Home

User Manual High Performance AC Drive

Contents

1. Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Mtr Current Lim 356 PI Integ Time 187 Posit Offset 2 754 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt 223 PI Lower Limit 192 Posit Offset Spd 755 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 222 PI Lpass Filt BW 184 Posit Spd Output 318 Mtr I2T Calibrat 339 PI Output 180 Posit TP Select 737 Mtr I2T Count 341 PI Preload 185 PositDetct1 Stpt 780 Mtr 127 Curr Min 337 PI Prop Gain 186 PositDetct2 Stpt 781 Mtr 12 Spd Min 338 PI Reference 181 Position Actual 763 Mtr I2T Trp 340 PI TP Data 179 Position Cmmd 747 Mtr NP Pwr Units 6 PI TP Sel 178 Position Control 740 Mtr OL Pend 372 PkDtct1 In Dint 212 Position ErrCnfg 399 Mtr OL 371 PkDtct In Real 213 Position Error 769 Mtr Trq Curr Ref 305 PkDtct2 In Dint 216 Position Fdbk 762 Mtr Vds Base 434 PkDtct2 In Real 217 Position Ref Sel 742 Mtr Vqs Base 435 PLL Bandwidth 722 Position Status 741 Mtring Power Lim 127 PLL Control 720 PositionFdbk Sel TIT MtrPosit Simulat 229 PLL EPR Input 725 PositRef EGR Div 746 MtrSpd Simul
2. MDI Feedback Option Board ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 DI WHIGY BK Rotary Encoder POWER 16 BKWH B REFSIN Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 9 BKWH qn C 05 Rotary Encoder SIN 14 IL BK GN D REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 WHRD waren gt E DATAs RS 486 Rotary Encoder COS 12 IL RD XX GY gt F DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 171 woeyv POWER Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 BU BU E m Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 1 1 WH BU LX WHBU amp qs Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 M Linear Sensor DATA 7 Linear Sensor DATA 6 WH GN Rotary Encoder REGISTRATIONe 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 OLA Figure H 6 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 pin DIN style connector MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 OL 80 pn H RD 12 POWER Rotary Encoder POWER 16 RD xX 11 NC Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 m H i BU
3. Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Dig Out1 Sel 845 Encdr1 Spd Fdbk 241 FromDriveLogix05 607 Dig Out2 Bit 852 PPR 232 FromDriveLogix06 608 Dig Out2 Data 851 Encoder PPR 242 FromDriveLogix07 609 Dig OffTime 854 Err Count Lmt 589 FromDriveLogix08 610 Dig Out2 On Time 853 Est Theta Delay 477 FromDriveLogix09 611 Dig Out2 Sel 850 Estimated Torque 471 FromDriveLogix10 612 Digln ConfigStat 159 Exception Event 320 FromDriveLogix1 1 613 Digln Debounce 823 Exception Event2 321 FromDriveLogix12 614 DInt2Real In 1047 Exception Event3 322 FromDriveLogix13 615 Dint2Real1 Scale 1048 External DB Res 544 FromDriveLogix14 616 Dint2Real1 Result 1049 Ext Fit Alm Cnfg 379 FromDriveLogix15 617 Dint2Real2 In 1150 Fault Clr Mask 674 FromDriveLogix16 618 Dint2Real2 Scale 1151 Fault Clr Owner 681 FromDriveLogix17 619 Dint2Real2Result 1152 Fault Status 1 323 FromDriveLogix18 620 Direction Mask 673 Fault Status 2 324 FromDriveLogix19 621 Direction Owner 680 Fault Status 3 325 FromDriveLogix20 622 DPI CommLoss Cfg 391 Fault TP Data 330 FVC CEMF Comp 469 DPI Data In A1 651 Fault TP Sel 329 FVC Mode Config 510 DPI Data In A2 652 FB Opt0 Posit 250 FVC Tune
4. Default 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 O JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 Tue 238 RegisLtch0 1Stat Indicates the control status of registration latch 0 and 1 e RLO Armed and bit 16 RL1 Armed indicates the registration latch is armed e Bit 1 RLO Found and bit 17 Found indicates the registration event has triggered the latch Rising edge of Arm request will set the Armed status bit Rising edge of Disarm request will clear the Armed status bit Options 1 1 1 1 1 1 leleleleilsisi amp l lslslslslsleleleslslsissss 8 9 5 5 5 15 5 5 5 5 1 lt 5 5 E T 8 8 9 8 8 99 CC CC CC CC ac rc cc rc Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 32 10 239 RegisLtch1 Value Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the registratio
5. Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter To DriveLogix09 635 Trq PosLim 123 VqsReg Err Lmt 588 To DriveLogix10 636 Trq Ref TP Data 131 VqsReg Off Freq 462 To DriveLogix11 637 Trq Ref TP Sel 130 VqsReg On Hystr 592 To DriveLogix12 638 Tune Test Status 165 Vuv Fdbk Offset 549 To DriveLogix13 639 Tx Buf Data Type 969 Fdbk Offset 550 To DriveLogix14 640 Tx Dir Data Type 964 Write Mask 669 To DriveLogix15 641 UserData Dint 01 1002 Write Mask Act 712 To DriveLogix16 642 UserData Dint 02 1003 X Notch Attenu 778 To DriveLogix17 643 UserData Dint 03 1004 X Notch FiltFreq 779 To DriveLogix18 644 UserData Dint 04 1005 X Offst SpdFilt 756 To DriveLogix19 645 UserData Dint 05 1006 XReg Integ HiLim 773 To DriveLogix20 646 UserData Dint 06 1007 XReg Integ LoLim 772 Torque Dly 501 UserData Dint 07 1008 XReg Integ Out 774 Torque Neg Limit 126 UserData Dint 08 1009 XReg Spd HiLim 776 Torque Pos Limit 125 UserData Dint 09 1010 XReg Spd LoLim 775 Torque 111 UserData Dint 10 1011 Xsync Gen Period 787 Torque Div 112 UserData Real 01 1012 Xsync In 1 788 Torque Ref2 113 UserData Real 02 1013 Xsync In 2 790 Torque Ref2 Mult 114 UserData Real 03 1014 Xsync In 3 793 Torque Step 116 UserData Real 04 1015 Xsync Out 1 789 Torque Trim 115 UserData Real 05 1016 Xsync Out 2 791 Total Inertia 9 UserData R
6. Supplemental Information A 37 169 0 6 65 34 9 137 Dia 158 2 6 23 2224087 Dia dx p a 3 Ax 62 7 2 47 Dia 1 2Places m a VLA 2419 mE 8 52 229 5 S o 9 04 220 0 e MET E 6 28 EZ 96 0 7 8 78 2 93 0 8 66 4 110 0 4 33 150 0 5 91 215 0 8 46 280 0 11 02 320 0 12 60 Frame 5 100 HP 480V 55 kW 400V Normal Duty Drive I 107 6 424 j Wee s 627 247 Dia 969 381 22 2 0 87 Dia 2 Places 96 9 3 81 pem Removable Junction Box __ o o ane eS o Pj pam es o GNICLS 241 9 9 52 a D Ha 223 5 e 5 J 8 80 5 42 1843 7 26 53 5 6 04 96 0 3 78 Ly Tt JAM 65 0 2 56 93 0 3 66 109 0 4 29 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches i 38 Supplemental Information Figure A 7 Frame 6 Dimensions 85 033 gt A di 18 0 0 71 36
7. jueiquue y 141 je parowa eq 1 jaqe ade au juo sed uedo WAN JO SI 5 9718 941 080 0091 009 Sez 007 96 0925 0 0 O8L SOvL 691 207 Z 091 00v 007 00 008 056 006 5 8 22 8vc 881 800 207 00c 9 ercaaoc 1244 080 osy 009 _ 002 058 000 ZLE 0 991 10 205 A Sek 4244 080 009 009 955 007 Scc 022 861 08 691 209 1 091 9 0819905 9681 osz 9 61 005 941 082 GLL OSZ 881 Sct 9 6 LEL 08 00 9681 Zz 080 OSr 009 002 092 002 vee 2211 991 2121 S Ov 205 Y Secl 9 99 0002 6091 5 5 961 092 098 Sel 00c Scl 891 96 6v4 1 06 20S p 6291 091 9 61 009 091 092 09 29 861 991 976 20 209 1001 S 0 4911 0006 NINO IN x 001 005 006 001 0 1 00 91 91 F09 EZZ 205 09 1 921 0961 098 Scl 002 961 trl 901 96 672 106 205 94 9 9609906 082 0006 NINO IN 00 092 090 08 92 08 081 86 99 96 965 09 p aeg 08 0006 NINO IN 001 0081 006 00L 0 1 00 Qt 8 09 24 09 09 1109005 492 0006 NINO IN 001 092 09 08 921 08 0 81 99 96 965 05 t Ov 05 9900005 80 009 NINO IN 0 00c
8. lt el TH OOG e TIP Remember to route wires through the sliding access panel at the bottom of the Control Assembly PowerFlex 700 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option F 3 Terminal Signal Description 12 POWER COMMON Power supply for encoder 11 POWER interface 2 10 REFSIN Negative Sine signal e 9 SIN Positive Sine signal il 8 REFCOS Negative Cosine signal e 7 COS Positive Cosine signal i 6 SHIELD Connection point for encoder 5 SHIELD cable shield a 4 N C Not connected 4 3 N C 2 DATA RS 485 Positive DH485 terminal 1 DATA RS 485 Negative DH485 terminal Recommended Cables If you are using this motor and feedback device Use this cable See this wiring diagram Allen Bradley 1326AB BXXXX 21ML and Allen Bradley 1326 CECU XXL XXX Figure 1 on page F 4 21MKXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX Figure F 2 on page F 4 S2L and S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley MPL A5xx and all MPL Bxxx Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX Figure F 2 on page F 4 motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL Allen Brad
9. 55 9 8 1818 8 8 88 8333 CC CC Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 00 00 O 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 Table 259A FIR Filter Settings Bit 12 11 10 Taps 000 1 001 2 010 4 0 1 1 8 100 16 101 32 110 64 1 1 1 127 260 Stegmann0 Status Indicates faults on the Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Bit8 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault The feedback option card checks for a pre determined constant value If this value is not within tolerances an open wire fault is declared A quadrature check also is done If an error occurs during the check the ope wire check is aborted If 3 quadrature errors occur in succession the open wire check will complete and the constant value checked again If this value is not within tolerances the fault is declared Bit 9 PowerSup Er indicates the failure of the power supply Bit 10 PwrUpDiag Er indicates the option board failed its power up diagnostic test The pattern on the FPGA must be identical to the pattern written from the DSP or the board status test will fail Bit 11 MsgChksum Er
10. 8 5 CC Defaut o o Jo jo o 0 0 fo ooo ea Bt 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 48210 5 MC Diag Status Indicates the status of the MC diagnostic tests Options E 8 8418 55 5 5 515 amp lele amp leicle 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SEIS EIS Cle e EEE 5555 5 5 o o 5 5 5 5 5 55 CC O ja Defaut 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jO O 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 020000 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6543210 MC Diag Done Indicates which MC diagnostic tests are completed Options e 884 25505 55 lt Qu dg 5 SS 92 2 65 15 B 2 2 9 lS 5 5 SEF es 5155555 5 5 58188 888 555 5 2 2 1212 55 5 CC ja Defaut 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 JO 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
11. HOA SZE A 23 Supplemental Information eui 1963000 seoiep 1 10 Aue 104 sezis SH ed 1nuweus 72194 Jo pue z 59215 9580 WOLL 994 59215 uuewssng sasny sezis 1530 008 8 009 VS3O dav 10 00 01 06 PEL ON upang v 007 010 PEP unang e pe1g uel v sj2euuoosi Jewod jueJuno eu sjes HW Jo serjddns 93N 81 089 HY 02 4 ut peuyep se A009 seDeyoA eq JSNW sng eonos Jewod au 0 SI eseu jo Burrejedo juerquie eui Siy ye 0 ui eq JSNW eqe eu AjUO sed uedo WAN JO SI ezis JO eu 2 sng UOWWOD eu pue paljdde eq jsnw ssejo 1 O0v SH 00t 01 905 902 4 OLL O0v SH 00t 06 98c 09c 86c Ov 4 cel 9 09cHQ0c OGEf SH 095 ELE 990 0 1 261 0 Y 06 OSEPSH 095 680 022 600 90
12. ZH 0 Bues jo 96 Buronpoud jo ejqedeo Ajuo 0283402 90541 0081 000 c 000 c 0081 c 00cc 0081 SG L 9vL 0201 766 66 00 90221 0051 0092 c 0092 0091 c 0092 009 99 860 08 66 66 002 Eb 1713906 20691 002 0022 00 0 c 0021 c 0002 002 66 1 08251 06 888 0 0001 20691 006 000 000 0061 0024 0061 979 SELL 0601 766 0 00LL 0713906 0692 0011 00vc 00vc 0001 0081 000 OtcL 088 964 c 006 0692 0021 00 6 00 0 0021 c 0002 001 O8EL 210 06 888 0 0001 0663406 syd sed 2 066 49 2 00 549 190 2 002 649 8 2 00y 080 006 0061 58198 006 548 008 549 298 00 sudied 1 008 OZLL 926 069 869 96 e 004 40 2 0021 54490 2 006 49 006 540 198 2 008 080 00 0095 Sudsed OOP sud 0001 349 299 0081 49 ooOL OZLL 206 08 6 96 0062 sudjedz 066 49 2 00 540 190 2 002 sudsed 2 pop 0 50 006 006 58 198 0061 sudsed 008 349 198 gop sudied 008 OZLL 926 099 869 e 002 E 2 0011 sudsed 2 sudsed 008 sudsed 0 60 0001 0022 50 199 00 540 190 096 54998 1 009 sudied
13. eu juo sed WAN 20 SI ezis 10 Bissau BL 1 x n 007 009 009 Scc 057 Sce 906 90212 661 09 e sel x 007 097 092 002 929 002 068 982 09 296 992 Sy e 99 9 09 900 z 082 008 00S Scc 058 Scc 808 996 1 09 29 05 S x 007 009 009 00 057 002 806 bre 126 1092 806 09 Y 99 9 2618002 z 080 057 008 00c 00 002 006 956 0SL 60S8 Ir 09 vL 092 008 00S Scc 09 990 961 1 F09 191 08 Sv 9 7919900 E 051 00 00r 921 Gee 961 9 1 961 YOL ESE 05 Y 0 082 9 6 009 9 1 9 0 921 9 1 05 Y 18 91 0519005 0006 NINO IN 09 002 092 92 00c 961 9 1 821 66 9 08 278 09 ue x x 081 092 9 7 091 092 091 91 221 Oct 207 Ekl 08 0 9 7019906 0006 NINO IN q 091 095 098 Ol 002 OLL 99 ELL 26 FOE 278 05 981 cc 0809906 0006 NINO IN 001 00 00 06 9 1 06 crcl 126 282 690 c 09 Y 911981 v 0208002 00 9 NINO IN 001 00c 00c 08 62 08 98 79 99981 919 09 Sb 2909008 00 9 69 38 01 0 911 6 1 09 001 09 60 FES 2871 091 977 08 GZ 1 5409906 000 c 0 383 IN 08 Scl Sel 0v 0 Ov 909 82 2021 LOL 960 05 99 92 z 8208002 00Sc NINO IN Sc0 383 N 969 38 S29 3e9 N 08 001 001 0 05 05 88 8 0 690 88 0 05 Ov SS 5509005
14. OL OL OL 8 OL OL 9 xB OL 6 OL OL OL ejegieespeugeq est OL ejegieespeuygeq est OL OL 5 Wo4 c Wo4 lt 1 5 4 5 Wo4 0 Wo4 6 e eaieesipeugeqaest Wo4 8 Wo4 Wo4 9 Wo4 6 Wo4 eyeqreeypeuyequesy Wo4 c Wo4 lt e eaieesipeuygeqaest Wo4
15. u9ie M Cel snjejg uonisogd 80 172 eal Crac lt e0 19180 lenjoy uonisod xse1 OMJUOD Z ou sx lt 162 684 Joje1eues ou g 884 864 1eseigxepujoiseg 17 Control Block Diagrams dl 27 3 NO WId dl 9v LLd Z 32995 d SYLL tp d SjutogiselL peeds ojez 01 6 sned g 5 lo3u02 ddd dWdd ij ED 1 1999 dWdd D D sod dNdd ainda ueo pds ddd zv 09 OL sod d Add dWdd D pds pds p 4 ddd S esneq apry 1940 103302 ddd z yseL 103302 ddd juiog 041002 PIOH puo ug ening ejqeu3 Buijeos ues eyueujeou aynjosqy SELL SnielS ddd
16. Default 0 0 O 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12141 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 T we 1162 Mul Default 1 0 V IRW 32 bit Multiplier numerator of the EGR user function position input Min Max 2000000 0 Integer Par 1164 EGR Pos Input x Par 1162 EGR Mul Par 1163 EGR Div Par 1165 EGR Pos Output Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1163 EGR Div Default 10 4 RW 32 bit Divisor denominator of the EGR user function position input Min Max 1 0 2000000 0 Integer Par 1164 EGR Pos Input x Par 1162 EGR Par 1163 EGR Div Par 1165 EGR Pos Output Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1164 EGR Pos Input Default 0 V RW 32 bit Position reference input to the Electrical Gear Ratio user function This parameter can be Min Max 2147483648 0 Integer linked to a position reference source such as Par 1160 VirtEncPositFast Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1165 Pos Output Default 0 RO 32 bit Position reference output from the Electrical Gear Ratio user function This parameter can be Min Max 2147483648 0 Integer linked to a position reference sink such as Par 1155 Heidn VM Pos Ref Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1166 Pos Preset Default 0 4 RW 32 bit A preset value for the Electrical Gear Ratio user function This v
17. sdwy yndjno Wd dH 9 1ndu OY HOA 08t Supplemental Information A 14 winwixew 74 Jo 62 ezis 23N SN 104 Jexeeiq diy snoeuejuejsul 10 98101d YNN 10100 Uone jeisui JO eq snw ezis 19eX3 OFAN SN Aq s p v1 10 0 621 ezis DIN SN 104 Jexeeiq euin Jexeeig 6 uwous v1 JOJOW Jo GZI ezis AN SN 104 serijddns yeu 3049p eui ezis eouesinu uonoejoid serjddns yey 1 s ezis 1 syd sed 2 gg6 sud4ed 2 cz sud sed 2 00 sud Jed Sep 2168 008 006 sud ed 4 0061 549 199 098 Syd 299 00 syd ed 1 098 0 11 9 6 059 959 0 351008 syd sed 2 0601 sudsed 2 ogp sud 902 008 sud Jed 2 0Gp 2128 0001 0012 sud 1 0012 540 198 006 sud ed 0091 849 298 006 660 08 oez GOL Ov 009 11 0849906 sud
18. lt lt lt lt lt lt i 2 2 8 i222 2 sles Default O 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 nTue 1062 Logic Cmpr State Displays the logical states of the Logic routine Pars 1063 1070 and the results of the compare functions Par 1071 1074 Logic Cmpr State TD lt 1002 04 Cmpr 1 lt D gt 1062 05 1 gt Logic Cmpr State m lt 1062 06 2 lt 2 1062 07 Cmpr 2 A gt B Options mom m ala la olo l lo lo lo lo olo 2 2 Xlo 2122 S amp S S 222922229 9 x a o 00000oooo iooioiloo oloolooooooi5ininmuisssi ss 5 8 8 8 5 8 c foe foe ee 31919 Default 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Tue 1063 Logic 1A Data Default 0 V RW 32 bit Selects the data word for the first input to Logic
19. Wo4 0 Wo4 dooJgBespds goxiBo1eAuquuoJ4 5 deigenbuo xi601 4 CDa 4 pds xi 601 4 xi607 zoxibo1eAuquio4 Lyaypeeds xi607 Loxibo1eAuquoiJ Be 53150118007 xi6o1 OL OL uen OL xiBo1 zoxibo1eAug OL 4 OL xi601 OL J04ju02 9SEld S004 X9 349M0d Ce dooiq pds 51215 18907 SnielS OW lt uano 1ndino Jes enbJo 1090 12 pesay gt 91609 WHO peeds 9 ewo uuo x81 009 OL 04102 27 Control Block Diagrams 9 xiBo1eAug OL s
20. _ CC OD 0 OD OD 0 2 Default 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 oe SL Buf Data Rx00 Default 0 RO 32 bit to Min Max 32 bits of data Integer 951 SL Buf Data Rx17 This is the SynchLink buffered data received See Par 933 Rx Buf Data Type for data type configuration 964 Tx Dir Data Type Indicates the data type of each Direct Transmit word If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection 38538 olo ololooloo0os oo0oov5uvuvooo o 5uvoo 5ovo o 9o os5ooisflttriuii 9 9 9 9 Options CC CC Default 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 JO 0 0 O 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12111 109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 m SL Dir Data Tx00 Default 0 V RW 32 bit Min Max 32 bits of data Integer 968 SL Dir Data Tx03 This is the S
21. n CC a O Default 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 654 32 10 1 168 Normal Stop Mode Default 0 Ramp Stop Sets the method of stopping the drive when a stop command is given Normal Stop command Options 0 Ramp Stop and the RUN input changing from true to false will command a Normal Stop V4 Stop 2 Coast Stop Ramp Stop decelerates to zero speed at the decal rate CurLim Stop Max torque current applied until zero speed Coast Stop power removed from motor motor coasts to zero 169 SrLss ZeroSpdLim Units Real Functionally equivalent to Par 160 Zero Speed Lim but is used exclusively in Sensorless Default 49 9975 speed mode The value is automatically set from Par 3 Motor NP Hertz Par 4 Motor NP Min Max 0 0000 875 0000 RPM or Par 7 Motor Poles The automatic setting corresponds to the rated slip speed of the motor synchronous speed nameplate speed The value can be manually set 170 Flying StartGain Default 4000 RW 16 bit This parameter is currently not used Min Max 0 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 171 SetSpeed Lim Units RPM 4 Real Creates a toler
22. Cem hi RGI 32 3 127 605 5 23 84 498 0 19 61 2234 0 87 95 41 2201 75 86 68 42 0 F 1 65 Lifting Holes This dimension is the depth for drives with the optional door mounted HIM installed Table A D Frame 10 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights AC Input Drive DC Input Drive Drive AC Input Drive amp Packaging amp Enclosure DC Input Drive Rating amp Enclosure Weight kg Weight kg amp Packaging Voltage Class Amps Weight kg Ibs Ibs Ibs Weight kg Ibs 400 480V AC 385 382 842 432 952 267 589 317 699 540 650V DC 460 382 842 432 952 267 589 817 699 520 382 842 432 952 267 589 317 699 600 690V AC 261 320 705 370 816 267 589 317 699 810 932V DC 325 851 774 401 884 267 589 817 699 385 351 774 401 884 267 589 317 699 416 351 774 401 884 267 589 317 699 42 Supplemental Information Figure A 11 Frame 11 Dimensions 797 81 38 F _ DUNS B E Y Y 2275 8957 62174 24 48 736 28 98 Dimensions millimeters and inches A GC 605 5 23 84 2234 0 87 9
23. A N O lt Default 0 0 jo jo 0 o o jo jo 0 0 o False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 1136 PPMP Rev Spd Lim Units Real Sets the maximum reverse speed reference limit Default 0 5 Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Changed the default value and Min Max 8 0 made the parameter linkable for firmware version 4 001 1137 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim Units Real Sets the maximum forward speed reference limit Default 0 5 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Changed the default value and 8 0 made the parameter linkable for firmware version 4 001 1138 PPMP Over Ride Default 1 0 IRW Real Multiplies both forward Par 1136 PPMP Rev Spd Lim and reverse Par 1137 PPMP Fwd Min Max 0 0 1 5 Spd Lim speed limits by this value Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Changed the default value minimum value and made the parameter linkable for firmware version 4 001 1139 PPMP Accel Time Units Sec 4 RW Real Sets the ramp time for acceleration time to go from zero to full speed Default 10 00 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 0 01 6553 50 1140 PPMP Decel Time Units 5 Real Sets the ramp time for deceleration time to go from full speed to zero speed Default 10
24. 5 5 5 le oo roo o c w CC lt lt lt Default 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 JO 0 jO 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 1 True 823 Digln Debounce Sets the amount of de bounce filtering for each digital input This is used to remove unwanted on off cycling chatter on the digital inputs caused by relay bounce Each digital input de bounce is configured separately from 0 5ms to 8 0ms The bit selections are cumulative for each digital input 1 6 Example bit 4 amp 2 amp 1 on 5 5ms of de bounce for digital input 1 p E EIEIEIE E EIEIEIE E 5 1S JS 5 S 5 S 5555 55555 0 IN Ie IN IN FO IN KH IN IN ico o JLo JL JLo JLo JH 8 Re DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI
25. 8 0000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 8 0000 0 0000 8 0000 degC 0 0000 50 0000 300 0000 Linkable Read Write F Data Type RW RW RO RO RO RO RO Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 346 347 348 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 Description Drive OL Status Indicates the status of various overload OL conditions Bit 1 NTC Open indicates the NTC has an open circuit Bit 5 IT Pending indicates the drive OL integrator is at 50 of the time out time temperature p p Options Reserved Reserved lt Reserved 9 Reserved 7 Unc OverTem S 9 IT Foldback IT Pending gt Trip Reserved S 0 False 1 True lt IHS Pending gt SHS OverTem a E 0 1 gt INTC Shorted Default 0 0 1 Bit 15 14 13 12 10 Drive OL TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the drive overload data displayed in Par 348 Drive OL TP Data Note Value 44 HH PwrBdTemp was added for firmware version 2 04 Added values 45 IGBT CndLoss 46 IGBT SwtLoss and 47 Fwd CndLoss for firmware version 3 03 Drive OL TP Data Displays the value selected by Par 347 Drive OL TP Sel Iq Actual Ref Displays the value of motor current reference that is present at the output of the divide by flux calculation Iq Ref Trim Provides an
26. Description Cat No 2 x 25 cm Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 000 2x1M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 001 2x3M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 003 2 x 5M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 005 10 M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 010 20 M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 020 50 M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 050 100 M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 100 250 M Fiber Optic Link 1403 CF 250 500 M Fiber Optic Bulk 1403 CF BLK Termination Kit 1403 NTOL Connector 10 1403 N10 Splice Bushing 5 1403 N11 Pulling Bullet 1403 N12 Fiber Stripper Tool 1403 N13 SynchLink Fiber Hub 1 input Base 1751 SLBA SynchLink Fiber Hub 4 output Star Splitter 1751 SL4SP SynchLink Bypass Switch 1751 SLBP A Important Do not overtighten tie wraps Table K B Fiber Optic Cable Assembly Specification Parameter Connecting Cables Value 200 230 micron HCS Hard Clad Silica Versalink V System Lucent Technologies Specialty Fibers Technology Division Maximum 300 meters with no more than one splice or one adapter Cable Length Minimum 1 meter Cable Length Minimum inside bend radius 25 4mm 1 in Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber optic cable Signal attentuation increases with decreased inside bend radii Operating Wavelength 650 nm Red Data Rate 5 Mbps Maximum 10 Daisy Chain Node Count 256 Star Configuration AC Supply Source 1 4 Unbalanced 1 4 Ungrounded 1 4 AC Supply Source Consideration 1
27. 2 222722 2222J u oloa 8 8 8 CC Default 0 jo jo o jo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 1120 Home Accel Time Units Sec 4 Real Acceleration rate when Homing Default 10 00 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 0 01 6553 50 1121 Home Decel Time Units Sec 4 IRW Real Deceleration rate when Homing Default 10 00 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 0 01 6553 50 1122 Speed Units 4 RW Real Speed reference used when Homing Default 0 005 Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 The default value was changed Min Max 8 000 from 0 000 to 0 005 for firmware version 4 001 1123 Home Position Default 0 4 RW 32 bit User defined Home position After the Homing function is completed the following Min Max 2147483648 Integer parameters are updated with the value of Par 1123 Par 744 PositRef EGR Out Par 747 Position Cmmd Par 763 Position Actual and Par 765 Posit Load Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 This parameter was activated for firmware version 4 001 1124 Actual Pos Default 0 RO 32 bit Actual home position after the Homing function is complete The value in this parameter Min Max 2147483648 Int
28. pue 51 uonisod e c9 eu uey jueJeyip si 89 d je enje ayy j 708 17 4 8 uonisod ejnjosqe uonisod IIM 909 2 d 5 20 pesn winy e Jas 904 OFZ uonisog doisduna ia 9227 uin pds Beux e 6 2 pds Bayx 097 1998 692 eui 929V 192 113 dad 997 uonisod 1ulod 1ulod qun 494 lt 8009 queo pds 1ndino seep peeds 10104 SOC Ore snjejs 5 SOK fee to Or 55247 997 29115 YSL 9S4 292 314 9 ISHO X 9v4 HOS inn ey 961 1299 10113 uonisod SHS uonisog K Ove 10 uonisod 9 AUI 0 291 gt 91S 21607 H
29. Jaquiny Aejaq awl sduiy ynduj y dwa Bojeje 9 1ndu HOA 018 Supplemental Information A 28 ZH 0L Jepun anbioy Buers jo Gg Buronpoud jo ejqedeo Ajuo 0089002 1 10LNOZL 00 SG4L 9vL 020 291 ge 100 00 99 1 8621 081 LESH 98 Z 001 l 1913906 2014041 0092 95 1 O8 L 006 820 0r 000 101 4101 991 SELL 0601 coll Z 00 l 007 OLvL 0521 028 96 Or 000 400 1 009 0881 101 006 820 0r Z 000L l 0c6xQ0c 0199 102 00 190 069 0 11 926 099 66 9 e o0z 0199 4041 49 2 059 0 11 206 028 926 SE 006 Zt 110689406 0199 102 49 2 069 0 11 926 099 Z 00 0199 102 49 190 2 069 0 11 98 09 978 008 e 05 9000 8099 4041 58 298 2 008 2901 988 068 999 Or e 059 8099 4041 49 2 009 2904 914 099 85 0 z 00 e 099710 8099 4041 548 190 2 009 06 292 209 995 ge Z 0S 8099 4041 Sudiedz 00S 988 679 069 999 009 0655100 8099 4041 548 298 2 009 88 069 097 619 Or e 008 8099 4041 49 2 009 888 299 zos 999
30. Jeu pds pejoejes 1 suondo THE D 8 Mg 13 Bays 3noBess pee1 jou ino Id Bes pds UM S UM S UY Bey pds 80 RAS 91607 S u9joN 2 se pesseudxe Mg 49114 pue 7 XW Bexpds Cze gt Buidweg Bay pds Cie D 0 06 jos pds gt 28 9 13 jsnfpe Ajjenuew mO dooug pds In eos gt Tus p mo C101 pds Cor sog Bey pds 90 o eL uleg Bes pds Jey enbio yesalgbi Bays lt gt suondo 21607 suondo ules 4001 ONES Ssed1 10413 paads J dnyogquy Beypds C91 D pm D peeds Bey pds pdsing 191 S 291 21607 Jeu pds euni s IIl pds Cre
31. 2 8 5 3 o a Figure C 4 Drive Operation When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time is Greater Than Zero Speed When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time is greater than zero the drive delays turning off the velocity and torque regulators for the amount of time specified in Par 154 P 154 Stop Dwell Time P 160 Zero Speed Lim 0 Time Drive Receives Stop Command Drive Detects Zero Speed Drive Turns Off Regulators 8 Application Notes Setpt 1 Data Provides data for comparison of 172 Setpt 1 Data to Par 173 Setpt1 TripPoint driving bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 Logic Status Figure C 5 At Setpoint 1 Status P172 Setpt 1 Data bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns on bit 16 At Setpt 1 turns off 5 5 o o P173 Setpt1 TripPoint 2 x P174 Setpt 1 Limit P173 Setptt TripPoint P174 Setpt 1 Limit P173 TripPoint P173 Setpt1 TripPoint P174 Setpt 1 Limit P173 Setptt TripPoint 2 x P174 Setpt 1 Limit Setpt 2 Data Provides data for comparison of Par175 Setpt 2 Data to Par 176 Setpt2 TripPoint driving bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Par 155 Logic Status Figure C 6 Above Setpoint 2 Status bit 17 Above Setpt 2 turns on bit 17
32. 1 0 uorisibes 0 uoje uoneusiBes N yg red 15 00 XL IS eseg x eseg 15 eeu 00 15 ejeq ujquiqzieey 75 75 XL 75 Sju9 3 1S lt Sibex Ld XH 1S lt Od XH 15 626d i 15 001015 ed xs NO PNN IS eseg JINN 75 75 75 0195 XM 15 23 Control Block Diagrams unuoAsmg ZH A epo Jojo 97 53215 ZH A ouo 2 ssed Id xui 1 eju lt 3 Id abeyo XEN 625 ysoog oovjuels 129 Id Qe ene indino Id 5 1 3582044 lt gt 2 9 1eseud SOO 15009 ZH A peeds dnis gt 9 pds peeds dps G pds peads 05 dis BuisseooJd 4 qualing poges 100W ZH A dS pds pejeog jew pds padwey les v jeu pe
33. 1 R S 12 0000 0 5000 100 0000 250 0 10000 1500 0 10000 500 0 10000 FitCoastStop Alarm Alarm Alarm FitCoastStop uon uo FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop n Linkable Read Write Data Type 27 Rated Vds 28 Rated Vas 29 RatedLamdVds 30 RatedLamdlds 31 RatedLamd ds 32 RatedLamd qs 33 145 34 05 35 Vqs 36 Vds 37 We 38 Torque 39 Torque Filtr 40 Lamda 195 41 Lamda 195 42 Lamda Vds 43 Lamda Vqs 44 Lamda ds 45 Lamda qs 46 Lamda ds Flt 47 Lamda qs Flt 48 Torque Ref 49 lq Reference 50 1 Motor Pole 51 1 Rated 105 52 1 Rated Torq 53 Rs Temp Coef RO Real RO Real V RW Real Real RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer 369 370 371 372 373 374 Description Brake OL Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Brake Overload OL Trip exception event This event is triggered when a Dynamic Brake DB overload condition occurs 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop
34. 49jeudjeju uou S y uelis je3ueueJou 0 einjosqy 103302 ddd 2 bel er as Sjqeu3 uonisod 6l 281 Geuueiqunow uns uo snes uonisod ejes sod x CILE NN sod eu 0 Sod diINdd PWD 5 ddd u3 Bujeos 1 ddd H 5 j Control Block Diagrams B 18 11 6L2d wyjeyeq 11 81 4 PIES dL 11 2 Sjulod 199 L Cee suopdo eed indino Tid Ec enieu ppy gt Tid 227 Sod Td apyino usod Tid ZEL gt 1 Apy D ino peeds vez D uonisod Td M4 uipimpueg Tid Ix pds xa Tid 10u09 11 1 521 doo 9jeospds 1x3 Jonuo2 Td 19 Control Block Diagrams yurqu uAs 909 400 Jopoou3 uondo 2 9 600 Je1se Wu A gupieH
35. REFLOW6 SIN HIGH5 SINLOW3 COSHIGH2 SHIELD 4 COSLOW1 REFHIGH8 SHIELD7 REFLOW6 SINHIGHS 2 SHIELD 4 SINLOW3 BEDERE COSHIGH2 COSLOW1 1 G 4 PowerFlex 7005 Resolver Feedback Option Card Notes Specifications Appendix H PowerFlex 7005 Multi Device Interface Option Card For information about See page Specifications H 1 Wiring the MDI Option Card H 3 MDI Option Card Specifications Consideration Rotary Encoder Voltage Supply Description 11 5V DC 130 mA Rotary Encoder Hi Resolution Feedback Sine Cosine 1V P P Offset 2 5 Rotary Encoder Maximum Cable Length 90m 295 tt Linear Encoder Maximum Cable Length 245m 800 ft Rotary Encoder RS 485 Interface The MDI Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after power up e Address Command Number Mode Number of turns Number of Sine Cos cycles Checksum Registration Inputs high speed 12 24V DC sinking digital inputs Customer I O plug P1 Allen Bradley PN S94274917 Weidmuller PN 67601782 Supported Linear Sensors Tem
36. eu sed uedo WAN JO SI SeAup ezis pejsi Bues 0 ojeg 5 sjuauno eq enu JO Jaquunu 1 00r 017 062 502 982 soz 092 Lele 05 Y SZ 001 9 g 092Nd0c 00v 802 882 160 791 261 9012 Sp 09 SZ 9 ooe 092 122 961 691 081 vel 69 Sr 05 09 9 052 6 1 9 981 eri vor oel cri Sy 09 S secteH 822 09921 021 81 08 701 Sr 0 Of S SAW SH S Ok 901 08 8 98 Sp s 0 Y 0808Q0c OSISH 081 80 8 0 8 5 Sy o 9 y 0109002 O0ifSH 001 08 9 2g 99 Sp 9 02 2908002 O6fSH 06 59 297 ev Sr Sy 0 Sl zvogaoz O9rSH 09 vr 8c 0 Sr S7 Ob 8209002 SWfSH S 56 22 c Sy s 94 2208002 o 060 891 91 91 SP el s 9108002 69513 Kejaq 9514 098 2 u09 sdwy 2 2 GN 942134 Sul 1nding idw bey dH 9
37. 2011041 0092 022 088 926 Or Z 006 2012041 0072 ogei 210 056 8601 Or 0001 l 026 NQ0c OPZSINOL Sud 198 2 089 0 1 926 099 99 ge Z 059 QpZSINOZ sud 198 2 069 0 11 206 08 996 9 z 008 ZL 0008000 9 0 49 294 2 029 0 1 9 6 059 99 OF 069 QPZSWOZL 49 294 2 029 0 1 98 06 88 Or e 0 e 0S 1NG0c 29 402 syd 198 099 zoo 688 069 969 e 009 GPZSINOZ Sud ied 099 zoo 912 099 99 z 059 089 100 0 1 49 294 z 009 poe 9 zos 169 98 e 009 VV4SWOZL 49 294 009 988 69 066 969 92 2 099 06S NQ0c PPLSINOZ sud 198 00S 828 069 09 avs Z 00 vV SWOZL sud ied 009 828 299 zos 166 0 009 2061002 29 02 599290 0 097 69 8 5 988 Or Z 5 6719 0 1 49 2 097 869 909 09 279 Or z 0 SrZOWOZI 002 989 88p Sze ese Or e sel SrZOWOZI 00 989 85 9 067 9 00r 01 917 002 97 9011 00 9897 887 Sze 86 Or e 9 67 9 0 1 002 989 986 Or 6 0L 02 029 07 262 19 102 Or e 060 029 0 85 Sze Or e SIE 01 79011 00s 5 6 212 800 Or e 000 009 5 6 1 82 19 106 Or 2 08 0L 19 ZvZSWOLI 00r 682 05 0 1 ooz 0 Z 09 67 9011 00 68 066 800 5 z 00 6 8021002 9 10 916 Gre 90 021 Or e 9p
38. Setup Select Diagnostic Check for Power amp Units Encoder Drive Power Circuit Verify Direction Select DB Resistor FLA Resolver Volts Hi Res Encoder Hertz Linear Sensor RPM Poles Motor Tests Inertia Measure Speed Limits Speed Control Start Stop 1 0 Field Oriented Measure System Select Direction Select Sources For All Configure Control Measure Inertia Control Speed References Digital Inputs Digital Stator Resistance Set FWD REV and Outputs Analog Leakage Inductance ABS Speed Limits Inputs Analog Outputs Magnetizing Inductance Slip Frequency PMag Motor Encoder Offset Stator Resistance Stator Inductance Back EMF Start Up Done Exit 2 7 2 8 Start Up Notes About Parameters Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters This chapter provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive parameters The parameters can be programmed viewed edited using a Human Interface Module HIM Refer to HIM Overview on page D 1 for information on using the HIM to view and edit parameters As an alternative programming can also be performed using DriveTools software and a personal computer For information on See page About Parameters 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Parameter Data in Linear List Format 3 15 Parameter Cross Reference By Name 3 117 To configure a drive module to operate in a specific way certain driv
39. 5501 910294044 1942919 esnJ asn4 1nding 1nduj dure L 5 SREM 101011 unong ejeg eur uoN uawa jeng WMd M 99 6 Saure indu Dy HOA 069 Supplemental Information A 20 su suey YT JOJOW Jo 62 1 SI ezis DAN SN 104 Jeyeeiq snoeuejuejsul 10128 0Jg HNDI s Uone e sui uoee JO uesouo eq JSNW ezis j9eX3 23N SN Aq winwixew shul HEY 1010 Jo 9 S 9215 OAN SN 204 uonoejoJd seijddns yey y si ezis unuuixejy eouesinu uonoejoud serjddns yey payed BU s ezis sud 00 sudjedz 54090 2 ogg 540 190 2 ze 6287 059 001 549199 0071 540 1 059 49 00 849290 1 0691 06 S4 206 90S 8 z oos sud 2 ggg sydsedz 00y 54090 2 069 sudiedz 00 6292 008 00 1 848 198 1 0021 sud 1 008 syd t 002 4999 1 008 988 679 06
40. C ured 114 9469 zH6 00 P PAS 1030 yqpapds 4 peeds 100W D ma ueo md 1 De1pee1 ssed g L 4SeL peedg eunjoiny 9015 90 gt 91607 v0 Ks 91607 s Cee an M ad z peeds jndino pds 104 SH 033002 paads e peeds joy pds 7 Control Block Diagrams dl Id 6414 195 dl Id 8 14 Sjulogise spe uaoun uN sxe usui jur 07 u29 202 lt A EOZ ui sxe x usu IH ug sxy 31607 40j amp Jeuec sxy 46 suondo lt co2 gt I Cz aey sxy oun sixy D wim id id 98 gt peoieid Id 1817 eui mun eno C161 D su 159 Id PIOH Id ules tL ESE 2 91607
41. 4 uiuo x67 00 0 xiBo1eAuq xiBo1eAug OL J04ju02 suonoeuuo J043u02 5002 9 Appendix C Application Notes For additional application notes refer to the PowerFlex 7008 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO003 For Information on See Page Input Voltage Range Tolerance C 1 Motor Control Mode C 2 Motor Overload C 5 Stop Dwell Time C 7 Setpt 1 Data C 8 Setpt 2 Data C 8 Input Voltage Range __ ____ _ Drive Rating Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating Tolerance Voltage Voltage Range Range 200 240 200 200T 200 264 180 264 208 208 208 264 240 230 230 264 380 400 380 3801 380 528 342 528 400 400 400 528 480 460 460 528 500 600 600 5751 575 660 432 660 Frames 1 4 Only 500 690 600 575 575 660 475 759 Frames 5 4 6 Only _ 690 690 690 759 475 759 Drive Full Power Range Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Lowestt Nominal Motor Voltage 10 to Drive Rated Voltage 1096 Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage 2 Application No
42. Bit 1 Timer Timing when this bit is set the timer is running Bit 2 Timer Done when this bit is set the timer is done Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options 2 O O 5 2 92 le jw alz 8 8 8 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 JO 0 9Q Fale Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True DelTmr2 TrigData Link a word to this parameter that will control a user defined on or off delay timer The bit within the selected word that will control the delay timer is set by Par 1114 DelTmr2 Trig Bit The user defined on off delay timer is enabled by setting bit 6 Delay Timer of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable DelayTimer2Stats Enabled DelayTimer2PrSet Dela DelayTimer2 Data C113 00 Pone DelayTimer2 Bit DelayTimer2Accum Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelTmr2 Trig Bit Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 1113 DelTmr2 TrigData that will change the status of the user defined delay timer to on or off When Par 1114 DelTmre Trig Bit is a positive number the delay timer is an on timer When Par 1114 is a negative number the delay timer is an off timer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer2PrSet The time that the value in Par 1116 Del
43. Values Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Scale Default Min Max Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Units Default Units Default Default Default Default Default Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max R S 10 0 32767 1 0 0 0 100 0 x10 96 50 0 0 0 799 9 x10 96 1 0 799 9 x10 S 5 0 0 0 1000 0 x10 0 8192 0 0 0 8192 7971 0 32767 5793 0 32767 246 32767 246 32767 0 32767 0 32767 150 0 32767 350 0 32767 300 100 10000 50 0 100 35 0 32767 100 0 32767 250 0 32767 350 0 32767 Linkable RW RW RW RO RO RW RW RW RW RO RO RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi t
44. 114 if Cx 4 peeds jasald 5 Z peeds 1 1 1 1 i5 gt 9 peads 1eseJg lt Cn peeds 1eseJg 1 1 G paads 060 gt 13497 uz on 1 1 22 paads ve Cet gt mnn pds 1 1 gt peads 1eseJg ile 15 A z Jeu pads z peeds si 2 peedg 1eseJd e ic 117 LC pds 1 1 peeds 0 vt 110 017 jeu pads I 1 9L 9 Idd uuo Idd Idd WIH Idd WIH uod Idd WIH 4 paads 9 peeds G paads 1eseJg Fi y peedg jeseJg peeds 1eseJg paads 1eseJg v peeds 1eseJd 060 194971 dOW SED ann zieu pds Z jeu peeds PAS 00 les v jeu peeds 5 Control Block Diagrams zys peeds 604 ju zssed g Jes pds Luu pds jespds Qu peeds 9jeos joy peeds D se D D ENT V0 K S 2 suondo Joy pds padwey x 5 m E ssed g jay pds
45. Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True Table 236A Encoder0 Trigger Source Settings Table 236D Trigger Direction Settings Bit 2 1 Bit 16 22 5 21 0 0 Encoder 0 Z pulse AND Ext Trig A 0 0 Not Configured 0 1 Ext Trig B Digital Input 2 0 1 Reverse 1 0 Ext Trig A Digital Input 1 1 0 Forward 1 1 Encoder 0 Primary Encoder Z pulse 1 1 Both Directions Note When the Z pulse is selected as a trigger source registration latch port 0 is used for Encoder0 regardless of the setting of bit 0 RLO Encoder1 Table 236B Encoder1 Trigger Source Settings Table 236E Filter Settings Bit18 117 Bit 11 10 9 8 nputFilter Setting 0 0 Encoder 1 Z pulse AND Ext Trig A 0 0 0 Filtrdisabled 0 1 Ext Trig B Digital Input 2 0 0 0 1 100 ns filter 1 0 Ext Trig A Digital Input 1 0 0 1 0 200 ns filter 1 1 Encoder 1 Secondary Encoder Z pulse 0 0 1 300 5 filter Note When the Z pulse is selected as a trigger source registration latch port 1 0 0 400 1 is used for regardless of the setting of bit 16 Encoder1 0 4 M 500 0 1 1 0 j600nsfiler O 1 1 1 700 filter Table 236C Edge Selection Settings 119 1918 ensis Bit 4 20 319 is er default setting 0 JO Capture on rising edge 100 1 0 1 0 11000 ns filter 0 1 Capture on falling edge 1 0 1 1 11100 ns filter 1 0 Capture on both edges 1 1 0 0 11200 ns filt
46. Cig devices at 500k Baud 53 DPI Loss Port 5 The device at DPI port 5 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional at drive port 5 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI Configured with Par 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg devices at 500k Baud 54 DPI Loss Port 6 Q The device at DPI port 6 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional at drive port 6 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI Configured with P r 391 DPI CommlLoss Cfg devices at 500k Baud 55 Net Loss DPI P1 Q A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 1 and the network Verify status of network Configured with Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 56 Net Loss DPI P2 Q A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 2 and the network Verify status of network Configured with Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 57 Net Loss DPI P3 Q A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 3 and the network Verify status of network Configured with Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 58 Net Loss DPI P4 Q A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 4 and the network Verify status of network Configured with Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 59 Net Loss DPI P5 Q A commu
47. o 8 SE Name No Description Values 8 1178 Generic 9 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1179 Generic 10 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 Programming and Parameters 3 117 Parameter Cross Reference By Name Param Name Text Parameter Motor Flux 309 Hrd OvrTrviCnfg 397 Sft OvrTrviCnfg 395 700L AlarmStatus 334 700L EventStatus 332 700L FaultStatus 333 Abs OverSpd Lim 335 Abs Posit Offset 757 Accel Time 1 32 Act Spd Reg BW 97 CurrFdbk AdjTime 551 AddSub 1 Add 1097 AddSub 1 Input 1096 AddSub 1 Result 1099 AddSub 1 Subtrct 1098 AddSub 2 Add 1101 AddSub 2 Input 1100 AddSub 2 Result 1103 AddSub 2 Subtrct 1102 AddSub 3 Add 1105 AddSub 3 Input 1104 AddSub 3 Result 1107 AddSub 3 Subtrct 1106 Al 1 Filt Gain 804 Al 2 Filt Gain 810 Al 3 Gain 816 Alarm Stat
48. 5 25 2 55 8 85 osz525225852z25522E 2525252 8783959229279 m cl ol o o 2 2 gt ale 52 2 le 2 2 8 Sle 2 2 2 25 S 22 2 Sle e S Default 0 0 0 0 jo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 41 109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 True 556 Trend Control Set bits to configure the Data Trend function e Bit 0 Enbl Collect Trend data collection begins on the rising edge of this bit and continues until either this bit is set low or the trend data has been completely collected This bit should be cleared following either the Triggered status or Complete status in order to complete the trend sequence This bit can also be cleared at any time to force the trend data sampling to stop and set the Complete status bit Setting bit 1 In1 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 1 The source for Real data is Par 571 Trend In1 Real Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par 570 Trend In1 Dint Setting bit 2 In2 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 2 The source for Real data is Par 575 Trend In2 Real Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par 574 Trend In2 Dint Setting bit 3 In3 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 3 The source for Real data is Par 579 Trend In3 Real Clearing the
49. O3N 81 081 HY OZ Wd IN U se ssal 10 A009 Oy SNU sng uouuo 0 sonos au z 0Sec SH S jo juerquie esi 0 1 eq 5 eu juo sad uedo YWAN JO SAU ezis siu ye ejejedo Jj 40 pejsij 1 OScfSH 080 212 991 6591 209 eek 9 cy LMaOZ o9LrSH 094 Ovl 8 8 6 209 69 O9LPSH _ 091 261 801 86 606 860MQ0c 2951 4 Aejaq 002 sduy ZH 19410 Aue 104 sezis sezis ISAO 008 8 009 jndjno ndul WMd MA JequinN 9 8 6 4 1ndu e ed 7294 10 e pue Z 59216 ese WOZ ed sezis VS3O 88V 20 00 01 08 61 ON unang Y 00 010 ON unang ejpeig uel y sj2euuoosiq y 19e uoo eseojd syr ed uueuissng sasn 94 Jamod 10 jue uno eu pepnjoui jou
50. CC Default 0 jo o jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 917 SL Rx Regis Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays received port 0 registration data if direct received data is configured to be port 0 Min Max 2147483648 Integer registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector Parameters 905 909 Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window 918 ISL Rx P1 Regis Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays received port 1 registration data if direct received data is configured to be port 1 Min Max 2147483648 Integer registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector Parameters 905 909 Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window 921 SL Real2Dint In Default 0 0000 RW Real Provides the floating point real input to the real to integer conversion function Min Max 16 0000 922 ISL Real2Dint Out Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays the integer output of the real to integer conversion function The value is the result of Min Max 0 65535 Integer the formula Par 921 SL Real2DInt In x Par 923 SL Mult Base 923 ISL Mult Base Default 10000 0000 RW Real Specifies the base for SynchLink real to integer and integer to real conversion functions Min Max 0 2000 50000 0000 Determines the resolution of the conversion results You must use the same
51. 1sog peeds iqp4 uonisod 0 002 uonisogd 10d 1 X Ove 1 uonsod 70 ur ejes pds 1esJO YSZ 5 292 19SJO 1504 4 YOION X WITIH pds nuayy uoioN X K 921 Bayyisog 2 nS w707 pds snijeljs uonisod zv peeds 0 yndyno 1504 10 Ov gt 9 aiqeug PS so 0 ist gt uonisod 55947 21215 149 91607 P 992 4 95 3330 X 9027 ey 1299 uonsogd Cnm N V 5821 INO HOA JeHisod x OMUOD paads dieju uoneJedo 20 269 d eq 0024 10 98 4 dieju 00 002 9u S UJON 00 69 gt asing 00 lt gt Snes ou Asx dieu 1 uonisog I Cer 3611 5 1611 5 Jojejodaeju L
52. 8 0000 pu 1 0 PU Torque Linkable Read Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RO RW RW RO RO Data Type Real Real 16 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Real Real 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Description Spd Reg Pos Lim Sets the positive limit of the Speed Regulator output value The output of the Speed Regulator is limited by adjustable high and low limits Spd Reg Neg Lim Sets the limit of the Speed Regulator output value The output of the Speed regulator is limited by adjustable high and low limits SrLss Spd Reg g Kp Sets the proportional gain of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 106 Srlss Spd Reg BW Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 106 to zero This gain setting has no units per unit torque per unit speed error SrLss Spd Reg Ki Sets the integral gain of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 106 Srlss Spd Reg BW Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 106 to zero Units are Sec per unit torque sec per unit speed error SrLss Spd R
53. 99S sduy 2 231 QN 7 1 qunyN 105 8 55071 40 99 0ld asn4 jeng enug SREM 5 indu WMd 13 Z 1 JY HOA 069 Supplemental Information A 22 uojoej y 19e uoo eseojd Jeujo Aue 104 sezis PSH ed 1 5 7604 sesn sezis ISIO Y 008 009 VS3O 10 00 010 PEL ON UNAIING Y OOP 01 0 L ON ugang ejpeg uej v j2euuoosiq sng 1ewod eui Jo JUAN perepi eA eu pepnjoui jou 95 HN 10 salddns A peg JIN 81 067 HY OZ VAN U peuyep se sse 10 A009 Oy aq jsnui SNA JeMOd BY eq eu 1 euo pue jeuuou euo suges penp seAup 9 pue 4 9 S seAup 5 10 jueiquie y esiwieujo JepJo ui eq snw eqe ade
54. Id Creat ma wa ssed id Cy yoeapes Id ure d 55247 indino Id zc d Ajeoid gt noua c suondo dy lt 181 Gs 31607 be K 29 9 ug Ul 201 gt smejs 2 60 881 Beh o Sd E J04u02 889204 Control Block Diagrams B 8 qur noy 1 6 52 jemoy eigeu3 exeig W u3 Bay sng 00 Cri sng exeug Jamog sng eyeig lt 2 Q gt poy enbio HOA sng OX eu n ed uir But sng C008 gt pds x C jur sog enbjo lt gt LVIS m peo103 1 18 lt 601 gt 8 RRERRT A pds er i 1 1 2202 1 gt enbio 99 3 31 uonenuenwvuoioN snes qur O Jey enbuo 1040W enbio LL Joy 611 pejoejes Ge Durea idepy ma idepy eui o 383 1
55. LL 6 uonoeroJd Dy 069 21 1010 Jo 981 SI ezis JIN SN 104 snoeuejuejsur 10498401d NIO JOJO Uonejjejsur YOBS 104 uesouo ed jsnui ezis OIN SN Aq uges WI Jo 6 SI azis 93N SN 104 Jexeeiq eui Jexeeig eje 100W jo 1 ezis QIN SN 104 uogoejoid serjddns jeu S ezis uonoejoud senup ed vIW3N 1ndui 9Y pue sesnJ exuesinu uogoejoid serjddns yey eaiep payed ay S ezis uogoejoid uinulu ZH 0 Jepun Bues jo 96 Bulanpoud jo ejqedeo Ajuo ere AN se up 028Q02 Supplemental Information 90871 0081 000 000 0061 0066 002 SSZL 6971 0601 8501 96 0001 90841 0091 0092 c 0092 0091 c 0092 009 9921 86cL 0811 68 66 00 EL _ 1314906 40651 002 00 6 00 0 0061 c 0006 0051 9541 0881 026 206 0 c 006 i 20681 006 000 000 0081
56. Puls 0p dois 35209 6 66 dois 81 yne BE 2495 jeu pds gas usquesn ze Wes jeu pds 9 2495 uegjesn 96 0195 jeu pds s Mes ueoiesp se dois 019 uegjesn z c ILO PIH pansasay 21 WILO ZE LL panas y LE 01 08 peniesey 6 puau 62 8 5 Id 82 ung 2 Id Z 9 Id 92 ues jeseu dOW SZ 39996 WON dOW vz neg x3 yurqmueun p qur paads c peedsojez Z S 11949 aidies L1 9 gt idu Ladies 0L 10 pZ paads iv 6 15 EZ anpy 8 uonisog ui 22 eiqeu3 LZ pe jesey 9 env oz paniesey 61 s c L L L L L 9 lt y Z dui 9 gt Z dui gc 5 oc sc 41 Z 9L ywn 1 61 1 5 0 suonoejeg 1ndino dOW z syne 1 15 Audisxpupsa zz deis xpupsg 12 pasn suogoajag indu 9 v L 0 0 Jey6ig sindu i i Emp D T ssedig jou si 0289 104
57. TD o0 ejeg 1 514 D 199 Aejaq peigeua ses 1605 wia dow 6801 dOW dOW Hep 1959 x 9801 dois Teseu zo 9801 909 eseoJoe BOL eseexou ae aey 521 suoijoun 1957 89 dewsia 99 demsug C 988 ug vo demsug ses D vo densis c demgug ynsey 9 demgig ug 99 demgig gs demsug nq demgiig Koss era vs z demguig demsug ud vp vy ynsey demsyg ynsey demsyg JO eui paddems pooejdo s v JO eu Z winsay eu 0 passed s eed v PIOM 1 ynsey demsyg ge demgig ge demsug ug ve demgiig ve demsig demsug ug vc demgiig vz demsug 18 g demsug nD ug vi demgug __ gt vi demsuia dems jig 21 Control Block Diagrams z 11 94 SL uonoun 1 uoyouny dOW zl epiuq Aldniniw 01 uoisJeAuo ejeq 6
58. uoroejoud seiddns yey 199M0 AU s ezis ed L IN 10 jueiquue eu 2 95 s episui uoniod pejoejoidun Jo 1uerquue 2 S einyereduje xuisjeeu ed IN jueiquie y 141 ye ejeredo ui eq jsnui jeqe ede eu juo sed uedo YWEN JO SeAup ezis 10 91 1009S I0v 995 uen 10 99 04d 100 WOY jo 8 z suleis s 0 8 9 S euojepuejs S eseu Jo Op sr Buea juano 059405 z ueiquie 9 cy 0 si Buea 9809005 m 00 009 009 osz OSc Olv 808 900 351 66 job e Ol 00v 09 0g ose 099 092 06 982 092 991 2792 pt Z 9 090000 092 00S 009 092 9 6 092 Ele 990 021 91 pO 06 00 009 009 092 092 68 Occ 900 861 986 Ov Y OL 9 09000000 092 007 055 00 00 0
59. v oO o j m o rrj mj lj ts o 0 go ru Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 76543210 1 True Table 233A Encoder Input Filter Settings Table 233B Multiplier and Direction Settings Bit 3 19 2 18 1 17 0 16 Encoder Bit Filter Settings Bit 5 21 4 20 Mult Directions Comments 0 0 0 0 Filter disabled Counts rise fall of phase A phase B only used to find 1 100 ns filter 0 0 2x fwd rev pinu 0 0 1 0 200 ns filter 0 1 4x fwd rev Counts rise fall of both A and B phases default setting 0 0 1 1 300 ns filter 1 0 1x fwdonly Counts rise of phase A Phase B ignored 0 1 0 0 400 ns filter 1 1 2X fwdonly Counts rise of phase A Phase B ignored e 2 Table 233C FIR Filter Settings 0 1 1 0 600 ns filter 0 1 1 1 700 ns filter Bit 12 28 11 27 10 26 Taps 1 0 0 0 800 ns filter default setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 90nsfiler E 1 0 1 0 1000nsfiler Ms sm 1 0 1 1 1100ns filter pe bow 1 1 0 0 120nsfiler tf S 1 1 0 1 1300ns filter aM CDL 1 1 1 0 1400 ns filter Lou Xe se 1 1 1 1 1500ns filter E Ne e E 234 Encdr Error Indicates the error status of the encoder 0 and encoder 1 Note Bit 4 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 88 22 5 9 9leosososososei e l529soso9soso o o o 9o 5 2 jo ja je
60. 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event PreChrg Err Enter a value to the drive s response to Precharge Error exception event e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event MC Cmd Lim Cn g Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Controller MC Command Limitation exception event This event is triggered when the motor controller detects limit of the command values used in the motor controller and returns the exception event to the Velocity Position Loop VPL e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs
61. Defaut 0 0 jo jo jo j0 jo jo jo jo jo jo jo o o o o o jo jo jo jo o jo jo jo 000 pri Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 1 True Programming and Parameters 3 49 No 325 326 327 328 8 9E Name 558 8 Description Values 52 amp Fault Status 3 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions These events are from Par 322 Exception Event3 e Bit 11 HH HW Ver is sed to indicate a High Horsepower hardware version fault Bit 12 HH CurUnblnc is used to indicate a High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault Bit 13 HH VitUnbinc is used to indicate a High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault Bit 29 1 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 1 loss fault Bit 30 AnlgIn2 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 2 loss fault Bit 31 AnlgIn3 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input loss fault Notes Bits 16 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2 04 Bits 11 12 13 29 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3 01 Changed bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to 12v Pwr for firmware version 3 03 Bit 14 NonCnfgAlarm was added for firmware version 3 04 Options E E E gig lele Gel 28 85 5 Ell 215 5 5 E 2 5 EIS 598 5259 2 2 5 95 5 5 5 5 5 2
62. XEN y UN 0956 3009 sduv 2 zHA QH jequnN 5507 lt 2012910 4 p 4042019 osnJ osnj 1ndino 5 4 3 SHEM 5 Aejaq WMd 1010 LL 6 9224 9 uonoerojg Dy HOA 15 Supplemental Information suey 74 1010UJ Jo GZ SI ezis 23N SN 104 Jexeeiq snoeuejuejsul 10 10 uesouo eq snw ezis 22x7 OFAN SN Aq ejgewojje wnwixeyy ha YT 10100 Jo 9562 SI ezis WNWIUIW OFAN SN 104 Jexeeuq euin Jexeeig 1911 p yT 1010UJ Jo 9582 SI ezis OFAN SN 104 uonoejoid serjddns yeu pere 15 46 4 eui ezis uonoejoid unuixejv 6 Senup OdAL vIW3N Mdu Oy joeuuoosip pue sesn 2 eouesinu jeu payes 15 ezis 1 1991 0081 00cv 00ct z 0081 z 000
63. pere ey S ezis eowep Supplemental Information exuesinu seijddns yey earep payed eu S ezis uonoejoid z O SI euojepuels YSdl Z ed IN eui 10 jueiquie 9 99 s eunsojoue jo juerquie or si juerquie yulsyeay ed L 1 1 T 00 091 092 091 862 6241 61 ZEL GLL 0 Z Obl 057 g l 00 921 Ele 9SL 699 621 09 61 9 6714906 gt 3 zi 9 6 Scl 00c 961 96L 271 86 Ell 606 09 e 06 gt 2 ni 007 091 092 091 624 121 6 851 SL 08 9 611906 9 6 9 6 001 00c 00 Ovi Eck 28 vv6 06 Or e GL 9 6 9 6 Sel 00c 961 Zeb 80 86 1 6 06 S 8604000 T Gee Sec 08 Sel 08 Oci 06 09 689 229 09 e SG x 9 6 9 6 001 00c 00 55 06 c8 vv6 0 6 05 4 94 S 2804002 5 921 941 09 OLL 09 01 8 29 969 69 05 Sv Gee Gee 08 Sel 08 06 99 09 689 ZZS 09 Y 99 S 0904000 051 081 09 06 05 26 69 9 O8v 09 9 6 x 9 1 911 09 OLL 09 8 19 cS 969 697 05 Y Sh S 2904002 SHEM o XEN UN zy WIN 995 1400 yay sdwy 9 ZHA
64. 0 eyed 8 UOISJaAUOD z 9 8 uonoun 21607 7 4 Jes 8 lt z 10 gz v z 10 0 o ejeis 1duij 21601 gt 1 vo Kzoov eje1s 1duij 21601 gz yz adw a lt v 1 90 m L a VL Cou angppy angppy Go angppy gt andu e ansopy NEED qns 2 angppy 10017 z z Bes indui z qnsppy qns qnsppv ppv ansppy indu qnsppv ynsey qnsppv xse1 suolouny 4 gz oio ejeq g 2607 ug 21607 ejeq 31607 91607 ejejs e ynsey 91607 INN 2 ynsey uj jujdzleey ynsey az e y x 5 zieeuziula 2 zieeuziua qnses czieesciulg x ejeos Leeuziula IEesruig aauog uj jieeziua ynsey MS ON 1284 MS MS so 5 S MS 2014 2195 ueoJesr ZZ0Ld
65. 04 4 DI DI DI DI gt 10 DI DI DI gt 10 DI DI 0 0 1 1 1 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 1 0 False 1 True 824 Local Status Displays the status of the local I O Options Relay Out 3 DigOut 2 O Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DigOut 1 SafeOfflnput Reserved Reserved Reserved IReserved Reserved lt Reserved 9 Reserved N 9 Reserved B Reserved oS lReserved lReserved 0 False Default 0 0 1 True Bit mo A N N 0 6 13 12 11 10 J mro o m o D DS zi a zi 4A 825 826 827 828 829 830 Description Dig In1 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 1 Selecting options 34 UserGen Sel0 37 UserGen Sel3 sends Binary Coded Decimal BCD data to Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl as follows Selection 34 UserGen Sel0 Sends Input to this bit in Par 1022 Bit 1 Sel Switch 00 35 UserGen Sel1 Bit 2 Sel Switch 01 36 UserGen Sel2 Bit 3 Sel Switch 02 37 UserGen Sel3 Bit 4 Sel Switch 03 Note For all Stop Functions Low Stop High OK to Run In Norm Stop CF Low Normal Stop and Cl
66. Jumper P22 HW Enable No HW Enable Verify Operation Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 7005 Phase Drives in Group Il Category 2 Applications with ATEX Approved Motors Digital Input 6 must be configured as a Hardware Enable Ensure that Jumper P22 on the Main Control Board is set to HW Enable Pins 2 and 4 At regular intervals during the life of the machine check the protective system for proper operation Both channels shall be verified using the table below How frequently the protective system is checked is dependent on the safety analysis of the machine section controlled by the drive Drive In Drive In Drive In Drive Able Protective System Status Safe State Safe State Safe State To Run Channel Operation Safe Off Option No Power Power Applied No Power Power Applied Terminals 1 amp 2 Applied Applied PowerFlex 700 Phase No Power No Power Power Applied Power Applied Enable Input Applied Applied Description For Verification Safe Off Option Closed Open Closed Open Monitor Contact Terminals 3 amp 4 PowerFlex 700 Phase Bit 16 1 Bit 16 2 0 Bit 16 1 Bit 16 0 Drive Inhibits Bit 1 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 1 20 Bit 1 20 Param 156 Bits 1 amp 16 What is SynchLink Appendix K SynchLink Board for PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Phase Il Control SynchLink is a fiber optic communication link that allows its users to implement distributed
67. PPMP Control PPMP Status PPMP Rev Spd Lim PPMP Fwd Spd Lim PPMP Over Ride PPMP Accel Time PPMP Decel Time PPMP SCurve Time PPMP Spd Output PPMP Pos Output PPMP Pos To Go PPMP TP Select PPMP TP DataDInt PPMP TP DataReal Dint2Real2 In DInt2Real2 Scale Dint2Real2Result See Page 3 1 3 114 soc 4 Change See Page The following parameters were updated for firmware version 3 01 3 1 3 114 81 Spd Reg P Gain 370 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg 825 Dig In1 Sel 84 SpdReg AntiBckup 412 Power EE TP 826 Dig In2 Sel 92 SpdReg P Gain Mx 414 Brake Bus Cnfg 827 Dig In3 Sel 110 Speed TorqueMode 416 Brake PulseWatts 828 Dig 104 Sel 132 Inert Adapt Sel 417 Brake Watts 829 Dig 5 Sel 147 FW Functions En 420 Pwr Strct Mode 830 Dig In6 Sel 149 FW FunctionsActl 465 MC Diag Error 3 904 SL Node Cnfg 150 Logic State Mach 466 MC TP1 Select 905 SL Rx CommFormat 153 Control Options 475 MC FaultTPSelect 906 SL Rx DirectSelO 157 Logic Ctrl State 486 Rated Slip Freq 907 SL Rx DirectSel 165 Tune Test Status 490 Statorlnductance 908 SL Rx DirectSel2 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 510 Mode Config 909 SL Rx DirectSel3 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt 511 FVC2 Mode Config 910 SL Tx Comm Format 224 TachSwitch Level 512 PMag Mode Config 911 SL Tx DirectSel0 259 Stegmann0 Cnfg 514 Test Mode Config 912 SL Tx DirectSel1 263 HeidenhainO Cnfg 549 Fdbk Offset 913 SL
68. lt lt lt lt jo Defaut 00 0 0 8 9 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 00 0 0 B O 0 j0 Fa Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 65 432 1 0 i TuS 3 84 Programming and Parameters 2 8 255 Description Values 22 5 689 Axis Resp Command response from both the Servo and Feedback Only Axis to the Motion Planner Options 5 5 8 8 8 5 lololo lolo lole lele 2 2 1212122 2 5 5 55 25155 55 21515 51515 21585 amp 5 5 CC Default 000002000 0 00 00 0000000000200 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O False 1 True 690 Cnct Status Status of all Motion connections Also includes status for the configuration state relating to motion connections Options 3888 37 222228825522 2 5 lt 89959 55 oioi 5 5 CC 12 lt Defaut 0 o o fo fo fo fo fo fo 0 0 ore Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True
69. 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 False 1 True RO 32 bit Integer RO Real RO Real Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies In some cases you may configure the drive s response to these events by entering values in the parameters of 0 False 3 48 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values 321 Exception Event2 Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies Configure the drive s response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the fault alarm configuration group of the utility file Linkable Read Write Data Type Note Changed bit 14 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3 03 Options 5 o fe E 5 2 5 lg 3 E 5 5 5 5 5 5 J Z ja E 3 2 S EE E gE E 2 8 8 8 3 2 S 2 S le 2 2 5 SIS Ele 1818 8 54558 S S S S 5 S 2 l l 5 3 Z 5 8 2 2 l S S gt lt gt lt gt gt lt la lala la oc 81818152 2 2 25 S 25 S B 5 2 S a 518 5 0 5 S gt Default 0 O 0 jO JO JO 0 JO 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 13 2 1 0 1 True 322 Exception Event3 Indicates the presence
70. 1 power is present at the Enable Terminal TB2 16 Apply the enable 2 3 4 stop command is being issued Close all stop inputs 5 Power loss event is in progress indicating loss of the AC input voltage Restore AC power 6 Data supplied by the power structure EEprom is invalid or corrupt Cycle the power If problem persists replace the power structure 7 Flash Update in Progress Complete Flash Procedures 8 is expecting a Start Edge and is receiving a continuous Open all start buttons and remove all start commands signal 9 Drive is expecting a Jog Edge and is receiving a continuous Open all jog buttons and remove all jog commands signal 10 A conflict exists between the Encoder PPR programming Par Verify encoder data and reprogram 232 or 242 and the encoder configuration for edge counts Par 233 bits 4 amp 5 11 The drive cannot precharge because a precharge input is Reprogram the input or close the precharge control contact programmed and no signal is present Start input configured but stop not configured Program Par 825 830 to include a stop button rewire the drive 5 Run input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to O 2 wire control B Start input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to 1 3 wire control 12 Multiple inputs configured as Start or Run Reprogram
71. 15 Control Block Diagrams JOlJd Y pepe pue 69 9 egzd jesei 818 0 9 JI Z 102929 sav 2929 4 uonisod pepe 1724 pue 9 69 9 59 9 uay Jas S g iq 0 9 Jl 4n920 sjueuiuBisse yq 2 19 p4d Jo uogengoe y uo 395944 01 ZX QD so Kor loquo uonisod pds urn pds x 0 bel x 20 bel Snes uonisod boJ41ll4 X 27 nuenv x eys Joquog peeds pds ejqeu3 pseds 9 oz K orz 9 K LSE gt exis 21607 SHS se sjunoo asn Ajuo ues uonisod jurod oj jurod ay ejnjosqe pessed q si 909 07 9 ueuM 909 07 9 pue uni ui jou si Y pesn eq siu L SJojejnuunooe jes pesn eq 609 07 9 1s0g016z198 eui s 909 29 ueuM Z uonisod oj
72. ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 390 SL MultErr Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to the failure of a DPI port ine 0 F Options 0 Ignore 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2 FltCoastStop this event occurs 3 Fit RampStop 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault 4 FltCurLimStp bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault
73. Jey pds dwog peeds 282 enbio bj enieu DL suondo 1 enbio Ce dwogou4 2 gt diis dwogous dnjag duio22u4 dwog uonouJ 9 lt 69 ppy bij dwo ou jenutA Aejaq jpoua lt a gt jpou3 HIA gt Jey dwo u3 oS 324 ayers 91607 19 2 D 1 eun Cz D Jeu pds peseg ysy dwey Joy pds pedwey u3 dwey jays 91601 z xse1 92U9819J8M 04jUO 21 iw La dweupds 21607 Cos ejeospeedseieg Ces D uiecjeoeqenieu Cus 5 uieojeooverjeu erpau 12101 dwo9 enieu OL puewwog 91607 1219 3944 u3 pds 21607 e Keo dweypds 91607 oka jeuipeedg ILlBl llllJ2222222222 2 p jodium ZSL 291 pds pui291601 Cie un jeu T n
74. eo o 8 5 Name 255 Description Values 2225 904 SL Node Cnfg Set bits to configure the SynchLink node Setting bit 0 Time Keeper configures the local node as the Time Master e Setting bit 2 Sync Now configures the node to synchronize with the Time Master immediately 1 25 per node on power up or recovery If you do not set bit 2 the node will stay in the fast mode taking up to 36S per node to synchronize on power up or recovery e Setting bit 3 Reset SL resets SynchLink This can be used to reset SynchLink after a configuration change instead of cycling the drive s power This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Options 5 2222222222222 8 5 CC Default O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 18 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True D p commons f f SynchLink data This d h efines the node s communication format for receiving SynchLink data This determines the number of axis data direct data and buffered data words received Configure the format by Axis A Direct D Buffered B using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software Options 0 0 0 0 e Option 14 can be used to allow the drive to receive position data that can be
75. 0 0 484 W 0290 480 N 0cO 3co N 0 04 0 0c 98 06 9c SLL 9 291 09 Y 0 Ov L 9109008 919 384 910 38 WN 910 320 W Sl 0 0 0 41 Vel ve 96 09 FLI 9469906 012 384 010 38Q WN 0LO IZCO N ki 06 08 01 Sl Ol 851 8 89 05 Y FLI 91 8498406 p 98 38 N 98 3cO N L 91 921 9 0L eel 0 09 7 980 92 0 edvaaoe S2QUINN XEN g UIN 295 2 Woo sduy o ZHA QH 57 sequin 9 10499 044 19 Aejaq bag S Boeg 5 ejqeisn py ui 1010 NOY L wag 1030 119119 4 eui 1 eng y dwal M eAug 9 3 uonoejoJd Indu JY HOA 802 9 Supplemental Information L005S INOr eeg eA feu 10199301d WOY jo eu 5 5 2490 2490 A009 20 A08 UO ASN 104 P S IN JON 276 A009 10 LLZ AOSP ejeq 10 OAM OpZ eyed 10 802 40 persi TIN rejonuo 104014 3 5 dui eui yeu 0119 di uano pjnous eBuei uano unang
76. 12 Reserved 13 Jog 2 14 Normal Stop 15 Spd Ref Sel0 16 Spd Ref 17 Spd Ref Sel2 18 CurLim Stop 19 Coast Stop 20 Accel Decel2 uon Hn n H H H H I H n mn O N O uon 2 S 2c 21 Step 22 Indx StepRev 23 Inc 24 Dec 25 Reset 26 PI Trim En 27 PI Trim Hold 28 PI Trim Rst 29 Trend Trig 30 PreCharge En 31 Regis 1 Ltch 32 Hrd OvrTrvl 33 OvrTrvl 34 UserGen Sel0 35 UserGen Sel1 36 UserGen Sel2 37 UserGen Sel3 38 ExtFault Inv 39 Home Switch 41 Find Home 42 Return Home 21 Step 22 StepRev 23 MOP Inc 24 MOP Dec 25 MOP Reset 26 PI Trim En 27 PI Trim Hold 28 PI Trim Rst 29 Trend Trig 30 PreCharge En 31 Regis 2 Ltch 32 Hrd OvrTrvl 33 Hrd OvrTrvl 34 UserGen Sel0 35 UserGen Sel1 36 UserGen Sel2 37 UserGen Sel3 38 ExtFault Inv 39 Home Switch 41 Find Home 42 Return Home 21 Step 22 Indx StepRev
77. 132 1110 132 110 1200 1150 150 1150 160 1132 160 1132 250 200 200 150 200 160 250 200 350 3800 350 250 315 250 250 250 450 350 1400 350 355 315 450 350 400 315 32 Supplemental Information 208 240 400V 480V 600V 690V ND HD ND HD ND HD HD HD ND HD Frame kW kW HP kW NDHPHP 315 250 500 50 500 1400 450 355 355 315 500 500 500 500 500 1400 400 355 1600 500 1600 500 1560 500 450 400 700 600 1700 650 630 560 F 500 450 800 700 800 700 1710 630 560 1500 1900 800 1900 700 800 630 630 560 1000 900 1000 900 1900 800 710 630 1200 11000 1100 1000 1000 900 800 710 1250 1000 1300 1100 1100 1000 Table A B PowerFlex 7005 Drives with DC Input 5 5 5 Frame HDkW NDHP HDHP NDHP HDHP ND kW HD kW 7 5 5 0 2 2 155 2 0 15 2 0 1 5 40 3 0 3 0 2 0 3 0 2 0 5 5 4 0 5 0 3 0 5 0 3 0 7 5 5 5 7 5 5 0 7 5 5 0 110 775 10 0 7 5 10 0 17 5 15 10 15 10 185 115 25 20 25 20 15 10 22 18 5 30 25 30 25 q 25 20 45 37 60 50 60 50 5 40 30 55 45 75 60 100 15 90 15 50 40 55 45 100 75 75 55 100 75 6 60 50 90 75 12
78. 9 STOP 16 Enable H 153 Control Options bit 8 3WireControl will automatically be ON 1 for 3 wire control e Set Par 168 Normal Stop Mode for the desired stopping mode 0 Ramp Stop 1 CurLim Stop 2 Coast Stop 1 28 Installation Wiring Main Control Board Configuration Settings Figure 1 8 Main Control Board Dip Switches JUMPER P22 HW Enable No HW Enable SWITCH S5 SIDE VIEW FRONT TOP VIEW Up Open Off EEF 12 Down Closed On Li SWITCH S2 SIDE VIEW FRONT Up Open Off TOP VIEW Down Closed On 12134 SWITCH SIDE VI TOP VIEW Down Closed On H 5 9 a 90 im ge SWITCH S4 FRONT TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW Up Open Off Down Closed On 3 EW FRONT FER 12 CE Conformity Installation Wiring 1 29 to 24V DC at the factory If you are running a 115V AC input application the switches must be set as indicated below before applyi
79. Dimensions are in millimeters and inches 36 Supplemental Information Figure A 5 Frame 5 Dimensions gt lt 65 0 26 lt M 259 1 10 20 gt lt 15 0 0 59 jhe gt Detail C hy o gt 0000000000001000001000000000 r 4 000000000000000000000000000000 O 00000000000000000000000000 000 NENNEN o 25 5 p A 6 5 0 26 Lifting Holes 4 Places 12 7 0 50 Dia 12 5 0 49 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Drive amp Packaging 42 18 93 0 0210 644 5 25 37 275 4 10 84 225 0 8 86 m 24 61 37 19 82 0 Refer to the Drive Frame Size to HP kW Ratings Cross Reference on page A 31 table for frame information 2 When using the supplied junction box 100 HP drives Only add an additional 45 1 mm 1 78 in to this dimension 9 Weights include HIM DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard Hi Resolution Encoder Option and 20 COMM C ControlNet adapter Figure A 6 Frame 5 Bottom View Frame 5 75 HP 480V 55 kW 400V Normal Duty Drive
80. PowerFlex 7005 e Connected DPI Devices Him CopyCat Device gt HIM Memory Storage Reset To Defaults Device lt HIM Save EEPROM Delete HIM Set GO Recall EEPROM Start Up b Introduction gt Motor Control Motor Data Feedback Confi 62 z Pwr Circuit Diag Direction Test Motor Tests D hor Nasu Uer Dapur pepe me Strt Stop I O User Dspy Video Done Exit Reset User Dspy Contrast Press GP to move between menu items Press to select a menu item Press to move 1 level back in the menu structure Press to select how to view parameters D 4 HIM Overview Diagnostics Menu When a fault trips the drive use this menu to access detailed data about the drive Option Description Faults View fault queue or fault information clear faults or reset drive Status Info View parameters that display status information about the drive Device Version View the firmware version and hardware series of components HIM Version View the firmware version and hardware series of the HIM Parameter Menu Refer to Viewing and Editing Parameters on page D 5 Device Select Menu Use this menu to access parameters in connected peripheral devices Memory Storage Menu Drive data can be saved to or recalled from the HIM or EEPROM EEPROM is permanent non volatile drive memory HIM sets are files stored in per
81. Torque Est 6 Output Power 20 Scl Spd Fdbk 7 Output Volts 21 RampedSpdRef 8 DC Bus Volts 22 Spd Reg Out 9 PI Reference 23 MOP Level 10 PI Feedback 24 Trend 1 11 PI Error 25 Trend 1 Real 12 PI Output 26 Trend 2 13 Reserved 27 Trend 2 Real 839 Anlg Out2 Dint Default 0 V RW 32 bit Link this parameter to an integer source parameter that will control Analog Output 2 Min Max 2147483648 Integer 840 Anlg Out2 Real Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Link this parameter to a real floating point source parameter that will control Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 2 Programming and Parameters 3 99 8 Name 5755 Description Values Ses 841 Anlg Out2 Offset Default 0 0000 RW Real Provides an offset for Analog Output 2 before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 2 function This parameter value is summed with either Par 839 Anlg Out2 Dint or Par 840 Anlg Out2 Real at the beginning of the function 842 Anlg Out2 Scale Units V IRW Real Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output 2 For example If Par Default 0 0000 838 Anlg Sel is set to 1 Output Freq the output frequency of the drive is 0 60Hz and Min Max 2200000000 0000 you enter 6 in this parame
82. gt DATA RS 485 E GN XX BK DATA RS485 1 DEH y 1 REFCOS 6 PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Connection Examples Figure F7 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 10 pin MS style connector Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 gt A POWER POWER 11 gt POWER COMMON REFSIN 10 gt C SIN 9 gt D REFCOS REFCOS 8 gt DATA RS 485 4008 7 J gt DATA RS 485 SHIELD L gt G SIN SHIELD 5 COS NC 4 DL NC 3 gt J SHIELD DATA RS 485 2 DATA RS 485 1 Figure F 8 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 8 pin Berg style connector Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 07 BU RD POWER POWER 11 X gt 2 POWER COMMON REFSIN 10 3 REFSIN 4SIN 9 4 4 REFCOS 8 mm GY 5 DATA RS 485 COS 7 DER __ 6 DATA RS 485 SHIELD SHELD 5 DIES NC 4 DLI NC 3 DATA RS 485 2 DATA RS485 1 H Figure Pre attached Stegmann shielded twisted pair
83. p 0081 __ 0072 0081 002 8911 0 0001 5 1991 0051 0095 0096 0091 00 0 0091 9212 9691 091 0071 2 0921 21 vxIOGOC 4109 0091 008 2 008 2 0091 2 0066 70091 6 00 9641 091 0001 11081 0071 0078 2 0078 0071 2 0090 0071 600 0571 0084 992 00cL 6L 71906 10861 0071 0078 0078 0071 2 0092 0591 9791 0801 766 c 006 10861 0081 0008 2 000 2 0081 z 0060 0061 02911 9961 06 000 61191006 syd Jed 2 0081 syd 1902 009 sud 4ed 2 0001 sud 1ed 2 009 0021 009 8 190 0092 49299 0021 548 0008 549 298 002 0091 OZEL 06 196 96 e 008 Sud 1ed 2 006 syd 190 2 069 6401942 0011 Sud 190 2 069 0081 000 548 198 0008 548 198 0081 540 0022 549 198 1 0081 9991 221 0601 766 07 4 006 OMLGGOC syd 2 0021 49 499 ogg _ 50 290 2 006 sud 1ed 2 066 07901 0021 007 84 190 00 849290 1 OOLL 849 0081 548 298 1 001 9271 086 088 928 e 007 Sud 1ed 2 0081 sud 13d Z 009 Sud 1ed 2 0001 syd 190 2 009 0 90 0021 0092 540 299 1 0092 544 198 002 540 0002 84990 1 002 082 210 066 888 008 0669906 Sud 1ed 2 0901 syd 190 2 0Gp sud 13d 2 008 syd 190 2 og 1026 0021 0018 540 198 001 190 006 548 198 0091 0 290 1 006 181 9601 0 98
84. 096 OZLL 928 0S2 vel 008 05 3406 syd 098 49 2 Gye 49 190 2 069 50090 2 sve 6096 008 0041 548 198 1 0041 548 09 54998 0061 59890 05 901 988 069 0 5 c 099 syd sed 2 26 49 2 00 54090 2 002 548 1 9 2 00 2096 006 006 58198 006 syd 008 54998 1 00 4929 008 Z90L Stz 099 869 002 0593406 XeW _ UIN ase 3009 _ 9 2 Jequiny 8807 101993024 lt 4042919 Aejaq Aejaq jueulo 3 nd no dwa 5 Boeg SHEM UND 4040 indui WMd gt EL 21 Indu Dy 009 19 uinujixeu YT 10 Jo ezis JAN SN 104 19X234 PNI duy 1 12112 JOJON 10 uesouo eq jsnui ezis 39eX3 O3N SN Aq v14 Jo 92 SI ezis SN 104 euin 1 PNOO ere umoys W714 10 Jo 951 S ezis SN 104 serjddns yey
85. 3 RO dTime 7 RO Delta2Err Reslvr0 TP Data Default 0 32 bit Displays the data selected by Par 270 Reslvr0 TP Sel Min Max 2147483648 Integer Reslvr0 SpdRatio Default 1 2 poles x1 Specifies the speed ratio for the resolver option card port 0 The speed ratio comes from the Options 0 Zero 3 6 Poles x3 following formula Speed ratio electrical revolutions mechanical revolutions pole count M 2 Poles xt 4 8 Poles x4 2 Note Option 0 Zero was added for firmware version 2 04 S SRO Ve 10 Polesie Reslvr0 Carrier Unit Hz RO 32 bit Specifies the resolver carrier frequency for the resolver option card port 0 Default 0 Integer Min Max 0 10000 Reslvr0 In Volts Units RO Real Specifies the resolver input voltage for the resolver option card port 0 Default 0 0000 Min Max 0 0000 31 0810 Rslvr0 XfrmRatio Default 0 0000 RO Real Specifies the resolver transform ratio for the resolver option card port 0 Min Max 0 0000 4 0950 Reslvr0 CableBal Default 0 RO Real Specifies the resolver cable balance for the resolver option card port 0 Min Max 0 255 5 Default 0 Disabled pecifies used resolver ione 0 Di 2 The values for options 5 amp 12 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Added Options Ko p ME ee new resolver values 15 and 16 for firmware version 4 001 2 T2014 2087x2 11 Reserved 3 T2014 2
86. 393 BusUndervoltCnfg Default 1 Alarm Enter a value to configure the drive s response to the DC Bus voltage falling below the Options 0 Ignore minimum value 3 1 Alarm 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 2 4 A 2 FltCoastStop e 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 Flt RampStop this event occurs 4 FitCurLimStp 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 60 Programming and Parameters No 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 Name Description VoltFdbkLossCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a communication error between Motor Control MC and the motor voltage feedback board e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit i
87. 5 uoneJ69ju Cis uieo d Bay pds I pid pde 1 5 jeuoniodoug yoeqpee l l 1 les Jes 4 jeu peeds ojo Qm INO Id Bex pds L 521 sojejnBay 1 peeds zt Nee ew ewe ew ew ew ew ew ew ew ee ew ew ew ew ee a Id c peeds uonoejes eoueJlojes 394 1504 Beyu Bay 31304 JojejodJeju uonisod swelbeig 2 S004 1611 2 581 5 uonisod yndjno pds Control Block Diagrams gt Jeu pds z xse1 d 624 Nd dl Jeu pds 84d 195 dL Jeu pds 77d Sjulodisel aKa 62 2 29 paddy JAS eouaJ8JaM OUD peedg lt gt les 8 paads Cos gt a palos jeu paads 1 S Idd Idd 9 C ponesou MBSE Ii bids 1 eI uod Idd WIH ua 1 eI T Mod Idd WIH 1 1 1 EL b HOd Idd peyunow 1 m Coz 4 peeds 1 1 9 paads jeseJg tbi 1 i GD G 1 116 1 eI 8 Cu peedg 1 1 11 peedg
88. 8 0000 90 0 0 0 100 0 100 8192 mSec 100 0 32767 100 8192 1 00 0 00 100 00 100 8192 Linkable 2 Read Write RW RW RO RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RO RO RO RW RW RW 3 71 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Real 16 bit Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi t t t t t t t t Integer Real 16 bi Integer 16 bi Integer 16 bi t t t Integer 3 72 Programming and Parameters 503 504 505 e 508 509 510 Name Description Current Reg BW value Reducing the value reduces current regulator over shoot PM AbsEncd Offst Determined by auto tune procedure PM TestWait Time Defines the time interval used for the automated measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM motor PM Test Idc Ramp automated measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM motor PM Test FreqRamp Defines the ramp rate of the frequency reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM motor PM Test Freq Ref Defines the frequency reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM motor PM Test Ref automated
89. 8 585 834 jt O lt Defaut 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 JO 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 700L AlarmStatus Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions for PowerFlex 700L LiquiFlo drive Bit 0 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 1 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 2 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 3 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 4 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 5 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 6 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 7 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 8 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 14 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 15 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 16 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 17 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 18 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 19 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 20 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 21 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 22 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 23 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Bit 24 NonCnfgFault Not configured as alarm Note This parameter was
90. AE z elt B 1 T 1 7 28 En n is jer 7 6 E 185 1 i 3 c 3 ea H 1 A 133 3 1 625 in DOD IMs dell I PO OH on P gt o OD LI 2p i Y Y Y SPACE 2 76 gt 39 3 155 lt lt 75 9 2 99 gt lt 57 2 2 25 gt lt 96 0 3 78 gt lt 72 7 2 86 gt lt 106 0 4 17 gt lt 139 4 5 49 gt lt 177 4 6 98 gt Frame 3 All Drives except 50 HP 480 V 37 kW 400V Frame 3 50 HP 480V 37 kW 400V Normal Duty Drive 105 3 4 15 gt 105 3 4 15 gt 34 9 1 37 Dia m 222 0 87 Dia 94 7 3 73 gt 37 3 147 Dia lt 947 3 73 gt 2 Places 7 1 84 Dia 28 7 1 13 Dia pi 28 7 1 13 Dia Places 2 2 Places gt lt LAM UN tee tee 165 1 B 585 5 1 23 2e 6 80 B amp 165 1 FT T 160 1 6 50 151 1 6 30 Eg 5 95 t 127 7 T FCHOECHORCHERCRD ieee O O O G O Qr 6 03 MC vr Qv KOK CKO OTO O EOSTO I Y Y s RORGECKO Vent Plate n ov 227 0 89 29 0 1 14 _ 22 7 0 89 lt lt 66 0 2 60 gt 29 0 1 14 lt gt 97 0 3 82 66 0 2 60 I 137 2 5 40 lt 1800 6 12 lt 187 0 7
91. Allen Bradley 1 i 11 amp Power 700 High Performance AC Drive Phase Control Firmware Versions 1 xx 4 001 User Manual Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equ
92. Bit 0 Local Ovflow indicates a math overflow due to local multiply Bit 1 Rx Ovflow indicates a math overflow in received data Bit 3 Ftol Ovflow indicates a math overflow in the real to integer conversion function Options l l l ld l ld ld l l ld l l l ld ld lo lo d 5 5 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt amp 9 o o lololooooooooooooo oooosoooovoeoecCcCieoo s s CC CC jo jo _ Default O 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 928 Rx Dir Data Type Sets the data type for the SynchLink received direct words If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Options Reserved lt 9 lReserved lReserved N 9 Reserved gt Reserved lReserved Reserved e ISLDir03 Real SLDir02 Real 9 SLDir01 Real gt SLDir0O Real gt
93. Chapter 4 Troubleshooting This chapter provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 7008 A list and description of drive faults with possible solutions when applicable and alarms is included For Information on See page Faults and Alarms 4 4 Drive Status 4 1 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Fault Alarm Descriptions 4 5 The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored Any changes will be indicated through the front panel LEDs and or the HIM if present If the DriveLogix option is not present the associated indicators will not be present The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only operational when the drive is energized These LEDs are only visible when the drive door is open or when viewed from the HIM or an application program e g DriveExplorer in parameter 554 LED Status This feature is only available with DriveLogix version 15 03 or later operational when the drive is energized and only visible with the drive door open Servicing energized equipment can be hazardous Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock burn or unintended actuation of controlled equipment Follow Safety related practices of NFPA 70E ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR EMPLOYEE WORKPLACES DO NOT work alone on energized equipment ATTENTION The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only Troubleshooting LED Indications Figure 4 1 Drive Status Indicators Table Drive Sta
94. Controller is OK Bit 19 DL Loading The controller is storing or loading a project to or from nonvolatile memory Bit 20 DL CF Flash The controller is reading from or writing to the CompactFlash card Bit 21 DL CF Format The CompactFlash memory is not initialized Bit 22 DL CF Error CompactFlash card does not have a valid file system Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 o c pe m sts 2 Sle zg222222z5285 2 2 2 2 52 5 5 2 2 2 8 2 5 0 5 55525 lt ju lt ojojo fa fa Ja Js CC DID 1D 0 W Default 0 0 0 JO 0000 0 00 0 0 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 49 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 True 3 78 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 555 Status Indicates the status of the Motor Control MC Processor and related functions Note Changed bit 18 from Reserved to Vqs Reg Act for firmware version 3 03 1 Options m 25 2 o gt 5 2 5 5 o lt 9 215 5 S Sga 2 5 8 6 88
95. Ldeaaoc sng feroa esn4 295 WIN I 1409 sduv 95 QN eue Jequinw 9 HOA 069 Supplemental Information A 26 10L7INOZL 00 0084 0021 0 2 0001 10L NOZL 00 9212 9691 0971 9591 0 Z 0881 l pyLraog ZOLZWOL 00 6 02 9221 0911 1621 0 2 000 LOLLINOZ L 00 620Z 0081 L91 e 0081 el 10L7INOZL 00 0291 9791 0201 0 Z 006 10L NOZL 00 0291 992 0911 1651 0 Z 0001 el LXIPOOC 0199 4041 sud 198 09 009L 0221 026 820 ge Z 008 0199 4041 sud 198 069 9991 SELL 0201 0 006 e 0 6099 0041 Sud 055 9271 0221 008 926 0r Z 002 6099 0 1 Sud 099 082 ZLOL 006 8601 z 008 e 0 6 0 1199 4041 sud 190 Z 002 YLEL 9601 OEZ Z 009 1199 4041 sud 190 002 0881 206 028 506 Ov 002 e ozeraoz LL99INOZL syd ed 2 002 OZLL 26 099 Or Z 009 LL99INOZL sud 1902 002 S60L 6 08 052 28 Ov z 009 05 0 0199 4041 sud 190 09 090 988 069 999 Z 008 0199 4041 sud ied 09 090 912 099 008 089 0 6099 0041 Sud 2
96. RW Real RW Real 3 62 Programming and Parameters No 412 413 414 415 416 2 28 5 Description Values Power EE TP Sel Enter or write a value to select drive power EEPROM data displayed in Par 413 Power EE TP Data The default is 0 Zero Note Options 74 92 were changed and options 93 111 were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 0 Zero 19 Bus VitScale 38 IGBT Rated A 61 Convt Type 80 P B ID 99 2 P B ID 1 Volt Class 20 Sml PS Watts 39 IGBT V Thres 62 DC Bus Induc 81 HH1 S W ID 100 HH2 S W ID 2 Assy Rev 21 Sml PS Min V 40 IGBT Slope R 63 AC Inp Induc 82 HH1 Rev 101 2 Rev 3 ASAS N 22 Lrg PS Watts 41 IGBT Sw Engy 64 Precharg Res 83 S W Rev 102 HH2 S W Rev 4 Manuf Year 23 Lrg PS Min V 44 IGBT CS Tres 65 PrechThrm Tc 84 HH1 Extr Data 103 HH2 ExtrData 5 Manuf Month 24 Inv Rated Kw 45 IGBT CS Tc 66 Mtr NP Units 85 HH Voltlndx 104 HH2 Voltindx 6 Manuf Day 25 Inv Rated V 46 Diode V 67 Mtr NP Power 86 HH1 Sizelndx 105 HH2 Sizelndx 7 TstProcStat 26 Inv Rated A 47 Diode SlopeR 68 Mtr NP Volts 87 HH1 Option 106 HH2 Option 8 Life PwrCycl 27 Inv 1min Amp 48 Diode JC Tr 69 Mtr NP Amps 88 1 HrdPrdct 107 HH2 HrdPrdct 9 Life Pwrup 28 inv 3sec Amp 49 Diode JC Tc 70 Mtr NP Freq 89 HH1H W 108 HH2 10 Life RunTime 29 SWOverC 50 GBT
97. SHUEY W714 JOJOW Jo 5 ezis DAN SN 104 duy snoeuejuejsul 1012810Jd 1n2112 JOJOJA 10 eq ezis j9ex3 93N SN Aq ejqewoje SHUEY W714 2010 Jo GZ S ezis WNWIUIW SN 104 JexeeJq euin JexeeJg SHUEY JO OW Jo 62 SI ezis WNWIUIW OFAN SN 104 uonoejoid serjddns jeu payed sayBly 9215 unuixejy eouesinu uonoejoid seijddns yey payed eu s ezis uonoeyoud 0 n 0 SI S eseu Jo siy je eq snw eu uo sed uedo WAN JO SI ezis 10 9u i 092 GLE S 0911 9 0 09 09 881 921 9121 LLL 0t Z Sell 080 00 00 921 008 9 912 891 981 209 Z 09 9 71310 n 091 9 61 S Set 000 Sel 861 671 66 996 6 z 0S Z 00 osz GLE S 091 052 051 881 8
98. Start Up 2 8 Applying Power to the Drive RUN Drive RUN DriveLogix 1 0 DriveLogix T mem E ooo mdo gm T Y 6 FORCE DriveLogix COM DriveLogix BAT DriveLogix OK DriveLogix HBB LY 6 Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive Examine the Power PWR LED 2 4 Start Up Table 2 A Drive Status Indicator Descriptions Color State Description PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive Power SIS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running amp no faults are present S Status Steady Drive running no faults are present S Yellow Flashing When running a type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to run When stopped a start inhibit exists and the drive cannot be started 5 Steady A type 1 user configurable alarm condition exists but drive continues to run e Red Flashing fault has occurred Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Red Flashing The drive is in flash recovery mode The only operation permitted is flash upgrade Yellow Alternately 2 PORT Status of DPI port internal co
99. Sys neti Notes Value 5 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Value 7 Mtr Sys J was sc LU LATE changed to Slip Test for firmware version 3 01 Value 8 Find Home was added for firmware 4 PM Offset version 3 03 166 Motor Ctrl Displays the command bits to the Motor Control Processor from the Velocity Processor Options 5 5 2 le le 2 2 2 2 2 2 28 2 9 5 2 2268 3 5 5 2 21285 8 8 g oOo o o ojo oiocooo o ojooiocoo o gcolojojoioomoo o o oidcdioloi o gt CC CC CC cc cc cc cc en jo Defaut jo jo jo jo j0 0 jo j0 jo jo j0 j0 j0 0 jo j0 op ri Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 76543210 1 167 Motor Ctrl Ackn Displays the Motor Control Processor s acknowledgment to the Velocity Processor for the Motor Control Command bits Options 5 2292293929 lt 2 lt 3 ojojo 5 5 lt ss 9 212 3 812 9 9 2 9 OID
100. were added for firmware version 2 04 2 2 msec 4 msec Default 0 RW 32 bit Integer RO 32 bit Integer RW 32 bit Integer RO 32 bit Integer RO 32 bit Integer 3 94 Programming and Parameters No 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 Name Description Xsync In 3 32 bit integer input of the Sync Generator Latched to Par 794 Xsync Out 3 Link any 32 bit integer parameter to this input parameter Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 Xsync Out 3 Sync Generator 32 bit output register Latched to Par 793 Xsync In 3 every time bit 0 Sync Pulse of Par 786 Xsync Status is set Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 Xsync Out 3 Dly Displays data of Par 794 Xsync Out 3 from the last sync period Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 Posit Gear Ratio Sets the load side gear ratio for position control Adjust this value when the selection of 777 PositionFdbk Sel is not 3 Motor Calculation Motor Encoder Rpm Load Encoder Rpm Note Thi
101. 0 SrvoAxisCnfgxe Selector for diagnostic Test point relating to Motion functionality Options 0 SrvoAxisCnfg 16 CST Upper 1 2 SrvoAxisUnwd 17 FBonlyFbkRaw 2 Marker Dist 18 Reserved 3 HomeEvent X 19 I O Rx Seqi 4 Watch Posit 20 0 Rx Msg 5 Home Posit 21 Tx Msg 6 SrvoMRP 22 Syn Rx Seqi 7 SrvoAct Ofst 23 Syn Rx Msg 8 PositRegis1 24 Syn Tx Msg 9 PositRegis2 25 Evt Rx Seq 10 FdbkAxisCnfg 26 Rx Msg 11 FdbkAxisUnwd 27 Tx Msg 12 FdbkMRP 28 Rx Seq 13 FdbkAct Ofst 29 Asy Rx Msg 14 TimeEvntStat 30 Asy Tx 15 CST Lower 31 Reset Msg 704 TP Value Default 0 RO 32 bit Data for diagnostic Test point relating to Motion functionality Min Max 2147483648 Integer 705 Motn RotaryCmmd Default 0 RO 32 bit Position command input from the Motion Planner to the ServoAxis when configured in rotary Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer mode 706 MotnUnwdTurnCmmd Default 0 RO 16 bit Position unwind turns command input from the Motion Planner to the Servo Axis when Min Max 32767 Integer configured in rotary mode 707 SrvoAxis RotFdbk Default 0 RO 32 bit Position feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo Axis when configured in rotary Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer mode 708 SrvoAx
102. 1 10 OJA 5 nd Kesey jeniov 1 wring dudo L 521 JUOLIND o4ju02 enbJo Control Block Diagrams B 10 QJe oseM 892 292 1ejeurejed Q uueuibejs 692 1ejeurejed 1 0 1pou3 ggz ay suonduosep jo seonpei sdej jo jequinu jeubis peeds y jo legsiqed OJAISeM hz 1190 g4 smeig lt 692 gt RD QUAISY iens gt sdej Jaquinu ay 0 g 5 IJ uoee 104 Buas eiqeisn pe sdej jo jequunu y HJA ue seu 4 uoe3 BuisseooJgd xoeqpee4 SHOA 0JA SOS 4 Quz oneupds ounisey uoneasiDos 1 0 uondo dL pds 7rzd yeigsiBeu L 01d0 PAS 9 S usod 95 dL PAS enid Byuoo 1 0190 QuieuuepieH xyoeqpee4 5101091591 lt isz gt lt QuueuiBeis ByugsiBey 1 01390 BHyugsiBey 1 0 3 S MOD B d 6 pds oido 84 100 yoyqsi6ey pou F yor s
103. 11 Iq Delay Enables the Torque Current Delay option 12 Jog Nolnteg Configures the speed regulator s integrator to hold when jogging 13 OLClsLpDsbl Overload Closeloop Calculation Disable 14 ReservedDM Reserved for use by the Drive module for Invert Speed Feedback 15 ReservedDM Reserved for use by the Drive module for Invert Motor Torque Current 16 AutoTachSw Switches to secondary motor feedback 17 AuxPwrSply X Enables the use of an auxiliary power supply When set to 1 the Main Control Board MCB examines internal 12V DC power to see when it is energized When set to 0 the MCB examines the voltage of the DC Bus This bit enables the MCB and the DriveLogix Controller to remain energized when 3 0 voltage is de energized 18 SpdRegPreset When set to 1 this bit selects Par 303 Motor Torque Ref for the Speed Regulator preset When set to 0 Par 87 SReg Trq Preset is selected 19 Slip Comp Enables slip compensation 20 MotorOL Ret Enables motor over load retention 21 Inrt TrqLPEn Enables the Inertia Compensation Torque Output Low Pass Filter 23 PlTrim EnOut Enables the output of Process Trim 24 Time Axis En Ramps the output of the Time Function Generator 25 MOCAtuneEn Enables Autotune tests 26 Trq Trim En Enables Torque Trim 27 PwrDiag En Enables the Power Diagnostic test 28 PMOffsetEn Enables the Permanent Magnet Motor offset test 29 Slip Test En Enables the Slip Frequency Auto Tune function 30 SysInrt
104. 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Values Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options PAO o Linkable Read Write Data Type Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Alarm Ignore 3 Alarm 4 FitCoastStop FitCoastStop Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Programming and Parameters 3 57 g SE Name 55 No Description Values ses 383 51 CommLoss Data Default 1 Last State Enter a value to determine what is done with the data received from SynchLink when a Options 0 Zero Data communication loss occurs Refer to Par 902 SL Error Status for possible causes of H Last State communication loss 0 Zero Data Resets data to zero e 1 Last State Holds data in its last state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 383 SL
105. 26 AC Input Drive amp Packaging amp Enclosure Weight kg Ibs Ibs 1348 2972 1400 3086 1400 3086 1248 2751 1248 2751 1248 2751 Drive Rating Amps 1150 1300 1450 920 1030 1180 2197 865 89 6 2275 Table A G Frame 13 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights Voltage Class 400 480V AC 540 650V DC 600 690V AC 810 932V DC Appendix B Control Block Diagrams List of Control Block Flow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the drives control Diagrams algorithms For Information on See Page Overview B 3 Speed Control Reference Select B 4 Speed Control Reference B 5 Speed Control Regulator B 6 Process Control B 7 Torque Control Torque B 8 Torque Control Current B 9 Speed Position Feedback B 10 Inputs amp Outputs Digital B 11 Inputs amp Outputs Analog B 12 Control Logic B 13 Position Control Interp Direct B 14 Position Control Point to Point B 15 Position Control Auxiliary Control B 16 Point To Point Motion Planner B 17 Phase Lock Loop B 18 Virtual Master Encoder B 19 User Functions 1 B 20 User Functions 2 B 21 Synchlink B 22 V Hz B 23 Diagnostic Tools B 24 Inverter Overload IT B 25 DriveLogix Connection Speed Control B 26 DriveLogix Connection Position Control B 27 DriveLogix Con
106. ActiveFbkDev 24 E0 Error 4 MCP Fdbk Dev 25 E0 Qloss pk 5 Reserved 26 EO Ploss pk 6 Reserved 27 EO PleviHist 7 Reserved 28 E1 Edge Time 8 Reserved 29 E1 dEdge 9 Reserved 30 E1 dTime 10 Reserved 31 EPR 11 Reserved 32 E1 Edge Mode 12 Reserved 33 E1 nMax 13 Reserved 34 E1 Error 14 Reserved 35 E1 Qloss pk 15 Reserved 36 E1 Ploss pk 16 MCP PPR 37 1 PlevlHist 17 MCP 2 38 EO Delta2Err 18 0 Edge Time 39 1 Delta2Er 19 0 dEdge 40 EOB Present 20 0 dTime 41 First Diff Units RPM RO Real Default 0 0 Min Max 8 0 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu Default 0 RO 16 bit Min Max 32768 Integer Options NNNNN NNNNN N NNN N NNN Revision No Low Module ID No Version Revision No High Default 0 RO 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer 3 38 Programming and Parameters 8 5 555 Description Values 225 251 FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk Units RPM RO Real Displays the speed feedback from the feedback option card port 0 Default 0 0000 Min Max 14000 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 252 FB Opti Posit Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays position feedback accumulator
107. In 1 Real is cleared 571 Trend Ini Real Default 0 0000 4 IRW Real Provides real input to the Trend 1 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Min Max 2200000000 0000 Buffer 1 if bit 1 In 1 Real is set 572 Trend Out Dint Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the output for Trend Buffer 1 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the Min Max 2147483648 Integer value of the element in Trend Buffer 1 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 573 Trend Out Real Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the output for Trend Buffer 1 if the buffer is using real data This will equal the Min Max 2200000000 0000 value of the element in Trend Buffer 1 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 574 Trend 112 Dint Default 0 RW 32 bit Provides integer input to the Trend 2 The Trending function samples this parameter for Min Max 2147483648 Integer Trend Buffer 2 if bit 2 In 2 Real is cleared 575 Trend In2 Real Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Provides real input to the Trend 2 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Min Max 2200000000 0000 Buffer 2 if bit 2 In 2 Real is set 576 Trend Out2 Dint Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the output for Trend Buffer 2 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the Min Max 2147483648 Integer value of the element in Trend Buffer 2 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 577 Trend Out2 Real Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the
108. Lov spun Bojeuy Cees wia Lino zul roa jew enbiop Joop 0 4 JOYDIL IOON GL pL eL NANO 14084 dino id 1e8y Qno puel 27Gd le y zZ 10413 1948814 1013 Id LL 1 9 64 quid z puau 92 x eqpaesj dzgld 1 OL HNO pueJ1 2298 leay sz 4184 Id 6 N wld puss 2 64 yz sng 9499084 SHOA sna Od 8 18497 dOW 06014 19 91 dOW z NAINO 2024 SHOA 1ndino Queuno ziv spun O I Bojeuy cora 45 JnO 2064 ino Bay pds zz NAINO LLEd Jemog 9 Jeu pds padwey Joupdspeduiey Lz JOJON XniJ 100 6 pds z 0d pds 0 02 bi xqp3un5 62 6674 bit p enbJo LZ d 353 1 61 queuing 3ndino 8064 n2 1ndino yapapds 4 LZ 0d peeds 81 0704 _ jeu PS 95 Z Jeu peeds L0 d jeu peeds 1 _ beijindino Jeu uno 6084 JouINObILAW 91 peugeq1est 1 1 5 0 1ndino Bojeuy Buy 10 181 Jay le vi L8L 1 1 9
109. M uon n n Hn 50 0 500 Hz 0 0 0 0 500 0 0 2147483648 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 I Linkable Read Write SL DirlntRx0 SL DirlntRx1 SL DirlntRx2 SL DirlntRx3 RW RW RW RW RO RW RW RW RW RW Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 32 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 93 No 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 Par 740 Position Control bits 18 amp 19 Position Watch 2 compares this value with Par 785 Posit Dect2 In and sets bit 9 Posit Watch2 of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condition is satisfied Par 741 Position Status when Par 769 Position Error is within this bandwidth for a sufficient time specified by Par 783 In Posit Dwell A modest hysteresis count is added to the position bandwidth after the position error is within specified limits In Posit Dwell momentary out of position indication will reset the internal timer and clear the In Position status bit with Par 740 Position Control bits 16 4 17 Position Watch 1 compares this value with 780 PositDetct1 Stpt and sets bit 8 Watch1 of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condition is satisfied A default link connects this par
110. N a Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved o gt gt DID N N cc c Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved lt Reserved 2 Reserved e e e 0 False 1 True Default Bit e gt 0 0 0 19 1 1 e 1 0 5 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 o Programming and Parameters 3 105 eo amp Name 255 No Description Values 2252 929 SL Dir Data Rx00 Default 0 RO 32 bit to Min Max 32 bits of data Integer 932 SL Dir Data Rx03 This is the SynchLink direct data received See Par 928 Rx Dir Data Type for data type configuration 933 Buf Data Type Sets the data type for the SynchLink received buffered data If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Options 5 29 9 2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 o o amp cjr X X a 9am8ERESZsssSsss222rf22rzesregsssisisgsisiss 25 fst fst Jas
111. RS 485 2 DATA RS 485 1 WHCN XX Note Thermal Switch cannot be accessed using 2090 5 cable Figure F 5 MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090 UXNFDMP SXX cable Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWERCOMMON 12 DEH WHIGY c BK 4SIN POWER 11 GY XOX BKWH REFSIN 10 DR BKWH C 4SIN 9 XxX WHRD p ReFCos REFCOS 8 WERD XX Tem gt E DATA 98 485 008 7 RD F DATA RS 488 SHIELD 6 Es gt POWER SHED 5 Ld T gt L COMMON BU NC 4 gt TS NC 3 i weu WHBU 5 GN DATA RS485 2 DI DATA RS485 1 WHCN xX Figure F 6 Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 DIN style connector Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWERCOMMON 12 BU 5 x 12 POWER POWER 11 hD 11 NC REFSIN 10 m SOX BU 49 POWER COMMON 4SIN 9 SHIELD REFCOS 8 PK 5 4COS xx GN COS 7 gt 7 DATA RS 485 SHED 6 6 REFSIN SHIELD DIE WH 5 Li 5 SIN NC 4 1 gt gt 4 NC NC 8 NC RS 485 2
112. This is the resultant output of the first conversion form Dint value to a Real value after scaling Note This parameter name changed from DInt2RealResult to DInt2Real1 Result for firmware version 3 01 Real2Dint In Input value for Real to Dint value conversion Real2Dint Scale Input value to scale the conversion from Real to Dint This is a multiplication to the input value after conversion to a Dint value Real2DInt Result This is the resultant output of the conversion form a Real value to a Dint value after scaling MulDiv 1 Input Input value to be scaled as need with the Multiplication and Division function This input will be multiplied by Par 1054 MulDiv 1 Mul and then divided by Par 1055 MulDiv 1 Div The result will be loaded to Par 1056 MulDiv 1 Result Equation Par 1053 Par 1054 Par 1055 Par 1056 MulDiv 1 Mul Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1053 MulDiv 1 Input The result will be divided by Par 1055 and loaded into Par 1056 See Par 1053 MulDiv 1 Div Set this value as the divisor of the result of Par 1053 Par 1054 The result will be loaded into Par 1056 See Par 1053 MulDiv 1 Result This is the result output from the Multiplication and Division function See Par 1053 Equation Par 1056 Par 1053 Par 1054 Par 1055 MulDiv 2 Input Input value to be scaled as need with the Multiplication and Division function This input will be multi
113. ZIPS ueoJesr 01 119 ueoyesr 19 01 0195 ueoJesr d 2 5 220 ue 51 uonoejes edA 1ndui se xjes UBHJESN SN ZZOL syndy jej61g eui BIA eq YO IMS 10 2 5 E 2 uowsgies uowsies CD uo MS MO YMS 8S S ul ul uosies L ZL Ul uosies LL ul uses OL ul 60 5 80 104 90 ul 90 YO 504 ZO LO 00 ul 506 0000000 00 Kzzor mo uows es Control Block Diagrams B 22 vp c su wj v w __ oad uso sf sof v v __ e swsof ef _ __ eyepdr SOM apdn SPIO sag o wj ef sof uso sf sof v e suso ___ aepdn SpoM
114. ade ay uo sodA uedo YIWAN 20 S seAup p ezis 20 eu z OOVPSH 007 096 0 6 081 861 c 09 OOVPSH 007 616 6 6 8yc 6 5 002 9 1 8 0 0 007 415 vec 991 06 Scl 007 0 6 861 08 86 09 Y 06 9 1 081706 OO amp fSH 008 0Sc 881 Scl 1745 09 Y 00 OO amp fSH 008 vec 611 991 VLL 09 Y Scl 9 1 9817006 OScfSH 092 261 96 690 09 Y GL 09 5 060 002 871 SEL 151 09 Y 001 5 071706 O0cfSH 00 891 96 6 60 09 Y Sg 00 5 00 691 851 Scl 09 Y 00 S 1 9217006 SASH SL 791 978 06 7 09 SZIPSH 941 901 96 660 06 Y GL 6 960f 00 OSIfSH 06 051 926 978 09 7 09 09 Y 1109406 OOIFSH 001 YOL 8 99 9 69 09 Ov 09 9900002 06f SH 06 08 09 eS 499 09 06 OV 90 0 08f SH 08 89 1 0 6 06 G2 0 0700400 09 5 09 YS 9 07 ve 795 09 y 0 S yeodaoc OSf SH 09 vw 66 1 6 8 09 7 9 00 604400 66 21574 09 Y Ob SL 6604406 0 99 971 09 7 GZ Ob Oc SH 0c 99 beh LL 09 Y 9 Gl SIf SH SL 88 08 V8 09 Y S 0d8daoc 0L SMf 0L GL 99 09 Sy 09 Y E 0459406 9 SMf 9 09 Sv ve 0 06 91 745400 9 SMf 9 CE yc 61 09 Y 90
115. oO o EJ lt E C EIE lt 0 ojojo jojo o Defaut 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO 0 JO jo io JO jo Jo jo 0 0 O Jo 0 Jo Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O False 1 694 Mx Pos Trvl Default 0 RW 32 bit Positive soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis Min Max 2147483648 Integer 695 Mx Trvl Default 0 RW 32 bit Negative soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis Min Max 2147483648 Integer 696 PositErrTol Default 4096 RW 32 bit Position error tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis Min Max 0 2147483648 Integer Programming and Parameters 3 85 eo 8 Name 5755 Description Values 22 5 697 Motn PositLock Default 0 RW 32 bit Position lock tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis Min Max 0 2147483648 Integer 698 Motn Cmmd Default 0 RO 32 bit Position command input from the Motion Planner This is linked as the source to the Min Max 2147483648 Integer interpolator s Course Position Target 699 Motn Speed Cmmd Units RO Real Speed co
116. spun jeu AOL era 13 Control Block Diagrams Ajanisnjoxe ejqeu3 pesn si guy pue you s 0584 MOI 51 0 19 280 sd g H sas on vo EKE MH L uo BI T i mec EL L YBIH snes 91607 tors eg guy 9Igeug e qeua ejqeu3 JeMYOS uo eiqeu3 o 61 snes 21607 eIqeua e 195 pul DIG eo eui h 0 uei ala gt ES ies eui 1 mer E sce les 7 Lo but 1 6 aeua cg 295 1 xse1 2160 JeuMQ JID ysey uonoeuig suqiuu 31235 991 sei J UMO ASEN uelis smeis 21607 9914 dois sev 21601 91607 Jo Ajeotd A ee 941 2195 pds 195 pds 0195 pds paniasey dois 15205 5 wung dois wung zza 909 909 SJ9SuMQ SASEN 9S19 8M 29 Bess es1e eM 909 pjew04 029 d
117. sw y uni doo uonisod 0 9rd ejqeu3 soyejodsayuy 150 e suodei Y JO JS jou SI J uonoeuuo Y 10 YUITYOUAS Jeujoue 2 1 Jo L 01195 eqysnw 0 axi e qeu3 doo uonisog e qeu3 remu 0 4002 40 1 dn moys jou op 25941 uonoeuuoo 0 1 10 10 45 1euue d uonoyy i e moys Id Oxo 99110 jes eq JSNW 95941 peeds 1euue d uonoyy Loxi6o1eAuquioJ4 lt 669 gt uoiisog YORON lt 869 gt lt xibo1eAug OL 5 xibo1eAug OL lt OL xibo1eAug OL 8 0 xiBo1eAuq xi6o1 OL snes 91607 Wo4 1 6
118. 0 0000 3760 0000 cannot be viewed from the HIM Light Heavy Par 816 AI 3 Filt Gain 025 01 Par 817 Anlg In3 Filt BW 50 10 821 Analog I O Units Use to configure the type of units voltage or current for the analog I O e For analog input 1 configure bit 0 to match the selection of hardware switch S5 2 bit 0 set to 0 V or set to 1 mA Also the units for Pars 801 Anlg In1 Value 802 Anlg In1 Scale and 803 In1 Offset will correspond to this setting mA Also the units for Pars 807 Anlg In2 e For analog input 2 configure bit 1 to match the selection of hardware switch 55 1 bit 1 set to 0 V or set to 1 Value 808 Anlg In2 Scale and 809 Anlg In2 Offset will correspond to this setting e Bit2 AI3 Thermstr configures analog input 3 for a thermistor input with range of 0 to 10V For analog output 1 use bit 16 to configure Pars 835 Anlg Out1 Scale 836 Anlg Out Zero and 837 Anlg Out1 Value for voltage or current bit 16 set to 0 V or setto 1 mA For analog output 2 use bit 17 to configure Pars 842 Anlg Out2 Scale 843 Anlg Out2 Zero and 844 Anlg Out2 Value for voltage or current bit 16 set to 0 V or set to 1 2 mA No hardware configuration is needed for the analog outputs Options 3 ele olo 2 gt 5 gt gt lt 5
119. 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 11111111111111111111111111111111 0 RW 32 31 RW 0 00 0 00 600 00 Sec RW 0 00 0 00 600 00 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 101 No 860 865 870 875 880 885 861 866 871 876 881 886 862 867 872 877 882 887 863 868 873 878 883 888 864 869 874 879 884 889 Name Description General BitSwap Description The six 6 Bit Swap functions are used to replace one bit in a word with one bit from a different word This is typically done to a control word where one bit in the control word is replaced by a bit from another word such as a digital input Four 4 input parameters and one 1 output parameter are used to accomplish each Bit Swap function BitSwap 1A Data This is the main word in which 1 bit will be edited All of the data from this word except the selected bit in Par 861 BitSwap 1A Bit are passed to Par 864 BitSwap 1 Result BitSwap 2A Data BitSwap 3A Data BitSwap 4A Data BitSwap 5A Data BitSwap 6A Data BitSwap 1A Bit This parameter specifies the bit to be replaced in Par 860 BitSwap 1A Data BitSwap 2A Bit BitSwap 3A Bit BitSwap 4A Bit BitSwap Bit BitSwap 6A Bit BitSwap 1B Data This parameter contains the word from which the replacement bit will be selected Only the selected bit is passed to Par 864 BitS
120. 008 81 vMLHOOC 008 6 08 9221 0811 SEL 0 069 5 101 41021 00ve 6202 006 0591 0 81 exLHOOC 2014041 007 0291 991 0801 0 Z 099 00 091 9921 06 SEL 0 069 L LIMIHOOZ 019910011 _ 5 8 029 0091 0221 026 5801 Ge Z 005 5 019910011 54 0891 9991 SELL 0801 ard 0 096 OMLHOOC 6099401 49 099 9 9 0621 028 996 z 05 5 6099N0 L 349 2 089 082 210 026 801 0 009 Z 6 119910011 49 004 vel seol oez 698 0 Z 00 5 119910011 540 2 002 0801 206 028 996 0 OS 0 8 LLQOWOZL 49 2 00 0211 9 6 099 99 z 992 LLQOWOZL 49 2 002 S601 608 024 698 0 00r LL 0g4HQ0c 019910011 540 290 089 29011 688 069 969 0 Z 912 019910011 sudjedz oc9 90 099 S94 0 8 LL 9 6099 102 sudiedz osc 996 08 029 219 Or z 060 6099001 sudiedz osc 996 679 069 969 SIE LL 8099 00 11 54 290 009 078 089 ozv Or Z 060 3 809910011 sudjedz oos 05 099 008 686 092 OL 199IN0 L 006 0 8 9 982 697 0 Z 002 199IN0 L 006 0 909 09 Lvs 0 060 OL 9 LL99INOZ L 00 009 06 008 89 0 Z 091 5 LL99INOZ L 002 009 988 002 OL 9 0199 0041 0 9 067 896 88
121. 055 996 082 029 189 Ov Z 057 d 609910041 syd 2 099 996 6v9 069 999 z 009 06st aoc 8099IN0ZL syd 198 009 078 029 ozr bly Z 058 8099 4041 sud 198 009 05 099 009 795 097 0L 009 0 19910 006 OZZ 8 9 982 ver 0 Z 00 19901 006 0 909 09 619 0 z 0 01 1199 4041 002 009 057 002 855 0 Z 092 11990 00 009 982 ver 0 e 00 0L Sgeraoc 0199 4041 069 067 892 9 62 0 Z 002 d 019914041 0 9 097 Oe 008 86 e 092 6 ooeraoz 80991N0 L 00S 802 902 LEZ 0 Z 06 80991N0 L 00S 017 82 192 veZ 0 Z 002 6 L9eraoc 9514 eis esnj 295 2 UIN L 3009 sduy 9o ZH1 GN owe JequinN uueuissng WMd E 6 9114 S99 A9Q uonoejoJd 1ndu 099 27 Supplemental Information sezis TSAO V 008 009 VS30 20 00 0 06 v6 ON unang n V 007 010 Ai0yoe euj j9e u09 952919 seoiep 1eujo Aue 104 89715 PSH ed 1nuweus zeia Jo e pue Z 59216 9520 WOLL ed sezis ed uueuissng sesn4j ON uneing SJ28uuo9SI sng eui jueuno xeeiq perepi eA Buiwoljoj eu Jou sjes HW 10 seijddns
122. 10 POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder SIN 14 DL H H gt 9 SHIELD Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 0E 8 005 Rotary Encoder COS 12 DI PK H H GN gt DATA 85 485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 DIR E BN 6 REFSIN Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 10 DI CN H Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 1 5 4 NC Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 3 LinearSensorDATA 7 GY RS 485 Linear Sensor DATA L 1 REFCOS Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 00 Figure H 7 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable and 10 pin MS style connector MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 07 w A POWER Rotary Encoder POWER 16 40 RD BUT B POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 N SN C REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN 14 MH li H D REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 BK N GY E DATA 85 485 Rotary Encoder 4COS 12 xX GNI gt F DpATA RS485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 1 WH Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 GN PKI Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 o gt NC Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 gt J SHIELD Linear Sensor DATA 7 D Linear Sensor DATA 6 1 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTR
123. 133 Inert Adapt BW 134 Inert Adapt Gain 221 Load Estimate Programming and Parameters 3 7 3 8 Programming and Parameters 181 PI Reference 202 Time Axis Rate 182 PI Feedback 203 Time Axis Output 184 PI Lpass Filt BW 204 LimGen Y axis Mx 183 PI Error 205 LimGen Y axis Mn 185 Preload 206 LimGen X axis In 207 Limit Gen Hi Out PI Integ HLim 208 Limit Gen Lo Out 189 PI Integ LLim 190 PI Integ Output 191 PI High Limit 192 PI Lower Limit 180 PI Output Programming and Parameters 3 9 Position Config Point to Point Sync Generator Phase Lock Loop 740 Position Control 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref 786 Status 720 PLL Control 741 Position Status 745 PositRef EGR Mul 787 Xsync Gen Period 721 PLL Position Ref 742 Posit Ref Sel 746 PositRef EGR Div 317 SL System Time 722 PLL BandWidth 777 PositionFdbk Sel 744 PositRef EGR Out 788 Xsyncln 1 723 PLL Rev Input 784 Posit In 753 Posit Offset 1 789 Xsync Out 1 724 PLL Rev Output 780 PositDetcti Stpt 754 Posit Offset 2 790 XsyncIn2 725 EPR Input 785 Posit Detct2 In 755 Posit Offset Spd 791 Xsync Out 2 726 EPR Output 781 PositDetct2 Stpt 756 XOffst SpdFilt 792 Xsync Out 2 Dly 727 PLL VirtEncdrRPM 782 In BW 747 Position Cmmd 793 XsyncIn3 728
124. 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer RO 16 bit Integer RO 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer 3 76 528 529 530 531 532 533 537 538 539 540 541 542 544 545 546 547 Programming and Parameters Name Description Values Run Boost Units Sets the boost level for steady state or deceleration when V Hz mode is selected Default Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max Break Voltage Units Sets the voltage the drive will output at Par 530 Lia Frequency Default Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max Break Frequency Units Sets the frequency the drive will output at Par 529 Break Voltage Default Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max Maximum Voltage Units Sets the highest voltage the drive will output Default Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max Maximum Freq Units Sets the highest frequency the drive will output This parameter is a function of Par 3 Motor Default NP Hertz Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 SlewRateTimeLimt Default Defines the time limit in seconds during which torque producing voltage Vqs regulator output variations are limited by each slew rate at the transition where the Vqs regulator turns on The same time limit is applied at the transition to the
125. 191 PlHigh Limit Units V RW Real The high limit of the Process Control regulator output A value of 1 can represent either base Default 10 1000 motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Min Max 0 0000 8 0000 192 Lower Limit Units 4 Real The low limit of the Process Control regulator output A value of 1 can represent either base Default 0 1000 motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Min Max 8 0000 0 0000 196 ParamAccessLevel Default 0 Basic RW 16 bit The value of this parameter establishes the level of parameter access for the Human Interface Options 0 Basic Integer Module P 1 Advanced Value 0 Basic grants access to the minimum number of parameters Value 1 Advanced grants access to a larger group of parameters 201 Language Default 0 English RW 16 bit Selects the display language when using an LCD HIM Currently only option 0 English is Options 0 English Integer available 1 Alt Language 202 Time Axis Rate Units Sec Real Sets rate 1 sec for the Time Function Generator to ramp from an output of 0 to 1 and from 1 Default 1 0000 to 0 Min Max 0 0100 20 0000 203 Time Axis Output Default 10 0000 RO Real The output of the Time Function Generator When the Time Function Generator is enabled by Min Max 0 0000 1 0000 Par 151 Logic Command bit 3 Time Axis En or Par 153 Contro
126. 23 MOP Inc 24 MOP Dec 25 MOP Reset 26 PI Trim En 27 PI Trim Hold 28 PI Trim Rst 29 Trend Trig 30 PreCharge En 31 Reserved 32 Hrd OvrTrvl 33 Hrd OvrTrvl 34 UserGen Sel0 35 UserGen Sel1 36 UserGen Sel2 37 UserGen Sel3 38 ExtFault Inv 39 Reserved 41 Find Home 42 Return Home 3 97 Data Type 3 98 Programming and Parameters 2 255 Description Values Ses 831 Out1 Sel HM Default 17 Speed Fdbk Me aso Anlg Out Real to select the desired parameter for output 2 Sel Spd Ref 16 MtrTrqCurRef The following table provides the parameter that corresponds to the option selected in this wa ou a Lu parameter 5 Motor Flux 19 Torque Est Option Parameter Option Parameter 5 Output rawar en 1 Output Freq 310 Output Freq 16 MtrTrqCurRef 305 Mtr Trq Curr Ref 8 DC Bus Volts 22 Spd Reg Out 2 Sel Spd Ref 140 Selected Spd Ref 17 Speed Ref 301 Motor Speed ace ane 3 Output Curr 308 Output Current 18 Speed Fdbk 71 Filtered SpdFdbk 11 Pl Error 25 Trend 1 Real 4 Trq 19 499 Trq Cur Fdbk Iq 19 Torque Est 471 Estimated Torque n
127. 3 41 dTime 7 1Delta2Em e Value 2 L1 dEdge displays the change in Par 252 FB since the last feedback sample Value 3 L1 DTime displays the change in time since the last feedback sample Note the sample rate is 10 000 counts per second 10 Mhz Value 4 L1 EPR displays the change in edges per motor revolution This number is the same value Par 290 Lineari e Value 5 Edge Mode should always display a zero 0 e Value 6 L1 nMax displays the numerator term for speed calculation This number divided by change in time TP3 is the calculated per unit speed for the linear feedback sensor 288 Lineari TP Data Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays the data selected by Par 287 Lineari TP Sel Min Max 32768 Integer 289 Lini Update Rate Default 2 1 0 msec Sets the sample rate for the linear channel on the Multi Device Interface MDI feedback Options 0 8 0 msec 8 4 0 msec option 1 0 5 msec 9 4 5 msec 2 1 0 msec 10 5 0 msec 3 1 5 msec 11 5 5 msec 4 2 0 msec 12 6 0 msec 5 2 5 msec 13 6 5 msec 6 3 0 msec 14 7 0 msec 7 3 5 msec 15 7 5 msec Programming and Parameters 3 45 8 2E Name 555 Description Values 225 290 Lineari CPR Unit RW 32 51 Specifies the change in Par 252 FB Opt Posit for
128. 5 Motor Flux 309 Motor Flux 20 Scl Spd Fdbk 72 Scaled Spd Fdbk 6 Output Power 311 Output Power 21 RampedSpdRef 43 Ramped Spd Ref 7 Output Volts 307 Output Voltage 22 Spd Reg Out 101 SpdReg Integ Out 8 DC Bus Volts 306 DC Bus Voltage 23 MOP Level 1090 MOP Level Real 9 PI Reference 181 PI Reference 24 Trend 1 572 Trend Out Dint 10 PI Feedback 182 PI Feedback 25 Trend 1 Real 573 Trend Out1 Real 11 Error 183 PI Error 26 Trend 2 Dint 576 Trend Out2 Dint 12 PI Output 180 PI Output 27 Trend 2 Real 577 Trend Out2 Real 15 Motor TrqRef 303 Motor Torque Ref 832 Anlg Out Dint Default 0 4 RW 32 bit Link this parameter to an integer source parameter that will control Analog Output 1 Min Max 2147483648 Integer 833 Out Real Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Link this parameter to a real floating point source parameter that will control Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 0000 1 834 Anlg Outi Offset Default 0 0000 V RW Real Provides an offset for Analog Output 1 before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output Min Max 2200000000 0000 1 function This parameter value is summed with either Par 832 Anlg Out1 Dint or Par 833 Anlg Out1 Real at the beginning of the function 835 Anlg Outi Scale Units V RW Real Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output 1 For example If
129. 5 12 5 2 S 5 S amp o i E 2 5 8 2 5 5 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 jO jO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 1 Drive Logic Rslt This is the logic output of the logic parser that combines the outputs from the DPI ports and the DriveLogix controller to determine drive control based on the masks and owners The control bits are reflected in Par 152 Applied LogicCmd bits 16 31 Options S xS 2 a iS Su 2 2 1 2 1212121118181 8 515150210 0 219 E 5 15 5 5 2 818 9 amp amp amp 9 9 9 5 2 6 5 9 E S S a a O 5 m i iP 5 S Oo 2 0 S O 8 ib 5 5 5 2 Default 0 0 0O 0O 0O 0O O jO jO O jO O O jO jO O jO jO O O O j0 O j0 O j0 O j0 O IO 0 D o Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 76543210 1 Digln ConfigStat Default 0 Digin Ok This parameter indicates the status of the Digital Inputs Options 0 Digln OK 4 Strt UnLatch 1 2 Run Starts 5 2 Jogl s 2 Start NoStop 6 2 Jog2 s 3 Run Latched 7 2Fwd s Rev s Zero Speed Lim Units 4 Real Establishes a band around zero speed that is used to determine when the
130. 600V 60Hz Input 690V 50 Hz Input Code Version Code Amps Hp Code Amps kW N None 1 7 1 7 1 052 52 45 DPI ControlNet 2P7 2 7 2 060 60 55 D DPI DeviceNet 3P9 3 9 3 082 82 75 E DPI EtherNet IP 6P1 6 1 098 98 90 R DPI RIO 9 7 5 119 119 110 DPI RS 485 DF1 011 11 10 142 142 132 1 DriveLogix ControlNet Coax 017 17 15 170 170 160 2 DriveLogix ControlNet Redundant 022 22 20 208 208 200 Coax 027 27 25 261 261 250 3 DriveLogix ControlNet Fiber 032 32 30 325 325 315 4 DriveLogix ControlNet Redundant Fiber 041 41 40 385 385 355 DriveLogix DeviceNet Open Conn 052 52 50 416 416 400 6 DriveLogix EtherNet IP 062 62 60 460 460 450 077 77 75 502 502 500 099 99 100 590 590 560 125 125 125 650 650 630 Control Options 144 144 150 750 750 710 Control Logic Synch 170 170 150 820 820 800 Code Option Expansion Link Cassette 208 208 200 920 920 900 A Phase No No Expanded 261 261 250 1KO 1030 1000 325 325 350 1K1 1180 1100 B rod No Yes Expanded 385 385 400 Note CE Certification testing has not been 416 416 450 performed on 600V class drives Frames 1 4 C ae Yes No Expanded 460 460 450 Phase 502 502 500 f D Yes Yes Expanded 590 590 600 Documentation Phase 650 650 700 Code Documents N A No Slim 750 750 800 Quick Start Guide H Phase N A Yes Slim 820 820 900 N No Documentation l 920 920 1000 1KO 1030 1100 g 1 1 1 1180 1300 Note CE Certification testing has not
131. 67 05 Y 02 24892000 699 584 98 3cO N 2 0c 0c 9 Ol 9 S7 99 09 25 9v 09 v 91 0439406 Org 38Q N 0 9 329 L 9 e 9 L 9 09 9 96 C 09 Y bE L 9489406 Scg 38QWN Seg 3co W 9 8 6 9 be 20 81 05 Y 990 920 I tdzodoz Sequin XEN cy WIN WIN 2958 UN 1900 sdwy 2 QN 7 1 010 esnj ejeg esn4 ejeg sbuneu S aiqeisnipy ut 1S 1010 1 WOVE 5 UON enq indui sy durer WMd mj e 9 1ndu OY HOA 00t 11 Supplemental Information umoys 774 10100 Jo 6 1 S ezis WNWIUILW JIN SN 104 JexeeJq duy snoeugjuejsul 10109 0 4 9110 JOO Uone e sui 20 uesouo ezis j9eX3 QIN SN Aq ejqewo pe JO OW JO 95Gz SI ezis 93N SN 104 Jexeeiq euin Jexeeig 774 4010 Jo 62 SI ezis
132. 691 Motn EventStatus Status of all events supported by the Motion Event Connection Note Added bit 9 Watch Fb Arm and bit 10 WatchFbPosit for firmware version 3 03 Options 7 E le o Rit Lit jee xe 2 5 5 1515 5 e g 5 5 5 3 imr Default 0 0 O 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 131 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 692 Event Ctrl Shows configuration state of Motion Event functions Added bit 7 Watch Fb Rev for firmware version 3 03 Options 151218 2 8 5 8 9 g c 9 9 e 5 5 5 55 2 2 5 cm a r I jr Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O False Bt 15 14 13 12 1 109 8 7 6 5 4 32 10 693 Interp Bit zero of this parameter is used as the synchronization pulse for the Interpolator This parameter is linked to Par 700 Motn Posit Sync for a Motion Servo Axis It is linked to Xsync Status for a SynchLink application Bits 1 4 have been changes to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options D 5 8
133. 71 72 73 74 75 76 Programming and Parameters Name Description DeltaSpeedScale Multiplier in the Inertia Compensation function affects the value of Par 59 Inertia Trq Add Use in center winder and unwind applications to compensate for roll diameter build up Virt Encoder EPR Equivalent Edges Per Revolution EPR or line count of a virtual encoder A virtual encoder is a position reference whose input comes from speed reference It accumulates pulses at the same rate as a real encoder of identical Pulses Per Revolution PPR Enter the equivalent PPR For example enter 1024 PPR to match an encoder with 1024 EPR Virt Encdr Posit A 32 bit pulse accumulator of the virtual encoder The accumulated pulse count is equivalent to the hardware accumulator of a real encoder It accumulates at a rate of 4x the value placed in Par 61 Virt Encoder EPR The accumulator starts at zero upon position enable Virt Encdr Dlyed One sample period delayed output of Par 62 Virt Encdr Posit Used in some applications to phase synchronize position reference through SynchLink The master is delayed one sample while the downstream drives update their position references then all drives sample position simultaneously The downstream drives do not select a delay FricComp Spd Ref Supplies a speed input to the Friction Compensation algorithm This input is normally a speed reference from a motion planner or ramped speed reference It
134. 738 PositTP DataDint 960 Tong m 464 MC Diag Error 2 387 Timeout Cnfg 739 PositTP DataReal 561 Trend TrigA Rea 465 MC Diag Error 3 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg 892 SL Comm TP Sel 562 Trend TrigB Dint 894 SLCRCErrAccum 389 LgxLinkChngCnfg 893 SL Comm TP Data Real 895 SLCRC 370 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel 564 Trend Trig Data 896 SLBOF Err Accum 363 HiHp GndFit Cur 246 Spd Fdbk TP RPM 565 Trend Trig Bit 897 SLBOF Error 364 HiHp GndFit Dy 247 Spd Fdbk TP Data 2 TS 808 SLCRC Limit 378 Interp Fit Cnfg 261 Steg amp Hiedn TPSel 567 Trend Mark Dint 899 SLBOF Err Limit 395 Sft OvrirviCnfg 262 Steg amp Heidn TPDta 568 Trend Mark Real 332 700L EventStatus 396 Sft OvrTrviCnfg 270 Reslvr0 TP Sel 969 333 7001 FaultStatus 397 OvrTrviCnfg 271 Reslvr0 TP Data 570 Trend Inf Dint 334 7001 AlarmStatus 398 Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg 287 Linear TP Sel 571 Trend Int Real 399 Position ErrCnfg 288 Linear TP Data 572 Trend Outi Dint 368 NotLogin Cfg 412 PowerEE TP Sel 573 Trend Out Real 413 Power EE TP Data 574 In2 Dint 466 TP1 Select 575 Trend In2 Real 467 MC TP1 Value 576 Trend Dint 473 MC TP2 Select 578 Trend In3 Dint 474 MC TP Value 579 Trend In3 Real 475 FaultTPSelect E 476 FaultTP Value 581 Trend Out3 Rea 717 PLL TP Select 582 Trend In4 Dint Trend In4 Real 718 DataDint 2 719 PLL TP DataReal ee 585 Out4 Real 1145 PPMP TP Select 1146 PPMP TP DataDi
135. 858 859 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or relay output will not change state Name Description Values Dig Out2 Data Default Link a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output 2 The bit within the selected word Min that will control Digital Output 2 is set by Par 852 Dig Bit Max Dig Out 2 Bit Default Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 851 Dig Out 2 Data that will change the status of Min Max Digital Output 2 when Par 852 Dig Out 2 Bit equals 0 bit 0 of Par 851 Dig Out 2 Data will control Digital Output 2 Dig Out2 On Time Units Defines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the Default corresponding change in state of Digital Output 2 If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Par 853 Dig Out2 On Time can be disabled by setting the delay time 10 0 zero Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Dig Out2 OffTime Units Defines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the output status and the De
136. A fault has occurred in the drive Bit 4 Sts Alarm A type 1 user configurable alarm condition exists but the drive continues to run Bit 5 Sts RunInhbt A type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to run Bit 6 Sync InSync The module is configured as the time keeper or the module is configured as a follower and synchronization is complete Bit 7 Sync NotSync The follower s are not configured with the time keeper Bit 8 DL Run Mode The controller is in Run mode Bit 9 DL Force Act I O forces are active enabled but may or may not exist Bit 10 DL ForceNtEn One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled Bit 11 DL Battery Either the battery is not installed or 95 discharged and should be replaced Bit 12 DL I O Activ The controller is communicating with all the devices in its I O configuration Bit 13 DL I O Alarm One or more devices in the I O configuration of the controller are not responding Bit 14 DL I O Fault The controller is not communicating to any devices and is faulted Bit 15 DL ComActive RS 232 activity Bit 16 DL Fault The controller detected a non recoverable fault so it cleared the project from memory Bit 17 DL NotActive If the controller is a new then it requires a firmware update or if the controller is not new a major fault occurred Bit 18 DL OK
137. Appendix J Appendix K Index PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives bees pedi m t egere e uibs G 1 SpecHICAlIO S os E RE we oie eE Rp elo Oa IE uia G 1 Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications G 1 Compatible Resolvers eso ceo cene sise ana cc 0 G 1 Recommended 0 G 2 Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver G 3 PowerFlex 700S Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card Specifications Thi dns bL v RS UIDE RE SEL See OLI Serv d H 1 MDI Option Card eh H 1 Supported Linear Sensors llle H 1 Supported Rotary 4 0 H 2 Recommended 0 2 Wiring the MDI Option I H 3 PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications Compatible Permanent Magnet 1 1 Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 7005 Phase Il Drives in Group Il Category 2 Applications with ATEX Approved Motors General Information sree occi lod I Rl pe IER dad WES dete J 1 Motor Requirements Wh tests beue pis ues bt de iu Gide J 1 Drive Wing uve DER be Eu albe e e pi J 2 Drive Hardware Configuration 2 0 J 4 Verify Operation bee or Ies Iu M Erst ek ipm J 4 SynchLink Board for P
138. CHASSIS GND Rotary Registration Sensor Linear Registration Sensor B Power DOLIDODOUODDOHOOUL ESUE EE E E E IE EFE E EET IE m o O Compatible Permanent Magnet Motors Appendix PowerFlex 700 Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications The following table contains a list of specifications for the permanent magnet motors compatible with PowerFlex 7005 drives Note that you must have a high resolution Stegmann or compatible resolver Table I A Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications Motor NP System Cont Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA Frequency Motor NP RPM Motor NP Motor Current peak Stall Torque Motor Max Model Number line to line V rms rms Hz oper rpm Power KW Poles Arms N m RPM rpm Parameter 1 2 3 4 5 7 MPL A310P 230 3 4 294 0 4410 0 73 8 9 9 1 58 5000 MPL A310F 230 2 1 185 3 2780 0 46 8 6 6 1 58 3000 MPL A320P 230 6 4 271 3 4070 1 30 8 20 9 3 05 5000 MPL A320H 230 46 208 7 3130 1 00 8 13 6 3 05 3500 MPL A330P 230 8 5 280 7 4210 1 80 8 26 9 4 08 5000 MPL A420P 230 9 0 268 7 4030 2 00 8 32 5 4 74 5000 MPL A430P 230 11 9 234 0 3510 2 20 8 474 5 99 5000 MPL A430H 230 8 6 184 7 27
139. Cees pds 121 aw uno 1zi aN 10 ove dL 12 aw aneo 121 D Joy exeig Beusng Cuv spem Cow es spem speMesind ayeig uuejx3 exeug Cw o eeu exer sng exeig dui 10exeug uondeox3 Joysisel gq duL70 10 u odujduiLo Aul puegduio au e K oze gt uondeox3 L gt 2D via av oon X 4 juang our wnang d isio 30 jueuno nd 5 nd CoeqpioJ 11 lt gt 11 urn 10 42014 enbioj ees ouenbeij WMd 12 peo 49 0 dui 1 v SH c sng SH uedo OLN peuous OLN o Kore 10jejnojeo gt papur Jes bI snjeis 10 e ug 3a Md jjour 70 pue OLN duie xursjeeH lt sonsuejoe1euo 1 MOd LI Control Block Diagrams B 26 s xibo1eAug OL xibo1eAug OL OL
140. Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Options Units Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Scale Default Min Max Programming and Parameters 2 3 P U 3 0000 0 0000 6 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 8 0000 RW 0 0000 200 0000 Sec 8 0000 0 0000 4095 8000 RIS IRW 10 0000 0 0000 30 0000 RPM RO 0 0 3000 0 0 Zero 0 Zero 27 Spd FiltOut 1 Iq Rate BW Servo Lock 2 Reserved 29 Spd ServLock 3 PGain Max 30 Prop Output 4 BW Limit 31 Intg Input 5 InertiaMaxBW Scld Int Pre 6 BW Lim Stat Sel Int Pre 7 BW Select 34 Droop Output 8 Inertia 35 Out Lim Stat 9 TI Lim Stat 36 Intg Hold 10 Reserved Srlss ZeroWe 11 Reserved 12 I Rate Limit 13 RtLim Stat 14 PGain Max 15 GnMx LimStat 16 Damping 43 17 Dmp Lim Stat 18 Reserved 19 5 46 20 Srls BWLimit 21 SrisinrtMxBW 22 SrlsBWSelect 38 GainParLim 39 P GainParLim 40 SrvLck ParLm 41 AntiBkup PLm 42 Droop Pos Lim Stat 44 Neg Lim Stat 45 Limiter Out Active
141. Encoder PPR ratings are limited to the values specified in the table below PPR Rating Values n x mod75 125 225 mod 375 625 mod1125 0 75 125 225 375 625 1125 1 2 150 250 450 750 1250 2250 2 4 300 500 900 1500 2500 4500 3 8 600 1000 1800 3000 5000 9000 4 16 1200 2000 3600 6000 10000 18000 5 32 2400 4000 7200 12000 20000 6 64 7 128 8 256 9 512 10 1024 11 2048 12 4096 13 8192 14 16384 Encoder Voltage 5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA channel 5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA channel Supply 5V DC minimum high state voltage of 3 0V DC maximum low 5V DC minimum high state voltage of 3 0V DC maximum low state voltage at 0 4V DC state voltage at 0 4V DC 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7 0V DC maximum low 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7 0V DC maximum low state voltage of 0 4V DC state voltage of 0 4V DC Maximum Input 400 kHz 400 kHz Frequency Stegmann Option Encoder Voltage 11 5V DC 130 mA 11 5V DC 130 mA Supply Hi Resolution Sine Cosine 1V P P Offset 2 5 Sine Cosine 1V P P Offset 2 5 Feedback Maximum Cable 182 m 600 ft 182 m 600 ft Length RS 485 Interface Hi Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following Hi Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after power up Address Command Number Mode Number of turns power up Address Command Number
142. Increase if set increments the MOP level output from Par 1087 MOP Rate to Par 1088 MOP High Limit Bit 1 Decrease if set decrements the level output from Par 1087 Rate to Par 1089 Low Limit e Bit 2 Reset if set resets the MOP level output to zero and bit 0 Increment and bit 1 Decrease are inhibited Bit 3 Reset Stop if set resets the level output to zero when stop is set e Bit 4 Reset PwrLs if set resets the MOP level output to zero when power is lost If either bit 3 or bit 4 is not set the level output will be saved until bit 2 Reset is set Options 3 o 2 29 515 I O S Default 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 3 2 1 0 1087 Rate Units Sec RW Real Sets the rate of change increment or decrement for the MOP The setting 0 1 sec will equate Default 0 1000 Sec to an increment or decrement of 0 1 for every second active If this is used for the speed Min Max 0 0000 2200000000 0000 reference that equals 1096 of base speed every second for a total of 10 seconds to reach base speed reference 1088 MOP High Limit Units Sec 4 Real Sets the upper limit for MOP output The MOP cannot be incremented above this level Default 1 0000 Sec Min Max 0 0000 2200000000 0000 1089 Low Limit Units 4 RW Real Sets the
143. Integer Real 3 92 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 Programming and Parameters Name Description Position Error Actual position error in motor pulse counts When the position regulator is not enabled this 32 bit integer register is initialized to zero When the position regulator is enabled this parameter contains the running value of position error often referred to as following error PositReg Integ Sets position regulator integral gain as measured from position error to velocity reference It has gain units of per unit velocity sec per unit position and is unit compatible with Par 768 PositReg P Gain An integral gain of 25 means that a per unit position error of 0 1 sec will effect 2 5 pu speed change per sec A typical maximum value is _ PositReg P Gain 2 Note 1 per unit position is the distance traveled in 1 sec at base motor speed PositReg Droop Position Droop limits the low frequency gain of the position regulators integral channel to a value of 1 droop It provides a means to fine tune the stability for load mounted feedback devices where lost motion may cause a problem Typically position droop will have a value that is less than 1 position gain perhaps even zero for tightly coupled loads Position droop has a gain value of per unit position per unit speed Note 1 per unit position is the distance traveled in 1 sec at bas
144. Jase S 8 OFZ GSI Z 1029 9 1esyo sav 2929 pepeo 196 1728 pue 69 9 69 9 uay jes 518 iq Op d 4n290 sjueuiubisse 94 SHEL 2 19 1729 Jo Busu uo oJezx Case so JONUOD uonisod y 0Jez pue uomisod y pejqeua 151 8 uonisod y ueuM e s juod siu V pee LOK bee OOK 174 sniels dooiq CELL 01D Bau Bayyisog eo K 15 uanisod sus ejas 91607 PIOH AUI 0 qun ueg 15005 queo peeds 1004 peo pov 31504 pds C961 1299 50 KoD 10 U00 5 uoa assed C991 83 ey Je96 N V peor cH6
145. Min Max 32767 Integer which is calculated based on the Slip regulator output A value of 4096 in this parameter doubles the compensation coefficient Notes This value should not be changed This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 591 RsTmpCoefAdjstEn Default 0 RW 16 bit A value of 1 in this parameter enables the temperature compensation function in flux and Min Max 32767 Integer torque estimate calculation where the temperature information is based on the Slip regulator output A value of 0 in this parameter disables the temperature compensation function Notes This value should not be changed This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 592 VqsReg On Hystr Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 593 SlipReg On Hystr Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 600 Lgx Comm Format Default 16 Speed Ctrl Indicates the Controller to Drive communication format Options 0 Not Used 18 UserDefin 1 16 Speed Ctrl 19 Motion 17 PositionCtrl 32 CustmUserDef Note Option values 1 15 and 20 31 are Reserved 601 From DL DataType Sets the type of data for each word communicated from DriveLogix to the PowerFlex 7008 drive Setting a bit High will configure the associat
146. OK to Run In Norm Stop CF Low Normal Stop and Clear Fault Note Notes Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2 04 Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3 01 Values 41 and 42 were added and value 39 was deleted for firmware version 4 001 1 Opening an Enable input will cause the motor to coast to stop ignoring any programmed Stop modes Values Default Options Default Options Default Options Programming and Parameters Not Used Not Used Enable Clear Faults Ext Fault Norm Stop CF Start Reverse Run Reserved Reserved Jog 1 Reserved Reserved Jog 2 Normal Stop Spd Ref 0 Spd Ref Spd Ref Sel2 CurLim Stop Coast Stop Accel Decel2 I m n Hn H H TS 2 6 TIO ROMO H H H H H H Not Used Not Used Enable Clear Faults Ext Fault Norm Stop CF Start Reverse Run Reserved Reserved Jog 1 Reserved Reserved Jog 2 Normal Stop Spd Ref 0 Spd Ref Spd Ref Sel2 CurLim Stop Coast Stop Accel Decel2 Not Used Not Used Enable Clear Faults Ext Fault Norm Stop CF Start Reverse Run Reserved Reserved 10 Jog 1 11 Reserved
147. OL OL c OL 2 OL i OL Hesyoisoq x1607 goxo Tau quo gt 0 xi amp o4 lt c OL 5 611 xi607 eveqieesipeugeqiesn OL c xiBo1eAug OL Be zoxiBoTeAuquuoJ4 Jeupeeds xi6o1 0 o OL puewwogoi6o7 xi601 00 1 4 Wo Wo4 4 Ienjovuonisog OL lt S
148. P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu 1 0 Rated Motor Torque P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu 1 0 Rated Motor Torque 50 10 500 Hz 0 0000 0 0000 500 0000 RPM 0 005 0 0 0 1 Sec 0 0 0 0 2 0 P U 1 0 0 0 8 0 P U 1 0 8 0 0 0 P U 2 0000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 2 0000 8 0000 0 0000 P U 8 0000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 5000 8 0000 0 0000 P U 0 50 0 2 1 0 1 0 PU Motor to Torque lt Linkable 20 lt Read Write F Data Type RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RW RW RW RW RW Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 3 23 Programming and Parameters No 130 131 132 133 134 136 138 139 Name Description Trq Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select torque reference data displayed in Par 131 Trq Ref TP Data Note The value for option 5 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Trq Ref TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 130 Trq Ref TP Sel Inert Adapt Sel Configures the Inertia Adaptation Algorithm IAA Function high bandwidths Bit 2 First Diff selects the first difference feedback for Inertia Adaptation Options Reserved Reserved Reserved e Default Bit 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Inert Adapt BW This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Inertia Adaptation function when the IAA
149. Ref 7 Preset 7 X Reserved 1 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 logic bit 8 0 and logic bit 9 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive To perform this command the value must switch from to 1 6 Supplemental Information Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Status Description Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Running 0 Not Running 1 Running Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Jogging 0 Not Jogging 1 Jogging Fault 0 No Fault 1 Fault Alarm 0 No Alarm 1 Alarm xX Flash Mode 0 Not in Flash Mode 1 In Flash Mode X Run Ready 0 Not Ready to Run 1 Ready to Run x At Limit 0 Not At Limit 1 At Limit X Tach Loss 0 Not Tach Loss Sw Sw 1 Tach Loss Sw X At Zero Spd 0 Not At Zero Speed 1 At Zero Speed X At Setpt 0 Not At Setpoint Speed Spd 1 At Setpoint Speed X Enable 0 Not Enabled 1 Enabled See Parameter 304 Limit Status in the PowerFlex 700 drive for a description of the limit status conditions DPI Device Limitations PowerFlex 700 Drives use a 450mA device on the 12V DPI power supply Due to the typical load of a external DPI device of 140mA there is a thre
150. Row 2 1 Constant value 3 Control Block Diagrams I l Id 1 1 1 d ssed Id 1 1 1 1 edpsei d J I peo 1 Id Our 1 l Jeac e jou yur indino Id 1 JOMUOD 5592014 1 3 uonoejoJd uondepy synduj joy T00W 8 eau 1 Coz D 1 pds 1eseud 9 pds jeseJd pdg saud dwog enieu D v pds uogoejes dg 19524 e o pds uonoejes Buisse2oJd jueun2 1934 ppybi dwogou4 8 Csi Z pds 10128 sng jeu uno a pds ening 5 pds said 004 L xse1 9 dwey ___ Jes 8 Jeu peeds Jes pds 25 pds pedwey pds 195 v peeds p m m ue ue Gus am uonisod Jesyo uonisod pee1 Id 2 4sej 9u 1 4 0 05 lt Bey pds Cos gt 1 ule 6 29 Bes pds Ce i
151. Stopped ndicates the logical state of the drive ione 102 2 Value 0 Stopped indicates zero speed has been detected and the speed and torque Options 1 DOE if regulators are disabled 2 Running 8 Slip Test Value 8 Slip Test indicates that the Slip Frequency Auto Tune test is in progress 3 Stopping 9 Finding Home Note Value 8 Slip Test was added for firmware version 3 01 Values 9 Finding Home and 4 Inertia Test 10 Homing Done 10 Homing Done were added for firmware version 3 03 5 MC Diag Programming and Parameters 3 25 2 oa No Description Values S28 151 Logic Command The controller drive interface as defined by the Controller Communication Format sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms Bits that are changed here are reflected in Par 152 Applied LogicCmd Note Bits 4 through 9 are NOT recalled from Control EEprom They will be cleared upon drive powerup or following an EEprom recall operation Options Inertia Comp 9 Ex Fit Alm 9 Reserved Default 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 True 152 Applied LogicCmd Displays the Logic Command that is applied to the Regulators and Control Algorithms within the drive Logic Commands come from the 32 bit Logic Command N IReserved 9 SReg IntgRst 9 SReg IntgHld gt SpdRamp Hold lt 9 Time Axis En T
152. c D 9 Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 Rotary Encoder POWER 16 Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 Rotary Encoder SIN 14 Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 Rotary Encoder COS 12 Rotary Encoder DATA 5485 1 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 10 Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor DATA Linear Sensor DATA Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION CHASSIS GND POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN SIN REFCOS COS L DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 RD BN WH BK PK GY GN 2 2 ee Rea JOCURI eG ee ESI Ee 8 o RO Oo Figure H 10 Registration Sensor connection EXTERNAL 120r24Vdc POWER POWER f COMMON SUPPLY 9 m 2 E a ion Board Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 Rotary Encoder POWER 16 Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 Rotary Encoder SIN 14 Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 Rotary Encoder COS 12 Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 11 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor DATA Linear Sensor DATA Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION
153. e 2 Pmag Motor selects control for permanent magnet motors e 3 V Hz selects volts per hertz control This selection is available in v2 003 and later e 4 Test puts the drive in a test mode to perform the direction test Test is automatically selected during the direction test portion of the Start Up routine and does not need to be set manually by the user Application Notes C 3 Field Oriented Control Permanent Magnet Motor Control and Volts Hertz Control are described in further detail below Field Oriented Control Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this mode Field oriented control is selected by setting parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 0 In field oriented control the drive takes the speed reference that is specified by the Speed Reference Selection Block and compares it to the speed feedback The speed regulator uses Proportional and Integral gains to adjust the torque reference for the motor This torque reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed The torque reference is then converted to the torque producing component of the motor current This type of speed regulator produces a high bandwidth response to speed command and load changes In field oriented control the flux and torque producing currents are independently controlled Therefore you can send a torque referenc
154. in response to this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 389 Lgx LinkChngCnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage Programming and Parameters 3 59 g 5 575 Description Values 225 5 390 SL MultErr Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the Drive Module s response to a SynchLink Multiplier error Refer n Options 0 Ignore to Par 927 SL Mult State for possible causes for multiplier errors 1 Alarm 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 2 FliCoastStop e 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 Flt RampStop this event occurs 4 FitCurLimStp 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event
155. or 0 196 mm 24 AWG Pulse I O equivalent individually shielded 1524 Power Belden 8790 0 750 mm 18AWG Rs to Combined 9773 9774 0 750 mm 18AWG 850 ft equivalent individually shielded pair EMC Refer to CE Conformity on page 1 29 for details Compliance 1 Belden 9730 is 3 individual y shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9728 or equivalent 2 Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair 8 Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs 3 channel 0 33 mm 22 AWG plus 1 shielded pair 0 5 mm 20 AWG for power 4 Belden 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9774 or equivalent 5 If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits the use of shielded wire may not be necessary but is always recommended 1 20 Installation Wiring ATEX Approved Drives and Motors For detailed information on using ATEX approved drives and motors refer to Appendix J Wiring the Main Control Board I O Terminals Terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 contain connection points for all inputs outputs and standard encoder connections Both terminal blocks reside on the Main Control Board Remove the terminal block plug from the socket and make connections Do not use a tool for terminal block removal Damage may occur if a tool is used Important For NEMA UL Type 1 applicati
156. s eu p 1 0 999d woy 1ejurod s 9994 juiod 1 663 eui Jo BuiuuiBeq y y peoejd Jaysew y eui jo ed au uo 8964 10 998 Z 1e8811 e1d eui 0 21015 sjuiod y sjoajas 9964 eos Jejulogjingpuei Ceos 5 Jeay Jexie y pue C298 1e pussy Ceos puoi 666 d eje1 je xoeq ejd oj sesneo 9964 jo g Bues lt gt ayey Jojuo2 Control Block Diagrams B 24 199jeq 13 40 S 10 99 8P ji 95774 0 39 ose s 3S1v4 195 s 19 esie yead 37 41 19 s z 10 x x yq eu JLON 195 Jead u 25 Control Block Diagrams eq dL 10 OAC 8954 195 dl 272 5 0 15 1 Jojow nd OL i TEN eee 1 1 szo jueuno nd 225 10 10 Juang uondeox3 jo
157. the Motor OLoad Pend alarm fault 12 occurs If the value of this parameter exceeds 1 0 the Motor OLoad Trip fault fault 11 occurs The value of this parameter is saved in non volatile memory after power down if Par 153 Control Options bit 20 Motor OL Ret is on Toggling bit 20 of Par 153 Control Options clears the value of this parameter Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 OL OpnLp CurrLim Displays the current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload OL function This function sets this current limit based on stator current feedback and the current ratings of the drive continuous and short term three second rating Typically the drive will have a sixty second rating of 110 of continuous current and a three second rating at 150 of the continuous Under normal operating conditions the open loop function sets this current limit to the short term three second rating If the function detects an overload it lowers the limit to the continuous level After a period of time typically one to three minutes the function returns the limit to the short term rating OL ClsLp CurrLim Displays the current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload OL function This function will set a current limit level based on the values in Par 355 Iq Ref Limited Par 313 Heatsink Temp and the thermal characteristics of the drive Under normal operating conditions the function typically
158. 0 F 0 9 S0cHQ0c OSEPSH 095 082 01 071 691 09 Y GL F OSEPSH 095 992 181 04 08 Y 3 06 9 041HQ0c 0Scf SH 092 00 891 901 202 06 Y 99 oser SH 082 Ole 791 Ovi 691 06 GL S yOrIHQ0C ooz SH 00c 89 bbl 96 96 08 Y Sy 00 5 002 291 851 Scl rads 08 Y 99 S 9 GLICSH 921 041 82 98 96 06 Y Sy x GLICSH 921 891 9LL 901 209 06 z 99 S 01 90 0 OSIP SH 091 bbl 80 98 96 08 Y 15 Sy Y 9800002 e 78 908 06 Y 0 15 2200002 00 5 00 98 79 98 619 08 Y c 0 9909406 6 5 06 vL 98 927 06 98 v00d0 OZPSH 0 09 Sy 15 60r 08 Y 91 981 1809405 oS SH 09 ee 0 CES 0 Y 9 0602000 0 ee evo Yo 08 Y Gl LL 7200002 Se SH 90 be cL VSI 89 06 99 Gl 9109007 Oc SH 0c vL l 92 09 Y Y 99 1109406 SI SH Sl cel 66 L8 26 09 Y 06 Y 4d89Q0c 01 5 Ol GL 99 09 es 08 Y 9 0dS9Q0c 8 5 8 09 Sy Ge Lt 0 Sg 2 0002 4 osnj ese 1409 sduy 2 ZH QN owed JequinN fejog eull uoN nd no 1ndu 28 Wd MA Bojeje 9 Sowes4 1ndu 30A Supplemental Information A 24 ZOLLWOZI 00vz 00 0098 002 ELpL 0 014 008 9212 9691 097 10 1 0
159. 0 0 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 JO JO JO 0 0 0 0 JO JO 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 626 To DriveLogix00 Default 0 V RO 5 by to to Min Max 32 dependant on Par 625 To DL Par 625 646 To DriveLogix20 DataType These parameters display the output values communicated from the PowerFlex 7008 drive to the DriveLogix controller 3 82 Programming and Parameters No 650 Name Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type DPI In DataType Sets the data type for each word communicated from an external controller to the PowerFlex 7005 drive via a communication module Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type Options 8 833388 ON ir e lt lt n n n Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 1 True DPI Data In A1 Default 0 RO 32 bit DPI Data In A2 Min Max 32 dependant on Par 650 DPI In Integer DPI Data In B1 DataType DPI Data In B2 DPI Data In C1 DPI Data In C2 DPI Data In D1 DPI Data In D2 These parameters display the input values communicated from communication modules to the PowerFlex 700S drive DPI Out DataType Sets the data type for each
160. 0 0 0 2147483648 0 PPR 1024 1024 and 2048 only 0 0 2147483648 0 Linkable Read Write Data Type RO 17 Mtn Calc 18 MP AnlgPulse 19 MP Rate In 20 MP Rate Out 21 MP Gain 22 MP Kx 23 MP FrctAccmR 24 MP AccelRate 25 MP DecelRate 26 MP Cal 27 5 Sum 28 SC Index 29 5 ArraySize 30 SC Once 31 SC Enable 32 SC Ipos RO RO RW RW RO RW RW RO Real 32 bit Integer Real 32 bit Integer Real Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 115 8 s No Description Values 5 1161 Config Configuration for the Electrical Gear Ratio EGR user function Setting bit 7 EGR of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable enables the EGR user function The combination of bit 0 Output Sel 0 and bit 1 Output Sel 1 determines the output of the EGR user function as follows Bit1 Description 0 0 Par 1165 EGR Pos Output is set to zero 0 1 Par 1165 EGR Pos Output is active 1 0 Par 1165 EGR Pos Output is set to the value of Par 1164 EGR Pos Input 1 1 Par 1165 EGR Pos Output is set to the value of Par 1166 EGR Pos preset Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 Options Z
161. 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 gp rae Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 65 4 32 1 0 1 256 0 0 1 RegisStat Indicates the registration control status on port 0 of the feedback option card Bit 0 Armed indicates the registration latch is armed e Bit 1 OptO Found indicates the registration event has triggered the latch e Rising edge of Arm request will set the Armed status bit e Rising edge of Disarm request will clear the Armed status bit i alala s 8 2 2 2 lt 2 2 2 2 2 elelele amp le ele e ea 9 9 9 9 9 z o cc Default 0 0000000000 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO J0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 oc rale Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 l True Programming and Parameters 3 39 o 8 5 5858 Description Values 225 257 OptO Regis Ltch Default 0 RO 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Displays the registration data of the feedback option card port 0 The registration data is the position reference counter value latched by the external strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by
162. 0 0 1 1 0 00 000 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 76543210 1 Tue 148 IFW TaskTime Actl Default 0 0 5 2 8ms RO 16 bit Displays the actual firmware scan times selected by Par 146 FW TaskTime Sel Before the Options 0 0 5 2 8ms Integer change to the firmware scan time is accepted the drive evaluates the change to ensure the 12 05 1 8ms processor will not be overloaded If there is risk of overloading the processor the change will 2 0251 8ms not be accepted 3 0 25 0 5 8ms 4 0 1 0 5 8ms 5 0 5 1 2ms 6 0 25 1 2ms 7 0 25 0 5 2ms 8 0 1 0 5 2ms 149 FW FunctionsActl Displays the actual state of the firmware functions If activating requested functions could overload the processor the change to Par 147 FW Functions En will not be accepted Note Bit 19 MotinPlanner and 24 PhaseLockLp were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 9 us L c mam 8 5 e 515 5 5 Setibfsrississsisioos5Tsfesto229s s2bossc2Sesssssszs2siie2225232525 E o o A fle 2 2 5 22 52 2 aig Defaut 0 o 00 o op poo p po ooo 00 ppo 00 o o 0 0 0 0 0 me Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 76543210 1 150 Logic State Mach Default 0
163. 00 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 0 01 6553 50 1141 PPMP SCurve Time Units Sec 4 RW Real Sets the amount of time that is applied to the S Curve Half of the time specified is added at Default 0 05 the beginning and half end of the acceleration and deceleration ramp Min Max 0 00 4 00 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1142 PPMP Spd Output Unit RPM RO Real Provides a speed reference output from the Motion Planner Typically this parameter would be Default 0 0 used by the drives speed loop A link could be made from a velocity reference input to this Min Max 8 0 parameter Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 3 114 Programming and Parameters No 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1150 1151 1152 1155 1156 1160 Name Description PPMP Pos Output Provides a position reference output from the Motion Planner This output is scaled in counts Typically this parameter would be used by the drive s Position Loop A link could be made from auxiliary position input to this parameter Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP Pos To Go Provides indication of feedback counts remaining in the move Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP TP Select Motion Planner test point selection Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Selecti
164. 1 19 ATEX Approved Drives and 1 20 Wiring the Main Control Board I O 1 20 Auxiliary Power Supply High Power Only 1 21 Hardware Enable Circuitry 0 1 22 Main Control Board I O Configuration 1 28 2 Table of Contents CE Conformity 7 2 s pup te eee eae a pA do Wb eie sd 1 29 Low Voltage Directive 73 23 1 29 EMC Directive 89 336 I 1 30 General Notes SE AE E 1 30 Essential Requirements for CE 1 30 Chapter 2 Start Up Prepare for Drive Start Up 2 2 2 1 Before Applying Power to the 2 1 Applying Power to the 2 0 2 3 Assisted Up oe eee eU SERE em qeu Gala Mew 2 5 Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters About Parameters uere pm om Re HA eus Len aca Rigid 3 1 How Parameters are 3 3 Parameter Data in Linear List 3 15 Parameter Cross Reference By 3 117 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter Objectives aee Eos E a
165. 1 20 Wiring 1 19 Indicator Drive Status 2 4 4 2 Input Phase Selection 1 10 Input Power Conditioning 1 5 Input Output Contactors Using 1 16 Inputs High Speed 1 27 Inputs amp Outputs Analog Inputs 3 13 Installation Wiring Chapter 1 1 1 J Jumper 1 17 Location 1 18 Jumper Removal 1 17 L LCD HIM Menus D 4 LED Class 1 P 4 LED Indications 4 2 Line Type 1 10 Linear Sensors Temposonics H 1 Location Power Terminal Block 1 13 Logic Command Word A 5 Logic Status Word A 6 Low Voltage Directive 1 29 M Main Control Board Wiring I O Terminals 1 20 Main Control Board I O Configuration Settings 1 28 Manual Conventions P 3 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 MDI H 1 Recommended Cables H 2 Specifications H 1 Support Linear Sensors H 1 Supported Rotary Encoders H 2 Menu Structure HIM D 4 Mode Capacitors 1 17 Monitor Metering 3 3 Motor 1 9 Motor Cable Lengths 1 9 Motor Control Motor Data 3 4 Motor Control Mode C 2 Field Oriented Control C 3 Permanent Magnet Control C 4 Volts Hertz Control C 4 Motor Ratings A 30 Index 3 Mounting Clearances 1 3 MOV 1 4 MOVs 1 17 Multi Device Interface Option Card H 1 N National Codes and standards 1 7 0 Opening Cover 1 2 Opening the Cover 1 2 Operating Temperature 1 3 Operating Temperatures 1 3 Operator Interface D 5 Option Card E 1 G 1 MDI H 1 Resolver G 1 Output Devices A 7 P Parameter By Name 3 117 Changing Editing D 5 Data 3 15 L
166. 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 65 4 3 2 1 0 PM Q Inductance Units 96 Indicates the percent per unit inductance of the motor stator in the torque producing Default 120 00 q axis Min Max 0 00 399 99 Scale 100 8192 PM D Inductance Units Indicates the percent per unit inductance of the motor stator in the flux producing d axis Default 20 00 Min Max 0 00 399 99 Scale 100 8192 PM Stator Resist Units 96 Indicates the percent per unit resistance of the motor stator Default 1 50 Min Max 0 00 100 00 Scale 100 8192 Mtr Coef Units 96 Indicates the coefficient for Counter Electro Motive Force voltage normalized to Default 89 99 base motor speed Min Max 0 00 399 99 Scale 100 8192 Slip Ratio Unis Hz Used by the Field Oriented Control 2 FOC2 mode Indicates the present operating slip Default 0 00 frequency at 100 Torque Producing Current Iqs scaled to hertz x 100 Min Max 0 00 327 67 Scale x 10 Stator Frequency Units 96 Displays stator frequency as a percentage of Par 3 Motor NP Hertz Default 0 0 Min Max 800 0 Scale x 10 Start Acc Boost Units Sets the voltage boost level for starting and acceleration when V Hz mode is selected Default 50 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max 0 0 1150 0 3 75 cia 0 False 1 0 False 1 True RW 16 bit Integer RW
167. 195 1 9 uSUM a em me D BS eanga zz 92 Kee s LA Ecc 18201 Ea 4 aes ez eouncaea uiia Ps su sounogsg zz 12 E zr 0 gt Is seis 2907 P9 oc eiqeu3 828 81 2 or za1 Pes vul a vr za wt 1 81 vo p uiia 9 10 sniels 18207 OWAGLL 104 YS OVAGLL OQ vZ Ine 4 M c sniels 2907 V Jojejes c uj6iq SnielS 12907 so vo 0 eama zar N M 281 10 5 12907 59 sindu Control Block Diagrams B 12 i or 0 9 Je IEA zino z zino ER asit ziro szo 1967 M8 193 Cire iesuo zino jn du ne 80 81 pieius a zov spun Bojeuy eui 90 191 Buy 0197 nsuueu eiv spun Bojeuy zul Buy 1142 IV
168. 2 04 Options 5 5 g PEEZEEZEEZEEZESEIEEZEAISESIEESSZEESZSS 2 2 9 922 sS s o 8 8 CC CC CC S uu lu lu Default 0 0 O 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 O JO 0 0 O 0 j0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 76543210 SL System Time Units uSec Displays the SynchLink system time counter Default 0 Min Max 0 1048575 Posit Spd Output Units RPM Final output of the position regulator Default 0 0000 Min Max 14112 0000 Scale 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu Selected Trq Ref Units Displays the actual selected torque reference value after Par 110 Speed TorqueMode Default 0 0 Min Max 8 0 pu the fault alarm configuration group of the utility file Options 8 o E c ES e 0 218 2 8 528 5l ls gt 2 5 65 5 5 5 5 552 5 2 2 ala 2 S o a S 6 8 Z Z 2 2 S o a 8 ji Default 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 O JO JO 0 0 0
169. 2 A lt B 13 Speed Limit 28 Cmpr 2 A gt B 14 CurrentLimit 846 Dig Out Data Default 00000000000000000000000000000000 RW 32 bit ink a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output 1 The bit within the selected word Min 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean that will control Digital Output 1 is set by Par 847 Dig Bit Max 11111111111111111111111111111111 847 Dig Out Bit Default 0 V RW 16 bit Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 846 Dig Out1 Data that will change the status of Min Max 32 31 Integer Digital Output 1 e g when Par 847 Dig Out Bit equals 0 bit 0 of Par 846 Dig Out1 Data will control Digital Output 1 848 Dig Outi On Time Units RW 16 bit efines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the Default 0 00 Integer pedet change in state of Digital Output 1 If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max 0 00 600 00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Par 848 Dig Out On Time can be disabled by setting the delay time to 0 zero Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 849 Dig Out1 OffTime Units RW 16 bit efines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the outpu
170. 2 VdsCmd 6 VqsCmd 72 8 9 VwCmdl 10 luFdbk 11 lwFdbk 12 ldsFdbk 13 IgsFdbk 14 VdsFdbk 15 VuvFdbk 16 VvwFdbk 17 VgsFdbk 18 IdsCmd 19 IgsRatio 20 MulgsRef 21 IqsCmd 22 23 24 25 26 VuCmd2 27 VvCmd2 28 VwCmd2 29 30 Vds cemf 31 Vqs cemf 32 VdsCmd2 33 34 ldsintegral 35 Iqsintegral 36 DcBus 37 AGnd 38 Wr2 39 FluxRatio1 40 VbusFdbk 41 FluxRatio2 42 FluxRatio3 MC 2 Value 43 FluxRatio4 44 MuFlxRtioRef 45 RepFlxRatiot 46 MulfluxRef 47 MultestRef 48 MotVntc 49 BaseSlip 50 VbusFdbk2 51 VdsFdbk2 52 VqsFdbk2 53 VdsSpdVItFit 54 55 MuTestFrqRef 56 TestFrqRef 57 FluxFltrN 1 58 PrchgDlayCtr 59 PrchTimOutCr 60 PrchPilotCtr 61 TrqEnableCtr 62 MuTscan1 63 ErStatFromCp 64 FlxCurRteOut 65 ThetaE 66 SinThetaE1 67 SinThetaE2 68 SinThetaE3 69 SinThetaE4 70 SinThetaE5 71 SinThetaE6 72 ThetaEcor 73 SinThtaEcor1 74 SinThtaEcor2 75 SinThtaEcor3 76 SinThtaEcor4 77 MulRef2B 78 SpdFdbk 79 Spdintegral 80 SpdPrportnal 81 SpdPI 82 SpdRef 83 SlipGainEst 84 SlipGainFf 85 Ws2 for firmware version 2 03 86 SlipGain 87 SlipGainFltr 88 SlipVdsCmd 89 SlpVdsCmdFit 90 VdsLastError 91 VdsPrportnal 92 VdslntMnitor 93 MotorVits 94 BusUtil 95 Fie
171. 3000 MPL B860D 460 33 6 96 0 1440 12 50 8 67 5 83 10 2000 MPL B880C 460 33 6 72 7 1090 12 60 8 69 0 110 00 1500 MPL B880D 460 40 3 86 7 1300 15 00 8 113 2 110 00 2000 MPL B960B 460 29 7 62 0 930 12 70 8 63 6 130 00 1200 MPL B960C 460 38 9 76 0 1140 14 80 8 88 4 124 30 1500 MPL B960D 460 50 2 76 7 1150 15 00 8 102 5 124 30 2000 MPL B980B 460 31 8 59 3 890 15 02 8 70 7 162 70 1000 2 PowerFlex 700 Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications Motor NP System Cont Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA A Frequency Motor NP RPM Motor NP Motor Current peak Stall Torque Motor Max Model Number line to line V rms rms Hz oper rpm Power KW Poles A rms N m RPM rpm MPL B980C 460 48 2 67 3 1010 16 80 8 99 0 158 20 1500 MPL B980D 460 63 6 74 7 1120 18 60 8 141 4 158 20 2000 MPG A004 031 230 1 8 222 7 3340 0 21 8 4 0 0 60 6000 MPG A010 031 230 21 189 3 2840 0 36 8 6 0 1 21 4875 MPG A010 091 230 0 9 295 3 4430 0 19 8 2 3 0 41 5900 MPG A025 031 230 9 9 181 0 1810 0 88 12 19 8 4 65 5200 MPG A025 091 230 3 0 168 0 1680 0 52 12 8 5 2 95 5625 MPG A050 031 230 24 7 120 0 1200 1 50 12 53 0 11 90 2510 MPG A050 091 230 5 0 275 0 2750 0 75 12 15 6 2 60 3775 MPG A110 031 230 20 2 122 0 1220 2 20 12 53 0 17 20 2875 MPG A110 091 230 17 0 184 0 1840 1 60 12 332 8 30 3500
172. 4 Access Tap 1 11 Access Panel 1 10 Ambient Temperature 1 3 Application Notes C 1 Armored Cable 1 8 Assisted Start Up 2 5 ATEX Applications J 1 Drive Hardware Configuration J 4 Drive Wiring J 2 Motor Requirements J 1 Auxiliary Power Supply 1 21 A 31 Before Applying Power 2 1 Bipolar Inputs 1 19 Bottom Plate Removal 1 9 Brake Resistor 1 15 C Cable 1 9 Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 9 SHLD Terminal 1 6 Cable Length Motor 1 9 Cable Trays 1 9 Cables Power Armored 1 8 Insulation 1 7 Separation 1 7 Shielded 1 7 1 8 Type 1 7 Unshielded 1 7 1 8 Capacitors 1 17 CE Conformity 1 29 Checklist Start Up 2 1 Circuit Breaker Ratings A 7 Circuitry 1 22 Index Class 1 LED Product P 4 Clear Faults Manually 4 4 Clearances Mounting 1 3 Clearing Faults 4 4 Command Word Logic A 5 Common Mode Capacitors 1 17 Common Mode Interference 1 19 Common Start Up Faults 2 5 Communication Masks amp Owners 3 12 Communications Programmable Controller Configurations A 5 Compatible Motors Thermistor A 30 Conduit 1 9 Conformity CE 1 29 Contactors Input Output 1 16 Control Block Diagrams B 1 Control Wire 1 19 Controller DriveLogix P 2 Conventions P 3 Cooling Fan Voltage 1 10 Copycat D 4 Cover Opening 1 2 Covers Removing 1 2 D Data Saving D 4 Defaults Resetting to D 4 Diagnostic Data Viewing D 4 Distribution Systems 1 17 Unbalanced 1 4 Ungrounded 1 4 Documentation P 1 DPI Communication Configuratio
173. 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 110 Spd Torq ModeSel Default 1 Speed Reg Selects the source for the drive torque reference Options 0 Zero Torque 4 Max Spd Torq 1 Speed Reg 5 Sum Spd Torq 2 Torque Ref 6 AbsMn Spd Tq 3 Min Spd Torq 4 Motor NP RPM Units RPM RW 16 bit Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM Default Calculated Integer Min Max 1 30000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu o 8 5 No Description 5 e No Parameter Number Parameter value cannot be changed until the drive is stopped 2 Name Parameter name as it appears in the DriveExecutive software Description Brief description of parameter function e Values Define the various operating characteristics of the parameter There are 3 types of Values ENUM Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Options Displays the selections available Bit Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Options Displays the selections available Numeric Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Min Max Displays lowest possible setting Displays highest possible setting Scale Value sent from Controller or Comm Device Drive Parameter Value x Comm Scale A checkmark indicates that the parameter is linkable d Indicates if parameter is read write or read only RW Read Write RW RO Read Only RO Indicates parameter data type i e integer floating point boolean r How Par
174. 57 FluxFltrN_1 58 PrchgDlayCtr 59 PrchTimOutCr 60 PrchPilotCtr 61 TrqEnableCtr 62 MuTscan1 63 ErStatFromCp 64 FlxCurRteOut 65 ThetaE 66 SinThetaE1 67 SinThetaE2 68 SinThetaE3 69 SinThetaE4 70 SinThetaE5 71 SinThetaE6 72 ThetaEcor 73 SinThtaEcor1 74 SinThtaEcor2 75 SinThtaEcor3 76 SinThtaEcor4 77 MulRef2B 78 SpdFdbk 79 Spdintegral 80 SpdPrportnal 81 SpdPI 82 SpdRef 83 SlipGainEst 84 LatchSlipGin 85 Ws2 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 SlipGainRate FiltSlipGain SlipScale SlipSclShift VdsError MotorRegen VqsSlwRtCLim MotorVlts BusUtil IdsCompMon IgsLimit VqsSlwRtOnt VasErrMon VasNoErrOnt VqsldsCmd VasMaxVbus FreqMinFB FreqMaxFB IdsCmdFilter DelFreqIntFB VasError SlipBrkErrFB FastBrkOnFB FreqOutput AbsFreqOut TestMark70 TestMark71 TestMark72 TestMark73 TestMark74 TestMark75 TestMark76 TestMark76 TestMark78 TestMark79 TestMark7A TestMark7B TestMark7C TestMark7D TestMark7E TestMark7F RWVuOut 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166
175. 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 2 a Name Description Values 5 Position Status Indicates status of position control algorithms e Bit 0 X indicates the position integrator is at the low limit Bit 1 X Gain indicates the position integrator is at the high limit e Bit 2 X Spd indicates the position regulator output at the low limit Bit 3 X Spd HLim indicates the position regulator output is at the high limit Bit 4 PtPtRRef Act TBD Bit 5 XOffRRef Act TBD e Bit 7 Regulator On indicates position regulator is active e Bit 8 Posit Watch1 indicates Position Watch 1 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint from the proper direction e Bit 9 Posit Watch2 indicates Position Watch 2 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint from the proper direction e Bit 10 In Position indicates Par 769 Position Error is within the position deadband specified by Par 782 In Posit BW e Bit 13 HomeRequired Set when the Find Home bit is set in Par 740 Position Control and the drive is waiting on a Start command e Bit 14 Homing Set when the drive is running the Homing Sequence e Bit 15 Set when the Homing Sequence has completed Note Bits 13 15 were added for future use not active for use with firmware ver
176. BitSwap 2A Data 800 Anlg Ini Data 836 Out Zero 830 Dig In6 Sel 851 Dig Out2 Data 866 BitSwap 2A Bit 1093 Anlg In1LossCnfg 837 Out Value 824 Local Status 852 Dig Out2 Bit 867 BitSwap 2B Data 809 Anlg In2 Offset 838 Anlg Out2 Sel 853 Dig Out2 On Time 868 BitSwap 2B Bit 807 In2 Value 839 Anlg Out2 Dint 854 Dig Out2 OffTime 869 BitSwap 2 Result 808 In2 Scale 840 Anlg Out2 Real 855 Out3 Sel 870 BitSwap Data 810 Al2Filt Gain 841 Out2 Offset 856 Out3 Data 871 Bit 811 Anlg In2 Filt BW 842 Out2 Scale 857 Out Bit 872 JBitSwap Data 806 In2 Data 843 Out2 Zero 858 Rly Out3 On Time 873 BitSwap Bit 1094 Anlg In2LossCnfg 844 Anlg Out2 Value 859 Out3 OffTime 874 BitSwap 3 Result 815 Anlg In3 Offset 824 Local I O Status 875 BitSwap 4A Data 813 Anlg In3 Value 876 BitSwap 4A Bit 814 Anlg In3 Scale 877 BitSwap 4B Data 816 AI3Filt Gain 878 BitSwap 4B Bit 817 Anlg In3 Filt BW 879 BitSwap 4 Result 812 In3 Data 880 BitSwap 5A Data 1095 Anlg In3LossCnfg 881 BitSwap 5A Bit 882 BitSwap 5B Data 883 BitSwap 5B Bit 884 BitSwap 5 Result 885 BitSwap 6A Data 886 BitSwap 6A Bit 887 BitSwap 6B Data 888 BitSwap 6B Bit 889 BitSwap 6 Result 3 14 Programming and Parameters Ontro _ Tert Param amp Config Select Switches 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 101
177. Block 1 See Par 1061 Logic Config Min Max 32 bits of data Boolean 1064 Logic 1 Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1063 Logic 1A Data for the first input to Logic Block 1 Min Max 31 32 Integer Note To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 1065 Logic 1B Data Default 0 V RW 32 bit Selects the data word for the second input to Logic Block 1 See Par 1061 Logic Config Min Max 32 bits of data Boolean 1066 Logic 1B Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1065 Logic 1B Data for the second input to Logic Block 1 Min Max 31 32 Integer Note To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 1067 Logic 2A Data Default 0 RW 32 bit Selects the data word for the first input to Logic Block 2 See Par 1061 Logic Config Min Max 32 bits of data Boolean 1068 Logic 2A Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1067 Logic 2A Data for the first input to Logic Block 2 Min Max 31 32 Integer Note To invert the selected input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 1069 Logic 2B Data Default 0 V RW 32 bit Selects the data word for the second input to Logic Block 2 See Par 1061 Logic Config _ Min Max 32 bits of data Boolean 1070 Logic 2B Bit Default 0 RW 16 bit Selects the bit of Par 1069 Logic 2B Data for the second input to Logic Block 2 Min Max 31 32 Integer Note To invert the sele
178. By HIM HIM Direction Button Enabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied or command signal Enabled No Has no effect on motor direction Direction determined by sign of Par 40 Selected Spd Ref Disabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit Disabled No Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit In either Bipolar or Unipolar mode the selected direction can be determined from the sign of Par 41 Limited Spd Ref Positive values indicate forward rotation and negative values indicate reverse rotation 1 SRefLdLg En the Speed Reference Lead Lag Filter 2 SErrFilt1 Stg Setting this bit will configure the speed error filter as a single first order low pass filter Clearing this bit will configure the speed error filter as two cascaded first order low pass filters 3 Flying Start Enables disables the function which reconnects to a spinning motor at actual RPM when a start command is issued 4 Jog in Torq Overrides Par 110 Speed TorqueMode setting when a jog command is received 5 Jog NoRamp the Speed Reference Ramp and S Curve 6 Trq StopRamp Overrides Par 110 Speed TorqueMode setting when stopping 7 Trq DsbIZSpd Configures how the drive uses stop dwell time 8 3WireControl Configures the drive for 3 wire control 10 Changes direction of the motor rotation
179. DIR X GN E DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder COS 12 RU WHIGN amp DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 Os GN SOX OR N POWER Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 DIET WHIGN WHOR COMMON Linear Sensor CLOCKt 9 L BU BU TS Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 WHIBU y WHBU 5 Ts Figure Rotary Encoder connections for MPL A5xx and MPL Bxxx motors or 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motors with 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable MDI Feedback Option Board _ WHIGY A ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 SIN Rotary Encoder POWER 16 DIE OF KWH REFSIN Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 i mE cos Rotary Encoder SIN 14 0 BK WHRD REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 18 DI WERD E DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder 4COS 12 o 80 xX E gt F DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 gt POWER Rotary Encoder DATA 95485 10 Ha XOX WWOY COMMON Linear Sensor 9 001 Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 001 5 TS Linear Sensor DATAt 7 Linear Sensor DATA 6 D Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 DL Note Thermal Switch cannot be accessed usin
180. Dint 149 FW FunctionsActl 824 Local I O Status 382 Lim Cnfg 164 StopOper TP Data 213 PkDtct1 In Real 146 FW TaskTime Sel 320 Exception Event1 381 PreChrg Err Cnfg 329 Fault TP Sel 214 PeakDtct Preset 148 FW TaskTime Actl 321 Exception Event2 393 BusUndervoltCnfg 330 Fault TP Data 215 Out 322 Exception Event3 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg 77 Ref TP Sel 216 PkDtct2 In Dint 326 Alarm Status 1 376 nv OL Pend Cnfg 78 Spd Ref TP RPM 217 PkDtct2 In Real 327 Alarm Status 2 377 Inv OL Trip 79 Spd Ref TP Data 218 PeakDtct2 Preset 328 Alarm Status 3 372 Mtr OL Pend Cnfg 108 Spd Reg TP Sel 219 PeakDetect2 Out 323 Fault Status 1 371 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg 109 Spd Reg TP Data 324 Fault Status 2 375 Inv OT Pend Cnfg 347 Drive OL TP Sel 325 Fault Status 3 369 Brake OL Cnfg 348 Drive OL TP Data 331 LstFaultStopMode 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 130 Ref TP Sel 313 Heatsink Temp 366 Fdbk LsCnfg 131 Ref TP Data 345 Drive OL JnctTmp 367 Fdbk LsCnfgPosit 357 Curr Ref TP Sel 346 Drive OL Status 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg 358 Curr Ref TP Data Trending 316 SynchLink Status 392 NetLoss Cnfg 418 Brake TP Sel 902 SL Error Status 383 SL CommLoss Data 419 Brake TP Data 556 Trend Control 903 SL Error History 384 SLCommLossCnfg 178 PI TP Sel 337 Trend Status 518 Diag Status 390 SL MultErr Cnfg 179 PITP Data 958 Trend State 519 MC Diag Done 385 LgxCommLossData 737 Posit TP Select 559 Trend Rate 463 MC Diag Error 1 386 LgxOutOfRunCnfg
181. Dir Data Rx02 931 Spd Ref Bypass 37 SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk 708 SL Dir Data Rx03 932 Spd Ref Bypass2 48 Start Acc Boost 527 SL Dir Data Tx00 965 Spd Ref TP Data 79 Start Inhibits 156 SL Dir Data Tx01 966 Spd Ref TP RPM 78 Start Mask 671 SL Dir Data Tx02 967 Spd Ref TP Sel 77 Start Owner 678 SL Dir Data Tx03 968 Spd Divide 11 Start Acc Boost 527 SL Error History 903 Spd Ref2 Multi 13 Startup State 452 SL Error Status 902 Spd Reg BW 90 Stator Frequency 526 SL Mult A In 924 Spd Reg Damping 91 Statorlnductance 490 SL Mult B In 925 Spd Reg Droop 86 StatorResistance 491 SL Mult Base 923 Spd Reg Gain 82 Steg amp Heidn TPDta 262 SL Mult Out 926 Spd Reg Neg Lim 103 Steg amp Heidn TPSel 261 SL Mult State 927 Spd Reg P Gain 81 Cnfg 259 SL MultErr Cnfg 390 Spd Reg PI Out 302 Stegmanno Status 260 SL Node Cnfg 904 Spd Reg Pos Lim 102 Stop Dwell Time 154 SL Rcv Events 915 Spd Reg TP Data 109 Stop Oper TP Sel 163 SL Real2Dint In 921 Spd Reg TP Sel 108 Stop Owner 677 SL Real2DInt Out 922 SpdFdbkSmoothing 220 StopOper TP Data 164 SL Rx CommFormat 905 SpdRef SpdTrm1 47 STrim2 Filt Gain 25 SL Rx DirectSelo 906 SpdRef Filt BW 36 Swtch Dint 1 NC 1026 SL Rx DirectSel1 907 SpdRef Filt Gain 35 Swtch Dint 1 NO 1027 SL Rx DirectSel2 908 SpdReg AntiBckup 84 Swtch Dint 1 Out 1028 SL Rx DirectSel3 909 SpdReg Integ Out 101 Swtch Real 1 NC 1023 SL Rx Regis 917 SpdReg P Gain Mx 92 Swtch Real 1 NO 1024 SL Rx P1 Regis 918 SpdTrim 3 Scale 24 Swtch Real 1 Out
182. En Enables the System Inertia test 31 Ids Test Enable Enables the flux producing d axis current test for the Field Oriented Control FOC encoder mode 3 27 Programming and Parameters No 154 155 156 14 At Setpt Spd 171 Start Inhibits 8 3 Name 5758 Description Values 22 2 Stop Dwell Time Units Sec 4 Real Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and _ Default 0 0000 torque regulators when responding to a stop command For more information please see 0 0000 10 0000 Stop Dwell Time on page C 7 Important Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter Logic Status Displays the status condition of the drive Options 9 2 oo 2222 822 23 8 8lelZ s3 2 g 8 B S 555 Ble jx jx 5 8 2 2 8 8 8 S 2 8 885 91818 Gale 2 2 9 0 2 15161 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Jo 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 O False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 131 109 807 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ie Bit Name Current Function Bit Current Function 0 Active Drive is controlling motor 15 Enable On 1 Running Run co
183. Ext Spd Ref 783 Posit Dwell 757 Abs Posit Offset 794 Xsync Out 3 729 PLL Ext SpdScale 762 Position Fdbk 795 Xsync Out 3 Dly 730 PLLLPFilter BW 763 Position Actual 731 PLL Posit Out 769 Position Error 732 PLL Posit OutAdv 796 Posit Gear Ratio 733 FiltPositOut 768 PositReg P Gain 734 PLL Speed Out 7 761 Pt Pt Filt BW i 735 PLL SpeedOut Adv Interp Direct 759 Pt Pt Accel Time anh n 760 X PtPt Decel Time 684 otnUpdatePerio 748 GoarsoF osit Trot 775 XReg Spd LoLim 685 CoarseMulti 750 Coarse Spd Trgt m interp Position 776 XReg Spd HiLim 686 Config 751 Interp Speed 778 X Notch Attenu 687 Motn Axis Status 752 Interp AccelRate 779 X Notch FiltFreq 688 AxisControl 693 Interp Syncinput 318 Posit Spd Output 689 Axis Resp 5 797 Step 690 Cnct Status Homing 798 BasicIndx P 691 EventStat 745 PositRef EGR Mul eee ee 1120 Home Accel Time i 799 Basiclndx Output 692 Motn Event Ctrl 746 PositRef EGR Div 1121 Home Decel Time i 1130 PPMP Pos Command 694 Mx Pos 744 PositRef EGR Out 1122 Home Speed i 1131 PPMP Pos Mul 695 Mx Neg 757 Abs Posit Offset 1124 Actual Pos 753 Posit Offset 1 1132 PPMP Pos Div 696 PositErrTol 1123 Home Position 5 1133 PPMP Scaled 697 MotnPositLockTol 754 Posit Offset 2 755 Posit Offset Spd 1134 PPMP Control 698 Motn Posit Cmmd 756 Spd
184. IN04 L 916 60 7 84 QOL ooz Or 2 091 6 0 1ING0c esnJ eis 5 4 5955 UINL 340 Jo ZH JequinN uuewssng dwa Md E 6 9 4 uon2ejoJd 1ndu HOA 226 30 Supplemental Information List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings Motor Type 200 STD Motor 200 SVO Motor 400 STD Motor Motor Base Speed Voltage Rate Current Current 002 Kg kW Catalog Poles RPM Vrms Arms Arms m 1 5 51027 4 1500 180 7 5 0 024 2 2 51028 4 1500 180 11 0 045 37 51001 4 1500 180 18 0 066 37 51007 1 4 1500 180 18 0 066 5 5 51002 4 1500 180 25 0 12 5 5 51008 1 4 1500 180 25 0 12 7 5 51003 4 1500 180 33 0 15 7 5 M 51009 1 4 1500 180 33 0 15 11 M 51004 4 1500 180 47 0 32 11 M 51010 1 4 1500 180 47 0 32 15 M 51005 4 1500 180 63 0 43 15 M 51011 1 4 1500 180 63 0 43 18 5 M 51012 4 1500 180 81 0 71 18 5 M 51012 1 4 1500 180 81 0 71 22 M 51013 4 1500 180 95 0 82 22 M 51013 1 4 1500 180 95 0 82 30 M 51050 4 1500 155 145 0 83 37 M 51051 4 1500 155 183 1 1 45 M 51052 4 1500 155 220 14 55 51053 4 1500 155 265 2 75 51054 4 1500 155 346 2 7 0 75 M 51043 4 1500 1
185. If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur Trend Trig Data This is the logic input for the Trend Trigger Function A trigger will occur on the rise of the specified bit in this word The bit will be specified by Par 565 Trend Trig Bit Trend Trig Bit Specifies the bit in Par 564 Trend Trig Data that will cause a Trend Trigger to occur Positive numbers specify rising edges and negative numbers specify falling edges Trend PreSamples Specifies the number pre trigger samples in the trend buffer Pre trigger samples are the samples that occur before the trigger and remain in the buffer The remainder of the trend buffer will contain post trigger samples Trend Mark Dint Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using integer data The Trend Marker can be used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function Trend Mark Real Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using real data The Trend Marker can be used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function TrendBuffPointer Selects the trend buffer element to be displayed in the Trend Output Parameters when the trend function is inactive not collecting data samples A zero value points to the element that corresponds to the trigger event Negative values point to pre trigger data Positive values point to post trigger data When the Auto Output function is running this parameter will automatically sequence through i
186. JAN SN 104 401091019 serjddns yeu pore 9 y ezis uonoejoud 2 eouesinu serjddns yey payes 15 ezis syd sed 2 086 sud edz 5401902 00 sudiedz 2128 000 0061 64990 1 0061 sud 199 1 098 49 199 i 849190 1 058 0 11 9 6 099 999 e 956 540 2 060 49 1902 006 sudiedz 008 sudied 2 006 2128 0051 0012 84098 0012 sud 190 0001 sud 49d 0091 849 2 9 1 0001 9601 08 oez 98 0 z 09 0000 syd 069 sudjedz 54060 2 069 54090 2 8592 008 0021 59 198 002 syd 1 092 54 1 0081 59190 097 5901 988 068 766 0 SI sud 2 066 sud 2 1 2 00 sudiedz 8592 000 006 548 198 0061 4929 098 sudued 1 00 8490 098 Z90 61 099 999 992 0599006 sud ed 2 06 50 062 54000 2 065 540 190 2 098 0299 007 009 549 198 oog 540 00 548 OOLL 5890 00 996 084 059 ves 0 092 d sud sed Z ggg sud uedz Gye 54090 2 009 sudiedz gc 0299 008 00 1 548 198 0041 34929 1 09 349 299 0061 54899 06 996 679 069 769 0 06599006 269 009 00 1 0021 099
187. M20 4 1500 280 42 22 MC M20 4 1500 280 58 5 22 MC M20 4 1500 280 58 5 30 MC M20 6 1000 280 88 37 MC M20 6 1000 280 125 07 Manufacturer Reliance Electric Japan catalog number for ordering Auxiliary Power Supply Drive Frame Size to HP kW The following are manufacturers of Auxiliary Power Supplies for 300V DC Ratings Cross Reference Manufacturer Part Frame Size Manufacturer Number All Allen Bradley 24V Input 20 24V AUX1 Drive Input all voltage classes Refer to the PowerFlex 700S Auxiliary Control Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 20D INO21 for more information 14 Phoenix Contact 24V Input 29 49 826 230V Input 29 49 813 1 6 Acopian U300Y20 Table A A PowerFlex 700S Drives with AC Input 208 240 400V 480V 600V 690V ND ND JHD ND JHD HD HD JHD Frame kW HP kw NDHPIHP _ T 075 055 10 075 075 055 075 M 075 is ma go qus qns qa 15 22 ile 20 2 3 2 40 30 50 30 40 3 0 6 3 5 3 GS JN qwe y bs Ju w Ts 95 75 110 75 11 75 15 10 15 10 22 18 5 30 25 30 22 40 30 55 45 5 60 75 60 45 37 5 37 30 50 40 55 45 100 75 100 75 55 45 75 55 90 75 55 45 75 60 90 75 150 125 0150 1125 132 110 66 55 100 75 110 90 200 4150 l
188. MPG B010 031 460 1 6 162 7 2440 0 34 8 44 1 33 6450 MPG B010 091 460 0 7 357 3 5360 0 23 8 15 0 41 6450 MPG B025 031 460 4 0 219 0 2190 0 92 12 11 3 4 02 4838 MPG B025 091 460 1 9 175 0 1750 0 54 12 5 2 2 95 5900 050 031 460 16 3 92 0 920 1 20 12 32 5 12 40 2510 MPG B050 091 460 3 4 290 0 2900 0 79 12 9 9 2 60 4560 110 031 460 12 9 112 0 1120 2 00 12 31 1 17 00 2420 110 091 460 10 6 184 0 1840 1 60 12 20 5 8 30 3500 1326AB B410G 460 2 5 118 0 3540 1 00 4 74 2 70 5000 1326AB B410J 460 3 5 165 0 4950 1 40 4 10 4 270 7250 1326 420 460 2 8 70 0 2100 1 10 4 8 5 5 00 3000 1326 420 460 55 137 3 4120 2 20 4 15 6 5 10 6000 1326AB B430E 460 3 9 67 7 2030 1 40 4 11 7 6 60 3000 1326AB B430G 460 5 6 114 3 3430 2 30 4 16 8 6 40 5000 1326AB B515E 460 6 1 70 3 2110 2 30 4 18 3 10 40 3000 1326AB B515G 460 9 5 88 7 2660 2 90 4 28 5 10 40 5000 1326AB B520E 460 6 7 71 0 2130 2 90 4 20 1 13 00 3000 1326AB B520F 460 8 8 70 3 2110 2 90 4 26 4 13 10 3500 1326AB B530E 460 9 5 743 2230 4 20 4 28 5 18 00 3000 1326AB B720E 460 17 5 70 0 2100 6 80 4 52 5 30 90 3500 1326 720 460 27 5 117 0 3510 11 70 4 66 5 31 80 5000 1326AB B730E 460 22 8 78 3 2350 9 60 4 66 5 39 00 3350 1326AB B740C 460 20 9 52 3 1570 8 70 4 62 7 53 00 2200 1326AB B740E 460 32 0 79 7 2390 12 70 4 66 5 50 80 3400 1326AS B310H 460 0 8 204 5 4090 0 30 6 24 0 70 6200 1326AS B330H 460 2 1 204 5 4090 0 90 6 6 0 2 10 6500 1326AS B420G 460 2 6 179 0 3580 1 20 6 7 8 3
189. Max 2200000000 0000 Real 1 On is high this input is updated to Par 1025 Swtch Real 1 Output Swtch Real 1 Out Default 0 0000 RO Real This is the result of the Real switch The output is loaded with the selected input based on Par Min Max 2200000000 0000 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 5 SW Real 1 On If this parameter does not update check the setting of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable bit 1 User Params Swtch Dint 1 NC Default 0 0000 RW 32 bit This is the Normally Closed input to the DInt switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit6 Min Max 2200000000 0000 Integer SW Dint 1 On is low this input is updated to Par 1028 Swtch DInt 1 Output Swtch Dint 1 NO Default 0 0000 V RW 32 bit This is the Normally Open input to the Real switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 6 SW Min Max 2200000000 0000 Integer DInt 1 On is high this input is updated to Par 1028 Swtch Dint 1 Output Swtch Dint 1 Out Default 0 0000 32 bit This is the result of the switch The output is loaded with the selected input based on Par 1022 Min Max 2200000000 0000 Integer Sel Switch Ctrl bit 6 SW Dint 1 On If this parameter does not update check the setting of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable bit 1 User Params Sel Swtch In00 Default 0 0000 V IRW Real t Min Max 2200000000 0000 0 Sel Swtch In15 Set these values for the inputs to the selector switch specified Pa
190. Max Programming and Parameters Bit 2 HS OverTemp indicates heatsink temperature is above 105C for ratings 1 1 11 0A 115C for 14 34A 100C for 40 52A Bit 3 HS Pending indicates heatsink temperature is above 95C for ratings 1 1 11A 105C for 14 34A 90C for 40 52 Bit 4 IT Trip indicates the drive has exceed the 3 second rating of either the 150 normal duty rating or 200 of the heavy duty rating Zero Zero fAbslsCurr fAbslqCurr OL m fOL_g fOL intg intg 10 flnvOLClim 11 12 IJunTmprMax 13 4605 14 fe sAmp 15 f8sPUCur 16 f8sAmp 17 fRatiolnvMtr 18 fRatioMtrinv 19 iConvertStat 20 flgbtThres 21 flgbtSlope 22 flgbtEnergy 23 flgbtJuncase 0 0000 2200000000 0000 PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu U 0000 0000 8 0000 U 1 0000 0 0000 8 0000 O gt Sec 1000 0000 5 0000 10000 0000 P U 0 0000 8 0000 pu PU 1 5000 0 0000 Calculated Linkable Read Write Data Type Bit 7 Jnc Over Temp indicates the junction temperature has exceeded the maximum temperature for the power semiconductor device 24 flgbtWatts 25 ilgbtPerMod 26 fFdThres 27 fFdSlope 28 fFdJunCase 29 fFdWatts 30 fMaxH
191. Motn Event Ctrl 3 84 Updated Parameter 554 LED Status to include a description 3 77 Updated the description for bit 7 AbsoluteMode of parameter 740 Position Control 3 89 Updated the description for bit 0 Absolute of parameter 1134 PPMP Control 3 113 Updated fault 33 15volt Power to new voltage band settings 4 8 Added new event 86 Drive Homing 4 11 Added new event 93 12volt Power Alarm 4 11 Updated the Specifications table for C tick Agency Certification drive sound levels and encoder A 1 voltage supply data Updated the Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings tables Updated wiring diagram for Rotary Encoder connections H 4 Added new Appendix for ATEX approved PowerFlex 700 Phase II Drives in Group II Category 2 J 1 applications with ATEX approved motors soc 3 This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control User Manual publication 20D UM0O06 since the August 2005 release Change The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 3 01 49 50 54 119 120 341 368 533 551 552 553 554 669 712 718 714 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 Selected SpdRefA Selected SpdRefB Inertia TrgLpfBW SLAT ErrorSetpnt SLAT Dwell Time Mtr 12T Count Cnv NotLogin Cfg SlewRateTimeLimt CurrFdbk AdjTime Slip Preload Val Slip Slew Rate LED Status W
192. Motor Posit Est 250 FB Opt0 Posit 224 TachSwitch Level 231 Spd Fdbk 228 MtrSpd Simulated 253 FB Spd Fdbk 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 230 EncdrO Position 229 MtrPosit Simulat 252 FB Posit 762 Position Fdbk 242 259 Stegmanno 73 Spd Fdbk Scale 241 Encdr1 Spd Fdbk 260 Status 72 Scaled Spd Fdbk 240 Encdr1 Position 263 HeidenhainO 236 Enc0 1 RegisCnfg 264 HeidenhainO Stat 237 0 1 RegisCtrl 265 Heidn Mkr Offset 238 Enc0 1 RegisStat 266 Heidn Encdr Type 235 RegisLtch 267 Heidn Encdr PPR 239 Encdr1 RegisLtch 268 Resolver0 Cnfg 269 Resolver Status 277 Reslvr0 Type Sel 272 Reslvr0 SpdRatio 273 Reslvr0 Carrier 274 Reslvr0 In Volts 275 Rslvr0 XfrmRatio 276 Reslvr0 CableBal 254 Opt0 1 RegisCnfg 255 Opt0 1 RegisCtrl 256 Opt0 1 RegisStat 257 Opt 0 Regis Ltch 258 Opt 1 Regis Ltch 286 Linear1 Status 289 Lint Update Rate 290 Linear CPR 285 Linear1 Config 291 Lin1 Stahl Status 1155 Heidn VM Pos Ref 1156 Heidn VM Enc PPR Programming and Parameters Drive Memory Diagnostics Fault Alm Config Test Points Peak Detection 196 ParamAccessLevel 155 Logic Status 379 Ext FIt Alm Cnfg 161 Logic TP Sel 210 PeakDtct Ctrl In 145 ApplicationGroup 156 Start Inhibits 374 Motor Stall Onfg 162 Logic TP Data 211 PeakDtct Status 147 FW Functions En 304 Limit Status 373 Motor Stall Time 163 Stop Oper TP Sel 212 PkDtcti In
193. Mult Oflow 40 HiHp In PhaseLs 65 Stahl Optics 88 HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 VoltageFdbk Loss 43 HiHP PwrBd Otemp 25 VPL MC Comm 28 42 2 HiHp PwrBd PrcEr Vref Decel Fail Appendix A Supplemental Information Chapter Objectives For Information on See Page Specifications 1 DPI Communication Configurations A 5 Output Devices 7 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings 7 List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings A 30 Auxiliary Power Supply 31 Drive Frame Size to HP kW Ratings Cross Reference A 31 Approximate Dimensions A 33 Specifications Specification Category Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only Frames 9 amp up Protection 600V 600V 690V frames frames 200 208V 240 380 400V 480V 0 4 5 amp 6 380 400V 480V 500V 600V 690V AC Input Overvoltage Trip 300VAC 300VAC 600VAC 600VAC 863VAC 863VAC 675VAC 675V AC 675 AC 889VAC 889 Bus Overvoltage Trip 405VDC 405VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1164VDC 1164VDC 911VDC 911VDC 911VDC 1200VDC 1200VDC Bus Undervoltage Trip Adjustable Adjustable Nominal Bus Voltage 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC 931VDC 540VDC 648VDC 645VDC 810 981VDC All Drives Heat Sink Thermistor Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Softwa
194. NOP jo sune eur sueis s eyeqeied A009 20 uo BSN 104 TIN JON LE A009 10 08 CHOC 10 BAM Orc eyed 10 BAM 802 104 10 3 ed L 5 jenue di JOU y yeu eui 0 19 zuana eu pinoys jueuno ejqejsn pe ui or ugang v4 JOJOW Jo 62 SI ezis WNWIUIL DAN SN 104 Jexeeiq duy snoeuejuelsul 10399014 11211 4010 Uonej ejsui 10 uesouo eq JSNW ezis OFAN SN Aq Bunes uwous WI JOJOW 10 621 1 azis WNWIUIW 93N SN 104 euin Jexeeg lt 6 JOJOW jo 9 1 ezis QIN SN 104 serjddns jeu payed ezis eouesinu uomoejoud serjddns yey 1990 S 9215 z 0 SI SOA eseui eunyejeduie jueiquie eu esiwueujo siy je parowa eq
195. Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 514 Test Mode Config Configures the Motor Control MC test mode Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Options Be 8 5 l l lololo 5 2 eje gej fo c a Default 0 0 j0 0 j o 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 49 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 515 FVC Tune Config Configures FOC tuning mode Bit 1 FluxCurrTune when set the value in Par 488 Flux Current is used as the flux current at the beginning of the magnetic inductance test When this bit is not set default an automatically calculated preset flux current is used as the flux current at the beginning of the magnetic inductance test e 2 NoTimeLimit when set the time limit fault detection during the magnetizing inductance test is disabled Bits 1 and 2 were added for firmware version 4 001 ATTENTION Do not modi
196. Producing Voltage Vqs regulator input becomes Min Max 32767 Integer active When the error level reaches the value specified in this parameter and the error count condition specified in Par 589 Err Count Lmt is met the drive control will transition from the slew rate limit mode to normal operation of the Vqs regulator Notes This value should not be changed This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 Programming and Parameters 3 01 5 8 5 S gs No Description Values 525 589 Count Lmt Default 0 RW 16 bit Defines the control loop counts limit where the counter counts up if the error level ofthe Min Max 32767 Integer Vqs regulator input is equal to the error level during Flux Producing Current Ids command Slew Rate operation When the counter exceeds the value of this parameter then the normal Vqs regulator operation becomes active The same limit of control loop counts is applied to the Slip Slew Rate operation where the counter counts up if the error level of the Slip regulator input is equal to the error level during Slip Slew Rate operation When the counter exceeds the value of this parameter then the normal Slip regulator operation becomes active Notes This value should not be changed This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 590 RsTempCoefAdjust Default 0 RW 16 bit The value specified in this parameter adjusts the temperature compensation coefficient
197. RS 485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory 2 PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Wiring the Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder Table F A Supported Stegmann Encoders Model SINCOS SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 and SCM 70 Resolution 512 sine cycles per revolution Comment SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SCS KIT 101 and SCM KIT 101 1024 sine cycles per revolution SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS 50 SRS 60 SRM 50 and SRM 60 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRM 50 and SRM 60 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS M 25 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built in mechanical turns counter IP65 Protection Class Size 25 square flange mounting SINCOS SRS660 1024 sine cycles per revolution Hollow shaft up to 14 mm diameter SINCOS SHS 170 512 sine cycles per revolution While the software supports this encoder the SHS 170 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply SINCOS SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc Terminal block P1 contains connection points for a Stegmann Hiperface encoder This terminal block resides on the Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option card Hiperface is a registered trademark of Stegmann Inc
198. Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Real Programming and Parameters 3 95 No 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 Name Description Anlg In2 Data Displays the scaled final value for Analog Input 2 Anlg In2 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 may be configured for voltage or current input signal For proper selection of the input signal the DIP switch S 5 and Par 821 Analog Units must be set to match Par 807 Anlg In2 Value is multiplied by Par 808 Anlg In2 Scale produce the input to the lead lag filter function Type of Input Configurable Voltage or Current Polarity Bi Polar Resolution 14 bit 8191 to 8191 DIP Switch Analog I O Units Al 2 Voltage 55 1 Open Par 821 Bit 1 0 False Al 2 Current 55 1 Closed Par 821 Bit 1 1 True Anlg In2 Scale Scales the range of Analog Input 2 to the range of Par 806 Anlg In2 Data Enter the units you want per volt or mA For example If Par 807 Anlg In2 Value 0 10V and you enter 6 in this parameter Par 806 Anlg In2 Data will equal 0 60V Par 807 Par 808 Par 806 Anlg In2 Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 2 Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create an offset to the actual input The output of the A D converter is summed with this par
199. Run Boost 137 Skip Speed 2 364 Kd Current Limit 529 Break Voltage e 138 Skip Speed 3 471 Estimated Torque 530 Break Frequency e 139 Skip Speed Band 473 MC TP2 Select 531 Maximum Voltage 170 Flying StartGain 474 MC TP2 Value 532 Maximum Freq e 263 Cnfg 475 MC FaultTPSelect 541 SrLss Angl Comp e 264 Heidenhain0 Stat 476 MC FaultTP Value 542 SrLss Volt Comp e 265 Heidn Mkr Offset 478 VPL Mem Password 545 Reg Ki 266 Heidn Encdr Type 479 VPL Mem Address 546 Bus Reg Kp e 267 Heidn Encdr PPR 480 VPL Mem Data Int 547 Bus Reg Kd e 285 Lineari Config 481 VPL Mem Data 548 Reg ACR 296 Motor Freq Ref 482 VVPL Mem Data Bit The following parameters were updated for firmware versions 2 03 and 2 04 153 Control Options 347 Drive OL TP Sel 830 Dig In6 Sel e 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel 466 MC TP1 Select 905 SL Rx CommFormat e 266 Heidn Encdr Type 787 Xsync Gen Period 906 SL Rx DirectSel0 e 268 Resolver 825 Dig In1 Sel 907 SL Rx DirectSel1 e 272 Reslvw0O SpdRatio 826 Dig In2 Sel 908 SL Rx DirectSel2 e 316 SynchLink Status 827 Dig In3 Sel 909 SL Rx DirectSel2 e 322 Exception Event3 828 Dig In4 Sel 1000 UserFunct Enable e 328 Alarm Status 3 829 Dig In5 Sel Added new fault codes and descriptions actions 4 5 Specifications Table and Recommended Protection Devices tables updated 1 amp
200. S Curve Time 34 SL Buf Data Rx07 941 Preset Speed 7 20 Save To UserSet 199 SL Buf Data Rx08 942 Pt Pt Accel Time 759 Saved Events 436 SL Buf Data Rx09 943 Pt Pt Decel Time 760 Scaled Spd Fdbk 72 SL Buf Data Rx10 944 Pt Pt Filt BW 761 Scaled Spd Ref 46 SL Buf Data Rx11 945 Pt Pt Posit Ref 758 Sel Switch Ctrl 1022 SL Buf Data Rx12 946 PWM Frequency 402 Sel Swtch In00 1029 SL Buf Data Rx13 947 Pwr Strct Mode 420 Sel Swtch In01 1030 SL Buf Data Rx14 948 Ramped Spd Ref 43 Sel Swtch In02 1031 SL Buf Data Rx15 949 RatCalc BldUpRec 1084 Sel Swtch In03 1032 SL Buf Data Rx16 950 RatCalc Build Up 1083 Sel Swtch In04 1033 SL Buf Data Rx17 951 RatCalc Filter 1082 Sel Swtch In05 1034 SL Buf Data Rx18 952 RatCalc Inertia 1085 Sel Swtch In06 1035 SL Buf Data Rx19 953 RatCalc MinSpeed 1079 Sel Swtch In07 1036 SL Buf Data Rx20 954 RatCalc Mx BldUp 1078 Sel Swtch In08 1037 SL Buf Data Rx21 955 RatCalc RateLim 1080 Sel Swtch In09 1038 SL Buf Data Rx22 956 RatCalc ResetVal 1077 Sel Swtch In10 1039 SL Buf Data Rx23 957 Rated Amps 400 Sel Swtch In11 1040 SL Buf Data Rx24 958 Rated Slip Freq 486 Sel Swtch In12 1041 SL Buf Data Rx25 959 Rated Volts 401 Sel Swtch In13 1042 SL Buf Data Rx26 960 RatioCalc Status 1076 Sel Swtch In14 1043 SL Buf Data Rx27 961 RatioCalcControl 1075 Sel Swtch In15 1044 SL Buf Data Rx28 962 Real2DiInt In 1050 Selected Spd Ref 40 SL Buf Data Rx29 963 Real2DInt Result 1052 Selected SpdRefA 49 SL Buf Data Tx00 970 Real2DInt Scale 1051 Selected SpdRefB 5
201. She 95 vl 651 0 c 051 080 009 008 Gee 092 Scc She 281 0 1 79 081 6 041306 sHeM XEN gj XE i UN XEN yun se 3009 sduy 9 2 GN 55071 14012 1014 4042019 asny ej q asny Aejaq suey S SREM 100 qnoi indu WMd dH LL 6 4 uonoejoJd Dy HOA 009 Supplemental Information A 18 ere v3 1010W Jo 951 1 ezis WNWIUIL JFN SN 104 jexeeiq dy snoeuejuejsul 10 2901d JOJON 10 uesouo eq JSNW 215 19eX3 SN Bugei uwous sDugeg v1 1010W jo 1 ezis QIN SN 104 euin Iexeejg PNOO UMOYS v7 JO OW Jo S ezis SN 104 yey pere 1 SI 9215 dAL WAN Buidduy eouesinu uoroejoud serjddns yey 99 N perddns joeuuoosip pue sasn4 pojeJ ezis uonoeyoud
202. Spd Ref 103 Spd Reg Neg Lim 21 Speed Trim 1 95 SRegOut FiltGain 47 SpdRef SpdTrm1 96 SReg Out Filt BW 56 Inertia SpeedRef 302 Spd Reg PI Out 9 Total Inertia 57 InertiaAccelGain 58 InertiaDecelGain 60 DeltaSpeedScale 55 Speed Comp 59 Inertia Trq Add 64 FricComp Spd Ref 65 FricComp Setup 1160 VirtEncPositFast 66 FricComp Stick 67 FricComp Slip 68 FricComp Rated 69 FricComp Trq Add Torque Current 110 Speed TorqueMode 303 Motor Torque Ref 302 Spd Reg PI Out 309 Motor Flux 59 Inertia Trq Add 359 Motor Flux Est 69 FricComp Trq Add 360 Min Flux 111 Torque Ref 1 361 LpassFilt BW 112 Torque Ref1 Div 350 Iq Actual Ref 113 Torque Ref 2 351 Iq Ref Trim 114 Torque Ref2 Mult 308 Output Current 115 Torque Trim 343 OL OpnLp CurrLim 119 SLAT ErrorSetpnt 356 Mtr Current Lim 120 SLAT Dwell Time 362 Current Lmt Gain 319 Selected Trq Ref 352 Is Actual Lim 116 Torque Step 488 Flux Current 129 Atune Trq Ref 312 MotorFluxCurr FB 117 NotchAttenuation 345 Drive OL JnctTmp 118 Notch Filt Freq 313 Heatsink Temp 415 BusReg Brake Ref 346 Drive OL Status 401 Rated Volts 344 OL ClsLp CurrLim 306 DC Bus Voltage 353 Actual Lim 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 354 Iq Rate Limit 127 Mtring Power Lim 355 Iq Ref Limited 128 Regen Power Lim 305 Mtr Ref 353 Iq Actual Lim 125 Torque Pos Limit 126 Torque Neg Limit 123 Trq PosLim 124 Trq NegLim 303 Motor Torque Ref 132 Inert Adapt Sel
203. Sud sed 2 00 60211 00r 000 Sud 0008 Sud 00 Sud 0000 sud 124 OOF 9991 EELL 001 8501 099 0919906 Sud sed 2 OOLL Sud 2 OSS sud 13d 2 006 Sud 2 OSS 02901 0021 00vc syd 0000 sud 199 00 sud 198 008 sud Jad 1 0011 9271 0521 068 928 e 0 sud 1ed Z 0051 sud sed 2 009 sud Jed 2 0001 sud sed 2 009 07901 0021 0092 Sud Jad 0092 sud 199 0002 Sud 1ed 000Z sud Jed 0051 082 026 466 009 0669006 Sud 198 2 0901 Sud 2 006 sud 2 008 Sud 2 006 1066 002 0012 syd 1ed 0010 sud Jed 0001 sud Jed 0091 sud 1ed 0001 9601 0 7 SEZ 0 e 00 5 sud Jed 2 002 Sud sed 2 069 sud 1ed 2 006 syd sed 2 069 1006 002 Sud 190 00pZ sud 199 001 49 199 008 sud Jed 0011 0 cL 206 0 8 928 0S cl 0689406 SREM XEN 7 XEN WIN XEN UW 9ese 3009 sduy 2 231 aH QN m jequinN SS0 910128 0ld 19 ejog osnJ ej q jeng 8 SHEM WNI dwal WMd M enu 13 Z Seu 1 Dy 007 13 Supplemental Information LO0DS WOP uopeoiqnd eeg uen 10191014 JO OW WOY Upang eui jo 94 sueis s eyeq eled A009 20 uo ASN 104 PA
204. Transformer Tap Access The transformer is located behind the Power Terminal Block in the area shown in Figure 1 2 Gain access by releasing the terminal block from the rail To release terminal block and change tap 1 Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block 2 Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out Repeat for next block if desired 3 Select appropriate transformer tap 4 Replace block s in reverse order 1 12 Installation Wiring Important Common Bus DC Input Application Notes 1 If drives without internal precharge are used Frames 5 amp 6 only then precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against possible damage and disconnect switches Must Not be used between the input of the drive and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge device 2 If drives with internal precharge Frames 1 6 are used with a disconnect switch to the common bus then an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the drive The corresponding input parameter 825 830 must be set to Precharge Enable This provides the proper precharge interlock guarding against possible damage to the drive when connected to a common DC bus Table 1 C Power Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range Torque Terminal Bolt Size No Name Frame Descripti
205. Trend Min Max 2200000000 0000 Buffer 4 if bit 4 In 4 Real is set 584 Trend Out Dint Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the Min Max 2147483648 Integer value of the element in Trend Buffer 4 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 585 Trend Out4 Real Default 0 RO Real Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4 if the buffer is using real data This will equal the Min Max 2200000000 0000 value of the element in Trend Buffer 4 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 586 Slew Rate Units Sec RW Real Defines the slew rate for the torque producing voltage 5 regulator The output variation Default 5 000 is limited by one count every Par 586 16 sec Min Max 0 000 16 383 Notes This value should not be changed This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 587 SlipReg Err Lmt Default 0 RW 16 bit Detines the error level at which the slip regulator input becomes active When the error level Min Max 32767 Integer reaches the value specified in this parameter and the error count condition specified in Par 589 Err Count Lmt is met the drive control will transition from the slew rate limit mode to normal operation of the slip regulator Notes This value should not be changed This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 588 VqsReg Err Lmt Default 0 RW 16 bit Defines the error level at which the Flux
206. Write Data Type 211 PeakDtct Status Status of peak level detectors A peak detector sets its Change bit for one scan when it detects a peak The Change bit is off when set or when the Hold bit is on Options 2 5333353353336 Default 0 0 jo 0 0 0 0 0 J0 j0 0 O 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 True 212 PkDtcti In Dint Default 0 V RW 32 bit Integer input to the first peak level detector Min Max 2147483648 Integer 213 PkDtct In Real Default 0 0000 RW Real Floating point input to the first peak level detector Min Max 2200000000 0000 214 PeakDtct1 Preset Default 0 0000 4 Real The first detector in set or hold modes compares this value to its input for level detection Min Max 2200000000 0000 When the detector trips in set mode it transfers the value of this parameter to its output 215 PeakDetect1 Out Default 10 0000 RO Real Output from the first peak level detector Min Max 2200000000 0000 216 PkDtct2 In Dint Default 0 RW 32 bit Integer input to second peak level detector Min Max 2147483648 Integer 217 PkbDtct2 In Real Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Floating point input to second peak level detector Min Max 2200000000 0000 218 PeakDtct2 Preset Default 0 0
207. XW VIN sase woo sduy 2 291 GH jaquny 9201991014 eag esnj Aejaq Aejaq 5 1ua1n ejqejsn py 4010 WOYE 1012412 4010 119419 uil UON jueuig 3 jeng 1nding yduie WMd 9 Indu OY HOA Supplemental Information A 10 A009 40 A08 uo esn 10 IN ION PE A009 20 2 A08t eyed 10 OAM Orc eyed 10 BAM BOZ 40 TIN 19 10 4U09 10404 uomeurquio 3 ed L 5 ENUEN dui JOU eui eui 0 95 dij juano y e eu pinoys eBuej ejqejsnfpe Woy unang Unuixeu SHUEY W714 JOJOW JO 5 ezis DAN SN 104 Jaxealg duy snoeuejuejsul 1019 0Jd N3119 JOJOJA Uonej esui JO uesouo eq 18 ezis OFAN S N WI 2010 Jo 62 SI ezis WNWIUIW DAN SN 104 JexeeJq euin JexeeJg JO OW JO 6 1 SI ezis WNWIUIW JIN SN 104 serjddns yey ysoyBiy ayy 9215 unuixejy eouesinu
208. a adaptation 2 PMag Motor Value 1 Field Oriented Control 2 2 is induction motor control with temperature adaptation This option is used only for motors manufactured by Reliance Electric Japan Value 2 Permanent Magnet Motor Control Pmag Motor is permanent magnet motor operation e Value 3 V Hz is volts per hertz motor control e Value 4 Test is the test mode 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 Description Rated Slip Freq Displays the control slip frequency determined from Par 3 Motor NP Hertz and Par 4 Motor NP RPM Measured and updated by the autotune procedure Do not change this value Note Changed the attributes to allow changing this parameter while the drive is running for firmware version 3 01 Motor NTC Coef Defines a coefficient used to calculate the rotor temperature from the measured stator temperature Used only in Field Oriented Control 2 FOC2 mode See Par Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode Flux Current Specifies the magnetizing current that produces rated flux in the motor in a per unit percent representation Measured by the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Flx CurFdbk Id Displays flux producing d axis current feedback Statorinductance Displays the sum of the stator and cable inductances of the motor in per unit percent representatio
209. a first order filter whose time response is shaped specifically to provide an output that represents the actual speed of offset correction It may be used as a feed forward into speed reference to secure minimal position error during changes to offset Abs Posit Offset Provides an offset to absolute position Setting Par 740 Position Control bit 8 Xzero Preset presets Par 744 PositRef EGR Out Par 747 Position Cmmd Par 763 Position Actual and Par 765 Posit Actl Load with the value in Par 762 Position Fdbk minus Par 757 Abs Posit Offset upon drive enable Pt Posit Ref Provides position reference to the point to point position regulator when the value in Par 742 Position Ref Sel 2 Pt to Pt The initial value is latched upon position enable without causing movement changes to reference are relative to the latched position unless the position is re referenced by Par 740 Position Control bit 10 Pt Pt ReRef Position moves may be made within the limits of plus or minus 31 bits Point to point reference may be changed and even reversed during a move Pt Pt Accel Time Acceleration time sec to base speed active only in point to point mode Acceleration to a relatively low speed may be exponential Pt Pt Decel Time Deceleration time sec from base speed to zero active only in point to point mode Some tailing can be expected at the end of a move as the drive comes into command position It is lef
210. a word to this parameter that will control a user defined on or off delay timer The bit within the selected word that will control the delay timer is set by Par 1109 DelTmr1 Trig Bit The user defined on off delay timer is enabled by setting bit 6 Delay Timer of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable DelayTimer1PrSet Dela DelayTimer1 Data 11085 _ Ximena DelayTimer1 Bit 11097 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelTmr1 Trig Bit Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 1108 DelTmr1 TrigData that will change the status of the user defined delay timer to on or off When Par 1109 DelTmr1 Trig Bit is a positive number the delay timer is an on timer When Par 1109 is a negative number the delay timer is an off timer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer1 PrSet The time that the value in Par 1111 DelayTimer1Accum must reach before bit 2 Timer Done in Par 1112 DelayTimertStats is set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer1 Accum The amount of time that has elapsed since the timer was enabled Par 1112 DelayTimer1 Stats bit 2 set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimeriStats Displays the status of the user defined on or off delay timer Bit 0 Timer Enable when this bit is set the timer is enabled DelayTimer1Stats 00 Enabled Timing Done DelayTimer1Accum
211. added for firmware version 2 03 Options 55555555555 555555555 COGO DBD Ds as 5 C 55555 5555 50505 555565555555 55555 2223222323999099090990902332832339222992922 T jm 2 2 Z 2 2 22 2120 Z Z 2 Defaut 0 0 jO 0 0 0 jO O 0 0 JO 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 O JO 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O0 Abs OverSpd Lim Units Sets an incremental speed above Par 76 Fwd Speed Limit and below Par 75 Rev Speed Default 352 8000 Limit that is allowable before the drive indicates its speed is out of range Min Max 0 0000 1750 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu Motor OL Factor Units Sets the minimum level of current that causes a motor overload trip under continuous Default 1 1500 operation Current levels below this value will not result in an overload trip For example 1 0000 2 0000 service factor of 1 15 implies continuous operation up to 115 of nameplate motor current 3 51 Read Write Data Type 0 False 1 True 0 False 1 True RW Real RW Real 3 52 337 338 339 340 341 343 344 345 Programming and Parameters Name Description Mtr 127 Curr Min Sets the minimum current threshold f
212. and Parameters Inp CASE fus Sion 7 988 7 rque Con Ontrg 9090 X Con iro tro Motor Data Monitoring Drive Config Tuning Autotune Results 1 Motor NP Volts 525 Slip Ratio 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 423 145 Rate Limit 421 195 Integ Freq 2 Motor NP FLA 526 Stator Frequency 402 PWM Frequency 453 lu Offset 422 195 Reg P Gain 3 Motor NP Hertz 434 Mtr Vds Base 403 Voltage Class 454 Iw Offset 429 105 Integ Freq 4 Motor NP RPM 435 Mtr Vqs Base 405 Dead Time Comp 425 Flux Rate Limit 430 195 Reg P Gain 5 Motor NP Power 441 Vds Fdbk Filt 409 Line Undervolts 426 Flux Satur Coef 486 Rated Slip Freq 6 Mtr NP Pwr Units 442 Vqs Fdbk Filt 410 PreChrg TimeOut 443 Flux Reg P Gaint 487 Motor NTC 336 Motor OL Factor 497 Vqs Command 411 PreChrg Control 470 Flux Reg P Gain2 488 Flux Current 7 Motor Poles 498 Vds Command 510 Mode Config 444 Flux Gain 490 Statorlnductance 9 Total Inertia 495 lqs Command 511 FVC2 Mode Config 533 SlewRateTimeLimit 491 StatorResistance 496 195 Command 512 PMag Mode 500 Bus Util Limit 492 Leak Inductance 499 CurFdbk Iq 513 V Hz Mode Config 501 Torque En Dly 493 Leak Indc Satur 489 Flx CurFdbk Id 514 Test Mode Config 437 Vqs Max 494 Leak Indc Satur2 P a 438 Max 502 Rotor Resistance 2 Tune Config 439 Min 503 Current Reg BW 517 PMag Tune Config 440 Vds Min
213. and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 392 NetLoss DPI Cnig Default 2 FltCoastStop EE to configure the drive s response to a communication fault from a network card Options 0 Ignore e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs E Alarm A 2 FitCoastStop 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 Flt RampStop this event occurs 4 FitCurLimStp 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage
214. b es 4 1 Drive Stats 2 ue ee eed uere sp T REM CES 4 1 LED Indications Mins Wie a Rees Fe tae we ge Bie dee aE 4 2 Precharge Board LED 4 3 HIM Indication See DEED Aer ea ee Ae iA 4 4 Manually Clearing Faults reiasa I 4 4 Paults and Alarms 22mm HIR niu EG LIS p 4 4 Descriptions s winds ten tris atate Ero Rr a 4 5 Appendix A Supplemental Information Chapter Objectives oan tind Ota ee Rte et eae ma ee 1 Specifications Loss xiu daa euo y EN epe i De baa REOR ES WERE ad 1 DPI Communication Configurations A 5 Typical Programmable Controller A 5 Logic Command Word 5 Logic Status Word oiseau cn oem UIS ME D PUER EREMO A 6 DPI Device e 2 RI 6 Output Devices etd Rover v HUP PU DV ES qa pA E e DURS A 7 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker A 7 Puse SiZe Leo a ue I iet is A 7 Fuse Types tmr Be Sheet Be Se ee Ge ee serm EHE D IRE ES A 7 Appendix Appendix Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Table of Contents 3 List of Motors with Compatible Thermi
215. been Code w Brake IGBT Feedback performed on 600V class drives Frames 1 4 Y Yas Code Option N 3 No Option N medi es d t Brake IGBT is standard on Frames 1 3 and iiid optional on Frames 4 9 ONLY B Stegman Hi Resolution Encoder Enclosure Multi Device Interface P h E 2nd Encoder 20 1 MES 5 TOM Brake Resistor 54 Safe Off w 2nd Encoder en d Code w Resistor Expanded cassette required SePrames 9 amp up Only Y Yes 35 One encoder interface is included with the base drive N No e Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger HIM Code Operator Interface 1 Additional Config 0 blank Cover Emission Code Description 2 Digital Lep Code CE Filter CM Choke Phase Il Control 3 Full Numeric LCD A Yes Yes K Phase Il DriveLogix5730 5 Prog Only LCD B Yes No ze Phase Il DriveLogix5730 C Full Numeric LCD NS No No w EtherNet IP Door Mount 5 This is an embedded EtherNet option that is Frames 1 6 Only Frames 9 amp up Only For use on a high resistive ground or ungrounded distribution system Frame 9 only Note CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives Frames 1 4 Frames 10 amp up only only available with DriveLogix5730 Chapter Objectives Chapter 1 Installation Wiring This chapter provides the information needed to mount and wire PowerFlex 700S AC drives frames 1 6 For installation instructions for PowerFlex 7005 AC drives frames 9 13 refer
216. bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par 578 Trend In3 Dint Setting bit 4 In4 Real specifies the Real data type for Trend Input 4 The source for Real data is Par 583 Trend In4 Real Clearing the bit specifies the Integer data type The source for Integer data is Par 582 Trend In4 Dint Setting bit 15 Auto Output causes the trend output parameters to automatically cycle through the entire trend buffer at the rate specified in Par 559 Trend Rate Typically you link the output to an analog output for display on an oscilloscope Auto output is accomplished by writing to Par 569 TrendBuffPointer Clearing this bit requires manual selection of Par 569 TrendBuffPointer to view the trend buffer contents Options Zlo 0 5122 21212 2 2 22 88 8 83 95959 525 59 5 lt lt 5 0 lt Default 0 O O 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 557 Trend Status Bits indicate the status of the Data Trend function Bit 1 Triggered indicates a Trend Trigger event has been detected This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect e Bit2 Complete indicates all the post trigger data samples have been gathered and the trend buffers are full It will also be s
217. bus lines 10 Fan Feedback Loss an inverter cooling fan did not send active connector on the Main Control Board feedback or did not work High Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board and fiber connections 2 Check the inverter cooling fans 71 HiHp Drv OvrLoad High Horse Power Only Reduce mechanical load Drive Overload the drive s operating point has exceeded the intermittent current rating and a foldback to the continuous rating in Par 400 Rated Amps has occurred 72 HiHp PwrBd PrcEr High Horse Power Only Replace the High Power Fiber Optic Interface Power Board Processor Error a processor on the High Power board Fiber Optic Interface circuit board has detected a self diagnostic problem 73 HiHp PrChrg High Horse Power Only If the drive is an AC input model check the Precharge Contactor Fault the precharge contactor did not precharge resistor and contactor send back the active feedback If the drive is a DC input model check a jumper for precharge bypass switch on the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board 74 HiHp PwrEE Error D High Horse Power Only Cycle power Power EEPROM Error the Cycling Ring Checksum of T the data stored in the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit Check the communication bus lines 10 pin board EEPROM does not match the stored CRC connector or the Main Control Board Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board a
218. continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 385 Lgx CommLossData Default 1 Last State Enter a value to configure what the drive does with the data received from the DriveLogix Options 0 Zero Data controller when the connection is closed or times out MZ Last State 0 Zero Data Resets data to zero 1 Last State Holds data in its last state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 385 Lgx CommLossData lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 386 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg Default 2 FitCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to the DriveLogix processor being ina Options 0 Ignore Non Run mode Non Run modes include Program Remote Program and Faulted H Alarm 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 2 FitCoastStop 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 Fit RampStop this event occurs 4 FltCurLimStp 2 FltCoastStop co
219. cycles per revolution Hollow shaft up to 14 mm diameter SINCOS SHS 170 512 sine cycles per revolution While the software supports this encoder the SHS 170 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply SINCOS SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc Recommended Cables If you are using this motor and feedback device Use this cable Temposonics R Series Linear sensors with MTS part See this wiring diagram Mating MTS molded extension cable for RG connector or integral Figure H 1 on page H 3 numbers ending in 15261102 P cable Allen Bradley 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX Figure H 2 on page H 4 and S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley MPL A5xx and MPL Bxxx motors Allen Bradley 2090 CDNFDMP SXX Figure H 2 on page H 4 motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L Allen Bradley 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure H 3 on page H 4 and S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley MPL A5xx and MPL Bxxx motors Allen Bradley 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure H 3 on page H 4 motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all MPG Allen Bradley 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure H 4 on page H 4 series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all MPG serie
220. data of Par 791 Xsync Out 2 from the last sync period Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default 0 Min Max 0 4294967295 0 4294967295 0 0 4294967295 0 0 4294967295 0 0 4294967295 parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 9 Reserved Sync Unstbl lt O Sync Loss 9 lInterplnSync Reserved gt 9 Sync Pulse 4 5 6 8 msec 16 msec 32 msec Options lg D 0 ie 22 2 2222 5 5 5 CC Default 0 o 0 p 0 jo jo jo jo jo jo jo lo JO jo JO oj JO 0 jo Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 icd Xsync Gen Period Default 1 1 msec Sets the period for the Sync Pulse Generator Bit 0 of Par 786 Xsync Status will be set for 0 5 Options 0 0 5 msec msec and will be cleared for 0 5msec 2 Xsync Gen Period 0 5 msec H 1 msec Note Values 5 16 msec and 6 32 msec
221. drive considers the Default 17 6400 motor to be at zero speed Min Max 0 0000 882 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 Logic TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select logic status indication displayed in Par 162 Logic TP Data Options 0 Zero 28 Sys Friction 1 Avg Spd Ref 29 Iq proc time 2 Avg Spd Fdbk 30 Enable Inhib LastStopMode 31 DI Src Index 0 None 32 DI SrcRevldx 1 Coast 33 DI TrendTrig 2 Current Limit 34 DI Prchg 3 Ramp 35 Enable State 4 Torque Mode 36 Revision 4 Spd Ref Sel 37 DI MOP Incr 5 Start State 38 DI Decr 6 Run State 39 DI MOP Reset 7 Stop State 40 Term 8 PrChrg Logic 41 Cmd DPI 1 9 Meas State 42 Cmd DPI 2 10 Data State 43 Cmd DPI 3 11 Diag State 44 DPI 4 12 CalcState 45 Cmd DPI 5 13 Task 1 time 46 Cmd DPI 6 14 Task 1 max 47 ELC 15 Task 2 time 48 Debugger 16 Task 2 49 Reserved 17 Task 3 time 50 SelSw Posit 18 Task 3 max 51 z DI SelSw 00 19 BkGnd Time 52 z DI SelSw 01 20 BkGnd Max 53 z DI SelSw 02 21 Task 1 54 DI SelSw 03 22 Task 2 55 Ids Motoring 23 Task 3 56 IqsRef Motor 24 BkGnd 95 57 Ids Regen 25 RThru Stat
222. e 009 i syd Jed 2 0021 349 424 006 50 90 2 006 sud 1ed 2 006 1066 0021 007 sudiedi gopz 849290 0001 Suded 1 0081 849299 1 000 _ 0221 _ 206 058 261 0011 2 068000 SHEM XEN c UN c a WW 3958 1009 sduy 9 zHM 2 5507 g 40 99 01d 4042019 ejeg owlj uoy esnJ ejog 1ueuio 3 jeng sduiy 1nding bay 8 SHEM 1010 ynduj WMd dH EL 9 21 Seu Indu Dy Supplemental Information A 16 euojepueis SdAL IN eui 10 juerquie eu 2 GG s einsojoue ewup Jo juerquie 2 0 juerquie xursyeeu auel ed IN jueiquie y esi LO0DS WOr eeg ue 10 99 04d JO OW WOY Upang jo Shue OUL o sueis s A009 20 uo ASN 104 P S IN JON A009 10 247 408 EHEC 10 e M Orc eyed 10 M 802 10 PAS 104014 3 enuen dui JOU eu eu eui 195 di jueuno y Pinoys eBuei zuan ejqejsn pe UM NOT I unang Unuuixeui
223. e Bit2 0 la from indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the positive direction refer to Par 353 Iq Actual Lim e Bit 3 9 Calc indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its positive limit e Bit 4 Current Lim indicates that the current reference has reached the positive Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 Mtr Current Lim Bit5 DriveProtOL indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 343 OL OpnL p CurrLim e Bit 6 DriveProtCL indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 344 OL ClsLp e Bit 8 Torq Limit indicates that the torque reference has reached the Positive Torque Limit set by Par 125 Torque Pos Limit Bit 9 Mtrng PwrLim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Motoring Power Limit set by Par 127 Mtring Power Lim e Bit 10 Torq CurLim indicates that current reference has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 Iq Actual Lim e Bit 11 Atune Tq Lim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by Par 129 Atune Trq Bit 12 0 indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 9 Torq Ref En is off Bit 13 0 Curr
224. encoder pulse according to this PPR value which is limited to 1024 or 2048 encoder lines Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 VirtEncPositFast Virtual Encoder position output in Task 1 One of three outputs from the Virtual Encoder function This value is the encoder position reference output for Task1 fast rate Par 62 Virt Encdr Posit and Par 63 Virt Encdr Dlyed are the encoder position output in Task 2 For the Virtual Master Encoder function you must use Par 1160 VirEncPosiFast as the position reference updated in Task 1 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Options Default Min Max Default Default Default Default Default Units Default Default Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 0 0 2147483648 0 0 0 2147483648 0 Zero Zero MP FrctAccml MP WholeAccm MP EPR MP NBase MP Once Flag MP Pos Fdbk MP Pos Fdbk1 MP ErrorSum Reserved 10 MP IntegHold 11 MP Pos Exact 12 MP Pos Diff 13 MP One Shot 14 MP Run Delay 15 MP ResyncOne 16 MP Task Time 0 0 2147483648 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 0 2200000000 0 0 2147483648 0 0 0 2200000000 0 0 0 2200000000
225. external source to command trim or offset the internal motor current reference This value is summed with Par 350 Iq Actl Ref before the current limit is applied Scaling is in per unit motor current Is Actual Lim Displays the largest allowable stator motor current The range of allowable motor current is limited by the maximum drive current Scaling is in per unit motor current Iq Actual Lim Displays the largest allowable torque producing 19 motor current The range of allowable Iq motor current is limited by the maximum drive current and is adjusted by the motor flux current Scaling is in per unit Iq motor current Iq Rate Limit Enter the maximum rate of change for Current Reference in per unit current sec Par 90 Spd Reg BW will be limited to 2 3 of this value Iq Ref Limited Displays the current reference output of the rate limiter Mtr Current Lim Sets the largest allowable motor stator current The online maximum value of this parameter is Par 2 Motor NP FLA The online minimum value is 105 of the current indicated in Par 488 Flux Current Values e Bit 0 NTC Shorted indicates the Negative Temperature Coefficient NTC device has a short circuit Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Min Max Min Max Min Max Min
226. ezis JIN SN 104 euin PNOO eje v14 Jo 92 SI ezis JIN SN 104 seiddns yey pere 3U S ezis d L YWAN 1ndui 9Y paliddns 39euuoosip pue Buiddu eouesinu uonoejoid serddns yey 15 AU ezis 11991 0061 oozy z 00ct 2 0061 2 000 2 0061 0084 0021 6021 0 e 014 1991 0091 0092 0092 z 0091 00 0 z 0091 9212 96891 0941 19v 0 008181 7910906 1091 0041 0086 z 008 z 00 1 z 0062 z 00 1 6202 90 091 8511 e 059 14061 0091 0078 2 0075 20091 2 0092 2 0091 6202 OtvL 0051 0151 0141 Eb 10906 10821 0091 00 amp z 00v 2 0091 2 0090 2 0091 091 SvGL 001 8501 e 095 5 10821 00r 000 z 000 2 0071 2 0060 0071 0291 S9cL 06 8911 0 069 190906 sud Jed 2 0051 syd sed 2 009 sud 1ed Z 0001 syd sed 2 009 0021 0092 syd 198 0095 syd 199 000 Sud 299 0002 sud Jad 0001 009 OZEL 006 106 96 c 00S syd Jed 2 0061 Sud sed 2 00 sud 1ed Z 00
227. from port 1 of the feedback option card Min Max 0 2147483648 Integer 253 FBOpti Spd Fdbk Units RPM RO Real Displays feedback from port 1 of the feedback option card Default 0 0 Min Max 8 0 pu 254 Opto 1 RegisCnfg Configures the registration latch for port 0 of the feedback option card e Bits 3 00 RLTrgEdg0 4 00 RLTrgEdg1 19 O1 RLTrgEdgO and 20 O1 RLTrgEdg1 select which trigger edges signal the position see Table 254A Edge Selection Settings e Bits 5 OO RL DirRev 6 OO RL DirFwd 21 O1 RL DirRev and 22 O1 RL DirFwd set the direction of position capture see Table 2548 Direction Settings Bits 8 11 configure a digital filter for the registration trigger signal This filter can be used to reject spurious noise The filter works by waiting a programmed time before deciding that the signal is valid This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in the registration signal The filter delay is programmable in increments of 100 nanoseconds from 0 or no delay up to 700 nanoseconds i o o id IEEE lt l gt lolo o 8 2 8 18 8 18 2 8 2 8 8 a lt o o o o a a a 8 8 8 O Default 0 O O O O jO O JO 0 0 JO lO JO JO 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 p 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1
228. function is selected Par 132 Inert Adapt Sel bit 0 1 Typical IAA bandwidths range from 70 to 150 rad sec with 100 rad sec nominal best lReserved N 9 Reserved lt gt Reserved 9 Reserved Reserved lt 9 O First Diff Load Est lt S 0 0 1 True If the Load Estimate function is selected Par 132 Inert Adapt Sel bit 0 1 then this parameter sets the natural frequency of a filter in rad sec Typical values range from 10 to 150 rad sec with higher values being more responsive to disturbances but with increased system noise There is no nominal best value but 40 rad sec is a suggested starting point This adjustment may not function well in sloppy geared systems If both Inertia Adaptation and Load Estimate functions are active use a bandwidth setting of 100 rad sec Inert Adapt Gain This parameter sets a multiplier of system inertia when the Inertia Adaptation function is selected Par 132 Inert Adapt Sel bit 0 1 Higher values may cause high frequency ringing while smaller values may cause fundamental load instability A typical value is 0 5 This parameter has no affect on the Load Estimate function Skip Speed 1 Skip Speed 2 Skip Speed 3 Sets a frequency at which the drive will not operate Skip Speed 1 3 and Par 139 Skip Speed Band must not equal 0 Note These parameters were added for firmware version 2 03 Sk
229. help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used Parameter Names will appear in brackets after the Parameter Number For example Par 307 Output Voltage Display text will appear in quotes For example Enabled e The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action Word Meaning Can Possible able to do something Cannot Not possible not able to do something May Permitted allowed Must Unavoidable you must do this Shall Required and necessary Should Recommended Should Not Not recommended Similar PowerFlex 7008 drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering dimensioning etc A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A 4 Overview General Precautions Class 1 LED Product gt gt gt BP D ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber optic cable connectors ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with st
230. indicates a message checksum fault The check sum associated with the Heidenhain encoder must be correct and acknowledged by the feedback option card e Bit 12 Time Out Err indicates a RS 485 time out fault This check requires information to be sent from the encoder to the feedback option card within a specified time Typical times are about 10 clock cycles before an error is detected This check is done only at power up Options dell 5 Su 5 2 0 eje DIDI DIDI DIDI DIDI DID DI oO G 2 E 21888 9 218 Od oe foe CC a c x x rm rj a a a Defaut 0 0 jo jo jo jo jo jo o jo jo o o jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo o jo jo jo 0 000 bri Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 76543210 1 True 3 40 Programming and Parameters o 8 SEE Name 3 lt No Description Values 52 5 261 Steg amp Hiedn BtegHiedn Default 0 Zero elects data displayed by Par 262 Steg amp Hied
231. is used confirm the encoder wires are connected to the correct terminals and are secure refer to Table 1 H on page 1 22 3 Confirm that all control inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure 2 2 Start Up 4 Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive 5 Verify that the control power voltage is correct L1 L2 L3 M fJ The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed If an operator interface is not available remote devices should be used to start up the drive If the DriveLogix option is not present the associated indicators will not be present The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only operational when the drive is energized These LEDs are only visible when the drive door is open or when viewed from the HIM or an application program e g DriveExplorer in parameter 554 LED Status This feature is only available with DriveLogix version 15 03 or later operational when the drive is energized and only visible with the drive door open Servicing energized equipment can be hazardous Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock burn or unintended actuation of controlled equipment Follow Safety related practices of NFPA 70E ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR EMPLOYEE WORKPLACES DO NOT work alone on energized equipment ATTENTION The RUN LED and the controller LEDs are only
232. it had been established e Bit 1 Rx Loss indicates the receive port is not receiving data and the receive port configuration is set to receive data Bit 2 Many BOF Err indicates the number of Beginning Of Frame BOF errors exceeds limit set by Par 899 SL BOF Err Limit Bit 4 Pckg Msg indicates the received package sequence number has not matched for 1 05 Bit 5 CommForm Err indicates the format of received data does not match the configuration of the receive port e Bit 6 Sys Rev indicates the system revision in the received data does not match the value of Par 900 SynchLink Rev Bit 7 Mult indicates more than one node on the SynchLink system is configured as a time keeper Options ul io 5 BEI Beis 25 5 8 lt cr Default 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 00 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True Bit 3 Many CRC indicates the number of Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors exceeds limit set by Par 898 SL CRC Err Limit 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 103
233. iv ivr 8 ju CC Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 JO JO JO 0 0 O 0 00 00 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 Programming and Parameters 3 35 o 8 2E Name 5858 No Description Values 235 RegisLtch0 Value Default 0 RW 32 bit Displays the registration data of port 0 Indicates the position reference counter value latched Min Max 2147483648 Integer by the external strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 236 RegisLtch 0 1 Cnfg 236 RegisLtch 0 1Cnfg Configures the registration latch at port 0 or port 1 to be used with Encoder 0 or Encoder 1 respectively Bit 0 RLO Encoder 1 selects the encoder for the input source of latched data Setting bit 0 selects encoder 1 resetting the bit to zero selects encoder 0 Bits 1 RLO TrgSrc0 and 2 RLO TrgSrc1 select the trigger source see Table 236A Encoder0 Trigger Source Settings B
234. measurement of Par 504 PM AbsEncd Offst for a Permanent Magnet PM motor FVC Mode Config Configures Field Oriented Control FOC operation condition except during the first 10 seconds of the stop condition the VW voltage feedback offset value firmware version 3 03 Added bits 4 7 12 16 17 and 23 for firmware version 4 001 ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Sets the bandwidth for the current regulator Par 402 PWM Frequency limits the maximum Defines the ramp rate of the Flux Producing d axis current reference that is used for the Defines the amplitude of the Flux Producing d axis current reference that is used for the Values Units Default Min Max Scale R S 600 100 30000 0 0 65535 mSec 2000 500 5000 5 0 1 0 0 195 3 10 5 0 1 0 0 195 3 10 10 0 799 9 x 10 30 0 0 0 799 9 10 Bit 23 SyncTrans En when set default the synchronous transfer algorithm using voltage feedback data is active Notes Bit changes were made for firmware version 2 03 Bits 10 and 11 were added for firmware version 3 01 Changed bit 3 from Reserved to FastFluxDsbl for Linkable Read Write RW 16 bit RW 16 bit RW 16 bit RW 16 bit RW 16 bit RW 16 bit Options uz 9 o 5 a
235. motion and drive systems based on ControlLogix and PowerFlex700S products SynchLink should be used in conjunction with a standard control network such as ControlNet or Ethernet IP A standard network is used for general control interlocking and transfer of diagnostic data across the system SynchLink does not function as a standard control network e g it only broadcasts data The PowerFlex 700 Drives transfer two types of data between drives including e Direct Data delivered in a single message A SynchLink message can contain a maximum of four direct data words each word is 32 bits in length Direct data can be automatically forwarded to the next SynchLink node in the daisy chain or ring configurations e Buffered Data that exceeds the four word limit of a direct data transfer Buffered data is appropriately segmented at the transmitting device and reassembled at the receiving device Buffered data cannot be automatically forwarded to the next SynchLink node in the daisy chain and ring configurations Refer to the SynchLink Design Guide publication 1756 TD008 when planning and connecting the SynchLink network Refer to SynchLink Board for PowerFlex amp 700 Drives with Phase II Control publication 20D INO10 for information on installing the SynchLink option board SynchLink Board for PowerFlex amp 7005 Drives with Phase Control Table SynchLink Cables and Accessories
236. note referencing Cable Tuning Tests to Par 268 Resolver Cnfg 3 42 soc 2 Change See Page Added bit 14 to Pars 322 Exception Event3 325 Fault Status 3 and 328 Alarm Status 3 EE 3 49 Added note for value 1 FOC 2 for Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 3 70 Updated Par 796 Posit Gear Ratio to be linkable 3 94 Updated the description for options 34 UserGen 5 0 37 UserGen Sel for Pars 825 830 3 97 Added a list of parameters corresponding to the value selected in Par 831 Out1 Sel 3 98 Updated the description for Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl 3 106 Added new fault code 79 HiHP Bus Data 4 11 Updated the Bus Overvoltage levels A 1 Added information on DPI device limitations A 6 Update the Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings tables A 7 Updated the DriveLogix Motion Control Block Diagram B 28 Updated wiring diagram for Rotary Encoder connections F 4 H 4 Added new Appendix for SynchLink Specifications This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control User Manual publication 20D UM006 since the September 2005 release Change See Page Updated the Power Terminal Block Specification Descriptions 1 12 Updated the Terminal Block specifications for digital input leakage current 1 23 Updated the HIM Start Up Menu di
237. of an analog input can be linked to Accel Time 1 Rather than entering an acceleration time directly via HIM the link allows the value to change by varying the analog signal This can provide additional flexibility for advanced applications Each link has 2 components e Source parameter sender of information e Destination parameter receiver of information Most parameters can be a source of data for a link except parameter values that contain an integer representing an ENUM text choice These are not allowed since the integer is not actual data it represents a value Refer to the list of parameters in Chapter 3 for information on which parameters can D 6 HIM Overview be destinations links must be established between equal data types parameter value formatted in floating point can only source data to a destination parameter value that is also floating point Establishing A Link Step Key s Example Displays 1 Select a valid destination parameter to be linked The parameter value screen FG g Parameter displ 1 S Curve Time 2 Press Enter to edit the parameter The cursor will move to the value line e 3 Press ALT and then View Sel Next qc Min 0 01000 press the Up or Down Arrow to change Max 6553 5 Present Value to Define Link Press or 62 Dfit 10 0 Enter Present Value e 4 Enter the Source Parameter Number and press En
238. of zero Spd Reg Damping Sets the damping factor of the drive s characteristic equation and factors in the calculation of the integral gain A damping factor of 1 0 is considered critical damp Lowering the damping will produce faster load disturbance rejection but may cause a more oscillatory response When Par 90 Spd Reg BW is set to zero damping factor has no effect SpdReg P Gain Mx Places a limit on the maximum value of proportional gain in Par 81 Spd Reg P Gain and Par 104 Srlss Spd Reg Kp When gains are automatically calculated this parameter is necessary to limit the amplification of noise with increased inertia Note The Max value was increased from 600 0000 for firmware version 3 01 SRegFB Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the speed feedback filter Values greater than 1 will result in a lead function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter SReg FB Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Feedback filter SRegOut FiltGain Sets the lead term for the Speed Regulator output filter Values greater than 1 will result in a lead function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter Note The default value for this parameter was changed from 0 7000 to 1 0000 for firmware version 2 03 SReg Out Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Regulator output filter Act Spd Reg BW Displays the actual speed regulat
239. one 1 shielded pair of brake conductors Brake Conductors Type3 500 MCM AWG Standard Installations rated 600V 90 C 194 F Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation 150 HP or more RHH RHW 2 and 3 bare copper grounds and PVC jacket Type4 500 MCM AWG Water Caustic Chemical Tray rated 600V 90 C 194 F Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and Crush Resistance RHH RHW 2 three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller Acceptable in Class amp Il Division amp II locations 5 500 MCM AWG 690V Applications Tray rated 2000V 90 C 194 F Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation 3 bare copper grounds and PVC jacket Note If terminator network or output filter is used connector insulation must be XLPE not PVC 1 8 Installation Wiring Unshielded THHN THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and or conduit fill rates limits are provided Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 Mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity Shielded Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be give
240. one revolution of the motor shaft This Default 1000 Integer value is used to scale the calculated speed based on the change in feedback position Units Min Max 10 100000 are count per motor revolution CPR 291 LiniStahl Status Displays the status of the Stahl linear encoder The Stahl linear encoder works with the MDI option card 8 No Data Read indicates that no data can be read from the encoder Bit 9 Alarm Optics displays an alarm when fiber optics require cleaning Bit 10 Out of Range indicates that the encoder read count is at the maximum value 524 287 e Bit 11 ErrBits16 31 displays a diagnostic error code refer to bits 16 31 Bit 16 Fault Optics indicates that the read head for fiber optic cable must be cleaned or replaced Bit 17 Read Head indicates that the fiber optic cable read head must be checked aligned or replaced Bit 18 RAM error indicates that the fiber optic cable read head must be replaced Bit19 EPROM error indicates that there is an error with the communication module replace read head Bit 20 ROM error indicates replace read head Bit 22 No Position Cycle power to Stahl read head Options 5 ale gig S9EZ2922722z22z l zsgzg222 l2559z2292 229 22222 2 2 lt
241. only be used when the drive is not in run and Par 740 Position Control bit 6 1 true Setting bit 7 AbsoluteMode puts the position regulator in Absolute mode When using the Homing function while in Absolute mode the value in Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref must be set relative to the value in Par 763 Position Actual after homing is complete For example When homing is complete Par 763 Position Actual 1000 counts If you want to move to an absolute position of 2000 counts relative to the home switch you must enter a value of 3000 counts into Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref i e 1000 2000 3000 If you want to move back to the home switch using the same value in Par 763 Position Actual after homing 1000 you must enter a value of 1000 into Par 758 Pt Pt Position Ref i e 0 1000 1000 Setting bit 8 Xzero Preset presets Par 744 PositRef EGR Par 747 Position Cmmd Par 763 Position Actual and Par 765 Posit Load with the value in Par 62 Position Fdbk minus Par 757 Abs Posit Offset upon drive enable Setting bit 10 Pt Pt enables setting or changing Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref without changing the actual position Setting bit 16 X Watch1 En enables position Watch 1 Resetting it clears Par 741 Position Status bit 8 Posit Watch1 Setting bit 17 X Watch1 Dir causes Position Watch 1 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is greater than Par 780 PositDtct1 Stpt Re setting bit 17 causes Po
242. output for Trend Buffer 2 if the buffer is using real data This will equalthe _ Min Max 2200000000 0000 value of the element in Trend Buffer 2 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 578 Trend In3 Dint Default 0 V RW 32 bit Provides integer input to the Trend 3 The Trending function samples this parameter for _ Min Max 2147483648 Integer Trend Buffer 3 if bit 3 In 3 Real is cleared 579 Trend In3 Real Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Provides real input to the Trend 3 The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Min Max 2200000000 0000 Buffer 3 if bit 3 In 3 Real is set 580 Trend Out3 Dint Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the output for Trend Buffer 3 if the buffer is using integer data This will equal the Min Max 2147483648 Integer value of the element in Trend Buffer 3 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 581 Trend Out3 Real Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the output for Trend Buffer 3 if the buffer is using real data This will equal the _ Min Max 2200000000 0000 value of the element in Trend Buffer 3 specified by Par 569 TrendBuffPointer 582 In4 Dint Default 0 V RW 32 bit Provides integer input to the Trend 4 The Trending function samples this parameter for Min Max 2147483648 Integer Trend Buffer 4 if bit 4 In 4 Real is cleared 583 Trend In4 Real Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Provides real input to the Trend 4 The Trending function samples this parameter for
243. programming key associated with one of the following functions Table D A ALT Key Functions ALT Key and then SMART Function not available Vj Allows the selection of how parameters will be viewed or Gi detailed information about a parameter or component Function not available Lang Function not available Auto Man unction not available Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the HIM is Remove notthe last controlling device and does not have manual control of the drive Exp Allows the value to be entered as an exponent Param Allows entry of a parameter number for viewing editing HIM Overview D 3 Menu Structure Figure D 1 HIM Menu Structure User Display 0 0 Faults gt View Fault Queue status info gt Logic status Clear Faults Device Version gt PowerFlex 7005 Run Inhibit Stat Clr Fault Queue HIM Version Product Data Logic Control State Reset Device Main Control Board Power Unit Board LCD HIM Product Data LCD HIM Standard Control Board Keyboard Numeric view selected through ee Param Access Lv Basic ee FGP FGP Advanced Numbered List File 1 Name FGP Group Changed File2 Name Group 1 Name gt FGP Parameter File 3 Name Group 2 Name Parameter Group 3 Name Parameter Name Parameter Name Y gt Value Screen
244. pu speed change 1 per unit position error is the distance traveled in 1 sec at base motor speed The maximum value of this parameter is typically 1 3 of the speed bandwidth rad sec but may be set considerably higher with careful tuning of the speed regulator output lead lag filter Values Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Mi Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Programming and Parameters RPM 176 4000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu RPM 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 Sec 10 0000 0 1000 6553 5000 Sec 10 0000 0 1000 6553 5000 RIS 25 0000 0 0000 500 0000 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 1000000 1 1 2000000 R S 4 0000 0 0000 200 0000 lt Linkable 3 91 RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RW RO RW RW RW Data Type Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real Real Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit
245. rated motor current times the value of Par 336 Motor OL Factor If the motor current exceeds the value of the curve the value of the motor overload output integrates The value of the motor overload output is visible in Par 330 Fault TP Data when the value of Par 329 Fault TP Sel equals 13 Speed Motor Overload Memory Retention Per 2005 NEC The PowerFlex 7008 drive with Phase II control firmware 3 01 and higher has the ability to retain the motor overload count at power down per the 2005 NEC motor overtemperature requirement To enable motor overload memory retention set bit 20 Motor OL Ret of parameter 153 Control Options to 1 To disable motor overload memory retention set bit 20 Motor OL Ret of parameter 153 Control Options to 0 The motor overload count value can be viewed in parameter 341 Mtr 12 Count Application Notes C 7 Stop Dwell Time Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and torque regulators when responding to a stop command Important Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter Figure C 3 Drive Operation When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time Equals Zero Speed When Par 154 Stop Dwell Time equals zero the drive turns off the velocity and torque regulators when it detects zero speed P 160 Zero Speed Lim 0 Time Drive Detects Zero Speed and Turns Off Regulators E E S
246. rpm 2 76 K rpm 14 bit 14kHz 3480 rpm 1740 rpm 696 rpm 16 bit 10 kHz 900 rpm 450 rpm 180 rpm 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 Programming and Parameters 3 43 Name Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type Resolver0 Status Indicates status of the resolver option card port 0 Bit 0 Cable Tune Bit 1 Tune Result indicates the tuning Parameter type When set it indicates the tuning is using the parameter database When cleared it indicates the tuning is using derived data Bit 2 Mtr Turning indicates that the motor is turning e Bit 4 Energized indicates the resolver is energized Bit 8 Open Wire indicates a problem with the cable open circuit Bit 9 Power Supply indicates problem with the option card s power supply Bit 10 Diag Fail indicates the option card has failed its power up diagnostics Options 9 _ 8 2 9 5 lt 9 5 5 5 9 S F 2 5 5 leis 212121218 5 S 2 2 2 n O o Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 1 True Reslvr0 TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select Fault data displayed in Par 271 Reslvr0 TP Data Options 0 Zero 4 RO EPP 1 Edge Time 5 Edge Mode 2 RO dEdge 6
247. settle into a steady state Some adjustment will be necessary to effect the best compromise between noise and tracking response Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 723 PLL Rev Input Default 1 RW 32 bit Revolution of the input encoder This parameter must be coordinated with Par 724 PLL Rev Min Max 1000000 Integer Out to resolve the gear ratio between input revolutions and output virtual revolutions The ratio of input to output revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should be reduced to their lowest common factor Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 724 Rev Output Default RW 32 bit Revolution of the output encoder This parameter must be coordinated with Par 723 PLL Rev Min Max 1 2000000 Integer In to resolve the gear ratio between input revolutions and output virtual revolutions The ratio of input to output revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should be reduced to their lowest common factor Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 725 PLL EPR Input Units RW 32 bit Edges Per Revolution of the physical input device Use highest line count device possible to Default 1048576 Integer insure smoother operation Min Max 1 67108864 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 726 PLL EPR Output Units RW 32 bit Edges Per Revolution of virtual the physical output device Defa
248. slip regulator when the slip regulator turns on A value of zero disables the slew rate function on both the Vqs regulator output and the slip regulator output Par 553 defines the slew rate for the slip regulator and Par 586 IdsCmd Slew Rate defines the slew rate for the Vqs regulator Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 This parameter was renamed from Flux Gain Adjust to SlewRateTimeLimit the default value was changed to 10 0 and the minimum value was changed to 0 0 for firmware version 4 001 SrLssAng gleStblty Default Adjusts the electrica angle to maintain stable motor operation An increase in the value Min Max increases the angle adjustment SrLss VoltStblty Default Adjusts the voltage to maintain stable motor operation An increase in the value increases Min Max the output voltage adjustment SrLss StbityFilt Default The coefficient is used to adjust the bandwidth of a low pass filter The smaller the value of Min Max the coefficient the lower the bandwidth of the filter V Hz Status Indicates the limit status of the V Hz Control Operation Note This parameter was added form firmware version 2 03 Options 2 2 ojo 5 5 CC O Defaut 0 o D o p o p o p oj p pj p O False Bt 15 14 13 1211109 8 6548210 SrLs
249. standards listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manuals Important CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives frames 1 4 Declarations of Conformity are available online at http www ab com certification ce docs Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations 1 30 Installation Wiring EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EN61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods General Notes If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12 5 mm 0 5 in and top openings less than 1 0 mm 0 04 in to maintain compliance with the LV Directive The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment The user is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed below if necessary Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance P
250. the Par 254 Opt0 1 RegisCnfg 0 RO 32 bit 258 Opt Regis Lich Default Displays the registration data of the feedback option card port 0 The registration data is the Min Max 2147483648 Integer position reference counter value latched by the external strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 254 Opt0 1 RegisCnfg 259 Stegmann0 Cnfg Configures the Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Bit 5 Direction determines counting direction If clear direction is forward or up If set the direction is reverse or down Bits 10 SmplRate 610 12 SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response FIR Filter see Table 259A FIR Filter Settings This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system Refer to the Speed Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 700 with Phase Il Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for details Notes Bit 11 SmplRate bt1 is set to 0 False by default for firmware version 1 11 and is set to 1 True by default for firmware version 2 03 This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Options l lo 5 o jo jojojo
251. the applied ramp The S time is independent of speed and Min Max 0 0000 4 0000 results in a trapezoidal torque profile For example Speed Time in Seconds 0 5 sec 0 5 sec Accel Time 5 0 seconds S Curve Time 1 0 second Total Ramp Time 6 0 seconds 35 SpdRefFilt Gain Default 1 0000 4 RW Rea Sets the lead term for the Speed Reference filter Values greater than 1 will result in a lead Min Max 5 0000 function and values less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter 36 SpdRef Filt BW Units 5 V RW Real Sets the frequency for the Speed Reference filter Default 0 0000 Min Max 0 0000 500 0000 37 5 Ref Bypass Unit RPM RW Rea The speed command after the limit ramp and s curve blocks Link a source directly to this Default 0 0000 parameter to bypass these blocks Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 38 Speed Ref Scale Default 1 0000 RWhRea This parameter is multiplied with the value in Par 37 Spd Ref Bypass Min Max 1000 0000 Programming and Parameters 3 17 ES 5 2 2 gis No Description Values 2725 39 JogSpeed2 Units RPM RW Rea Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 23 Jog 2 of Default 0 0000 152 Applied LogicCmd Min Max 8 0000 p
252. to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 389 Lgx LinkChngCnfg Default 2 FitCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to Controller to Drive default links being jane yi 4 Options 0 Ignore removed A default link is a link automatically set up when a communication format is 1 Alarm selected for the Controller to Drive connection 2 FltCoastStop 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 3 Fit RampStop e 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 4 FitCurLimStp this event occurs 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit
253. type Encoder Voltage Supply 5V DC or 12V DC 320 mA per channel 5V DC requires an external power supply 12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC maximum low state voltage of 0 4V DC Maximum Input Frequency 400 kHz Table E A Recommended Cable Cable Type and Length Wire Type s Description Encoder Pulse I O Combined Belden 9730 or equivalent 07 10 196 mm 24AWG Less 30 5 m 100 ft individually shielded Encoder Pulse I O Signal Belden 9730 9728 or 0 196 mm 24 AWG 30 5 m 100 ft to 152 4 m equivalent 1 individually shielded 500 ft Power Belden 8790 2 0 750 mm 18AWG Combined Belden 9892 9 0 330 mm or 0 500 mm Encoder Pulse I O Signal Belden 9730 9728 or 0 196 mm 24 AWG 152 4 m 500 ft to 259 1 m equivalent 1 individually shielded 850 ft Power Belden 8790 2 0 750 mm 18AWG Combined Belden 9773 9774 or 0 750 mm 18 equivalent n individually shielded pair Belden 9730 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9728 or equivalent Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair 8 Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs 3 channel 0 33 mm 22 AWG plus 1 shielded pair 0 5 mm 20 AWG for power Belden 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel plus power If 3 channel is required use Belden 9774 or equivalent 2 PowerFlex 7005 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card T
254. uondQ 5 1 498 20100001 d Jesn 1 019 Ld enu sJejsi6e1 1 p GGL Ld 90ue19jo3 uonisog JOSEN S94 1ndjno pue sasn YOR ejnoex3 091 Ld 3ndjno pue jepoou3 jenutA eynoex3 LASEL ENYIN 20 uonnoex3 1 sajseypy BIA 19540 wwe meme em ee eK KK 309 jpoou3 1 1 600 4 eK sc asena ed 1poua jeusod 493 Jo 1nse1 34 uM S91 Ld indino 4453 99 L0X0 911 YOR ueuw dyno uonisod 493 owo woa uone Z9d JO eui YM ueos Z 29 pue 0911 1 uonisog 1epoou3 jen les iupu s ut seJ 27 z ysel Sel pe gpou3 uA C co Z xse1 HIA ueos Jo Buruuibeq je 5 xurquou s uonsog 393 ysel suoqouny EIE Jes pds Control Block Diagrams B 20 ug unooyz eui
255. updated when the drive is in a stop Bit17 ManuVItOffst when this bit is set Par 549 Fdbk Offset is used as the UV voltage feedback offset value and Par 550 Fdbk Offset is used as 0 False 1 True Programming and Parameters 3 73 Nn 5 255 Description Values 222 511 2 Mode Config Configures Field Oriented Control 2 FOC2 operation Notes Bit changes were made for firmware version 2 03 This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result A Options MN gl 3 E 3 2 12 olo olp g gigg 29 Defaut 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 00 0 0 l0 JO JO 0 0 009Hg JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12141 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 512 PMag Mode Config Configures Permanent Magnet PM operation Bit 9 ReflWaveComp when set Reflected Wave Correction is enabled Notes Bit changes were made for firmware version 2 03 This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Added bit 9 for firmware version 4 001 ATTENTION Do not modify t
256. used as a 6 1 2 4 position reference Notes Options 6 and 16 were added for firmware version 2 04 Option 14 was added and this 7 0 2 18 parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 9 0 4 8 14 1 3 14 16 1 4 4 17 0 4 18 906 ISL Rx DirectSel0 Default 0 No Data Determines the destination for the data received at word 0 of direct received data Configure Options 0 No Data 14 Reserved the selection by using the Peer Communication window 1 SL Multiply 15 Reserved 907 SLRxbDirectSell 2 Event PO 16 Reserved Determines the destination for the data received at word 1 of direct received data Configure 3 Event P1 17 Reserved the selection by using the Peer Communication window 4 Reserved 18 Reserved 908 51 Rx DirectSel2 5 Reserved 19 Reserved Determines the destination for the data received at word 2 of direct received data Configure 6 Reserved 20 Reserved the selection by using the Peer Communication window 7 Reserved 21 Dir Tx Data 909 ISL DirectSel3 8 Reserved 22 Dir Rx Data Determines the destination for the data received at word 3 of direct received data Configure 9 Reserved 23 E0 Accum the selection by using the Peer Communication window 10 Event Status 24 E1 Accum Notes Options 16 26 were added for firmware version 2 04 These parameters were 11 Reserved 25 Opt0 Acc
257. v4 1010 Jo 1 SI azis DAN SN 104 4exee1q du snoeuejuejsul 101991014 JOJO yoga 20 uesouo eq snu ezis j9ex3 OFAN SN Bue wnwixeyy lt 5 W714 JOJOW jo 9 1 ezis WNWIUIU QIN SN 104 xeeiq euin Jexeelg y suey W714 Jojou jo 981 9218 JIN SN 205 seiddns ey 3949P payed sayBly eui S ezis uonoejoid Buddi uonoejoid uunuuxeui yey eaiep Samo Y S ezis uogoejoid WNWIUI z 0 SI SeAup eseu JO jueique y siy je eje1edo JepJo eq 1snui au Ajuo sed uedo WAN JO S seAup ezis JO pas y L u z 00 009 009 057 9001 S06 905 6 691 09 gt 00 092 09 00 9 9 00 068 982 092 896 Eez Gy Z 00L 9 0928002 090 097 009 008 00 002 802 _ 122 9 109 971 09 Y 09 092 9 91 009 00 Scc 886 112 661 6 081 08 Y SZ 9 2618002 T 092 9 61 009 9
258. will not be allowed to exceed this value Torque Neg Limit Sets the external torque limit for negative torque reference values The external negative motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value Mtring Power Lim Sets the maximum motoring positive power of the drive This can be calculated by multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed A value of 1 0 nominal motor power Regen Power Lim Sets the maximum regenerative negative power of the drive This can be calculated by multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed A value of 1 0 nominal motor power Note The default value for this parameter was changed from 1 0000 to 0 5000 for firmware version 2 03 Atune Trq Ref Sets the motor torque that is applied to the motor during the flux current and inertia tests Note The minimum value for this parameter was changed from 0 2500 to 0 2000 for firmware Values Default Min Max Scale Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Units Default Units Default M Units Default M Units D efault M Units Default Units Default Units Default version 2 03 Scale Min Max Min Max in Max in Max in Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 0 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0 Rated Motor Torque 1 0000 2200000000 0000
259. will trigger a torque feed forward response depending on its value FricComp Setup Enter or write a value to configure the friction compensation algorithm This is a packed word of 3 digits Each digit has a possible selection of 10 levels e The least significant digit sets the speed threshold in intervals of 0 0005 pu speed e The next middle digit sets the hysteresis band for the units digit in intervals of 0 0005 pu velocity e The most significant digit sets the number of time steps from stick to slip each step is 0 002 sec Example Value 524 means 5 time steps between stick and slip each of 0 002 sec duration 2 counts of hysteresis or 0 001 pu_speed each count is 0 0005 pu_speed and 4 counts or 0 002 pu speed is the trigger threshold each count is 0 0005 pu speed FricComp Stick The torque needed to break away from zero speed By nature of friction the break away sticktion will always be greater than the running friction FricComp Slip The torque level to sustain very low speed once break away has been achieved By nature of friction viscous friction will always be less than sticktion FricComp Rated The torque needed to keep the motor running at base speed and with no process loading The friction compensation algorithm assumes a linear or viscous component of friction between Par 67 FricComp Slip and Par 68 FricComp Rated FricComp Trq Add The torque reference output of the Friction Comp
260. word communicated from the PowerFlex 700S drive to an external controller via a DP communication module Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type Options 5 5 55 3 CC CC lt lt Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 76543210 1 True DPI Data Out A1 Default 0 4 RW Set by DPI Data Out A2 Min Max 32 dependant on Par 659 DPI Out Par 659 DPI Data Out B1 DataTypel DPI Data Out B2 DPI Data Out C1 DPI Data Out C2 DPI Data Out D1 DPI Data Out D2 These parameters display the output values communicated from the PowerFlex 700 drive to DPI communication modules Write Mask Enables disables write access parameters links etc for DPI ports Changes to this parameter only become effective when power is cycled the drive is reset or bit 15 Security of Par 712 Write Mask Act transitions from 1 to 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options E SE x 5 8 8 m 9 8138 5 2 2 5 9 Default 0 0 0 0 False Bit 7 654 3210 1 Tue Programming and Parameters 3 83 eo amp 5 2855 Description Values
261. 0 177 z z T Za Way q B E Nana y A f 9 0 0 35 Lifting Hole 21 0 0 83 67 gt 245 53 lt m is 967 lt 142 5 5 61 59 0 2 32 100 12 Y 69 amp TUAM 7 J Brake Option Top Hat Table A C Frame 9 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights Drive Input Drive amp AC Input Drive DC Input Drive amp DC Input Drive amp Rating Enclosure amp Packaging Enclosure Packaging Voltage Class Amps Weight kg Ibs Weight kg Ibs Weight kg Ibs Weight kg Ibs 400 480V 261 143 315 143 315 109 240 109 240 540 650V DC 400 480V AC 300 151 333 151 333 117 258 117 258 540 650V DC 600 690V 170 143 315 143 315 109 240 109 240 810 932V DC 600 690V AC 208 143 315 143 315 109 240 109 240 810 932V DC B C X p 0 LEE 480 18 9 1150 45 28 363 3 14 32 400 15 75 1120 44 09 Figure A 10 Frame 10 Dimensions A 597 23 5 C B 1 cC ____ 2275 89 57 632 45 24 9 534 7 21 05 Supplemental Information Dimensions are in millimeters and inches
262. 0 when encoderless ridethrough is enabled Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 227 Motor Posit Est Default 0 RO 32 bit Summation or integration of Par 226 Motor Speed Est scaled by the value in Par 225 Min Max 2147483648 Integer Virtual Edge Rev Programming and Parameters 3 33 No 228 229 230 231 232 Name Description MtrSpd Simulated The motor speed output of the motor simulator The motor simulator provides motor speed information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control is not desired or possible To use the motor simulator enter a value of 4 in Par 222 Mtr Sel Pri or 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt MtrPosit Simulat The motor position output of the motor simulator The motor simulator provides motor position information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control is not desired or possible To use the motor simulator enter a value of 4 in Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri or Par 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt Encdr0 Position Displays the position feedback accumulator from encoder 0 The value changes by a value of four times 4x the Pulses Per Revolution PPR rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft Used by the Velocity Position Loop VPL to close the position loop if position control is selected Encdr0 Spd Fdbk Displays the speed feedback from encoder 0 Calculated from the chan
263. 0 0 e Zel 0199IN0 L 059 057 058 002 ESE 0 09 6 80991N0 L oos 07 808 902 T Or e OLL 5 80991N04 I 009 07 282 192 10 eel 6 19 9514 ais uuewssng esnj 995 UIN L 1002 sduy 9o ZH GH JequinN ynduj MA oun E 6 9 4 uonoejoJd 1ndu HOA OS 25 Supplemental Information eq snu sng eu Jo pue eui perde eq snu sesnJ ssejo serdde W BU 19e3u09 esee d sasn p 19470 Aue 104 S ZIS PSH ed 72394 Jo pue z 3926 ese W024 ed sezis ie Syr ed uuewssng sasn_ sezis je 1630 V 008 3 009 VSAO 10 00 0 0 76 ON Y 00 01 06 ON unang ejpeig uellv sjoeuuoosiq sng Dd Jamod peAuep y jo oj eu pepnjour jou sjes Jo serddns Aayeg FN 81 067 HY OZ dN U se ssa 10 A009 Ov penuep eq JSNW SNA eainos BY S SOU jo eu siu ye
264. 0 1 717 PLL TP Select Default 0 Zero ase Locked Loop test point selection ione O Zero _ Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options Ba Once V 2 Position 17 k1 3 XtoV 18 4 DP 19 k3 5 Gain 20 pi 6 Pos Intg 21 Enable 7 22 In 8 Epr Cal 23 Out 9 24 Ve AnaPlsScl 10 Denom 25 Whl Accum 11 Egr Ratio 26 Ve Fre AccmF 12 A Comp 27 Ve Fre Acem 13 Comp 28 Dt 14 Pos Lpf Out 718 PLL TP DataDint Default 0 RO 32 bit Test point integer data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 717 PLL TP Select Min Max 2147483648 Integer is integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 719 PLL TP DataReal Default 0 0 RO Real Test point real data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 717 PLL TP Select is Min Max 2200000000 0000 not integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Programming and Parameters 3 87 Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 720 PLL Control Phase Locked Loop Control Bit 0 Vel FdFwd En When set enables the velocity feed forward path When cleared the feed forward path is disabled Bit 1 Ext Vel In When set enables external velocity feed for
265. 0 12000 20000 6 64 7 128 8 1256 9 512 10 1024 11 2048 12 4096 13 8192 14 16384 Spd Fdbk TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the data displayed in Par 246 Spd Fdbk TP RPM and Par 247 Spd Fdbk TP Data Note Option values 5 15 were changed to Reserved and option 41 First Diff was added for firmware version 2 04 Spd Fdbk TP RPM Displays the value selected used if the selected value is Spd Fdbk TP Data Displays the value selected in Par 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel in RPM This display should only be floating point data in Par 245 Spd Fdbk TP Sel This display should only be used if Programming and Parameters 3 37 the selected value is integer data Fdbk Option ID Displays information about the Feedback Option Bits 15 11 indicate Module ID Number Bits 10 6 indicate Version Number Bits 5 3 indicate Revision Number High Bits 2 0 indicate Revision Number Low Hexadecimal 1000 indicates resolver hexadecimal 2000 indicates old high resolution board and hexadecimal 2040 indicates new high resolution board FB Opt0 Posit Displays the position feedback accumulator from the feedback option card port 0 TE 2858 Values 52 8 Units PPR RW 16 bit Default 1024 Integer Min Max 10 20000 Default 0 Zero Options 0 Zero 21 EPR 1 Clock Time 22 E0 Edge Mode 2 nactvFbkDev 23 EO nMax 3
266. 0 6 14 20 Di b D etai C zi 04 4 entrate 312 12 28 Y E N 11 6 126 3 8 5 0 33 p Holes aces Er Xu 12 7 0 50 Dia Y Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight Slim oe ES L Refer to E 231 530 E T LE Vots 2925 5l page 2 oa for 205 Mer ien 2 Weights include and Standard I O 3 an additional 3 6 kg 8 00 Ibs for 200 HP drives kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 91 85 202 5 Frame Supplemental Information A 39 Figure A 8 Frame 6 Bottom View 222 0 87 34 9 1 37 Dia 4 Places 123 5 4 86 62 7 2 47 Dia 3 Places 242 0 ing 2223 185 4 8 75 1485 O0 O O O4O O O 7 30 5 85 E 538 459 555535555 555 _ OOQOOO Y Y d 1 Y y Y 67 3 2 65 4 1144 45 1194 47 136 4 5 37 lt gt 197 4 7 77 297 4 11 7 11 7 347 4 13 7 397 4 15 6 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches 40 Supplemental Information Figure A 9 Frame 9 Dimensions A Dimensions are in millimeters and inches 5 0 0 20 n m 5 gt 14 0 0 55 lt 240 0 9 45 gt 9 0 0 35 339 5 13 37 55 45
267. 0 SL Buf Data Tx01 971 Regen Power Lim 128 Selected Trq Ref 319 SL Buf Data Tx02 972 RegisLtch0 Value 235 SelSwtch DIntOut 1046 SL Buf Data Tx03 973 RegisLtch0 1Cnfg 236 SelSwtch RealOut 1045 SL Buf Data Tx04 974 RegisLtch0 1 Ctrl 237 SrLssAngleStblty 537 SL Buf Data Tx05 975 RegisLtch0 1 Stat 238 SrLss VoltStblty 538 SL Buf Data Tx06 976 RegisLtch1 Value 239 SrLss StbltyFilt 539 SL Buf Data Tx07 977 Reserved 0 Servo Lock Gain 85 SL Buf Data Tx08 978 Reslvr0 CableBal 276 Set Speed Lim 171 SL Buf Data Tx09 979 Reslvr0 Carrier 273 Setpt 1 Data 172 SL Buf Data Tx10 980 Reslvr In Volts 274 Setpt 1 Limit 174 SL Buf Data Tx11 981 Reslvr0 SpdRatio 272 Setpt 2 Data 175 SL Buf Data Tx12 982 Reslvr0 TP Data 271 Setpt 2 Limit 177 SL Buf Data Tx13 983 Reslvr0 TP Sel 270 Setpt TripPoint 173 SL Buf Data Tx14 984 Reslvr0 Type Sel 277 Setpt2 TripPoint 176 SL Buf Data Tx15 985 Resolver0 Cnfg 268 Sft OvrTrviCnfg 396 SL Buf Data Tx16 986 Resolver Status 269 Skip Speed 1 136 SL Buf Data Tx17 987 Rev Speed Limit 75 Skip Speed 2 137 SL Buf Data Tx18 988 Rly Out3 Bit 857 Skip Speed 3 138 SL Buf Data Tx19 989 Rly Out3 Data 856 Skip Speed Band 139 SL Buf Data Tx20 990 Rly Out3 OffTime 859 SL BOF Err Accum 896 SL Buf Data Tx21 991 Rly Out3 On Time 858 SL BOF Err Limit 899 SL Buf Data Tx22 992 Rly Out3 Sel 855 SL BOF Error 897 SL Buf Data Tx23 993 Rotor Resistance 502 SL Buf Data Rx00 934 SL Buf Data Tx24 994 Rslvr0 XfrmRatio 275 SL Buf Data Rx01 935 SL Buf Data Tx25 995 RsTem
268. 00 without exceeding the rated element temperature You may change the value of this Min Max 1 0000 1000000000 0000 parameter only if you have selected an external DB resistor set bit 1 Brake Extern of Par 414 Brake Bus Cnfg If this rating is not available from the resistor vendor you can approximate it with this equation Par 416 Brake PulseWatts 75 000 x Weight where Weight equals the weight of resistor wire element in pounds not the entire weight of the resistor Another equation you can use is Par 416 Brake PulseWatts Time Constant x Brake Watts where Time Constant equals the amount of time to reach 63 of its rated temperature while the maximum power is applied and Brake Watts is the peak power rating of the resistor Note The maximum value was changed from 1000000 0000 to 1000000000 0000 for firmware version 3 01 Programming and Parameters 3 63 No 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 Name Description Values Brake Watts Units Sets the continuous rated power reference for the Dynamic Brake DB You may change Default the value of this parameter only if you have selected and external DB resistor set bit 1 Brake Extern of Par 414 Brake Bus Note The maximum value was changed from 5000 0000 to 500000 0000 for firmware version 3 01 Brake TP Sel Default Enter or write a value to select the drive brake data dis
269. 000 RW Real The second detector in set or hold modes compares this value to its input for level detection Min Max 2200000000 0000 When the detector trips in set mode it transfers the value of this parameter to its output 219 PeakDetect2 Out Default 0 00 RO Real Output from the second peak level detector Min Max 0 00 1200 00 221 Load Estimate Unit RO Real Displays the estimated load torque which is the side effect of the speed observer and does Default 0 0 not include torque to accelerate decelerate the motor if the inertia input is correct The _ Min Max 8 0 pu value is provided for display purposes 222 Fdbk Sel Pri Default 0 Encoder 0 Selects primary feedback device The primary feedback device configuration must not be set Options 0 Encoder 0 4 Motor Sim to fault an event in order to allow operational feedback switch over to the alternate 7 Encoder 1 5 FB Opt feedback device set in Par 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt 2 Sensorless Notes Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode must be set to FOC for Sensorless feedback selection to be 3 Reserved active Selection 5 is only available when compatible feedback option card is installed This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt Default 2 Sensorless ee feedback device if the feedback device selected in Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Op
270. 000 for firmware version 4 001 Fix LpassFilt BW Sets the bandwidth of the low pass filter that adjusts the response of the flux estimate used in the torque to current conversion Since the field time constant varies between motors a better control response may be obtained by adjusting the filter time constant Normally this parameter is not changed unless a significant disturbance occurs as the motor enters field weakening AND Par 360 Min Flux is less than 1 per unit Current Limit Gain Sets the responsiveness of the current limit This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Ki Current Limit Current Limit Integral gain This gain is applied to the current limit error signal to eliminate steady state current limit error A larger value increases overshoot during a step of motor current load This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Kd Current Limit Current Limit Derivative gain This gain is applied to the sensed motor current to anticipate a current limit condition A larger value reduces overshoot of the current relative to the current limit value This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri Fdbk LsCnfg Alt Fdbk LsCnfgPosit Enter a value fo configure the drive s response to an Encoder 0 1 Loss exception event 0
271. 000 0 0 0 10000 0 Linkable Read Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Real 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Programming and Parameters 3 77 8 5 255 Description Values 225 548 Bus Reg ACR Kp Default 225 0 RW 16 bit This proportional gain in conjunction with Par 545 Bus Reg Ki adjusts the output Min Max 0 0 100000 Integer frequency of the drive during a bus limit or inertia ride through condition The output frequency is adjusted in response to an error in the active or torque producing current to maintain the active bus limit or inertia ride through bus reference A larger value of gain reduces the dynamic error of the active current Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 549 Vuv Fdbk Offset Default 16384 0 RW 16 bit Displays the motor U phase to V phase offset voltage from the voltage feedback circuit The Min Max 15764 0 17004 0 Integer value of the offset is a uni polarity signal A zero offset is equal to 16384 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 550 Fdbk Offset Default 16384 0 RW 16 bit Displays the motor V phase to W phase offset voltage from the v
272. 000 0 5000 Turn off level for ascending data TripPoint 2 Limit e Turn on level for descending data TripPoint Limit Turn off level for descending data TripPoint 2 Limit 175 Setpt2 Data Unit P U 4 Real Provides data for comparison to Par 176 Setpt2 TripPoint driving bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Default 0 0000 Par 155 Logic Status For more information please see Setpt 2 Data on page C 8 Min Max 8 0000 pu 176 Setpt2 TripPoint Unit Real Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 17 Above Setpt 2 of Par 155 Logic Status Default 10 2000 Min Max 8 0000 pu 177 Setpt2 Limit Units 4 RW Real Creates a tolerance hysteresis band around the value in Par 176 Setpt2 TripPoint Default 0 0100 For positive setpoints Min Max 0 0000 0 5000 Turn on level TripPoint e Turn off level TripPoint Limit For negative setpoints Turn on level TripPoint e Turn off level TripPoint Limit 178 PI TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select Process Control PI data displayed by Par 179 PI TP Data Options 0 Zero 7 Status Hold The values for options 1 amp 8 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 M42 Reserved 8 Reserved 2 LPF Output 9 Reset Status 3 P Gain Term 10 Time Axis En 4 Reg Output 11 Enbl Status 5 On Intg Lim 12 Out Max Lim 6 On Out Limit 13 Out Min Lim 17
273. 0000 1 0000 Heatsink Temp Units degC Displays the measured temperature of the drive s heatsink Default 0 0000 Min Max 30 0000 200 0000 VPL Firmware Rev Default 1 003 Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive s Velocity Position Loop VPL Min Max 0 001 99 999 software Scale 1000 Notes The default value was changed from 1 11 to 2 03 for firmware version 2 03 The default value was changed from 2 03 to 3 01 for firmware version 3 01 Changed all values to three decimal places for firmware version 4 001 VPL Build Number Default 1 Displays the build number of the drive s Velocity Position Loop VPL software Min Max 1 10000 Note The default value was changed from 8001 to 1 for firmware version 2 03 SynchLink Status Indicates status of SynchLink functions Bit Opt Prsnt indicates the presence of an optional feedback daughter card e Bit 1 Prsnt indicates the presence of encoder 0 e Bit2 Prsnt indicates the presence of encoder 1 Bit 3 In Sync indicates SynchLink communications is synchronized Bit 4 Tx Active indicates TX frames are being transmitted downstream from this node e Bit 5 Rx Active indicates RX frames are being received from nodes upstream Bit 15 Rx Data Enb indicates received data is being updated Note Bit 8 Open Wire was changed to Reserved and bit 12 SOB Present and bit 14 Reset Req d were added for firmware
274. 00000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Linkable Read Write F Data Type RO RW RW RO RW RW RO RW RW RW RO RW RW RW RO 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real Real Real Real 32 bit Integer Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 3 108 Programming and Parameters 8 SE Name s No Description Values 1061 Logic Config Set this parameter to configure the logic routine in Pars 1063 1070 The result of this logic routine is displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State There are three configurable logic blocks as displayed below Each block can be configured as AND NAND OR XOR NXOR Select the functions as desired Multiple operation selection for one block will result in the first selection least significant bit being the active mode Logic Config Logic Cmpr State Lido An bal p Logic 1 Result Logic Bit 1064 Or Nor 4 1062 Logic 1B Data heal Logic 3 Result Logic 1B Bit Or Nor 1062X 02 Logic 2B Data 1069 B Logic 2B Bit 1070 Options c a c a c a 2 2 5 5 2 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 25 5 555 FSS 2 5 2 2 5 2 5 2 5
275. 005 09 OLL 09 08 09 Z66 227 09 Y 0 Ov 6904906 0001 NIND IN SY2 383 IN 05 091 091 05 06 05 89 9 0 SOC 292 09 Y Sc 08 07049906 619 0007 NINO IN SY9 383 N x 05 9211 Sel 0 0 0 vS 72 692 CIE 09 Y 06 Sc z 7509005 497 000b NO W c 0 383 N 05 00 001 98 09 98 88 15 900 872 05 Y Sk 02 z 200000 682 00SC NINO IN Sc0 383 IN 9Z9 380 W 929 3Z9 N 0 08 08 90 09 Sc cte cc 99 61 09 Ob Sti 6509906 919 384 N 919 38 910 420 N 0c 08 091 94 06 94 ce 991 YOL Seb 09 Y SZ Ob 7100906 eve 910 383 N 910 38C N 910 420 N 1 Or 0v 91 0c Gt GOL 62 S6 09 9 SZ 1100005 Ole 019 383 N 019 38 010 420 N 1 0 0 0 91 0 88 08 9 69 05 Y S 0489005 SEL 98 380 N 98 3cO N 2 0c 0c 9 01 9 S7 95 09 ce 6 09 Y z 0459006 4 Org 38Q N 078 320 W L 1 et Y 8 09 Sv 95 09 Gk z vdeaaoc 601 s S 8 320 W SL 8 9 ct vi 9L 08 9 0 bkdeadoe SHEM op 9 quinN 9 9 gj UIN g UIN 995 Ul 3409 VA sduy 2 QN 3 JequinN 5507 2201991014 BOG sny ejog asn4 5 SHEM yuading ajqejsn py 9 105419 _ 1n2112
276. 0056 002 SvGL SELL 0801 8501 000L L 0513906 0692 0011 00vc 00vc 0011 0081 OCcL 028 908 0 e 008 0692 0011 00vc c 00 0021 c 008 002 O8EL 026 106 0061 066306 sud 2 066 54890 2 349 4 4 2 00 sudiedz 68011 058 006 sud 198 006 492 9 098 49 007 49199 098 0 01 G 6 099 999 96 059 z s d1 d 2 002 5401902 066 50 902 006 540 108 2 066 8011 00 OOP 49 198 OOH sud go 54998 1 008 sudsed 001 206 028 928 96 4 008 21 1068306 sud sed 2 066 540 902 54090 2 00 5890 2 0 60 098 0061 sud ed 006 sudsed 1 ogg 548 00 49199 098 OZLL 926 099 999 c 059 E 5401902 001 49 2 9 2 sudjedz oog sudjedz 0 60 0001 0022 sud 198 gogz 54098 1 096 sudsed 1 0091 549 190 096 OZLL 98 092 994 01 eb 054306 sud 2 098 49 9 2 gc 49 9 099 54000 2 sve 9096 008 0021 sud 199 00 sudsed 1 09 sudsed 1 0081 54990 06 2901 988 069 769 0 e 099 syd 2 066 sudsedz sudsedz 004 sudsed 2 cay 2096 098 006 49 198 006 sudsed 1 098 548 1 007 849290 098 2901 SIZ 099 999 0 9 cL 0993406 SREM 9 2 UIN p
277. 006 099 078 059 Ocv eer 0 092 269 007 009 0081 099 000 099 092 0SS 00S 709 0961010059406 gees 009 001 0001 00S 098 00S 0 8 9 986 88 002 H Sees 009 006 0021 009 0001 009 024 90S 097 97 082 01 0979006 0557 007 006 006 007 059 007 009 057 008 608 091 H 0557 009 00 000 009 098 00S 009 988 885 0051019889406 001 007 00 004 ose 00S OSE 06 896 9 0 cel E 001 007 006 006 007 099 00 OSr 066 008 605 091 6 0059006 00 5 00 009 009 S c 057 9 6 017 805 902 402 Obl E 00 0 00 00 002 096 099 OSE Olv 482 190 96 0 2281 6 1929000 SHeM XEN XEN g Xen UIN g a WN 995 4409 sduy 9 1 Jequnw SS0 40199 04d 4042019 esn4 euirj uoN euirj jueure 3 jeng sdwy jndjno sbuneg S bojes SHEM 1040 5 ynduy Md LL 6 uonoeroJd Dy 30A 00t Supplemental Information A 12 v1 1010 Jo 921 S ezis DAN Sn 104 exteeiq dui snoeuejuejsur 101291014 JOJON 104 eq jsnu ezis 19eX3 SN Aq uwous W715 20100 jo 921 51
278. 087x5 12 Reserved 4 MPL 460v 13 Reserved 5 Reserved 14 AmciR11XC107 6 Siemens 1FT6 15 PowerTec R1 7 PrkrHn 2 600 16 PowerTec R2 8 Reserved 3 44 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values 285 Linear Config Used to configure a linear encoder when a Multi Device Interface MDI feedback card is installed Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 e Bit 5 Direction Setting this bit to 1 inverts the count up down direction of the linear feedback position Par 252 FB Posit If FB Posit has been Linkable Read Write Data Type counting up for forward feedback sensor travel then setting this bit will cause FB Opt1 Posit to count down The opposite behavior will occur when the sensor moves in the other direction Bit 6 Stahl Linear Setting this bit to 1 indicates to the MDI card that a Stahl type linear device is being used It this bit is set to 0 then a Temposonics linear device is being used e Bits 10 12 form a 3 bit moving average filter sampling rate See Table 285A Sample Rate Bit Settings Options Default 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 N 0 8 N 9 Reserved e IStahl Linear 9 Direction Reserved lt 9 lReserved N 2 Reserved Reserved 0 0
279. 09 8 76543210 1 True Table 254A Edge Selection Settings Table 2548 Direction Settings Bit 4 20 3 19 Bit 6 22 5 21 0 0 Capture on rising edge 0 Disable capture 0 1 Capture on falling edge 0 1 Capture position during Reverse rotation 1 0 on both edges 1 0 Capture position during Forward rotation 1 1 Disable capture 1 1 Capture position during either rotation 255 Opt0 1 RegisCtrl Configures the registration control on port 0 of the feedback option card e Set bits 0 OO Arm Req and 16 01 Arm to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input e Set bits 1 00 DisarmReq and 17 01 DisarmReq to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event After the registration is captured bit 0 O0 Arm Req and bit 16 O1 Arm Req automatically resets back to 0 after found Bit 1 O0 DisarmReq and bit 17 O1 DisarmReq are only needed to disarm a registration latch that has not been found yet Setting bits 1 and 17 will clear the bits 0 and 6 Setting bits 0 and 6 sets bits 0 0 Armed and bit 16 Opti Armed and clears bits 1 Opto Found and bit 17 Found of parameter 256 Opt0 1 RegisStat Options Ed cg cg lt E 5 o Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
280. 0c 08 012 6 961 009 v 092 009 009 osz 9 6 ose 950 2811 021 199 009 06 9 0 1000 m 091 00 00 091 900 OSL 01 891 SOL 969 Lel 009 99 060 _ 007 002 002 00c Olc 79 OvL 6 996 009 Y SZ 9 0719406 091 96 9 6 Sel 00c Scl 89 trl 96 7 9 LOL 009 yy a 092 922 009 091 9 0 09 691 821 921 628 1101 009 Y SS S 9519900 091 002 00 OLL 921 OL 04 821 98 799 718 009 091 00 00 Sel 900 921 891 911 901 96919001 009 Y 95 9 9019406 00 008 9 0 06 g l 06 801 cZ 987v 689 08 vw up 09 002 _ 002 OLL 00c OlL 8cl 76 98 799 718 05 Y Sv 9809007 001 0921 080 06 091 06 cll 8 22827 689 S v 0 16 c 0000c z 00 00c 00c 0 Sel 04 98 9 99 19 69 09 06 9909406 09 09 __ 09 09 06 09 74 991 207 08 Y 981 8709406 979 383 5 05 92 961 Sy 08 Sy 09 4 181 096 08 Y 9198 Z 2200002 2 9 384 N 05 06 021 96 09 Ge 9 5 08 1 61 80 05 Y tb St e 0t0900c 969 38 4 S 0 480 W 0 320 N 0 08 08 0 Sy 06 66 cre 90c 09 Y 6 H 550906 022 384 W 0c0 38 W 029 3c9 N 0c 09 09 0c 06 OZ bee 221 S 001 vv 08 Y SS GZ L 5105000 919 383 N 919 38 N 910 3 0 W 9 Sy Sy 91 Sc 9 Zt SH 92 801 08 Y t GS L 10000 019 383 W 0 9 380 W _ 010 320 W 9 0 0 9 91 91 cel 66 28 GS
281. 1 Unit RO Rea Displays the final speed command used by the Speed Regulator It is the sum of Par 46 Default 0 0000 Scaled Spd Ref and Par 21 Speed Trim 1 Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 48 _ 5 Ref Bypass2 Units RW Rea The speed command after the limit ramp and s curve blocks Link a source directly to this Default 0 0000 parameter to bypass these blocks Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 49 Selected SpdRefA Units RPM RO Rea Used to view the value of Speed Reference A Par 27 Speed Ref A Sel from a Human Default 0 0000 Interface Module HIM Min Max 8 0000 Note This parameter is new for firmware version 3 01 50 X Selected SpdRefB Units RO Rea Used to view the value of Speed Reference B Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel from a HIM Default 0 0000 Note This parameter is new for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 8 0000 53 Drive Ramp Rsit Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the speed reference value after the limit function This is the input to the error Min Max 262144 Integer calculator and speed regulator Available for use in peer to peer data links DPI interface This number is scaled so that rated motor speed will read 32768 54 Inertia TrqLpfBW Units R S RW Rea Sets the bandwidth of the inertia compensation torque output low pass filter A value of 0 0 will Default 35 0000 disable the filter Min Max 0 0000 2000 0000 N
282. 1 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 UserFunct Enable UserFunct Actual UserData Dint 01 UserData Dint 02 UserData Dint 03 UserData Dint 04 UserData Dint 05 UserData Dint 06 UserData Dint 07 UserData Dint 08 UserData Dint 09 UserData Dint 10 UserData Real 01 UserData Real 02 UserData Real 03 UserData Real 04 UserData Real 05 UserData Real 06 UserData Real 07 UserData Real 08 UserData Real 09 UserData Real 10 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 Sel Switch Ctrl Swtch Real 1 NC Swtch Real 1 NO Swtch Real 1 Out Swtch Dint 1 NC Swtch Dint 1 NO Swtch Dint 1 Out Sel Swtch In00 Sel Swtch In01 Sel Swtch In02 Sel Swtch In03 Sel Swtch In04 Sel Swtch In05 Sel Swtch In06 Sel Swtch In07 Sel Swtch In08 Sel Swtch In09 Sel Swtch In10 Sel Swtch In11 Sel Swtch In12 Sel Swtch In13 Sel Swtch In14 Sel Switch In15 SelSwtch RealOut SelSwtch DIntOut rol M Math amp Logic 1047 1048 1049 1150 1151 1152 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 DInt2Real1 In Dint2Real1 Scale Dint2Real1 Result Dint2Real2 In Dint2Real2 Scale Dint2Real2Result Real2Dint In Real2
283. 1 is set to Jog2 Multiple inputs configured as Fwd Rev Reprogram Par 825 830 so only 1 is set to Fwd Rev 14 Invalid Feedback Device for Permanent Magnet Motor Control Fault Set Par 222 to Value 5 FB Opt Table 2 C Common Start Up Faults Description Action Encoder Loss One of the following has occurred on an encoder missing encoder broken wire quadrature error phase loss Reconnect encoder or replace encoder Motor Overload A motor overload is pending Enter correct motor nameplate full load amps Par 2 Motor NP FLA or reduce excess load Motor Poles Fault Assisted Start Up The poles of the motor do not match its rating Enter correct motor nameplate information Par 4 Motor NP RPM If any digital input is configured to Stop CF CF Clear Faults verify the signal is present or the drive will not start Refer to Chapter 4 for a list of potential digital input conflicts If a fault code appears refer to Chapter 4 The STS LED should be flashing green or bit 1 Sts Ready of parameter 554 LED Status should be set at this point 8 Proceed to the Assisted Start Up routine below This routine prompts you for information needed to start up a drive for most applications such as line and motor data commonly adjusted parameters and I O Important When using the Start Up Assistant always exit the Assistant before cycling power on th
284. 1 0000 4 Real Input value to be added to and or subtracted from as need with the Add and Subtract function 2200000000 0000 This input will be added with Par 1097 AddSub 1 Add The result will be subtracted from by the value in Par 1098 AddSub 1 Subtrct The result of the operation is loaded to Par 1099 AddSub 1 Result Equation Par 1096 Par 1097 Par 1098 Par 1099 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 3 110 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 Programming and Parameters Name Description AddSub 1 Add This value is added to the value of Par 1096 AddSub 1 Input The result will be subtracted from by Par 1098 and loaded into Par 1099 See Par 1096 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 1 Subtrct This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1096 Par 1097 The result will be loaded into Par 1099 See Par 1096 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 1 Result This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function See Par 1096 Par 1096 Par 1097 Par 1098 Equation Par 1099 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Input Input value to be added to and or subtracted from as need with the Add and Subtract function This input will be added with Par 1101 AddSub 2 Add The res
285. 1 11 and bit 11 SmplRate1 is set to 1 True by default for firmware version 2 03 Options olo l l l l l l l 2 2 l l l l 5 5 55555555555 9555 33 81818 8 8 c jui cm o Defaut 0 0 00 0 0 0 jo 0 jo 1 JO 0 0 jo 0 0 O 1 jo JO JO 0 O 1 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Verus Table 268A Resolution Settings Table 268D FIR Filter Settings Bit3 2 Hosein Bit 12 11 10 Taps 0 0 10 bit resolution 0 0 0 1 O 1 12 bit resolution default setting 0012 1 0 14 i 0 1 0 4 1 1 16 bit resolution 0 11 8 Table 268B Resolution and Least Significant Bits Used T BR AR Resolution LSB Not Used Parameter 250 Increments by 1 20 4 i bit Albitsused 1 NR a 14 bit 2LSB notused 4 a pom er 12 bit 4LSB notused 8 10 bit 6 LSB used 64 Table 268C Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed Resolution Maximum Tracking Speed Tracking Speed Tracking Speed Carrier Freq for X1 Resolver for X2 Resolver for X5 Resolver 10 bit 34 kHz 55 K rpm 27 5 K rpm 11 K rpm 12 bit 24kHz 13 8 K rpm 6 9 K
286. 1 2 on page 1 11 will select single or three phase operation Remove plastic guard to access jumper Important When selecting single phase operation input power must be applied to the R L1 and S L2 terminals only Cooling Fan Voltage Common Bus drives require user supplied 120 or 240V AC to power the cooling fans The power source is connected between AC and the terminal corresponding to your source voltage see Figure 1 4 on page 1 14 Table 1 B Fan VA Rating Frame _ Voltage 120V or 240V 5 100 VA 6 138 VA Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage Frames 5 amp 6 Only power to the drive has been removed before performing ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all the following Frames 5 amp 6 utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the internal fan voltage If your line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate it may be necessary to change the transformer taps The taps are shown in Figure 1 2 on page 1 11 Installation Wiring 1 11 Figure 1 2 Frames 5 amp 6 Jumper and Transformer Locations Frame 5 shown Phase Selection Jumper 3 PH 1 PH LINE TYPE SPARE 1 SPARE 2 Fan Voltage 690 Volt Tap 600 Volt Tap 480 Volt Tap 400 Volt Tap Frame 6
287. 1 9 0 9 1 0921 961 02 209 cel 09 09 z gt 092 097 009 005 002 002 1220 691 vSL 109 91 09 09 9 7319905 z 091 002 00 921 Gee Sel 921 99 vOL 9 07 86 09 Y 0 5 0Sc 9 61 005 94 9 0 911 921 271 021 ZOG 08 Y 09 9 0218002 0006 NINO IN zi zi 001 005 008 001 921 00 09 Oct 08 SOE eZ 09 Os m 091 002 00 951 Gee 961 921 vOL 9 07 86 09 Y 0 9 7019005 0006 NINO IN 00 002 00 001 081 001 Ovl SOL 08 906 222 09 Y 9 02 v 0809008 0006 NINO IN z 001 Gle 9 0 06 091 061 901 8 01 Z9c cv9 08 S2 v 0109906 00 9 NINO IN m zs 001 00c 006 09 00 09 08 59 091 861 227 08 Y Sb 0 5609906 00 9 NINO IN 970 384 09 091 091 09 06 09 9 9 091 986 09 Y Ob 9 crogaoc 00 7 c O 3823 IN 09 00 00 92 09 gE 144 80 292 09 Y 94 Ob 809000 00Sc NINO IN ScO 383 W Sc0 38 W S20 420 N 0 08 08 Sc 09 92 Eel cre 8 661 08 S 87 ecogaoc 910 383 910 38CW 910 320 0 09 09 0c 0 0c 6 891 2911 9 ZEL 08 Y 9 119109006 019 3823 N 019 38C W 0L9 3c9 N 91 98 98 et 0c 90 96 vel 28 09 Y 9469008 019 384 019 38Q W 019 329 Sh Ge Ge 0L 91 Ol et 6 89 69 09 Y Gt 8499008 699 380 011 98 3c9 N L 9 SL S 8 S 79 ey vi 09 9 0 L edvadoe S equinw Bojeye WIN
288. 1025 SL System Rev 901 SpdTrim2 Filt BW 26 SynchLink Rev 900 SL System Time 317 Speed Comp 55 SynchLink Status 316 SL Tx CommFormat 910 Speed Error 100 TachSwitch Level 224 SL Tx DirectSelo 911 Speed Ref 1 10 Test Current Ref 431 SL Tx DirectSel1 912 Speed Ref 2 12 Test Freq Rate 433 SL Tx DirectSel2 913 Speed Ref A Sel 27 Test Freq Ref 432 SL Tx DirectSel3 914 Speed Ref B Sel 28 Test Mode Config 514 SLAT Dwell Time 120 Speed Ref Scale 38 Time Axis Output 203 SLAT ErrorSetpnt 119 Speed Trim 1 21 Time Axis Rate 202 SlewRateTimeLimit 533 Speed Trim 2 22 To DL DataType 625 SlipReg Err Lmt 587 Speed Trim 3 23 To DriveLogix00 626 SlipReg Off 14 461 Speed TorqueMode 110 To DriveLogix01 627 SlipReg On Hystr 593 SReg FB Filt BW 94 To DriveLogix02 628 Slip Comp Gain 99 SReg Out Filt BW 96 To DriveLogix03 629 Slip Gain 98 SReg Trq Preset 87 To DriveLogix04 630 Slip Gain Max 445 SRegFB Filt Gain 93 To DriveLogix05 631 Slip Gain Min 446 SRegOut FiltGain 95 To DriveLogix06 632 Slip Preload Val 552 SrLss Angl Comp 541 To DriveLogix07 633 Slip Ratio 525 SrLss FreqReg Ki 449 To DriveLogix08 634 Programming and Parameters 3 123
289. 105 105 55 096 96 75 325V Y 125 125 55 125 125 100 P 540V dc Y 170 170 90 156 156 125 R 650V dc Y 205 205 110 180 180 150 T 810V dc EN Y 260 260 132 248 248 200 W 932V dc Y 261 261 132 261 261 200 Note CE Certification testing has not been SUD 300 160 200 300 250 performed on 600V class drives Frames 1 4 385 385 200 385 385 300 Frames 5 amp 6 Only 460 460 250 460 460 350 38 Frames 5 amp up 500 500 250 500 500 450 8 For DC input on Frames 1 4 use the 590 590 315 590 590 500 corresponding AC input code B C D or E 650 650 355 650 650 500 730 730 400 730 730 600 c1 820 820 450 820 820 700 ND Rating 920 920 500 920 920 800 208 240V 60Hz Input 1K0 1030 560 1K0 1030 900 dias 208V 240V 1 1 1150 630 1 1 1150 1000 Amps Amps 1K3 1300 710 1K3 1300 1200 4P2 4 8 4 2 1 0 1K4 1450 800 1K4 1450 1250 6P8 7 8 6 8 2 0 9P6 11 9 6 3 0 015 17 5 15 3 5 0 022 25 3 22 7 5 028 32 2 28 10 042 48 3 42 15 052 56 52 20 070 78 2 70 25 080 92 80 30 104 120 104 40 130 130 130 50 154 177 154 60 192 221 192 75 260 260 260 100 6 Overview Catalog Number Explanation Cont d c4 c5 j ND Rating ND Rating Comm Slot
290. 131 PPMP Pos Mul Default 1 IRW 32 bit Part of the input scale block Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1130 PPMP_ Min Max 1 2000000 Integer Pos Command Also see Par 1132 PPMP Pos Div The scale block is enabled by setting bit 4 of Par 1134 PPMP Control The the intermediate product must be 31 bits Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1132 PPMP Pos Div Default 1 RW 32 bit Part of input scale block Set this value as the divisor of the product of Par 1130 PPMP Pos Min Max 1 2000000 Integer Command and Par 1131 PPMP Pos Mul Integer math applies The scale block is enabled by setting bit 4 of Par 1134 PPMP Control Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Programming and Parameters 3 113 8 2 575 5 No Description Values 5 1133 PPMP Scaled Default 0 32 bit Indicates the result of integer scaling of the position reference for the Motion planner or the Min Max 2147483648 Integer Position loop The units are counts Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1134 Control Establishes the operating condition for the Motion Planner The operating mode s is selected if the corresponding bit is set Bit 0 Absolute Absolute mode When using the Homing function while in Absolute mode the value in Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref must be set relati
291. 16 bit Displays the current regulator feedforward compensation Do not change this value Default 0 Integer Min Max 10 100 470 Flux Reg P Gain2 Default 1000 RW 16 6 Displays the additional proportional gain used at the start of Bus voltage limited field Min Max 0 32767 Integer weakening Do not change this value 471 Estimated Torque Default 0 0 RO Real Displays the calculated motor shaft torque Min Max 8 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 472 PreCharge Delay Units Sec RW 16 bit Adjusts the delay between the time all other precharge conditions have been met and the Default 2 0 Integer time the drive leaves the precharge state Can be used to control the sequence of Min Max 0 0 Calculated precharge completion in a drive system The maximum value of this parameter is calculated as follows Par 472 PreCharge Delay Par 410 PreChrg TimeOut 1 0 second 473 474 Name Description MC TP2 Select Programming and Parameters 3 69 Linkable Read Write Data Type Enter a value to select Motor Control MC data displayed in Par 474 MC TP2 Value and Par 468 MC TP1 Bit Par 474 MC TP2 Value and Par 468 MC TP1 Bit are diagnostic tools you can use to view internal drive parameters This parameter should not be changed by the user The default value is option 0 MulqsRef2 Note This parameter was added Options 0 MulgsRef2 1 SlipRatio 2 Ws 3 WrEst2 4 We 5
292. 167 168 169 170 171 RWVvOut RWVwOut RWuErr RWvErr RWwErr RWVuOut2 RWVvOut2 RWVwOut2 RWPosState RWNegState BusDropVolts RecoverVolts DbDuty VdsFdbkFitr VqsFdbkFltr VbusFdbkFltr VbusMemory VpEncOVelFbk VpEnc1VelFbk VPOptOVelFbk VPOpt1 VelFbk BitSelect1 BitSelect2 SrLssWeEst2 MulqsRef2 EstThetaByMV ETVdsFbkA ETVqsFbkA ETVdsFbkS ETVqsFbkS ETAtanVqVd ETByMtrVDfr VelRef2 VelOutput Reserved FrameSize VdTargetMon ThetaELiner PprCntDfcOt PprCntDfcTh LinearPprOnt ActiveFdbk VdsComp 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 VqsComp 215 54096 2 5V 216 FregAdjustFS 217 Reserved 218 219 220 WeMon 221 Reserved 222 IqsCmd2 223 Reserved 224 Reserved 225 Reserved 226 VLmtVqsRef 227 VRefVqsRefNm 228 VRefRslqsNm 229 VRefVqsSpdVN 230 EconoVoltGn 231 F Output Fre 232 TrqCreflasCm 233 Snk Wr 234 SrLssWrAve 235 CurFbklgsFbk 236 ACRIqsErr 237 CrefsqldsCmd 238 CurFbkldsFbk 239 VqsCmd700B 240 VdsCmc700B 241 VqsRefNom 242 VqsRslqsNom 243 VqsSpdVitNom 244 VitLmtVqsRef 245 IdsFbkDeriv 246 VdsRefNom 247 VdsRsldsNom 248 VdsSpdVitNom 249 VitLmtV
293. 198 2 ggg 49 5401902 69 sud sed z 8297 008 00 1 49 sed 1 00 1 49 229 OGZ Sud sed 0081 49 99 1 OGZ 2901 998 066 769 00S sud 190 2 066 sud4ed 2 49 1902 002 sud Jed 2 8297 008 0061 sud sed 006 49 198 098 sud ied 840 298 098 5901 91 1 099 829 0 4 005 11 0999406 540 2 06 sud4ed 2 ogg sud sed 2 ogg sud 2 098 099 004 008 sud 1 009 sud ed 00 sud ied gor sud 299 00 996 08 029 ves Ov 057 d sud ied 2 ggg sud g c 5401902 009 sud 100 2 0299 008 0021 sud 1d 00 sud 1ed 061 sud ied 0061 sud 299 06 996 679 069 0 8 0 0060 0650000 269 009 0021 002 099 006 099 078 069 Oct Ect 0 0 i 1069 00 0051 0051 099 000 069 0S7 099 00S 687 ov 2 057 01 0059406 Gees 009 00 00 009 098 009 024 8 9 982 858 0 00 g 6666 009 0051 0051 009 0001 009 0 909 09 0 092 01 0979906 0557 007 006 006 007 099 007 009 057 005 206 07 092 0557 009 00 00 008 098 009 009 pev 9825 e 0 2 008 01 9884906 001 00t 002 002 066 009 066 06 89 Sr Lye 00c 001 007 006 006 00 069 007 057 056 005 062 092 6 0084906 00 6 00 009 009 6 0 osp 6 0 0171 80 900 202 0 c 091 E 00 6 007 00 00 098 099 095 186 196 090 0 002 6 19 0 0
294. 20 5250 1326AS B440G 460 54 149 0 2980 2 00 6 16 2 6 40 5250 1326AS B460F 460 62 148 5 2970 2 80 6 18 6 9 00 4300 1326AS B630F 460 7 8 142 7 2140 2 40 8 18 5 10 70 4500 1326AS B660E 460 11 8 100 7 1510 340 8 29 8 21 50 3000 1326AS B690E 460 19 0 87 3 1810 5 00 8 41 3 36 40 3000 1326AS B840E 460 212 79 3 1190 4 70 8 39 5 37 60 3000 1326AS B860C 460 17 6 77 3 1160 6 00 8 444 49 30 2000 1326AH B330F 460 24 0 0 3000 0 75 9 0 3000 1326AH B440F 460 3 3 0 0 2500 1 22 13 8 2500 1326AH B540F 460 114 0 0 2500 2 60 47 2 2500 3050R 7 390 66 0 50 0 500 30 00 12 132 0 500 11050R 7 390 218 0 50 0 500 110 00 12 436 0 500 General Information Motor Requirements Appendix J Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700 Phase Drives in Group Category 2 Applications with ATEX Approved Motors This document provides information on operation of an ATEX Approved drive and ATEX approved motor The motor is located in a defined hazardous environment while the drive is not A protective system is required to stop current flow to the motor when an over temperature condition has been sensed in the motor When sensed the drive will go into a stop condition To restart the drive the over temperature condition must be resolved followed by a valid start command to the drive The PowerFlex 7005 Phase II drive must have the DriveGuard Safe Off with Second Encoder option board installed for ATEX applications Consult the option board U
295. 22 5 670 Logic Mask Determines which adapters can control the drive 671 Start Mask Controls which adapters can issue start commands 672 Mask Controls which adapters can issue jog commands 673 Direction Mask Controls which adapters can issue forward reverse direction commands 674 Fault Cir Mask Controls which adapters can clear a fault 677 Stop Owner Indicates which adapter are currently issuing a valid stop command 678 Start Owner Indicates which adapter are currently issuing a valid start command 679 Jog Owner Indicates which adapter are currently issuing a valid jog command 680 Direction Owner Indicates which adapter is currently has exclusive control of direction changes 681 Fault Clr Owner Indicates which adapter is currently clearing a fault Options c E x 32928525 9 Default 1 5 01H 11 1 0 False Bit 76543210 1 True 684 MotnUpdatePeriod Unit uSec RO 32 bit The servo update period for the servo axis drive Default 2000 Integer Min Max 1 999999 685 Motn CoarseMulti Default 4 RO 32 bit Number of Par 684 MotnUpdatePeriod comprising one Course Update Period from the Min Max 2 16 Integer Motion Period 686 Config Configuration bits pertaining to Motion related functions for the Servo axis C Options o o a 1 29229 2 ojo ojoj 5 2 ojojoj o
296. 36 gt 186 0 7 32 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Figure A 3 Frame 4 Dimensions ims AA e A 130 055 7 0 0 27 2 Places Lm 659 o AO O2 a 0 312 12 28 q ZEIT ory 8 0 0 31 Lifting Holes 3 Places 0 31 4 Places Frame 4 2200 8 55 25 9 9 92 758 8 29 87 2 7 7 04 Supplemental Information A 35 192 0 7 56 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches kg 05 E Drive 738 2 29 06 24 49 54 0 Drive amp Packaging 29 03 64 0 7 Refer to the Drive Frame Size to Us Ratings Cross Reference on page A 31 table for frame information 9 Weights include HIM DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard Hi Resolution Encoder Option and 20 COMM C ControlNet adapter Figure A 4 Frame 4 Bottom View 222 0 87 Dia lt 76 0 2 99 gt 2 Places lt 65 3 2 57 287 1 13 Dia 47 0 1 85 Dia 2 Places 54 1 2 13 Dia 2 Places 65 0 2 56 268 1 06 368 1 45 51 5 2 08 63 8 2 51 112 8 4 44 gt 180 8 7 12
297. 40 5 3 0 0075 15 M 51015 4 1500 140 11 4 0 0100 2 2 M 51016 4 1500 140 15 0 0120 3 7 M 51017 4 1500 140 24 5 0 0180 5 5 M 51018 4 1500 140 34 8 0 0390 7 5 M 51019 4 1500 140 44 0 0470 11 M 51020 4 1500 140 67 1 0 0810 15 M 51021 4 1500 140 80 7 0 1370 22 M 51022 4 1500 140 120 0 2000 30 M 51023 6 1000 155 176 0 5800 37 M 51024 6 1000 155 210 0 7000 55 51026 6 1000 135 334 1 1000 55 51027 6 500 155 315 4 0000 15 MC M2051 4 1500 320 4 7 2 045 2 2 MC M2052 4 1500 320 6 3 3 24 37 MC M2053 4 1500 320 10 5 25 5 5 MC M2054 4 1500 320 15 5 8 8 7 5 MC M2055 4 1500 320 20 5 11 25 11 MC M2056 4 1500 320 29 143 15 MC M2057 4 1500 320 37 164 18 5 MC M2058 4 1500 320 45 19 65 22 MC M2059 4 1500 320 53 23 30 MC M2060 4 1500 320 71 28 15 37 MC M2061 4 1500 320 85 29 7 45 MC M2062 4 1500 320 97 30 55 55 2063 4 1500 320 121 75 2064 4 1500 320 163 90 2065 4 1500 320 188 110 2066 4 1500 320 227 132 2067 4 1500 320 280 160 2068 4 1500 320 335 200 2069 4 1500 320 375 Motor Type 400 SVO Motor Supplemental Information A 31 Motor Base Speed Voltage Rate Current Ex Current 002 Kg kW Catalog Poles RPM Vrms Arms Arms m 15 20 4 1500 280 5 4 2 2 20 4 1500 280 7 3 37 MC M20 4 1500 280 12 3 5 5 MC M20 4 1500 280 17 3 7 5 MC M20 4 1500 280 22 11 MC M20 4 1500 280 34 15 MC
298. 4583906 n Scg3eo WN ki 01 6 9 98 Le Fz ke 09 Y 91 Z 4453906 zi 9L8 3co N SL 9 90 AH ill en 09 5 0 491940 SREM equinN jqereay XEN XEN y WIN 995 3409 va sdwy 9 21 QN m y 10198 04d asn4 3 jequnw 5501 esnj _ SHEM 1uaun ejqeisn py 2 1 10701 WOY L 2010 119419 jeng sdwy 3ndino 9 uonoejoag 1ndu OY HOA 009 17 Supplemental Information winwixew Jo 621 ezis WNWIUIW 23N SN 104 JexeeJq snoeugjuejsul 1012910 d NID JOJO 10 uesouo eq snu ezis joex3 QIN S N Aq uwous v4 1010W jo 351 S ezis QIN SN 104 Jexeeiq eui esienur 1 PNO o v713 Jojoui jo 92 1 ezis DAN SN 205 uonoejoid serjddns jeu payed S ezis uoroejojd 2 eouesinu serjddn
299. 5 2205 86 81 42 0 1 65 This dimension is the depth for drives with the optional door mounted HIM installed Table A E Frame 11 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights AC Input Drive DC Input Drive Drive AC Input Drive amp Packaging amp Enclosure DC Input Drive Rating amp Enclosure Weight kg Weight kg amp Packaging Voltage Class Amps Weight kg Ibs Ibs Ibs Weight kg Ibs 400 480V AC 590 564 1243 614 1354 396 873 446 983 540 650V DC 650 564 1243 614 1354 396 873 446 983 730 564 1243 614 1354 396 873 446 983 600 690V AC 460 511 1127 561 1237 396 873 446 983 810 932V DC 502 511 1127 561 1237 396 873 446 983 590 626 1380 676 1490 396 873 446 983 Figure A 12 Frame 12 Dimensions A 1196 1 47 1 2275 89 57 632 5 24 9 Supplemental Information _ 5347 21 1 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches 32 3 2234 0 87 95 A 43 2201 8 86 68 42 0 l 165 1 27 J This dimension is the depth for drives with the optional door mounted HIM installed Table A F Frame 12 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights AC Input Drive DC Input Drive Drive AC Input Drive amp Packaging amp Enclosure DC Input Drive Rating amp E
300. 5 100 150 125 132 110 75 60 110 90 150 125 100 75 132 110 200 150 132 110 200 150 150 150 160 132 160 132 250 200 200 150 200 160 250 200 350 300 350 250 315 250 250 250 450 350 400 350 355 315 450 350 400 315 11 315 250 500 450 500 400 450 355 355 315 500 500 500 500 500 400 400 355 600 500 600 500 560 500 12 450 400 700 600 700 650 630 560 500 450 800 700 800 700 710 630 560 500 900 800 900 700 800 630 630 560 1000 1900 1000 900 1000 900 710 630 1200 1000 11100 11000 1100 11000 800 710 1250 000 11300 1100 1300 1100 Supplemental Information A 33 Approximate Dimensions Figure Frame 1 3 Frame 1 Shown 15 0 58 059 _ 0 23 a 115 022 0000000 0070000 y 312 12 28 00100000 ar 00000000 CIE J Gay Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Sli Expanded Weight 7 kg ibs Frame AA B C D E Drive Drive amp Packaging 1 135 0 5 31 166 9 6 57 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 105 0 4 13 320 0 12 60 17 03 15 5 9 98 22 2 222 0 8 74 1253 9 9 99 342 5 13 48 1200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 320 0 12 60 12 52 27 6 15 20 33 5 3 222 0 8
301. 504 AbsEned Offst 505 TestWait Time 469 FVC CEMF Comp 427 PM Comp 506 PM Test Idc Ramp 449 35755 Reg Gain 520 PM Q Inductance 507 Test FregRamp 450 51155 Reg P Gain 521 PMD Inductance B n gel Ref n ae Reg cu 522 PM Stator Resist 50 est Re 448 Slip Reg Gain 523 Mtr Coef 424 Flux Ratio Ref 446 E Gain Min 445 Slip Gain Max 552 Slip Preload Val 553 Slip Slew Rate 472 PreCharge Delay 431 Test Current Ref 432 Test Freq Ref 433 Test Freq Rate 477 Est Theta Delay 428 IReg IGain 537 SrLssAngleStblty 538 SrLss VoltStblty 539 1 55 StbltyFilt 54 Inertia TrqLpfBW 551 CurrFdbk AdjTime Programming and Parameters 3 5 Configuration 151 Logic Command 152 Applied LogicCmd 153 Control Options 158 Drive Logic Rslt 160 Zero Speed Lim 169 SrLss ZeroSpdLim 335 Abs OverSpd Lim Overload Protect Stop Brake Modes Power Loss 337 Mtr 127 Curr Min 168 Normal Stop Mode 406 Power Loss Mode 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min 414 Brake Bus Cnfg 407 Power Loss Time 339 Mtr 127 Calibrat 415 BusReg Brake Ref 408 Power Loss Level 340 Mtr 12T Trp ThrH 416 Brake PulseWatts 341 Mtr 127 Count 417 Brake Watts 343 OL OpnLp CurrLim 154 Stop Dwell Time 344 OL ClsLp CurrLim 545 Bus Reg Ki 546 Bus Reg Kp 547 Bus Reg Kd 1125 DC Brake Level 544 External DB Res 1126 DC Brake Time 3 6 Programming and Parameters gt U 3 Se
302. 56 CC CC lt a 0 False Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO O 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 76543210 296 Motor Freq Ref Units RO Real Currently not used Default Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Min Max 297 Output Curr Disp Units Amps RO 32 bit Displays measured RMS motor current with a resolution of 1 10 amperes Default 0 0 Integer Min Max 0 0 9999 9 Scale x10 298 Elapsed Run Time Units Hrs RW 32 bit Displays the total time that the drive has been running inverter power devices active with a Default 0 0 Integer resolution of 1 10 hour This parameter is saved in power EE non volatile memory The value Min Max 0 0 429496736 0 in this parameter can be changed written to by the user Scale x10 299 Elapsed MWHrs Unit _ MWHrs RW 32 bit Displays the total energy the drive has consumed or produced Calculated from the absolute Default 0 0 Integer magnitude of the product of motor speed and motor torque power accumulated over time Min Max 0 0 429496736 0 This value will increase in both regen and motoring modes of operation This parameter value Scale 10 can be changed written to by the user 300 Motor Spd Fdbk Unit RO Real Display
303. 6 Y 0 190 Qjpou3 jejnuis pds ud AW zzz d Joenus IIM uonisogd E 444d 1030W payeinuis 797119 pve lt gt uA iqp4 uonisog 183 47 159 peeds 64 D pds z 29115 1 MS sso7yoe qp4 pds snes 91607 1pou3 plc Jepoouy 2 jepoou3 WIH OL xx pds L1pou3 pys 10u09 Byuo 1 0 1pou3 peeds 0 4043 0 1pou3 vez Q1pou3 0 p30 1 TL mg oin 19 1504 47 xx suondo 5 0 m dm L 4521 qp4 pds iisog peeds t 158 ssoqu e 91607 Ud 18S AW 11 Control Block Diagrams sdAg H 1 5 O 12907 joo K x22 uo eigeu3 snje s 21607 Ke TE jqeuz MH Case wa 20 281 nds B Case 18 era eno Ary ies 8 1UG va zino Kse zno 698 ew no opas uO Aly z no snieis 2907 uo Lino o Kors gt smeis 2907 ume Lt zieoeqieoov 02
304. 615 8 8 2 5 5 5 2 5 59 5 8 5 n SSIS 0 5 5 5 5 5 S S oj 5 1 lt 2 lt lt lt 2 a 2 2 2 z Defaut 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 JO JO jO 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO JO JO jO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 Tue Alarm Status 1 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions These events are from Par 320 Exception Event1 Options 5 BS le le ie Ele 298 25 leE lels lella Elo 2 5 6 16 5 65 6568 65 5 5 2165156515655 5 5 5 5 5 5 gt gt 5 gt Sll 5 575 Slo lo 2 2 55 gt 5 5 2 gt Default 0 0 0 00000 D jo o poo ori Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True Alarm Status 2 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions These events are from Par 321 Exception Event2 Note Ch
305. 70 1 80 8 31 8 6 21 3500 MPL A4520P 230 124 234 0 3510 2 20 8 354 5 99 5000 MPL A4520K 230 10 6 223 3 3350 2 10 8 30 4 5 99 4000 MPL A4530F 230 9 5 1447 2170 1 90 8 29 7 8 36 2800 MPL A4530K 230 144 196 0 2940 2 50 8 43 8 8 13 4000 MPL A4540C 230 6 6 93 3 1400 1 50 8 20 5 10 20 1500 MPL A4540F 230 13 0 162 0 2430 2 60 8 38 2 10 20 3000 MPL A520K 230 16 3 208 0 3120 3 50 8 46 0 10 70 4000 MPL A540K 230 29 3 180 7 2710 5 50 8 84 9 19 40 4000 MPL A560F 230 29 3 125 3 1880 5 50 8 84 9 27 90 3000 MPL B310P 460 17 310 0 4650 0 77 8 3 0 1 58 5000 MPL B320P 460 3 2 313 3 4700 1 50 8 5 0 3 05 5000 MPL B330P 460 43 274 0 4110 1 80 8 7 0 4 18 5000 MPL B420P 460 45 255 3 3830 1 90 8 9 2 4 74 5000 MPL B430P 460 6 5 214 0 3210 2 20 8 12 0 6 55 5000 MPL B4520P 460 6 0 236 7 3550 2 10 8 17 0 5 65 5000 MPL B4530F 460 5 0 162 0 2430 2 10 8 134 8 25 3000 MPL B4530K 460 7 8 200 7 3010 2 60 8 19 1 8 25 4000 MPL B4540F 460 6 4 162 0 2430 2 60 8 16 3 10 20 3000 MPL B4560F 460 8 3 1447 2170 3 20 8 25 5 14 10 3000 MPL B520K 460 8 1 208 0 3120 3 50 8 23 3 10 70 4000 MPL B540K 460 14 5 177 3 2660 5 40 8 42 4 19 40 4000 MPL B560F 460 14 5 130 7 1960 5 50 8 42 4 26 80 3000 MPL B580F 460 18 4 132 7 1990 7 10 8 66 5 34 00 3000 MPL B580J 460 22 6 148 0 2220 7 90 8 66 5 34 00 3800 MPL B640F 460 22 7 106 0 1590 6 11 8 46 0 36 70 3000 MPL B660F 460 27 2 81 3 1220 6 15 8 67 9 48 00 3000 MPL B680D 460 24 0 94 0 1410 9 30 8 66 5 62 80 2000 MPL B680F 460 33 9 79 8 1190 7 50 8 67 9 60 00
306. 74 1253 9 9 99 517 5 20 37 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 500 0 19 69 118 55 40 9 22 68 50 Refer to Drive Frame Size to HP KW Ratings Cross Reference on page A 31 for frame information 9 Weights include HIM DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard Hi Resolution Encoder Option and 20 COMM C ControlNet adapter 34 Supplemental Information Figure A 2 Frame 1 3 Bottom Views Frame 1 Frame 2 108 5 4 27 gt 167 5 6 59 b I 87 5 8 44 lt 675 15631615 287 1 13 Dia Bb 47 5 1 87 22 2 0 87 Dia 22 4 0 88 Dia 3 Places 6 1 2 5 3 Places 2Places LE NS 1 LHO T Hee Se 25 5
307. 8 ExtFault Inv in one of the following parameters to configure an input to detect an external fault Par 825 Digin 1 Sel Par 826 Digin 2 Sel Par 827 Digin 3 Sel Par 828 Dig In4 Sel Par 829 Dig In5 Sel Par 830 Dig In6 Sel 19 DSP Memory Error Flash memory does not match the SRAM memory Cycle the drive power If the fault remains replace the Main Control Board 20 DSP Device Error A DSP Velocity Position Loop interrupt task has not been Cycle the drive power completed in the allotted time If the fault remains replace the Main Control Board Troubleshooting 4 7 No Name Type Description Action 22 Over Frequency D Encoderless algorithm fails to converge on correct speed Two possible causes 1 Velocity regulator is attempting to run below motor s slip speed 2 Frequency regulator pulls out and commanded motor frequency slows to maximum frequency limit 23 MC Commissn The drive has failed to complete either the Motor Autotuning Verify that motor nameplate data is entered procedure or the Power Circuits Diagnostics test Par 463 correctly into the drive Diag Error 1 Par 464 MC Diag Error 2 and Par 465 MC Diag Veri Verify the motor is wired for the correction id 3 display Motor Autotuning and Power Circuit Diagnostic voltage entering into the drive Par 465 MC Diag Error 3 Drive current inductance vol
308. 81 9211 9121 LHL 209 e 91 9 9613406 0006 NINO IN 001 002 008 001 921 OOF BEL 941 Vg 0 2009 e S 09 GLE S Sel O0c 92 92 601 66 996 606 209 Z 001 6604000 00 9 NWO N ri 00 0Sc 090 06 Sel 06 9cl 76 9 909 289 203 e 09 0006 NINO IN 00 00 00 06 091 060 Ott S8 VSL Sy 94 9 2203002 00 9 NNO N 001 900 Soc 08 81 08 01 8 c9 909 289 Sy Z 09 09 0904000 00E9 NINO IN 00 00c 002 09 Ol 09 8 919 29 96v 227 09 Y 09 0504000 0007 NINO IN SvO 383 IN 001 091 06 05 06 08 79 8 68 976 08 0 07 11703906 000t NINO IN c 0 383 N zi 05 90 961 0 79 zel 906 08 Y 9 0 c 03Q0c 00S2 NWO W 20 384 N 08 0011 001 92 09 96 6 26 196 872 09 06 95 z 200310 00Sc NINO IW Sc9 383 W Sc90 38 W 20 420 W 0 08 08 0 09 0 ve 990 cc 016 zoe 09 Y Sk 0 z eco3a0c 9 9 384 N 910 480 W 910 420 W 0c 08 09 0c 0v 0c SSc 28 21109 91 08 Yi Ob St 1103006 012 383 019 38 N 0L9 3 O9 IN SL 0t Ov Sl SG ki GEL 20 66 05 Y GZ OL 11093406 ObO A84 N 019 38QHN 019 3 9 N 1 0 96 0L 0c 0 SEL 66 6 18 81 09 Y 9 GZ 096310 699 38 98 3cO N 91 0c 0c 6 6 6 19 19 99 es 09 Y S L 189310 079 389 Org 3co N 2 91 91 9 6 9 65 6 LE 02 08 Y 6
309. 9 PITP Data Units RO Real Displays the data selected by Par 178 PI TP Sel Default 10 0000 Min Max 8 0000 pu 180 PI Output Units RO Real The final output of the Process Control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base Default 10 0000 motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Min Max 8 0000 pu 181 IPI Reference Units V Real The reference input for the process control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base Default 0 0000 motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Min Max 8 0000 pu 182 PI Feedback Unit 4 Real The feedback input for the process control regulator A value of 1 can represent either base Default 0 0000 motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Min Max 8 0000 pu 183 PI Error Units RO Real Displays the error of the process trim reference minus the process trim feedback Default 10 0000 Min Max 8 0000 pu 184 PI Lpass Filt BW Units 5 V RW Real Sets the bandwidth of a single pole filter applied to the error input of the Process Control Default 10 0000 regulator The input to the filter is the difference between Par 181 PI Reference and Par 182 Min Max 0 0000 500 0000 PI Feedback The output of this filter is used as the input to the process control regulator 185 PIPreload Unit 4 Real Presets the integrator of the Process Control regulator Defaul
310. 9 769 96 09S 11 06640006 9069 009 0051 0051 009 0001 009 8c8 069 097 9 0 007 9069 099 00v 0071 00 002 007 8 8 299 209 90S 0 2 009 LI 0064000 6759 008 00 0051 008 008 00S 669 825 985 885 Ov SSE 6759 009 0051 0051 009 000 009 69 90S 097 9 0 4 09 LL 0974002 2099 oSv 006 006 057 00 057 989 887 6 206 0 c SIE 2099 oss 00cL 002 098 006 0991 985 89 917 61 95 00 0119173406 2099 097 006 006 097 004 9891 887 905 206 0 915 2099 009 00 001 009 098 0091 985 985 88 2 998 01 9883406 1927 ose 004 002 066 099 092 0 7 066 192 692 0 c 092 1927 oSv 006 006 002 0 8 6 206 0 SI 0L 9683406 90cv 00 009 009 00 057 00 9 6 2125 802 Ole c 002 90cv 095 004 00 095 099 096 9 6 1 80 196 692 0t 2 052101 196 406 090 008 009 Sec 098 Scc 68c OSc 0 1 0 c 09 E 092 009 009 002 oSv 00 68c Otc 80c 012 95 00c 6 8063406 002 00 009 002 00 000 9 912 vvl Stl cel 092 008 099 Gee 095 Sce Sve 281 0 1 0 09L 61 011 406 SREM Xe gy o Xe o UN XEN 9esc uw 3902 _ 21 Jequnw sso 918929 Aejaq asnq Aejaq jueuie 3 jeng 3 spem 1910 10104 induy M
311. A 22 Encoder Reference NA 12 or 5V DC power supply for primary encoder interface 23 Encoder Reference NA Rating 300 mA maximum 24 Encoder Shield NA Connection point for encoder shield 07 The analog inputs are not isolated However the analog inputs can be connected in series when using current mode Note that at 20mA the voltage source must be capable of providing 10V dc at the drive terminals for one drive 20V dc is required for two drives and 30V dc is required for three drives SN WH d Uy o ok wo VOD 6969 OOS QOL Y Input Output 0 10V Analog Input Table 1 J TB1 Terminals Analog Wiring Examples Connection Example 0 10V Analog Input Internal Source 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Required Parameter Changes NA Installation Wiring 1 23 Table 11 TB2 Terminals 5 SE Factory Ss Terminal Signal Default Description co 1 24V DC Common NA Drive supplied 24V DC logic input power 2 24V DC Source NA Rating 300 mA maximum load 3 Digital Output 1 24V DC Open Collector sinking logic 816 Rating Internal Source 150 mA max 847 External Source 750 mA 4 Digital Output 1 2 Com NA Common for Digital Output 1 amp 2 5 Digital Output 2 24V DC Open Collector sinking logic 851 Rating Internal Source 150 mA m
312. A 7 Updated and New Control Block Diagrams B Updated HIM Overview to include HIM menu chart and steps for viewing editing and linking parameters using the HIM Added new Appendix PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications soc 6 Summary of Changes Preface Chapter 1 Table of Contents Important User Information 2 ee neces 1 2 Manual Updates getreten i 1 Overview Who Should Use This Manual P 1 What Is Not In This 2 RR RR 1 Recommended 1 Conventions kis a Yn A e Op C RO URN Tw ee ROS P 3 Drive Frame SIZes si uere beer epi ebd evt deter P 3 General Precauttons innu aes ee Ye P 4 Class LEED Product Veto 9 SURE EE P 4 Catalog Number Explanation 5 65 P 5 Catalog Number Explanation 2 P 6 Installation Wiring Chapter Objectives a eres RO uo dua 1 1 Opening the Covet se RES Bk ee E AE Se ex 1 2 Mounting Clearances Ae t RAI E Vp ER 1 3 Operating Temperatures 2 1 1 3 AC Supply Source Considerations 2 ee 1 4 Unbalanced Ungrounded or Resistive Ground
313. AC Line BRI BR2 DC DC U V W R S T J T L3 T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 BR1 PS BR2 DC DC DC UMi V T2 PE PE 512 T L3 Frame 5 75 HP Normal Duty 2 Sy ey 480V AC Input OO e euo OJO OOJO O OJO PS 00 DC um vm WiTa RILI 312 OIO Frame 5 100 HP Normal Duty old oo 480 AC Input Ec PS BR2 su DC DC UTi V T2 PE vac VE PE _ dd Frame 5 75 HP Normal Duty 650V DC Input 2 ololo ol ojo o o ES e vag 1 Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F LX Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only BRi DC DC UTi 0 240 p BR2 DCH PEVAC VAC PE Frame 5 100 HP Normal Duty O O ee a1 o 189 650V DC Input io op PS 120 VAC y Precharge Resis
314. ATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 1 CHASSISGND 1 H 6 PowerFlex 700 Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card Connection Examples Figure H 8 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable and 8 pin Berg style connector MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 BU D E RO 4 POWER Rotary Encoder POWER 16 aD iy H X BU POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 I BN xx H BN REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN 14 H BK 4 REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 BK i H GYI 5 RS 485 Rotary Encoder COS 12 Os PK it xX L 6 DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder RS485 1 49 1 7 Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 005 Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 1 1 Linear Sensor DATA 7 Nimm H Linear Sensor DATA 6 008 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 LI Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 1 7 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 Figure H 9 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann pre attached shielded twisted pair cable M ion Board ROTARY ENCODER BU RD BN WH BK s a
315. Above Setpt 2 turns off P175 Setpt 2 Data P176 Setpt 2 TripPoint P176 Setpt 2 TripPoint P177 Setpt 2 Limit P176 Setpt 2 TripPoint 2 x P177 Setpt 2 Limit 0 Time Appendix D HIM Overview For Information See Page External and Internal Connections D 1 LCD Display Elements D 2 ALT Functions D 2 Menu Structure D 3 Viewing and Editing Parameters D 5 Linking Parameters D 5 Removing Installing the HIM D 6 External and Internal The PowerFlex 700 provides cable connection for a hand held HIM or Connections Port Expander Splitter Frame 1 shown NIE QOO SA JO Pos SOOO Connector Description DPI Port 1 HIM connection when installed in cover DPIPort2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options DP Port3 or2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port D 2 HIM Overview LCD Display Elements ALT Functions Display Ew Stopped Aute 0 0 RPM Main Menu Duci Sd Les Device Select Description Direction Drive Status Alarm Auto Manual Information Commanded or Output Speed Programming Monitoring Troubleshooting To use an ALT function press the ALT key release it then press the
316. B 230V Primary Resolver No Receiver type resolver not Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported supported 1326 AB 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver 9 AB 164982 8 9 1326Ax 460v 9 1326Ax 460v supported 1326 AB 460V Secondary Yes e Secondary resolver is 13 129214 8 13 Reserved 13 Reserved Resolver geared to motor not intended for motor speed position feedback Transmitter type resolver supported 1326AD 230V Rare Earth No Receiver type resolver not Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Primary Resolver supported 1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes Transmitter type resolver 9 AB 164982 8 9 1326Ax 460v 9 1326Ax 460v Motor Primary Resolver supported 1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes e Secondary resolver is N A N A N A Motor Secondary Resolver geared to motor not intended for motor speed position feedback e Transmitter type resolver supported 1326AS 460V Rare Earth Yes Transmitter type resolver 9 AB 164982 8 9 1326Ax 460v 9 1326Ax 460v Primary Resolver supported MPL 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver 4 AB 155407 8 4 MPL 460v 4 MPL 460v supported Recommended Cable Rockwell Automation strongly recommends the use of Reliance Electric 417900 207CG or Belden 9730 cable for installation or an equivalent cable that meets these specifications 3 Twisted Pairs 80 C 300V Chrome FPR Jacket Plenum Rated Conductor Size 18 AWG T
317. CommLoss Data lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 384 SL CommLoss Cnfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configures the drive s response to SynchLink communication loss HEC 4 Options 0 Ignore e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 2 FltCoastStop this event occurs 3 Fit RampStop 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault 4 FltCurLimStp bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 384 SL CommLoss Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive
318. Config 515 DPI Data In B1 653 FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk 251 FVC2 Mode Config 511 DPI Data In B2 654 FB Opt1 Posit 252 FVC2 Tune Config 516 DPI Data In C1 655 FB Spd Fdbk 253 FW Functions En 147 DPI Data In C2 656 Fdbk LsCnfg Alt 366 FW FunctionsActl 149 DPI Data In D1 657 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 365 FW TaskTime Actl 148 DPI Data In D2 658 Fdbk LsCnfgPosit 367 FW TaskTime Sel 146 DPI Data Out A1 660 Fdbk Option ID 249 Fwd Speed Limit 76 DPI Data Out A2 661 FdbkAxis FdbkSel 701 Hardware Present 145 DPI Data Out B1 662 FdbkAxis FdbkVal 702 Heatsink Temp 313 DPI Data Out B2 663 FdbkAxis RotFdbk 709 HeidenhainO 263 DPI Data Out C1 664 FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk 710 Heidenhaino Stat 264 DPI Data Out C2 665 Filtered SpdFdbk 71 Heidn Encdr PPR 267 DPI Data Out D1 666 Flux Current 488 Heidn Encdr Type 266 DPI Data Out D2 667 Flux Rate Limit 425 Heidn Mkr Offset 265 DPI In DataType 650 Flux Ratio Ref 424 Heidn VM Enc PPR 1155 DPI Out DataType 659 Flux Reg Gain 444 Heidn VM Pos Ref 1156 Drive Logic Rslt 158 Flux Reg P Gaint 443 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg 370 Drive OL JnctTmp 345 Flux Reg P Gain2 470 HIM Manual Mask 675 Drive OL Status 346 Flux Satur Coef 426 HIM Manual Owner 682 Drive OL TP Data 348 CurFdbk Id 489 Home Accel Time 1120 Drive OL TP Sel 347 LpassFilt BW 361 Home Actual Pos 1124 Drive Ramp Rslt 53 Flying StartGain 170 Home Decel Time 1121 EGR Config 1161 FR Sys Inertia 1081 Home Position 1123 EGR Div 1163 FricComp Rated 68 Home Speed 1122 EGR Mul 1162 FricCo
319. DInt Scale Real2DInt Result MulDiv 1 Input MulDiv 1 Mul MulDiv 1 Div MulDiv 1 Result MulDiv 2 Input MulDiv 2 Mul MulDiv 2 Div MulDiv 2 Result Logic Config Logic Cmpr State Logic 1A Data Logic 1A Bit Logic 1B Data Logic 1B Bit Logic 2A Data Logic 2A Bit Logic 2B Data Logic 2B Bit Compare 1A Compare 1B Compare 2A Compare 2B AddSub 1 Input AddSub 1 Add AddSub 1 Subtrct AddSub 1 Result AddSub 2 Input AddSub 2 Add AddSub 2 Subtrct AddSub 2 Result AddSub 3 Input AddSub 3 Add AddSub 3 Subtrct AddSub 3 Result 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 DelTmr1 TrigData DelTmr1 Trig Bit DelayTimer1PrSet DelayTimer1 Accu DelayTimer1 Stats DelTmr2 TrigData DelTmr2 Trig Bit DelayTimer2PrSet DelayTimer2Accu DelayTimer2Stats Electronic Gear Ratio 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 EGR Config EGR Mul EGR Div EGR Pos Input EGR Pos Output EGR Pos Preset Parameter Data in Linear List Format Programming and Parameters 3 15 o _ _ _ _ _ ec 988997 14 through 20 21 22 23 24 Name Description Motor NP Volts Set to the motor nameplate rated volts Motor NP FLA Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps Range limited by three second inverter rating Motor NP Hertz Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency Motor NP RPM Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM Motor NP Power Set to the motor namep
320. EncO Filt through Enco Filt bt3 or Bits 16 Enc1 Filt bt0 through 19 Enc1 Filt bt3 configure the encoder input filter see Table 233A Encoder Input Filter Settings The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period Input signal transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored Bits 0 3 and 16 19 add 100ns filtering per stage to encoder inputs e Bits 4 EncO 4x and 5 EncO A Phs or 20 Enc 4x and 21 Enc1 A Phs determine how the encoder channel A and B signals will be interpreted Typically both encoder phases A and B are used so that direction information is available Par 230 Encdr0 Position counts up for forward rotation and down for reverse rotation If bit 5 is set then the B phase signal is ignored As a result the encoder position will only increase regardless of rotation direction Bits 4 and 5 together also determine the number of edges counted per encoder pulse see Table 2338 Multiplier and Direction Settings 4x sampling counts both rise and fall of both A and B encoder phases hence 4 edges per pulse In 4x mode the encoder position will change by four times the encoder pulses per revolution rating PPR per encoder revolution e g it increments the value in Par 230 Encdr0 Position by 4096 for one revolution of a 1024 PPR encoder e Bit 6 EncO Dir and 22 Enc1 Dir inverts the channel A input thus reversing the direction of the feedback Note that cha
321. False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 l Tue 323 Fault Status 1 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions These events are from Par 320 Exception Event Options z E p _ _ 2 2 5 2 8 9o 5338 880 2 2 2 5 6 lt 985 5 2 5 5 8552 5 5 5 2 2 Default 0 0 0 0 jo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q Fagg Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 65 43 2 1 0 1 True 324 Fault Status 2 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions These events are from Par 321 Exception Event2 Note Changed bit 14 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3 03 Options E E 22 5 2 lela lela 5 2 ele le 85 8 5 2 S lS Els Ss lt 222 5 lw _ 5 5 5252 2 gt 9 9139 9 5 9 5 5 9 2 2 B 5 o ou S 5 5 555 2 82 gt 600 0 91910192 2 2 2 2 2 G 2 2 gt 2 a amp o 2 a a
322. FdbkAxis FdbkSel 830 Dig In6 Sel 266 Heidn Encdr Type 788 Xsync In 1 1000 UserFunct Enable 267 Heidn Encdr PPR 789 Xsync Out 1 1122 Home Speed 277 ReslvrO Type Sel 790 Xsync In 2 1123 Home Position 314 VPL Firmware Rev 791 Xsync Out 2 1136 PPMP Rev Spd Lim 357 Curr Ref TP Sel 792 Xsync Out 2 Dly 1137 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim 360 Min Flux 793 Xsync In 3 1138 PPMP Over Ride 457 MC Firmware Rev 794 Xsync Out 3 1145 PPMP TP Select 466 MC TP1 Select 795 Xsync Out 3 Dly 510 Mode Config 825 Dig In1 Sel Added the Electronic Gear Ratio Group to the User Function file 3 14 Added required encoder PPR rating values A4 Updated the Inputs amp Outputs Digital block diagram to reflect new values B 11 Added the new Virtual Master Encoder block diagram B 19 Updated the User Functions 2 block diagram B 21 Updated parameter names in the Inverter Overload IT block diagram B 25 Added an Application Note regarding Motor Overload Memory Retention C 6 This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 7008 High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control User Manual publication 20D UMO006 since the March 2006 release Change See Page Updated the Catalog Number Explanation Preface 5 Added a note for Frame 6 power terminals connections 1 12 Added a note to indicate that the Analog Inputs are not isolated 1 22 Added maximum value calculation for Par 81 Spd Reg P Gain 3 19 Added
323. Filt 1135 PPMP Status 699 Speed Cmmd 747 Position Cmmd 1136 PPMP Rev Spd Lim 700 Motn Posit Sync 762 Position Edbk 1137 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim 701 FdbkAxis FdbkSel i 1138 PPMP Over Ride 702 FdbkAxis FdbkVal 764 Posit Load Fdbk 1139 PPMP Accel Time 703 Motn TP Select 766 _ Posit FB EGR Mul n 1140 PPMP Decel Time 704 TP Value 767 EGR Div 763 Position Actual 1141 PPMP SCurve Time 705 RotaryCmmd 765 Posit Act Load 1142 PPMP Spd Output 706 MotnUnwdTurnCmmd 769 Position Error 1143 PPMP Pos Output 707 SrvoAxis RotFdbk i 1144 PPMP Pos Go 708 SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk 796 X Gear Ratio 768 PositHed P Gai 709 FdbkAxis RotFdbk g P Gain 710 FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk 770 PositReg Integ 711 MotnCnfaEmP 772 XReglnteg LoLim omonigenm eram 773 XReg Integ HiLim 774 XReg Integ Out 771 PositReg Droop 775 XReg Spd LoLim 776 XReg Spd HiLim 778 X Notch Attenu M ad es 779 X Notch FiltFreq Note The Position Control function is disabled by default To enable the Position Control 318 Posit Spd Output function set Par 147 bit 16 to 1 enable 3 10 Programming and Parameters Feedback Config Encoder Port 0 1 Calculated Fdbk Feedback Opt 0 1 222 MtrFdbk Sel Pri 233 Encdr 0 1 Config 225 Virtual Edge Rev 249 Fdbk Option ID 223 MtrFdbk Sel Alt 234 Encdr 0 1 Error 226 Motor Speed Est 251 FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk 777 PositionFdbk Sel 232 Encoder0 PPR 227
324. Flex 7005 with Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMOO3 for more information This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 IdsCompCoeff Reg Defines the flux producing current Ids command compensation coefficient used during regeneration When this parameter is set to 1024 the amount of compensation which is proportional to torque producing current Iqs command is 100 of the rated flux current at 1 pu of Iqs command when the Vqs regulator is off and Par 510 FVC Mode Config bit 7 Ids Comp En 1 No Ids command compensation will be applied when Par 510 FVC Mode Config bit 7 0 Notes Refer to Ids Compensation Coefficient Set Up in the PowerFlex 7005 with Phase 11 Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO03 for more information This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 SlipReg Off Iqs Defines the torque producing current 105 reference level below which the slip regulator turns off when the slip regulator turn off point is defined as Par 461 10 5 of the rated 195 reference The slip regulator turn on point is defined as Par 461 10 10 of the rated Iqs reference with the condition of the Vqs regulator is turned on Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 Off Freq Defines the output frequency level below which the Vqs regulator turns off when the Vqs regulator turn off point is defined as Par 462 10 of the rated mot
325. II Control or publication DRIVES INOOI Grounding and Wiring Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated AC Drives Power Terminal Blocks Figure 1 3 on page 1 13 shows the typical location of the Power Terminal Block in PowerFlex 700 frame 1 6 drives Cable Entry Plate Removal If additional wiring access is needed the Cable Entry Plate on Frame 1 3 drives can be removed Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the chassis The slotted mounting holes assure easy removal Important Removing the Cable Entry Plate limits the maximum surrounding air temperature to 40 C 104 F 1 10 Installation Wiring Power Wiring Access Panel Removal dangerous voltages on the terminals and negates the enclosure type rating Replace the access panel cover when service is complete Failure to comply may result in personal injury or equipment damage ATTENTION Removing the access panel cover exposes Frame Removal Procedure Replace when wiring is complete 1 2 amp 6 Remove part of the front cover see page 1 2 3 Open front cover and gently tap slide the cover down and out 4 Loosen the 4 screws and remove 5 Remove front cover see page 1 2 gently tap slide panel up and out AC Input Phase Selection Frames 5 amp 6 Only power to the drive has been removed before performing ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all the following Moving the Line Type jumper shown in Figure
326. INOO 1 Drives Safety Guidelines for the SGI 1 1 Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control M PURO A Global Reference Guide for 100 2 10 odd Reading Schematic Diagrams Guarding Against Electrostatic 8000 4 5 2 Damage 2 Overview The following publications provide detailed PowerFlex 700 drive information Title Publication Available PowerFlex 7005 Phase Il Reference Manual PFLEX RM003 PowerFlex 700 Phase II Quick Start Frames 20D QS002 1 6 PowerFlex 700 Phase II Quick Start Frames 20D QS004 9 13 PowerFlex 700H S Drives Installation Manual PFLEX INOOG Frames 9 13 The following publications provide specific PowerFlex 700 drive features Available www rockwellautomation com literature information Title Publication Installation Instructions Stegmann Feedback 200 001 Option for PowerFlex 7005 Drive Installation Instructions Resolver Feedback 20D INO002 Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives Installation Instructions Multi Device Interface 20D IN004 for PowerFlex 700S Drive Installation Instructions Second Encoder 200 13009 Option for PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Phase II Control Firmware Release Notes PowerFlex 700S 20D RNO007 Drive amp DriveLogix For Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Title Online at Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support www rockwella
327. Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Cnv NotLogin Cfg Configures the 700L drive s response when the active convertor is not logged in via a DPI port Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Values Default Options Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Default Default Options Default Options Zero Zero q Sum q Lim In Iq Lim Out Iq Rate Stat IqLmOutNoFil MtrCrLimStat Lim dMtrCrLm Iq Act Limit Iq Cal Gain Min Lim Stat Iq Prescale qtols Stat Flux Status Flux LPF Out Is Per Unit q Actl Lim Iq Lim Filt Hid Inverse Flux mpedance PU 22 Rated We 23 Leak Induct 24 Rated Torque 25 Rated Ids 26 Rated 195 PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu P U 0 2500 0 1000 1 0000 HOOT RONDO
328. LOSED ON Selection Supply Channel Channel Z Channel 5V DC Closed Closed Closed Closed 12VDC Open Open Open Open FRONT TOP VIEW 4 PowerFlex 7005 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card Notes Chapter Objectives Specifications Appendix F PowerFlex 700 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option For Information on See Page Specifications 1 Wiring the Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder 2 Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Encoder Voltage Supply 11 5V dc 130 mA Hi Resolution Feedback Sine Cosine 1V P P Offset 2 5 Maximum Cable Length 90m 295 ft Maximum Frequency 12 5 us cycle Encoder Speed 4687 5 RPM for encoders with 1024 sine cycles per revolution 9375 RPM for encoders with 512 sine cycles per revolution RS 485 Interface The Hi Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS 485 interface shortly after power up e Address e Command Number e Mode e Number of turns e Number of Sine Cos cycles e Checksum Customer I O plug P1 Allen Bradley PN 594262912 Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 12BK Supported Encoders Table E A specifies which encoders are supported by the 7005 Hi Resolution Stegmann Encoder Feedback Option module Important Please note that encoders must be ordered as Single Ended This will ensure that the
329. M 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 1 0000 2200000000 0000 RP Par 0 8500 AAA Par 4 Motor NP RPM RP Par 1 2500 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM Par 4 1 2500 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 0 1000 4 1 0000 z1 0pu z1 0pu z1 0pu lt Linkable Read Write RW RO RO RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RO RW RW RW RW Data Type Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real 16 bit Integer Real Rea Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Programming and Parameters 3 19 No 77 78 79 81 82 84 Description Spd Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select speed reference data displayed in Par 79 Spd Ref TP Data and Par 78 Spd Ref TP RPM Note The values for options 7 8 amp 9 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Spd Ref TP RPM Displays the value selected in Par 77 Spd Ref TP Sel in RPM This display should only be used if the selected value is floating point data Spd Ref TP Data Displays the value selected in Par 77 Spd Ref TP Sel This display should only be used if the selected value is integer data Spd Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the speed regulator This value is automatically cal
330. Mode Number of turns Number of Sine Cos cycles Checksum Number of Sine Cos cycles Checksum Customer I O Plug P1 Allen Bradley PN 894262912 Allen Bradley PN 894262912 Hi Res Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 12BK Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 12BK Resolver Option Excitation Frequency 2400 Hz 2400 Hz Excitation Voltage 4 25 26 Vrms 4 25 26 Vrms Operating Frequency 1 10 kHz 1 10 kHz Range Resolver Feedback 2V 300 mV 2V 300 mV Voltage Maximum Cable 304 8 meters 1000 ft 304 8 meters 1000 ft Length DriveLogix User Available 1 5 megabytes 1 5 megabytes MemoryBase Battery 1769 BA 0 599 lithium 1769 BA 0 590 lithium Serial Cable 1761 CBLPMO to 1761 NET AIC 1761 2 to 1761 NET AIC 1761 to 1761 NET AIC 1756 CP3 directly to controller 1747 CP3 directly to controller 1761 to 1761 NET AIC 1756 CP3 directly to controller 1747 CP3 directly to controller category 3 2 category 3 2 Compact I O Connection Up to 16 modules Up to 16 modules Cable 20D DL2 CL3 20D DL2 CL3 20D DL2 CR3 20D DL2 CR3 DPI Communication Configurations Supplemental Information 5 Typical Programmable Controller Configurations Important If programs are written that continuously write information to the drive care must be taken to properly format the block transfer If attribute 10 1s selected for the block transfer values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by t
331. Multi Turn was changed to 0 False and bit 6 Endat24bitSl was added for firmware version 3 01 Added bit 6 for firmware version 4 001 Options Not EnDat O Reserved 0 False 1 True 212 gt 2 lo Default 0 0 Reserved 9 e Ivrt MasterEn Endat24bitSI Reserved C lReserved Multi Turn 267 Heidn Encdr PPR Units PPR RW 32 bit Configures the encoder PPR for the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option Default 2048 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Changed the minimum value from Min Max 1 100000 10 to 1 for firmware version 4 001 3 42 Programming and Parameters 5 57858 Description Values 5285 268 Resolver0 Cnfg Configures options for the resolver option card port 0 e Setting bit 0 Cable Tune enables the cable tuning test resetting the bit to zero disables the test Refer to the section on Resolver Cable Tuning Tests publication PFLEX RM003 Reference Manual PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Phase II Control for more information Bit 1 Tune Param has been disabled Bits 2 Resolution 0 and 3 Resolution 1 select the resolver resolution see Table 268A Resolution Settings This determines the number of significant bits that are calculated in t
332. OX o11u02 10d X 1 uorisog 950 ISHO PY sniejs uonisod vk bel olay OL ie Wousodsqy 5 uonisog 90 074 I lt gt H6 dsog peedg 1 uonisog 072 4 jen Id Id uonisod ees les Jeu 1504 15010497195 9304 sok ore gt joquog uonisod s ore gt 5 uogisod T 0192 xoeqpeej pue y pejqeue 2 3511 51 doo uonisod ayy uauM eyep e si Julod 141 0 UOHISOd H 9 E 9 8 Control Block Diagrams B 16 SSL 21601 part port 9 2020 SD D deis xepujorseg uonisod 29 9 jndino xpujsis
333. Or 009 6097905 609914041 548 190 2 09 _ 269 8 6 988 ver Z 00 609910041 54 190 057 _ 269 90S 097 616 009 9 2199 1021 008 989 887 Sze 192 Ob 0 2199 1021 008 985 897 9 69 96 0 0 917406 1199 4041 002 686 887 Sze 296 Or zI ose 1199 4041 002 989 988 or e 00 01 988406 6099 10 1 099 0 7 262 192 76 Or e 081 6099IN04 I 099 0 v 896 Sze 19 Or 0 0 9657405 609910041 09 S 212 802 982 Or Z 00 609911041 6 6 1 88 190 v62 or e 0 01 196406 609SWOZI ost 682 060 0 1 661 0 Z 054 609SIN04 I osp 68c Otc 802 GE e 00 6 802xQ0c 8098 0041 00 9 9 1 291 Or Z 094 809911041 00 Ste 8 041 61 e 0 6 0119406 esnj 5958 ul 3009 sduy 2 ZH1 owe JequinyN 913 uuewssng indjno Md dH E 6 9 4 Indu 018 29 Supplemental Information ZH 01 Buers 9566 Buronpoud ejqedeo Ajuo SOAP OZBINGOZ 0 2012041 0072 9911 971 0601 29 SE zZ 00 20V4NOZL O0vz 9911 862i 08 22 98 Z 0051 l LxIHAGOZ 2010041 009 99 1 ogei 086 8601 2000 1040 1 O0vc SPSL SELL 0601 c9 Or Z O01 l
334. OvrTrviCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a positive hardware positioning over travel condition 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Hrd OvrTrviCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a negative hardware positioning over travel condition 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Position ErrCnfg Enter a value to
335. P SCurve Time 1141 ParamAccessLevel 196 PM Test Idc Ramp 506 PPMP Spd Output 1142 PeakDetect1 Out 215 PM TestWait Time 505 PPMP Status 1135 PeakDetect2 Out 219 PMag Mode Config 512 PPMP TP DataDint 1146 PeakDtct Ctrl In 210 PMag Tune Config 517 PPMP TP DataReal 1147 PeakDtct Status 211 Port Mask Act 714 PPMP TP Select 1145 PeakDtct1 Preset 214 Posit Actl Load 765 PreCharge Delay 472 PeakDtct2 Preset 218 Posit Detct In 784 PreChrg Control 411 PI Error 183 Posit Detct2 In 785 PreChrg Err Cnfg 381 PI Feedback 182 Posit FB EGR Div 767 PreChrg TimeOut 410 PI High Limit 191 Posit FB EGR Mul 766 Preset Speed 1 14 PI Integ HLim 188 Posit Gear Ratio 796 Preset Speed 2 15 PI Integ LLim 189 Posit Load Fdbk 764 Preset Speed 3 16 PI Integ Output 190 Posit Offset 1 753 Preset Speed 4 17 Programming and Parameters 3 121 Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Preset Speed 5 18 Rx Dir Data Type 928 SL Buf Data Rx06 940 Preset Speed 6 19
336. Par 825 830 so multiple starts multiple runs or any 8 combination do not exist 3 Multiple inputs configured as Jog1 Reprogram Par 825 83080 only 1 is set to Jog1 amp Multiple inputs configured as Jog2 Reprogram Par 825 830 so only 1 is set to Jog2 Multiple inputs configured as Fwd Rev Reprogram Par 825 830so only 1 is set to Fwd Rev 14 Invalid Feedback Device for Permanent Magnet Motor Control Set Par 222 to Value 5 FB Opt Port0 4 4 Troubleshooting HIM Indication The HIM also provides visual notification of a fault Condition Display Drive is indicating a fault The LCD HIM immediately reports the fault condition by displaying the following e Faulted appears in the status line orau NN DC Bus Overvolt e Fault number F Faulted auto Time since Fault e Fault name 00 23 52 e Time that has passed since the fault occurred Press Esc to regain control of the HIM Manually Clearing Faults This section will contain a table that illustrates the HIM keystrokes necessary to clear faults Step Key s 1 Press Esc to acknowledge the fault The fault information will be removed so that you can use the HIM 2 Address the condition that caused the fault The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared 3 After corrective action has been taken clear the fault by one of these methods Press Stop Cycle drive power Select Clear Faults from Diagnos
337. Par Default 0 0000 831 Anlg 1 Sel is set to 1 Output Freq the output frequency of the drive is 0 60Hz and Min Max 2200000000 0000 you enter 6 in this parameter Par 837 Anlg Out1 Value 6Hz per 1V or 0 60Hz Par 832 Anlg Out1 Dint or Par 833 Anlg Out1 Real is multiplied by this number after the limit function 836 Anlg Out Zero Units Volt RW Real Applies an offset to the scaled value of Analog Output 1 This parameter is summed with the Default 0 0000 output of the scaling block This sum produces Par 837 Anlg Out Value Typically this value Min Max 20 0000 corresponds to for Analog Output 1 837 Anlg Out Value Units Volt RO Real Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output 1 before the digital to analog conversion _ Default 0 0000 Min Max 10 0000 838 Out2 Sel Default 3 Output Curr Identifies the signal used on Analog Output 2 If the desired signal is not available in the 0 2s selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 839 Anlg Out2 Dint or Par 840 Options i Motor Tie Anlg Out2 Real to select the desired parameter for output Refer to Par 831 for a list of 2 Sel Spd Ref 16 MtrTrqCurRef parameters that correspond to the option selected in this parameter 3 Output Curr 17 Speed Ref 4 Cur Iq 18 Speed Fdbk 5 Motor Flux 19
338. Pgain 47 Active gain 48 Reserved 49 Reserved 3 21 Data Type 2 gt Real Real 16 bit Integer Real Real Real 23 Srls BW Calc 50 Reserved 24 Snsr BW Calc 51 Reserved 25 Reserved 52 Reserved 26 Reserved 53 Reserved PU RO 0 0000 8 0000 pu 1 Speed Reg 0 Zero Torque 5 Sum Spd Trq 1 Speed Reg 6 AbsMnSpd Trq 2 Torque Ref 7 SLAT Minimum 3 Min Spd Trq 8 SLAT Maximum 4 Max Spd Trq 0 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0 Rated Motor Torque 1 0000 1 2200000000 0000 3 22 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 Programming and Parameters Name Description Torque Ref 2 Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive This parameter is multiplied by the value in Par 114 Torq Ref2 Mult A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Torque Ref2 Mult Par 113 Torque Ref 2 is multiplied by this number Use this parameter to scale the value of Par 113 Torque Ref 2 Torque Trim The amount added to Par 111 Torque Ref 1 and Par 113 Torque Ref 2 before the Speed Torque Mode Selector A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Torque Step The amount added to the selected Torque Reference before notch filtering or limits ar
339. RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Real 16 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 16 bit Integer Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea Rea 3 16 Programming and Parameters o 8 558 Description Values 2205 25 STrim2 Gain Default 1 0000 RWReal Sets the lead term for the Par 22 Speed Trim 2 filter Values greater than 1 will result in a lead Min Max 15 0000 function and value less than 1 will result in a lag function A value of 1 will disable the filter 26 SpdTrim2 Filt BW Units 5 V RW Real Sets the frequency for the Speed Trim 2 filter Default 200 0000 Min Max 0 0000 1000 0000 H Eee Ref A ER Default 1 Spd Ref 1 eed Ref B Se J5 the speed reference source for the drive The selected speed reference values Spe P converge in the final selection of the drives speed reference with Par 152 Applied LogicCma Options 0 Zero Speed 9 Preset Spd 5 and are selected with bits 28 29 30 Rd 1 2 the Block Di in Appendix B for a description See the Block Diagrams in Appendix B for a description Sc Sum Sref 112 12 DPI Port 4 MOP Level 13 z DPI Port 2 5 Preset Spd 1 14 z DPI Port 3 6 Preset Spd 2 15 Reserved 7 Preset Sp
340. RW 32 bit Integer Bit 0 Sync Pulse will go high for 0 5ms latching the Sync Generator inputs to the Sync Generator outputs The period at which this bit is set is determined by Xsync In 1 32 bit integer input of the Sync Generator Latched to Par 789 Xsync Out 1 Link any 32 bit integer parameter to this input parameter Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 Xsync Out 1 Sync Generator 32 bit output register Latched to Par 788 Xsync In 1 every time bit 0 Sync Pulse of Par 786 Xsync Status is set Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 Xsync In 2 32 bit integer input of the Sync Generator Latched to Par 791 Xsync Out 2 Link any 32 bit integer parameter to this input parameter Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 Xsync Out 2 Sync Generator 32 bit output register Latched to Par 790 Xsync In 2 every time bit 0 Sync Pulse of Par 786 Xsync Status is set Note This parameter was changed to an unsigned integer data type and linkable to parameters that are either real or integer values for firmware version 4 001 Xsync Out 2 Diy Displays
341. Reduce mechanical load squared scaled and integrated over time When this integrated value exceeds 1 0 this Exception Event occurs The integrator s output can be viewed in Par 330 Fault TP Data when Par 329 Fault TP Sel is set to 13 Mtr OL Outpt The overload integration rate is affected by Par 336 Motor OL Factor Par 337 Mtr 127 Curr Min Par 338 Mtr 127 Spd Min and Par 339 Mtr I2T Calibrat Enter correct motor nameplate full load amps Par 2 Motor NP FLA Configured with Par 371 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg 12 Motor motor overload is pending Par 308 Output Current is Reduce the mechanical load squared scaled and integrated over time When this integrated Ent er correct motor nameplate full load amps value exceeds 0 5 this exception event occurs Par 2 Motor NP FLA The integrator s output can be viewed in Par 330 Fault TP Configured with Par 372 Mtr OL Pend Cnfg Data when Par 329 Fault TP Sel is set to 13 Mtr OL Outpt The overload integration rate is affected by Par 336 Motor OL Factor Par 337 Mtr 127 Curr Min Par 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min and Par 339 Mtr I2T Calibrat 13 Motor Stalled Q The motor has stalled These three conditions have occurred at Increase torque limit the same time for the amount of time specified in Par 373 Motor Stall Time Reduce mechanical load 1 Drive is not stop
342. S TIN JON Zv A009 10 Z22 A08t eyed 10 BAM eyed 10 OAM 802 40 e ou02 103014 3 ed L 4 jenuejy eui oi 195 du jueuno y Pinoys eBuei ejqeysn pe ym Woy unang SHUEY v1 JOJOW JO 5 ezis DAN SN 104 exeeJq duy snoeuejuejsul 1012910Jd N3119 JOJOJA Uonejjejsui uoee JO uesouo eq snw ezis OFAN S N Aq ejqewojje unuixejy SHUEY W714 2010 Jo 62 1 ezis WNWIUIW SN 104 JexeeJq eun JexeeJg SHUEY v1 100W Jo GZI 1 ezis WNWIUIW OFAN SN 104 serjddns yey payed jsoyBly 9215 uonoejoid unuixejy eouesinu seiddns yey 199M0 AY 1 ezis O o0f SI euojepueis psdl z d L IN eui 10 juerquue UL 2 sas s eunsojoue uonjod peroejoidun Jo jueiquue 2 S Buge juerquue xuisyeeu auel 2 ed L IN SI SeAup jo ee
343. Source Common Signal O Shield Common Signal or Source Common Signal O Shield Common Signal or Source Common O Signal Shield Common t 0 Analog Output 10V DC Used to drive analog meters displaying speed and current 0 10V Analog Output OMAN 0 gt Using Analog Out 1 10V to 10V to meter Motor RPM and direction Sendthe data to the Analog Output Par 833 Anlg Out1 Real the destination linked to Par 71 Filtered SpdFdbk the source Scale the Output to the source parameter Par 835 Anlg Out1 Scale 175 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1750 10V Using Analog Out 2 10V to 10V to meter Motor Current Sendthe data to the Analog Output Par 840 Anlg Out2 Real the destination linked to Par 308 Output Current the source Scale the Output to the source parameter Par 842 Anlg Out2 Scale xx Par 2 Motor NP FLA 10 V Output Primary Encoder Interface Supports 5V DC 12V DC differential encoders with internal power supply Encoder The Z channe
344. Speed Trim 2 Provides an additive speed trim value to Par 47 SpdRef SpdTrm1 with a Lead Lag filter The Position regulator output is linked to this parameter by default This speed trim value affects the speed reference input to the speed regulator Speed Trim 3 Provides a scalable speed trim value that will be added to Par 47 SpdRef SpdTrm1 Par 24 SpdTrim 3 Scale scales this value prior to the trim value affecting the speed reference SpdTrim 3 Scale Par 23 Speed Trim 3 is multiplied by this number This number can be used to scale the value of Par 23 Speed Trim 3 1 The calculation is based on the drive frame size and input voltage 75 705 4 14112 0000 414112 0000 Volt Calculated Amps Calculated Calculated Calculated Hz Calculated 2 0000 500 0000 RPM Calculated 1 1 30000 Hp Calculated 0 2500 3500 0000 2 0000 0 0100 655 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 RPM 0 0000 8 0000 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu RPM 0 0000 414112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 0000 1 0 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 0000 1 0 pu Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0000 1 0 pu 1000 0000 Linkable RW RW RW
345. Table 285A Sample Rate Bit Settings Bit 12 11 10 Exponent Value n Filter Sample Size 2 0 1 0 0 1 1 2 0 1 0 2 4 0 1 1 3 8 Default 100 4 16 1 0 1 5 32 1106 64 1 1 1 7 127 286 Lineari Status Indicates faults on the Multi Device Interface MDI Bit 8 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault Options o l l 2 222 S 2 9 9 Default 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O pi Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 287 Linear TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select Linear Feedback data displayed in Par 288 Linear TP Data Options 0 Zero 4 L1 EPR Value 0 Zero displays a value of zero 1 41 Edge Time 5 L1 Edge Mode e Value 1 L1 Edge Time displays the change displays the latency or edge time the time 2 L1 dEdge 6 41 nMax since the last update of Par 252 FB
346. The source type 6 Reserved 20 Reserved selections are no data event feedback and drive parameter 7 Reserved 21 Dir Tx Data 914 SLTx DirectSel3 8 Reserved 22 Dir Rx Data Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 3 The source type 9 Reserved 23 0 Accum selections no data event feedback and drive parameter 10 Event Status 24 1 Accum Note These parameters were changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 11 Reserved 25 OptO Accum 12 Reserved 26 Opt Accum 13 Reserved 3 104 Programming and Parameters eo 8 S gs No Description Values 222 915 ISL Rev Events Displays the received event status from Par 917 SL Rx Regis 916 ISL Cir Events Set these bits to clear the corresponding event latches indicated in Par 915 SL Rcv Events Options 5 lalala lala la o o 1D is 2 2999999 9 9 9 9 9 9999999 99 9 o x o CC
347. Tjmax 71 Mtr NP RPM 90 HH1 1V Amp 109 HH2 1V Amp 11 Kw Accum 30 DC Bus 51 HS Max DegC 72 Mtr IR Vdrop 91 HH1 2s Amp 110 HH2 2s Amp 12 Mw Hrs Accum 31 Min PWM Khz 52 DBIGBT Amp 73 Mtr Id Ref 92 Scale 111 HH2 Scale Inv High 32 PWM Khz 53 ohms 74 1 Data Rev 93 2 Data Rev 14 Reserved 33 Dfl PWM Khz 54 DBE Jo degC 75 HH1 Dev Type 94 HH2 Dev Type 15 Fan PwrCntl 34 PWM Dead us 55 EB C Watt 76 HH1 Serial st 95 HH Serial 16 Temp Sensor 35 Drive Frame 56 Jo degC 77 1 TestDate 96 HH TestDate 17 Phs AmpScale 36 IGBTs per 57 DB C Watt 78 HH1 Vcn Code 97 HH2 Vcn Code 18 Gnd 37 GBT Rated V 60 DB Ambt Tmax 79 HH1CrsCnclD 98 HH2 CrsCncID Power EE TP Data Default 0 RO Real Displays the data selected by Par 412 Power EE TP Sel Min Max 2200000000 Brake Bus Cnfg Contigures the MUR and bus operation of the drive Set bit 0 Brake Enable to enable the operation of the internal brake transistor e Set bit 1 Brake Extern to configure the brake to use an external resistor Set bit 2 Bus Ref High to select the high voltage setting as the turn on point for the Bus Voltage Regulator With the high setting brake operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of Par 415 BusReg Brake Ref and Bus Voltage Regulator operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of Par 415 B
348. Tx DirectSel2 264 HeidenhainO Stat 550 Fdbk Offset 914 SL Tx DirectSel3 266 Heidn Encdr Type 740 Position Control 1000 UserFunct Enable 306 DC Bus Voltage 741 Position Status 1047 DInteReal In 322 Exception Event3 742 Position Ref Sel 1048 DInt2Real1 Scale 325 Fault Status 3 777 PositionFdbk Sel 1049 DInt2Real1Result 328 Alarm Status 3 796 Posit Gear Ratio The following new fault codes were added for firmware version 3 01 4 5 76 HiHP HardwareVer 78 HiHP VoltUnbince 95 Analog In 2 Loss 77 CurrUnblnce 94 Analog In 1 Loss 96 Analog In 3 Loss Encoder specifications updated 1 amp 7 Updated and new Control Block Diagrams B 1 soc 5 This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control User Manual publication 20D UM006 since the August 2004 release Change Seepage _ URL for Rockwell Automation Technical Support added Preface 2 Catalog Number Explanation updated Preface 5 DIP Switch Settings table updated 1 29 The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 2 03 and 2 04 3 1 3 114 e 42 Jerk 332 7001 EventStatus 483 VPL Mem Link Int e 98 Slip RPM FLA 333 7001 FaultStatus 484 VPL Mem Link Fit e 99 Slip Comp Gain 334 700L AlarmStatus 513 V Hz Mode Config 107 Slip RPM Meter 362 Current Limit Gain 527 Start Acc Boost 136 Skip Speed 1 363 Ki Current Limit 528
349. VoltageLvlEr N Open Wire gt gt Quadrate Er 9 Sig Amplitud Reserved e Reserved IReserved 9 Emul Enc Out gt 9M Enc Out o A bs e lt 265 Heidn Mkr Offset Default 0 0000 RW 32 bit Configures marker offset values for the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option The marker 0 0000 4294967295 Integer offset is specified within one revolution Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 266 Heidn Encdr Type V RW 16 bit Configures the encoder type manually if the Endat type is not used Integer Bit 1 Not EnDat when this bit is set it indicates that an Endat type encoder is not used Bit 2 Multi Turn when this bit is set it indicates that a multi turn type encoder is used Bit 5 Endat24bitSl when this bit is on Heidenhain encoder works as Endat Single turn 24 bits When this bit is off the Heidenhain encoder works as Endat Single turn 20 bits Bit 6 VrtlMasterEn when set indicates that the Virtual Master encoder function of the Heidenhain option card is active The Virtual Master function is available with v3 00 or later of the Heidenhain option card Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Bit 1 Not Endat was changed to 0 false and bit 2 Multi Turn was changed to 1 true for firmware version 2 04 Bit 1 Not Endat was changed to 1 true bit 2
350. a displayed in Par 467 MC TP1 Value and Par 468 MC TP1 Bit Par 467 MC TP1 Value and Par 468 MC TP1 Bit are diagnostic tools you can use to view internal drive parameters The default value is option 0 MulqsRef2 Note Options 209 212 were added for firmware version 2 04 Options 213 254 were added for firmware version 3 01 Changed the following selections for firmware 4 001 84 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 95 97 98 99 103 104 105 106 108 109 110 111 163 164 165 174 175 176 177 178 179 181 182 183 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 236 237 253 Options 0 MulqsRef2 1 SlipRatio 2 Ws 3 WrEst2 4 We 5 VdsCmd 6 7 8 VvCmd1 9 1 10 luFdbk 11 IwFdbk 12 IdsFdbk 13 IgsFdbk 14 VdsFdbk 15 VuvFdbk 16 VvwFdbk 17 VqsFdbk 18 IdsCmd 19 IqsRatio 20 MulqsRef 21 IqsCmd 22 We2 23 24 25 26 27 28 VwCmd2 29 30 Vds cemf 31 Vqs cemf 32 VdsCmd2 33 VqsCmd2 34 Idslntegral 35 Iqsintegral 36 DcBus 37 AGnd 38 Wr2 39 FluxRatiot 40 VbusFdbk 41 FluxRatio2 42 FluxRatio3 43 FluxRatio4 44 MuFlxRtioRef 45 RcpFlxRatio1 46 MulfluxRef 47 MultestRef 48 MotVntc 49 BaseSlip 50 VbusFdbk2 51 VdsFdbk2 52 VqsFdbk2 53 VdsSpdVItFlt 54 WrEst1 55 MuTestFrqRef 56 TestFrqRef
351. achLoss Rst 9 Spd Crv En SpdRamp Dsbl found in a connection with the Logix Controller Note Bits 7 amp 8 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options m P 355 8 2 2 255 0 2 0 lo l o 5 2 5 5 lolo g gt m S SOze9g2r r5zB85 o0s5 crrrsisuisewsbsi c i EsEPIitisisms i sig g 21885 5 5 2 5 5 55 82 2 o 0 rcr S c 5 5 2 a ji E jui o E Default 0 0 0 0000000020000 0 0 0 JO 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 1 Speed Reference Select Inputs Bit 30 29 28 Spd Spd Spd Ref Ref Ref Auto Reference Sel2 Sell Sel0 Source 0 0 0 Speed Ref A Sel 0 0 1 Speed Ref B Sel 0 1 0 Preset Speed 2 To access Preset Speed 1 0 1 1 Preset Speed 3 set parameter 27 Speed 1 Preset d4 Ref A Sel or 28 Speed Ref 0 reset Speg B Sel to 5 Preset Spd 1 1 0 1 Preset Speed 5 1 1 0 Preset Speed 6 3 26 Programming and Parameters 8 sz Name s No Description Values S28 153 Control Options Set bits to configure the options for operating the drive Note Bit 3 Flying Start was added for firmware version 2 04 Bit 20 21 and 29 were added for firmware version 3 01 Added bit 31 Ids Test Enable fo
352. agram 2 7 Updated the Min Max values for parameter 75 Rev Speed Limit 3 18 Updated the Min Max values for parameter 76 Fwd Speed Limit 3 18 Added values 9 and 10 to parameter 150 Logic State Mach 3 24 Added value 8 to parameter 165 Tune Test Status 3 29 Updated the trigger Source settings for parameter 236 RegisLtch 0 1Cnfg 3 35 Changed parameter 321 Exception Event2 bit 14 to non configurable alarm 3 48 Changed parameter 322 Exception Event3 bit 11 12 13 21 and 28 to a non configurable 3 48 alarms Changed parameter 324 Fault Status 2 bit 14 to a non configurable alarm 3 48 Changed parameter 325 Fault Status 3 bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to 12v Pwr 3 49 Changed parameter 327 Alarm Status 2 bit 14 to a non configurable alarm 3 49 Changed parameter 328 Alarm Status 3 bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to 12v Pwr 3 49 Added values 45 46 and 47 to parameter 347 Drive OL TP Sel 3 53 Added values 20 52 to parameter 357 Curr Ref TP Sel 3 54 Changed bit 3 to FastFluxDsbl for parameter 510 FVC Mode Config 3 72 Changed bit 3 to FastFluxDsbl for parameter 513 V Hz Mode Config 3 73 Updated the default and Min Max values for parameter 532 Maximum Frequency 3 76 Change bit 18 to Vqs Reg Act for parameter 555 MC Status 3 78 Added bit 9 Watch Fb Arm and bit 10 WatchFbPosit to parameter 691 Motn EventStatus 3 84 Added bit 7 Watch Fb Rev to parameter 692
353. alog Input channel 1 is lost For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel 1 channel 1 see Par 1093 Anlg IniLossCnfg Change configuration for parameter 1093 Anlg In1LossCnfg 95 In 2 Loss Analog Input channel 2 is lost For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel 2 channel 2 see Par 1094 Anlg In2LossCnfg Change configuration for parameter 1094 Anlg In2LossCnfg 96 Analog In Loss Analog Input channel 3 is lost For configuration of Analog Input Check condition of Analog Input channel 3 channel 3 see Par 1095 Anlg IndLossCnfg Change configuration for parameter 1095 Anlg In3LossCnfg 129 Faults Cleared Indicates that all faults have been cleared Informational only 130 Fault Q Cleared Indicates that the fault queue has been cleared Informational only 131 Alarm Cleared li Indicates that all alarms have been cleared Informational only 132 Alarm Q Cleared indicates that the alarm queue has been cleared Informational only Refer to Table 4 C on page 4 4 for Fault Type Descriptions 4 12 Troubleshooting Table 4 E Fault Description Cross Reference DPI Loss Port 4 Motor Stalled DPI Loss Port 5 Net Loss DPI P1 Fault No Fault No 12volt Power Alarm 93 HiHp PwrEE Error 74 15volt Power 23 HiHP VoltUnbInce 78 Hard Over 83 In
354. alue is set to the value in Par Min Max 2147483648 0 Integer 1165 EGR Pos Output when bits 0 Output Sel 0 and 1 Output Sel 1 of Par 1161 EGR Config are set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1170 Generic 1 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1171 Generic 2 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1172 Generic 3 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1173 Generic 4 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1174 Generic 5 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1175 MC Generic 6 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1176 Generic 7 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1177 MC Generic 8 Default 0 RW 16 bit For Future Use Min Max 32767 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 3 116 Programming and Parameters
355. ameter to produce Par 807 Anlg In2 Value AI 2 Filt Gain Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 2 filter Anlg In2 Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Analog Input 2 filter Light Heavy Par 810 AI 2 Filt Gain 025 0 1 Par 811 Anlg In2 Filt BW 50 10 Anlg In3 Data Displays the scaled final value for Analog Input 3 Anlg In3 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 3 Analog Input 3 is a uni polar voltage input only and cannot be configured for current of Input Voltage Polarity Uni Polar Resolution 10 bit 0 to 1023 Note When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 Analog I O Units is set 1 this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM Anlg In3 Scale Scales the raw analog input data plus the input offset if any to the desired data range The scaled data for Analog Input 3 is displayed in Par 812 Anlg In3 Data and is available for usage in the drive Enter the units you want per volt For example If Par 813 Anlg In3 Value 0 10V and you enter 6 in this parameter Par 812 Anlg In3 Data will equal 0 60V Par 813 Par 814 Par 812 Note When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 Analog I O Units is set 1 this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM And In3 Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 3 Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create an offset to the actual input The output of the A D converter is summed with this parameter to
356. ameter to Par 763 Position Actual with Par 740 Position Control bits 18 4 19 Position Watch 2 compares this value with 781 PositDetct2 Stpt and sets bit 9 Watch2 of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condition is satisfied A default link connects this parameter to Par 763 Position Actual Xsync Status 787 Xsync Gen Period Note Bit 1 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Name Description Values PositDetct2 Stpt Default Provides the set point for Position Watch 2 Position Watch 2 is enabled and configured with Min Max In Posit BW Default Sets the overall bandwidth of the In Position detector The detector sets bit 10 In Position of Min Max Units 5 Position error must be within the value specified by Par 782 In Posit BW for this amount of Default 0 time before the In Position detector sets bit 10 In Position of Par 741 Position Status Min Max 0 Posit Dect1 In Default 0 Provides the input variable for Position Watch 1 Position Watch 1 is enabled and configured Min Max 2147483648 Posit Dect2 In Default 0 Provides the input variable for Position Watch 2 Position Watch 2 is enabled and configured Min Max 0 2147483648 200 0 1000000 0040 0000 10 0000 42147483648 lt Linkable Read Write ata Type 20 W 32 bit RW 32 bit Integer RW Real RW 32 bit Integer
357. ameters are Organized Metering 310 Output Freq 49 Selected SpdRefA 50 Selected SpdRefB 40 Selected Spd Ref 43 Ramped Spd Ref 301 Motor Speed Ref 319 Selected Trq Ref 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 72 Scaled Spd Fdbk 297 Output Curr Disp 499 Trq CurFdbk Iq 309 Motor Flux 312 MotorFluxCurr FB 307 Output Voltage 311 Output Power 762 Position Fdbk 299 Elapsed MWHrs 298 Elapsed Run Time 306 DC Bus Voltage 313 Heatsink Temp 345 Drive OL JnctTmp 824 Local I O Status 801 Anlg Ini Value 807 Anlg In2 Value 813 Anlg In3 Volts 837 Value 844 Anlg Out2 Value Programming and Parameters 3 8 DriveExecutive programming software displays parameters in Linear List or File Group Parameter format Viewing the parameters in File Group Parameter format simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used for similar functions There are twelve files Each file is divided into multiple groups of parameters Control Status Drive Data 150 Logic State Mach 400 Rated Amps 155 Logic Status 401 Rated Volts 157 Logic Ctrl State 420 Pwr Strct Mode 156 Start Inhibits 404 Dead Time 166 Motor Ctrl Cmmd 314 VPL Firmware Rev 167 Motor Ctrl Ackn 315 VPL Build Number 555 MC Status 457 MC Firmware Rev 346 Drive OL Status 456 MC Build Number 159 Digln ConfigStat 900 SynchLink Rev 165 Tune Test Status 901 SL System Rev 317 SL System Time 554 LED Status 3 4 Programming
358. ample If Par 801 Anlg In1 Value 0 10V and you enter 6 in this parameter Par 800 Anlg In1 Data will equal 0 60V Par 801 Par 802 Par 800 Ini Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input 1 Use the offset to correct for zero signal errors or to create an offset to the actual input The output of the A D converter is summed with this parameter to produce Par 801 Anlg In1 Value Al 1 Filt Gain Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 1 filter Anlg Ini Filt BW Provides the Lag term for the Analog Input 1 filter Light Heavy Par 804 Al 1 Gain 025 0 1 Par 805 Anlg In1 Filt BW 50 10 Values Default Min Max Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Default Units Default Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 0 0 4294967295 0 0 4294967295 0 0 4294967295 1 00 0 00 9999 00 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 0000 2200000000 0000 VimA 0 0000 1 20 0000 N or mA 0 1000 2200000000 0000 V mA 0 0000 20 0000 1 0000 5 0000 R S 0 0000 0 0000 3760 00001 lt Linkable Read Write RW RW RW RW RW RO RO RO RW RW RW RW 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer
359. ance hysteresis band around the value in Par 41 Limited Spd Ref for Default 17 6400 comparison to average speed feedback The comparison controls bit 14 At Setpt Spd of Par 0 0000 882 0000 155 Logic Status In general bit 14 At Setpt Spd turns on when the feedback is within the Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu tolerance of the reference Turn on level for rising feedback Limited Spd Ref Limit e Turn off level for rising feedback Limited Spd Ref 2 Limit Turn on level for falling feedback Limited Spd Ref Limit e Turn off level for falling feedback Limited Spd Ref 2 Limit 172 Setpt 1 Data Unit 4 Real Provides data for comparison to Par 173 Setpt1 TripPoint driving bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Default 0 0000 155 Logic Status For more information please see Setpt 1 Data on page C 8 Min Max 8 0000 pu 3 30 Programming and Parameters 8 5 575 Description Values 5g 173 Setpt1 TripPoint Unit 4 Real Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 16 At Setpt 1 of Par 155 Logic Status Default 0 1000 Min Max 8 0000 pu 174 Setpt 1 Limit Unit Real Creates a tolerance hysteresis band around the value in Par 173 Setpt1 TripPoint Default 0 0100 Turn on level for ascending data TripPoint Limit Min Max 0 0
360. and 21MKXL motors with a 1326 CECU XXL XXX cable SIN REFCOS COS SHIELD SHIELD N C N C DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 Hi Res Feedback Option Board POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 9 m c ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN SIN REFCOS COS DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 SHIELD OVERALL SHIELD 2090 CDNFDMP SXX cable POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 SIN REFCOS COS SHIELD SHIELD NIC NIC DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 WH a BK BK DOC Xw ES BK BK Es RD xX BK BK DECR BU AX BU I GN CLI x BK s GN L Figure F2 MPL A5xx and all MPL Bxxx motors or 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motors with Hi Res Feedback Option Board WHIOR_ BK ES OR BKWH BKWH RD t BK TOC WHRD WH RD eN RD xX WHIGN BE WHOR 01 au Mo L Ej wugu XOX WHBU Sh I weien AS L CO RB Aa DN uzommuooumom ENCODER SIN REFSIN COS REFCOS DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 POWER COMMON TS TS Figure MPL A5xx and all MPL Bxxx M
361. anged bit 14 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3 03 Options gt _ 52 5 5 5 5 5 Ele 5 25 5 eae 5 2 2 gt 9 55855 9 9 S 2 l2 l2 29 0 2 gt I 5 x EAEE 5 2155 52 538 Defaut 0 00 o o o op op p op op O Oo oO p 0 joj 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True Alarm Status 3 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions These events are from Par 322 Exception Event3 Bit 11 HH HW Ver indicates a non configurable High Horsepower hardware version fault Bit 12 HH CurUnbInc indicates a non configurable High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault e Bit 13 HH VitUnbinc indicates a non configurable High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault e Bit 14 HH Bus Data indicates when Communication Bus data are mismatched between left side unit and right side unit Bit 21 Drive Homing when the drive is in Drive Homing mode parameter Par 740 Position Control bit 24 Find Home or bit 27 Return Home is set to 1 this alarm is triggered and the drive moves to a home position automatical
362. anging the firmware scan times will affect drive i Integer Options 0 0 5 2 8ms performance Faster scan times may allow for higher bandwidth of the internal regulators To 1 0 5 1 8ms achieve faster scan times some functions may need to be disabled Only the most demanding 2 0 25 1 8ms application may benefit from faster scan times Typically adjusting this parameter is not needed it is recommended you consult the factory before changing 147 FW Functions En Allows specific firmware functions to be disabled When a bit is false the associated function is disabled and all related parameters will be hidden When a bit is true the associated function is enabled and all related parameters wil be displayed Notes Bits 18 20 amp 21 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Bit 19 MotinPlanner and 24 PhaseLockLp were added for firmware version 3 01 Options be c 9 lt E LQ gt 8 5 8800 5 gt 1212 gt 515 5 oo 5 5 2 5525 gu 05 0 0 5 gt 2 OQ N A O lu Default 1 1 0 1 0
363. ao Rian Page ERR dde D 3 Viewing and Editing D 5 LCD nines to hen ken Gans Goin le NIS d EN E ded I D 5 Numeric Keypad Shortcut llle D 5 Linking Paraineters iie VUE ex eoa emet s D 5 Establishing Link ez seem pte etes D 6 Removing Installing the III D 6 PowerFlex 7005 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives i e bie eee abe 1 Specifications nee TE RS 1 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card Specifications 1 Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card E 2 Dip Switch Setting8 52 22 e Re Rue Eu E ee ee hee cee des E 3 PowerFlex 700 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Chapter aes ews ene aed F 1 Sp cifications cuesta penes ip ee Sets hin ot a bir rea este F 1 Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card Specifications F 1 Supported Encod rs zi em eue ERAI AER dap eia mis F 1 Wiring the Stegmann Hi Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder F 2 Recommended Cabl s Ra ean E 3 4 Table of Contents Appendix G Appendix H Appendix I
364. apdn pue ay 104 sejeJ xurquou s pue pue JO jueJejjip Y pue 99291 10 jeuuoj eu 3euuo uiuo 15 016 pue 1euuo juiuo XY 15 S06 yoea Jo 00 p1JoM Ajuo 141 1 palayng 81 pue SpJoM 81 SpJOM 1IUISUEJ JAA Y SPIO JO e 2941 S9JON 15 00 PJOM 75 96 00 x1 eea ng 15 oes 0031915 ed ejeg yng 1 L 15 0 00 PJOM 75 00 1816 Kee ed eq xy Xurquo pasayng 191040002 X 15 016 jeuuoJ 1 yewo4wwog 151806 21 04 ejeg 1304 84 390 1304 84 0390 pou Jpou3 wol4 uonisog Qpou3 wnay 0 gt 15 lt gt 00X1 15 suang 15 Ceez gt uorisibou L uoje1
365. arameter in the order in which they occurred Bit 9 CurrSensor U indicates a current sensing fault in the U phase power structure of a frame 12 drive Bit 11 CurrSensor V indicates a current sensing fault in the V phase power structure of a frame 12 drive Bit 13 CurrSensor W indicates a current sensing fault in the W phase power structure of a frame 12 drive Bit 17 IFlux Range indicates that the Flux current is above 90 of the motor rated current Note Bits 1 7 10 12 and 18 were changed to Reserved bits 9 11 13 and 17 were changed for firmware version 3 01 Options gt gt D 5 5 5 72 a e 2 3 122 2 uu gt 1703 o e o o i Ee Bee E gt olo 5 5 5 ele I I fae m Default 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 0 0 JO JO 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 6 543 2 1 0 1 Thue 466 Description MC TP1 Select Programming and Parameters 3 67 Linkable Read Write Data Type Enter a value to select Motor Control MC dat
366. arameters eo 8 575 No Description Values 52 5 329 Fault TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select Fault data displayed in Par 330 Fault TP Data Options 0 Zero 12 OL Input 1 Abs OverSpd 13 Mtr OL Outpt 2 EE Pwr State 14 MtrStallTime 3 Inv DataStat 15 MC Handshake 4 Run Time 16 VPL Handshak 5 LowBus Thres 17 Diag 6 LowBus Detct 18 PwrLossState 7 PwrLosBusVIt 19 12 volt loss 8 MCPLosBusVIt 20 PwrEE Chksum 9 MC Fit Reset 21 Db Read Cnt 10 Ext Fit Stat 22 Db Read Cnt2 11 TaskErr 23 Db Read Cnt3 330 Fault TP Data Default 0 RO Real Displays the data selected by Par 329 Fault TP Sel Min Max 2200000000 331 LstFaultStopMode Default 0 Ignore Displays the action taken by the drive during the last fault When a fault occurs an action is Options 0 Ignore 3 Fit RampStop taken as a result of that fault H Alarm 4 FltCurLimStop 2 FitCoastStop 332 7001 EventStatus Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies for PowerFlex 700L LiquiFlo drive Bit 0 Phs U1 indicates that the primary structure detected on phase U Bit 1 Dsat Phs V1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 2 Dsat Phs W indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat
367. asured bus voltage Default 0 0000 Note The maximum value was increased from 1000 0000 to 1170 0000 for firmware version Min Max 0 0000 1170 0000 3 01 Output Voltage Units _ Volt RO Real Displays RMS line to line fundamental motor voltage This data is averaged and updated Default 0 00 every 50 milliseconds Min Max 0 00 3000 00 Output Current Units Amps RO Real Displays measured RMS motor current Default 0 00 Min Max 0 00 10000 00 Motor Flux Units RO 16 bit Displays the motor flux in of nominal Default 0 0 Integer Min Max 0 0 100 0 Scale 100 4096 Output Freq Unis Hz RO Real Displays the motor stator frequency Default 0 00 Min Max 250 00 Programming and Parameters 3 47 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 Read Write Data Type RO Real RO Real RO 16 bit Integer RO 16 bit Integer Exception Eventi 2 Q Name Description Values 5 Output Power Units Motor Power is the calculated product of the torque reference and motor speed feedback A Default 0 00 125mS filter is applied to this result Positive values indicate motoring power negative values Min Max 9999 00 indicate regenerative power Note The units were changed from kW to Hp for firmware version 2 03 MotorFluxCurr FB Unit Displays the measured per unit motor flux producing current Default 0 0000 Min Max 0
368. ated 228 PLL EPR Output 726 PositRef EGR Mul 745 MulDiv 1 Div 1055 PLL Ext Spd Ref 728 PositRef EGR Out 744 MulDiv 1 Input 1053 PLL Ext SpdScale 729 PositReg Droop 771 MulDiv 1 Mul 1054 PLL LPFilter BW 730 PositReg Integ 770 MulDiv 1 Result 1056 PLL FiltPositOut 733 PositReg P Gain 768 MulDiv 2 Div 1059 PLL Posit Out 731 PositTP DataDInt 738 MulDiv 2 Input 1057 PLL Posit OutAdv 732 PositTP DataReal 739 MulDiv 2 Mul 1058 PLL Position Ref 721 Power EE TP Data 413 MulDiv 2 Result 1060 PLL Rev Input 723 Power EE TP Sel 412 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 392 PLL Rev Output 724 Power Loss Level 408 Normal Stop Mode 168 PLL Speed Out 734 Power Loss Mode 406 Notch Filt Freq 118 PLL SpeedOut Adv 735 Power Loss Time 407 NotchAttenuation 117 PLL TP DataDint 718 PPMP Accel Time 1139 OL ClsLp CurrLim 344 PLL TP DataReal 719 PPMP Control 1134 OL OpnLp CurrLim 343 PLL TP Select 717 PPMP Decel Time 1140 Opt 0 Regis Ltch 257 PLL VirtEncdrRPM 727 PPMP Fwd Spd Lim 1137 Opt 1 Regis Ltch 258 PM AbsEncd Offst 504 PPMP Over Ride 1138 Opt0 1 RegisCnfg 254 PM D Inductance 521 PPMP Pos Command 1130 Opt0 1 RegisCtrl 255 PM Mtr CEMF Coef 523 PPMP Pos Div 1132 Opt0 1 RegisStat 256 PM Mtr CEMF Comp 427 PPMP Pos Mul 1131 Output Curr Disp 297 PM Q Inductance 520 PPMP Pos Output 1143 Output Current 308 PM Stator Resist 522 PPMP Pos To Go 1144 Output Freq 310 PM Test Freq Ref 508 PPMP Rev Spd Lim 1136 Output Power 311 PM Test FreqRamp 507 PPMP Scaled Cmd 1133 Output Voltage 307 PM Test Ref 509 PPM
369. atic control procedures reference A B publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with the PowerFlex 700S Drive and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block refer to Chapter 1 for location The voltage must be zero ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists DPI or SCANport host products must not be directly connected together via 1202 cables Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in this manner ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg let you determine the action of the drive in response to operating anomalies Precautions should be taken to ensure t
370. au 713 Logic Mask Act 663 DPI Data Out B2 637 To DriveLogix1 1 CE 664 DPI Data Out C1 638 DriveLogixt2 336 SL Buf Data xoz 665 DPI Data Out C2 639 To DriveLogix13 D BU Dala US 666 DPI Data Out D1 640 To DriveLogixt4 COE eps 667 DPI Data Out D2 641 ToDriveLogixi5 3937 642 To DriveLogix16 940 SL Buf Data Rx06 643 To DriveLogix17 941 SL Buf Data Rx07 644 To DriveLogix18 942 SL Buf Data Rx08 645 DriveLogixt9 943 SL Buf Data Rx09 646 To DriveLogix20 944 Buf Data Rx10 945 SL Buf Data Rx11 946 51 Buf Data Rx12 947 Buf Data Rx13 948 SL Buf Data Rx14 949 SL Buf Data Rx15 950 51 Buf Data Rx16 951 SL Buf Data Rx17 Programming and Parameters 3 13 Sm ication rocess Sion Com N Contro Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Digital Inputs Digital Outputs BitSwap Control 821 Analog I O Units 821 Analog I O Units 823 Digln Debounce 845 Dig Out Sel 860 BitSwap 1A Data 803 Anlg In1 Offset 831 Sel 825 Dig Ini Sel 846 Dig Out Data 861 BitSwap 1A Bit 801 AnlgIn1 Value 832 Anlg Dint 826 Dig In2 Sel 847 Dig Outt Bit 862 BitSwap 1B Data 802 Anlg Ini Scale 833 Anlg Out1 Real 827 019113 Sel 848 Dig Outi On Time 863 BitSwap 1B Bit 804 Al1Filt Gain 834 Out1 Offset 828 Dig In4 Sel 849 Dig Out OffTime 864 BitSwap 1 Result 805 AnlgIn1 Filt BW 835 Out Scale 829 Dig In5 Sel 850 Dig Out2 Sel 865
371. ault status for port 0 of the Resolver Feedback Option Card 6 OptPort 1 Loss Q The Linear sensor portion of the MDI feedback option card has Reconnect encoder or replace encoder detected Reconnect option feedback card e Par 286 Linear1 Status displays the fault status for linear Configured with Par 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri portion of the MDI feedback Option Card Par 366 Fdbk LsCnfg Alt and Par 367 Fdbk LsCnfgPosit 7 Params Defaulted All parameters are reset to default by user 8 SLink HW Fail A fault on loading SynchLink firmware into FPGA on Main Replace Main Control Board Control Board at power up 9 SLink Comm Fail A SynchLink communication fault has occurred Verify the SynchLink configuration in e Par 904 SL Node Cnfg e Par 902 SL Error Status displays SynchLink errors e Par 905 SL Rx CommFormat and e Par 910 SL Tx CommFormat Reconnect SynchLink communication fibers Configured with Par 384 SL CommLoss Cnfg 10 Drive PowerLoss DC Bus voltage has fallen below the minimum value Verify AC line power Par 306 DC Bus Voltage displays bus voltage Par 330 Fault TP Data displays the minimum value when Par 329 Fault TP Sel is set to five The drive must first complete precharge before this check is made 4 6 Troubleshooting No Name Type Description Action 11 Motor OLoad Trip A motor overload trip has occurred Par 308 Output Current is
372. aving Data D 4 Scheme Recommended Grounding 1 5 Setting Preferences D 4 Shielded Cables Power 1 8 SHLD Terminal 1 6 Side Covers Removing 1 2 Signal Wire 1 19 Sinking Input Output 1 26 Sourcing Input Output 1 26 Spare Connectors E 1 G 1 Specifications 1 13 A 1 Speed Control Reference 3 6 Speed Posit Fdbk Feedback Config 3 10 Start Up 2 1 Assisted 2 5 Checklist 2 1 Faults 2 5 Status Indicator 2 4 4 2 Status Word Logic A 6 Stegmann High Resolution F 1 Support Encoders F 1 Stegmann Hi Resolution Specifications F 1 Supplemental Information A 1 Supply Source 1 4 Support P 2 Surrounding Air 1 3 Operating Temperatures 1 3 Index 5 SynchLink K 1 SynchLink Cables and Accessories K 2 T Tap Access 1 11 TB1 Row B Bottom Terminals 1 26 TB2 Row T Top Terminals 1 26 Technical Support P 2 Terminal Block 1 9 Location 1 13 Specification 1 13 Wire Size Power 1 12 Thermistor Ratings A 30 THWN THHN 1 8 Torque Control Torque 3 7 Troubleshooting 4 1 Typical Jumper Locations 1 18 U Unbalanced Ungrounded Supply 1 4 Ungrounded Distribution Systems 1 17 Unshielded Power Cables 1 8 User Functions Param amp Config 3 14 User Sets D 4 Utility Drive Memory 3 11 V Viewing and Changing Parameters D 5 Voltage Low Voltage 1 29 W Wire Signal 1 19 Wiring Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 9 1 19 Main Control Board 1 20 Power 1 7 Index 6 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Inf
373. ax 852 External Source 750 mA 6 Relay Output 3 NC Relay contact output 856 7 Relay Output 3 Rating 115V AC 24V DC 2 max 857 8 Relay Output 3 NO Inductive Resistive 9 Digital Input 1 3 Com NA Common for Digital Inputs 1 3 10 Digital Input 1 High speed 12 24V DC sourcing Digital Input 825 11 Digital Input 2 Load 15 mA at 24V DC 826 12 Digital Input 3 Load 15 mA at 24V DC sourcing 827 13 Digital Input 4 6 Com NA Common for Digital Inputs 4 6 14 Digital Input 4 Load 10 mA at 24V DC sinking sourcing 828 15 Digital Input 5 Load 7 5 mA at 115V AC 829 16 Digital Input 6 HW Enable Note The 115 VAC Digital Inputs can withstand 2 milliamps of leakage current without turning on If an output device has a leakage current greater than 2 milliamps a burden resistor is required A 68 1K ohm resistor with a 0 5 watt rating should be used to keep the 115 VAC output below 2 milliamps 830 1 24 Installation Wiring Input Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes 0 10V Analog Input 0 10V Analog Input Bi Polar NA 18 11114 16 X 7 6 18 enr 19 EC 20 imi 22 11 23 1 12 UL pt 0 10V Analog Input 0 10V Analog Input External Source NA iA O Signal or
374. ayTimer2Accum must reach before bit 2 Timer Done in Par 1117 DelayTimer2Stats is set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 DelayTimer2Accum The amount of time that has elapsed since the timer was enabled Par 1117 DelayTimer2Stats bit 1 set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max 0 32 bits of data 32 0 0 600 00 Sec 0 0 600 00 0 32 bits of data 32 0 60000 e Sec 0 0 60000 lt Linkable Read Write RW RW RO RW RW RW RO 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 3 112 Programming and Parameters eo 8 575 5 Description Values 2225 1117 DelayTimer2Stats Displays the status of the user defined on or off delay timer Bit 0 Timer Enable when this bit is set the timer is enabled Bit 1 Timer Timing when this bit is set the timer is running Bit 2 Timer Done when this bit is set the timer is done Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options 2 5
375. ble but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length Particularly some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known EMC Compliance Refer to CE Conformity on page 1 29 for details Installation Wiring 1 9 Cable Trays and Conduit If cable trays or large conduits are to be used refer to guidelines presented in publication DRIVES INOO1 Grounding and Wiring Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives induced voltages unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends For the same reason if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads ATTENTION avoid a possible shock hazard caused by Motor Cable Lengths Typically motor lead lengths less than 30 meters 100 feet are acceptable For motor lead lengths of 30 meters 100 feet or above applicable cable types and length recommendations and restrictions refer to publication 20D TD002 Technical Data PowerFlex 700S Drives Phase
376. ble via Par 830 Dig In6 Sel Table 1 1 Terminals BS Terminal Signal Default Description co 1 Analog Input 1 Comm Volt Bipolar differential input 10V 0 20 mA 13 bit sign gt 2 Analog Input 1 ae jm impedance at Volt 500 Ohm impedance at 800 m 7 18k 3 Shield NA Analog Input Shield 2 4 Analog Input 2 Comm Volt Bipolar differential input 10 0 20 mA 13 bit sign 2 5 Analog Input 2 20k Ohm impedance at Volt 500 Ohm impedance at mA 806 les 6 Analog Input 3 NTC Comm Volt Differential input 0 10V 10 bit for motor control mode 2 9 2 7 Analog Input 3 NTC FVC2 this is the temperature adaptation input 812 8 Shield NA Analog Output Shield 2 E S 9 Analog Output 1 Volt Bipolar differential output 10V 0 20 mA 11 bit sign 832 833 A 10 Analog Output 1 2k Ohm minimum load 11 Analog Output 2 Volt 839 840 12 Analog Output 2 A 13 10 Reference Rating 20 mA maximum load Recommend 5k Ohm pot 9 S 14 Reference Common NA lw 19 K 15 10V Reference NA _ S 16 Encoder A NA Normal current draw per channel 20 mA 230 233 ek 17 Encoder A Not NA Flo 2 18 Encoder B NA 12 A 19 Encoder B NA 20 Encoder Z NA Z 21 Encoder Z Not N
377. cable Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 E RD 4 POWER POWER 11 S XX x gt 2 POWER COMMON REFSIN 10 gt 8 REFSIN 5 9 zn XX BK 4 REFCOS REFCOS 8 BK 5 pg AS 485 4008 7 PK XX GN 6 DATA RS 485 SHIELD L WHI 7 SHIELD 5 PK NC 4 NC DATA RS 485 2 Mmm SE DATA RS 485 1 DIE d XX Appendix G PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives For Information on Specifications G 1 Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver G 3 Specifications Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Excitation Frequency 2381 9300 Hz Excitation Voltage 8 26 Vrms Resolver Feedback Voltage 2 Vrms 300 mV Customer I O plug P1 Allen Bradley PN 594262908 Weidmuller PN BL3 50 90 8BK Compatible Resolvers Table G A specifies which resolvers are supported by the PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option module Table G A Compatible Resolvers Parameter 275 Parameter 275 Parameter 277 Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Manufacturer Setting for Phasel Setting for Phasel Setting for Phase Manufacturer Catalog Number Notes Firmware 1 17 Firmware 2 XX Firmware 1 XX Tamagawa TS 2014N181E32 x 1 flange mounted 1 Rel800123 2R 1 T2014 2087x1 1 T2014 2087x1
378. configure the drive s response to a position error condition 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Rated Amps This displays the currenting rating of the inverter The drive automatically sets this at power up Note The maximum value was changed for firmware version 2 03 Rated Volts This displays the name plate voltage rating of the inverter The drive automatically sets this at power up Values Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Linkable Read Write Data Type FitCoastStop Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop n Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp ROMO Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimSt
379. configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event HiHp InPhsLs Cig Selector for the input phase loss configuration e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Note The default value was changed from 1 Alarm to 3 Fit RampStop for firmware version 3 01 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Overload OL Trip exception event e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop config
380. cted input enter the desired bit as negative Use 32 to invert bit 0 1071 Compare 1A Default 0 0000 4 RW Real Sets input A for the Compare 1 function The compare function allows the user to compare Min Max 2200000000 0000 two values The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State Available functions lt B A gt Programming and Parameters 3 109 8 2 s No Description Values 1072 Compare 1B Default 10 0000 Real Sets B for the Compare 1 The compare functions allow the user to compare two values Min Max 2200000000 0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State Available functions are B A gt 1073 Compare 2A Default 0 0000 RW Real Sets input A for the Compare 2 The compare functions allow the user to compare two values Min Max 2200000000 0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State Available functions are lt B A gt 1074 Compare 2B Default 10 0000 Real Sets B for the Compare 2 The compare functions allow the user to compare two values Min Max 2200000000 0000 The results of the compare are displayed in Par 1062 Logic Cmpr State Available functions lt B A gt 1086 Control Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP control and configuration
381. ctor Efficiency 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Max Short Circuit Current Maximum short circuit current rating to match specified fuse lt 200 000 Amps Rating circuit breaker capability Using Recommended lt 200 000 Amps Fuse or Circuit Breaker Type Maximum Drive to Motor The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2 1 ratio The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2 1 ratio Power Ratio Control Method Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Indirect Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Indirect Induction Motor Brushless Motor Self Organized Field Oriented Control Current regulated Ratings apply to all drives Refer to the PowerFlex 700S Phase Il Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for derating guidelines The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package Self Organized Field Oriented Control Current regulated Ratings apply to all drives Refer to the PowerFlex 7005 Phase 1 Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for derating guidelines The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package Carrier Frequency Drive rating 4 kHz Settings 2 4 6 8 10 kHz 6 kHz is for V Hz operation only Drive rating 2 kHz Settings 2 4 6 8 10 kHz 6 kHz is for V Hz operation only Output Voltage Range 0 to rated motor voltage 0 to rated motor voltage O
382. culated based on the bandwidth setting in Par 90 Spd Reg BW Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 90 Spd Reg BW to a value of zero Units are per unit torque per unit speed The maximum value for Par 81 Spd Reg P Gain Par 90 Spd Reg BW Par 9 Total Inertia Total Inertia Maximum Speed Regulator Maximum Speed Regulator Par 9 Bandwidth Par 90 Proportional Gain Par 81 0 01 475 0 5 mSec 4 75 0 01 650 0 25 mSec 6 50 0 01 30 sensorless mode 0 03 2 0 475 0 5 mSec 950 2 0 650 0 25 mSec 1300 2 0 30 sensorless mode 60 The Max value was increased from 600 0000 for firmware version 3 01 Spd Reg Gain Sets the integral gain of the speed regulator This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in Par 90 Spd Reg BW Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 90 Spd Reg BW to a value of zero Units are per unit torque sec per unit speed SpdReg AntiBckup By setting this parameter to 0 3 the drive will not over shoot to a step response This parameter has no affect on the drive s response to load changes The recommended setting is 0 1000 to 0 5000 Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Over Shoot Reference M Feedback SpdReg AntiBckup 0 0 Feedback SpdReg AntiBckup 0 3 Under Shoot Values Default Options Units Defau
383. cy factor gain Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Default Min Max RIS 10 0 32767 1 0 0 0 100 0 x 10 5 800 0 0 0 800 0 x10 99 99 12 50 399 99 100 32767 5 1 0 0 0 195 3 10 0 0 0 0 51 3 x10 0 0 100 1 1 20 org 2 RW Real 10 Data State 11 BrakeEnbI 12 1 rdb 13 1 th_eb 14 1 15 16 1 th_ba 17 1 cb 18 DB IGBT Amp m RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 5 Integer RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer RW 16 bit Integer 3 64 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 Programming and Parameters Name Description Ids Integ Freq Sets the break frequency of the flux producing d axis current regulator This and Par 430 Ids Reg P Gain determine the integral gain for the d axis current regulator Set by the autotune procedure Do not change this value Ids Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the flux producing d axis current regulator Set by the autotune procedure Do not change this value Test Current Ref Sets the current reference
384. d Min Max 2147483648 if the selected value is integer data This parameter is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters This parameter should not be changed by the user Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 172 173 84096 2 5V 174 IqsLimFlux 175 IqsLimSlip 176 StatorCLimVp 177 Torque Err 178 179 Torque Int 180 IqsCmd2 181 Torque 182 Torque PI 183 RotorFluxEst 184 VL mtVqsRef 185 VRefVqsRefNm 186 VRefRslqsNm 187 VRefVqsSpdVN 188 EconoVoltGn 189 F Output Fre 190 TrqCreflgsCm 191 192 SrLssWrAve 193 CurFbklqsFbk 194 ACRIgsErr 195 CrefwgldsCmd 196 CurFbkldsFbk 197 7008 198 VdsCmc700B 199 VqsRefNom 200 VgsRslgsNom 201 VasSpdVitNom 202 VitLmtVqsRef 203 IdsFbkDeriv 204 VdsRefNom 205 VdsRsldsNom 206 VdsSpdVitNom 207 VitLmtVdsRef 208 IdsFbkDeriv 209 VuvFbkOffset 210 VvwFbkOffset 211 luFdbkOffest 212 IwFdbkOffset 213 255 Reserved RO 32 bit Integer 3 70 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 475 MC FaultTPSelect Enter or write a value to select the Motor Control MC Fault Data displayed in Par 476 MC FaultTP Value This parameter should not be changed by the user Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 The value for option 67 was change
385. d 3 16 DPI Port 5 8 Preset Spd 4 29 JogSpeed 1 Units RWiRea Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 18 Jog 1 of Par Default 0 0000 152 Applied LogicCmd Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 30 Min Spd Ref Lim Units RPM Sets the minimum speed reference limit This value may be negative or positive but not Default 0 0000 greater than Par 31 Max Spd Ref Lim Min Max 8 0000 Par 31 Max Spd Ref Lim Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 31 Max Spd Ref Lim Unit RPM Sets the maximum speed reference limit This value may be negative or positive but not less Default 0 0000 than Par 30 Min Spd Ref Lim Min Max Par 30 Min Spd Ref Lim 8 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 32 Accel Time 1 Units Sec 4 RW Rea Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases with time in seconds to base speed Default 10 0000 Accel Rate Par 4 Motor NP RPM Par 32 Accel Time Min Max 0 0100 6553 5000 33 Decel Time 1 Units RWIRea Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases with time in seconds to base speed Default 10 0000 Decel Rate Par 4 Motor NP RPM Par 33 Decel Time Min Max 0 0100 6553 5000 34 S Curve Time Units Sec 4 Sets the S time Round In and Round Out in seconds Half of the time specified is added to Default 0 5000 the beginning and half to the end of
386. d from HH GateShort to MCStatus1 for firmware version 2 04 Values 68 76 were added for firmware version 3 01 Options re IqsRef2 14 DcBus 29 DbDuty 43 RotorFluxEst 57 VbusDrop 71 OverLoad 1 Ws 15 VbusFdbk 30 VelFdbkEncO 44 Ws2 58 VdsMax 72 HH Precharge 2 We 16 VbusFdbkFitr 31 VelFdbkEnc1 45 BusDropVolts 59 VbusLow 73 HH Fan Alarm 3 We2 17 VbusMemory 32 VdsCmd2 46 RecoverVolts 60 VbusRising 74 4 VdsCmd 18 33 VelFdbkOptt 47 0 61 PreChrgDone 75 HH HW Incomp 5 VqsCmd 19 ThetaE 34 Reserved 48 TestDtoA1 62 FieldWeak 76 GateShort 6 VdsFdbk 20 FldWeakActiv 35 Reserved 49 TestDtoA2 63 Reserved 7 21 MtrFixPU 36 Reserved 50 TestDtoA3 64 DynamBrakeOn 8 luFdbk 23 SlipGainFltr 37 Reserved 51 RideThruActv 65 Reserved 9 24 SlipVdsCmd 38 TorqueEst 52 PreChrgReqVp 66 MCStatusMon 10 IdsFdbk 25 MotorVolts 39 TorqueEstFlt 53 Reserved 67 MCStatust 11 lgsFdbk 26 BusUtil 40 Reserved 54 Reserved 68 HH OverCurr 12 IdsCmd 27 IqsLimit 41 PowerCalc 55 Reserved 69 BusOvrVit 13 IqsCmd 28 5105 42 TorqueCmd 56 TorqTrimActv 70 HH Tr Desat 476 MC FaultTP Value Default 0 0 RO 32 bit Displays the data selected by Par 475 MC FaultTPSelect This parameter should not be Min Max 2147483648 Integer changed by the us
387. d in Par 41 and Indicates which condition is preventing the drive from starting or running Note Bit 18 MC Config was added to this parameter for firmware version 2 03 Added bit 20 High BusVolt for firmware version 4 001 Options lt _ 2 i 5 5 lg 2 288 2 5 2 5 512588 33 15 8 2 2 e 2 2 2 3 S S 2 S E la S 2 2 amp 5 52 8 Defaut 0 0 0 o o o oo op 000 0 opo 0 oo 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 76543210 1 True 3 28 157 158 159 160 161 162 Programming and Parameters 8 5 2 285 5 Description Values 222 Logic Ctrl State Indicates which logic control functions are enabled Bit 22 S Tst FulSpd set to 1 indicates that the Slip Auto Tune function is active Bit 23 Slip Test En set to 1 indicates that the drive is at speed for the Auto Tune function Note Bits 22 and 23 were added for firmware version 3 01 Options 5 E als ols 28 3 c elc c 5 2 5 255 oes Sle 8 S S S 855 2 2 5 2 5 8 5 5 2 5 5 2 2 2 S e lt 212 5 215181812
388. d sec Gain should normally be set to less than 1 3 speed regulator bandwidth or for the desired response Set to zero to disable Servo Lock Spd Reg Droop Specifies the amount of base speed that the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque Use the droop function to cause the motor speed to decrease with an increase in load The units are per unit speed per unit torque SReg Trq Preset When the drive is not enabled this parameter presets integrator output Par 101 SpdReg Integ Out to a specified torque level This ensures that the torque command will be at the preset value when the drive is enabled and run Par 153 Control Options bit 18 SpdRegPreset 0 enables this preset Spd Err Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a 2nd order Butterworth low pass filter which reduces quantization noise The units are rad sec A value of 0 will disable the filter The value should be greater than 5 times the value of Par 90 Spd Reg BW Note The default value for this parameter was changed from 200 0000 to 700 0000 for firmware version 2 03 Spd Reg BW Sets the bandwidth of the speed regulator in rad sec Bandwidth is also referred to as the crossover frequency Small signal time response is approximately 1 BW and is the time to reach 63 of set point A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Par 81 Spd Reg P Gain and Par 82 Spd Reg Gain To disable the automatic gain calculation set this parameter to a value
389. depy emul Foo zer ins dev uou or asy qp4 pds 2 204 uondepy erau 5 21607 eneu D 5 jeu por bij d 21607 Ppy 021 9109504 SZ OX ppy bi enieu pHs NO 1 Bex pds 10ju02 peeds D enbio 521 enbJo jo4juo2 dl jeu Leld 9 dL Jeu DIL Siulodiso 9 Control Block Diagrams dL Jes NO 8964 195 dL Jes UND 7Ged Sjulogise eq Lezi gt noy wiqsog eunioiny q 5 201 xng noy enbio ejes e bi lt gt suondo 929 158 XN 4 JOJO snes qur m unse 0 359 enbuo Joy uno 62 AW ue EHZ i ug 641 ejels 21607 suondo Jey enbio 100 611 ove SN E S 10 e ug loz est suondo eic due lt your 10 cr cest 95009910 19 LI suogdo wung 41510 10 1ndino 83 unoxn 4J010JA 228 Cz W14 dN 100W XEN X G44 esc pem uang uano AW bj
390. direction of the encoder pulse output is the same as Par 1155 Heidn VM Pos Ref and the reverse of Par 1155 when this bit is set 1 Bits 10 12 form a 3 bit moving average filter sampling rate See Table 263A Sample Rate Bit Settings Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Added bit 7 for firmware version 4 001 Options Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved gt SmplRate bt2 7 SmplRate btt SmplRate btO 3 Reserved Default Bit N Direction gt SW Reset Direction Reserved lt Reserved N Reserved 7 9 Reserved lt gt Reserved a 0 9 Y 4A 9v MI Reserved 9 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 wo wo Table 263A Sample Rate Bit Settings Bit 12 11 10 Exponent Value n Filter Sample Size 2 0 1 0 0 1 1 2 0 1 0 2 4 0 1 1 3 8 Default 100 4 16 1 0 1 5 32 1 10 6 64 1 1 1 7 127 Programming and Parameters 3 41 No Description Values 264 HeidenhainO Stat Indicates fault and alarm statuses on the Heidendhain encoder
391. dsRef 250 IdsFbkDeriv 251 VuvFbkOffset 252 VvwF bkOffset 253 luFbkOffset 254 IwFbkOffset 255 KSlipNP IUnbalanceSt CurrSnsChck1 CurrSnsChck3 CurrSnsChck5 FrameSize Reserved Reserved Reserved PowerMon RawlwFdbk2 VqsFbFitrCom VqsErrorComm ReconswFreq ReconAngleAc VsCmdAngleVf ReconFreglnt SpeedRef CurFbkldsFbk CurFbklqsFbk VasThetaEst VdsThetaEst RecnSwitch VqsFbTransf VdsFbTransf BusLimitVBEr ParDecelRtMC ACRIqsRef ACRIqsCmd IqsCmdFltr ISpdCmd AccDecRate RecThetaEx4 RecVqsFdbk RecVdsFdbk VdeFilter VqsFdbkTrans VdsFdbkTrans Excitation ExciteStatus CommldsCount ThetaEsample Reserved 3 68 Programming and Parameters 8 285 5 Description Values 52 5 467 MCTP1 Value Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the data selected by Par 466 MC TP1 Select This display should only be used Min Max 2147483648 Integer if the selected value is integer data This parameter is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters 468 1 Bit Default 00000000000000000000000000000000 RO 32 bit Displays the data selected by Par 466 MC TP1 Select This display should only be used Min 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean if the selected value is bit enumerated data Par 468 MC TP1 Bit is a diagnostic tool you Max 11111111111111111111111111111111 can use to view internal drive parameters 469 FVC Comp Units RW
392. e DPI device limit Output Devices Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings Supplemental Information A 7 Common mode cores are internal to the drive For information on output devices such as output contactors cable terminators and output reactors refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol 2 The tables on the following pages provide PowerFlex 7005 drive ratings including continuous 1 minute and 3 second and recommended AC input line fuses and circuit breakers Fuse Size Fuse sizes are the recommended minimum size based on 40 C ambient 75 C wiring and U S N E C Other country state or local codes may require different fuse circuit breaker ratings Fuse Type The recommend fuse type is listed below If available current ratings do not match the tables provided the fuse rating that exceeds the drive continuous rating should be chosen e EC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 type go or equivalent should be used for these drives e UL UL requirements specify that UL Class CC T or J fuses must be used for all drives in this section 9 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Ora 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH Typical designations include CC FNQ R Type J JKS LPJ Type T JJS JUN Supplemental Information A 8 10095 07 ees eA 101291041 JO OW
393. e 924 SL Mult A In 925 SL Mult B In 964 Tx Dir Data Type 965 SL Dir Data Tx00 966 SL Dir Data Tx01 967 SL Dir Data Tx02 968 SL Dir Data Tx03 969 Tx Buf Data Type 970 SL Data Tx00 971 SL Buf Data Tx01 972 SL Buf Data Tx02 973 SL Buf Data Tx03 974 SL Buf Data Tx04 975 SL Buf Data Tx05 976 SL Buf Data Tx06 977 SL Buf Data Tx07 978 SL Buf Data Tx08 979 SL Buf Data Tx09 980 SL Buf Data Tx10 981 SL Buf Data Tx11 982 SL Buf Data Tx12 983 SL Buf Data Tx13 926 SL Mult Out DPI Data Links 621 FromDriveLogix19 SL Mult State Des T y ae He 650 DPI In DataType 622 FromDriveLogix20 986 SL Buf Data Tx16 651 DPI Data In 625 DataType 987 5 Buf Data Tx17 652 DPI Data In A2 626 To DriveLogix00 653 DPI Data In B1 627 To DriveLogix01 654 DPI Data In B2 628 To DriveLogix02 SynchLink Input 655 DPI Data In C1 629 To DriveLogix03 656 DPI Data In C2 630 DriveLogix04 928 Rx Dir Data Type z j 929 SL Dir Data Rx00 Security 657 DPI Data In D1 631 To DriveLogix05 658 DPI Data In D2 632 To DriveLogix06 930 SL Dir Data Rx01 714 Port Mask Act 659 DPI Out DataType 633 To DriveLogix07 931 SL Dir Data Rx02 669 Write Mask 660 DPI Data Out A1 634 To DriveLogix08 712 Write Mask Act 661 DPI Data Out A2 635 DriveLogixo9 670 Logic Mask 662 DPI Data Out B1 686 DriveLogix10 D
394. e 58 IqsRef Regen 26 RThru Timer 27 Health State Logic TP Data Default 0 0000 RO heal Displays the indication selected by Par 161 Logic TP Sel Min Max 2200000000 0000 Programming and Parameters 3 29 8 sz Name 5758 Description Values S28 163 Stop Oper TP Sel Default 0 Zero Enter or write a value to select data displayed in Par 164 StpOper TPData at the time of the Options 0 Zero 14 ZM1 Spd Fdbk last initiated stop 1 Logic State 15 Speed Ref 2 Logic Input 16 Avg Spd Ref Lel In State 17 ZM1 Spd Ref 4 Logic Status 18 SReg PI Out 5 Run Inhibit 19 Ref 6 Logic Ctrl 20 TrqRef Stat 7 Mtr Ctrl 21 DC Bus Volts 8 Mtr Ctrl Ack 22 Motor Volts 9 Reserved 23 Mtr Current 10 Fit Status 1 24 Motor Flux 11 Fit Status 2 25 Motor Freq 12 Motor Speed 26 Motor Power 13 Avg Spd Fdbk 27 Fit Status 3 164 StopOper TP Data Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the data selected by Par 163 Stop Oper TP Sel Min Max 2147483648 Integer 165 Tune DN Default 0 None ndicates which test if any is in progress ione 0 _ 4 and is used to continue the Auto Tune test from the last point at which it Options MC Autotune ze
395. e applied A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor NotchAttenuation Sets the depth for the Notch Filter Attenuation is the ratio of the output to the input at the notch frequency An attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1 30 of the input at the specified frequency Calculation Attenuation Input Output Attenuation Freq Hz Notch Filt Freq The center frequency for Notch filter To disable set to zero 0 SLAT ErrorSetpnt Determines the RPMs at which the drive will switch from speed mode to the Speed Limited Adjustable Torque SLAT min or SLAT max mode identified in Par 110 Speed Torque Mode bit 7 SLAT Minimum or bit 8 SLAT Maximum Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 SLAT Dwell Time SLAT control dwell time The time in seconds that the drive can be above the error setpoint in Par 119 SLAT ErrorSetpnt before returning to the SLAT min or SLAT max mode Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Trq PosLim Actl Sets the internal torque limit for positive torque reference values The positive internal motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value Trq NegLim Actl Sets the Internal torque limit for negative torque reference values The internal negative motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value Torque Pos Limit Sets the external torque limit for positive torque reference values The external positive motor torque
396. e parameters may have to be configured appropriately Three types of parameters exist e ENUM Parameters These parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items The LCD HIM will display a text message for each item e Bit Parameters These parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions If the bit is 0 the feature is off or the condition is false If the bit is 1 the feature is on or the condition is true e Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numeric value i e 0 1 Volts The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual 3 2 Programming and Parameters Table 3 A Table Explanation o g afe Name 5595 No Description Values 525 151 Logic Command The controller drive interface as defined by the Controller Communication Format sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms Bits that are changed here are reflected Par 152 Applied LogicCmd Note Bits 4 through 9 in Logic Command are NOT recalled from Control EEprom They will be cleared upon drive powerup or following an EEprom recall operation Options A 8 5 15 5 5 01959 5 8 8 eg E 8 Ble a ja lt o o o aA Defaut 0 0 0 0 0000000000 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6
397. e appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 387 Lgx Timeout Cnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg Default 2 FltCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to the controller closing the Options 0 Ignore Controller to Drive connection H Alarm e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 2 FliCoastStop 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 Flt RampStop this event occurs 4 FltCurLimStp 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive
398. e directly instead of a speed reference The independent flux control also allows you to reduce the flux in order to run above base motor speed High Bandwidth Current Regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Flux V mag Reg SPEED REF Speed Current Voltage Reg Reg Control TORQUE REF Vang Adaptive Controller AUTOTUNE PARAMETERS SPEED FEEDBACK C4 Application Notes Permanent Magnet Control Permanent magnet control is used with permanent magnet motors Permanent magnet motor control is selected by setting parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 2 Pmag Motor Permanent magnet motor control requires either a hi resolution Stegmann encoder or compatible resolver feedback on the motor Refer to PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option on page F 1 for a list of compatible hi resolution Stegmann encoders and compatible resolvers e Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this mode Refer to PowerFlex 700S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications on page I 1 for a list of compatible Allen Bradley permanent magnet motors and motor data to be used with the PowerFlex 7008 Volts Hertz Control v2 003 and later Volts Hertz control is used in fan pump or multi motor applications Volts Hertz operation creates a fixed relationship between output voltage and output frequency Configuration Volts Hertz control
399. e drive Failure to exit may leave unwanted settings active in the drive configuration If after exiting the Start Up Assistant external sources inhibit drive start check Par 671 Start Mask 2 6 Start Up The assisted start up routine asks simple yes or no questions and prompts you to input required information Access Assisted Start Up by selecting Start Up from the Main Menu Step Key s Example LCD Displays 1 To exit the User Display screen Press Esc Ew Stoppea Autoj 0 0 Output C 1 In the Main Menu use the Down Arrow to scroll to Start Up 2 Press Enter 5 Bm Auto TIP Throughout the Start Up Routine many screens A RPM have more selection than shown Use the arrow keys MPEG NS UH i to scroll through all the menu options Device Select 1 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the Start Up PowerFlex 7005 Start Up The Start Up routine sets up the drive for basic operation Push Enter Important If using a HIM the following functions are not available Alt Man Alt Lang Alt SMART Figure 2 1 Start Up Menu Down 1 level or Select StartUp gt Back 1 level or 1 selection 696 gt Scroll all choices PowerFlex 7005 Motor Control Motor Data mE Power Circuit Test Direction Test Configuration Select Motor Control Enter Motor
400. e motor speed XReg Integ LoLim The negative limit of the position regulator integral gain XReg Integ HiLim The positive limit of the position regulator integral gain XReg Integ Out The output of the position regulator integral channel after application of the limits This output is set to zero if the integral gain is set to zero or the integrator is not enabled XReg Spd LoLim The negative speed limit of total position regulator output Point to point mode uses this parameter to set the reverse speed reference XReg Spd HiLim The positive speed limit of total position regulator output Point to point mode uses this parameter to set the forward speed reference PositionFdbk Sel Enter a value to select the position control feedback device The feedback device used for position control may be an independent selection from the motor speed control feedback device in Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri or Par 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt If the position feedback is to be the same as the motor feedback select option 3 Motor Fdbk This option will set the selected feedback of Par 222 Motor Fdbk Sel Pri or Par 223 Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt as the position regulators position feedback Notes Options 5 and 6 are only available when compatible feedback option card is installed This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 X Notch Attenu Sets the depth for the Position Notch Filter Attenuation is the ratio of the output to the
401. e offset position will be internally rate limited and added to the selected reference position The rate of correction is set by Par 755 Posit Offset Spd The initial value of this parameter is latched upon position enable without causing a change in reference Subsequent changes to this value will be relative to the latched value See Par 740 Position Control bit 5 for re referencing the offsets Posit Offset 2 Default 0 Supplies another position reference offset which is summed with Par 753 Posit Offset 1 Min Max 2147483648 Used to trim the phase of the selected position reference Position offset will be internally rate limited to a velocity set by Par 755 Posit Offset Spd Read Write Data Type 0 False 1 True RO RW RO RW RO RO RW RW RW 32 bit Integer RO 32 bit Integer RW 32 bit Integer RW 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real Real Real 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 Description Posit Offset Spd Sets the speed of position offset A position offset command will not exceed this speed The actual speed of offset is limited to a maximum value of 1 inertia pos gain so as not to cause a torque pulse greater than 1 per unit The speed will change exponentially X Offst SpdFilt Displays the output of
402. e or a temperature code J 2 Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 7005 Phase II Drives in Group Il Category 2 Applications with ATEX Approved Motors Drive Wiring e When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in dust environments Category 2D the motor must be protected by an enclosure according to 50281 1 1 or according to IEC61241 1 Ex tD Group II motors are marked with a temperature e The motor over temperature signal supplied to the drive must be a normally closed contact open during over temperature condition compatible with the digital logic input circuitry of the drive If multiple sensors are required in the motor the connection at the drive must be the resultant of all required contacts wired in series Refer to all product markings for additional cautions that may apply Typical motor markings are contained on a motor certification nameplate similar to the sample below FLAMEPROOF Exd ENCLOSURE EExd I IIB___Tamb___C to___C Il 2 G D C oss O IM2 Sira ATEX V MFG BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION P Important ATEX certification of this drive requires that 2 separate inputs be configured to monitor a normally closed over temperature contact or multiple contacts wired in series presented to the drive from the motor The first input must energize Digital Input6 Hardware Enable on the drive control board TB2 terminal 16 The second input must energize
403. e or associated equipment hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation Power Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt Installations ATTENTION National Codes and standards NEC BSI etc A and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations For many installations unshielded cable is adequate provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 0 3 meters 1 foot for every 10 meters 32 8 feet of length In all cases long parallel runs must be avoided Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils 0 4mm 0 015 in Use copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire Table 1 4 Recommended Cable Design Type Max Wire Size Where Used Rating Type Description 1 2 AWG Standard Installations 600 90 C 194 F Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation 100 HP or less XHHW2 RHW 2 Type2 2 AWG Standard Installations 600 90 C 194 F Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation plus 100 HP or less with RHH RHW 2
404. e the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or relay output will not change state Par 858 Rly Out3 On Time can be disabled by setting the delay time 10 0 zero Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Out3 OffTime Units Defines the amount of time between a True to False transition on the output status and the Default corresponding change in state of Relay Output 3 If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 2 z 5 ja 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 11111111111111111111111111111111 0 RW 32 31 RW 0 00 0 00 600 00 Sec RW 0 0 0 0 600 00 1 Not Fault 0 User Select 15 Torque Limit 1 Not Fault 16 Power Limit 2 Not Alarm 17 Fault 3 Ready 18 Alarm 4 Running 19 Command Dir 5 Reserved 20 Actual Dir 6 Reserved 21 Jogging 7 Enable On 22 In Position 8 Active 23 Posit Watch1 9 At Speed 24 Posit Watch2 10 At Setpt 1 25 Cmpr 1 A lt B 11 Above Setpt2 26 1 A gt B 12 AtZeroSpeed 27 Cmpr 2 A lt B 13 Speed Limit 28 Cmpr 2 A gt B 14 CurrentLimit
405. e to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor If an input device is used occasionally an auxiliary contact on that device should also be wired to a digital input programmed as a Enable function The input device must not exceed one operation per minute or drive damage will occur ATTENTION The drive start stop control circuitry includes solidstate components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive When the AC line is removed there will be a loss of any inherent regenerative braking effect that might be present the motor will coast to a stop An auxiliary braking method may be required ATTENTION guard against drive damage when using output contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fa
406. e wires to guard against unintentional Input Filter contact with chassis or components Frame Capacitors on page 1 15 ATTENTION The disconnecting MOV must be used a AN grounded system 1 18 Installation Wiring Figure 1 6 Typical Jumper Locations Frame 1 Control Assembly amp I O Cassette Removed Frame 2 e q Car LA fi Frames 3 amp 4 Frame 5 55 ERE 0 DC 2 SUP To eo o 22282000 sto g 3 Wiring Installation Wiring 1 19 Important points to remember about I O wiring Always use copper wire Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0 3 meters 1 foot e 4100CCF3 Flex I O cable for use with DriveLogix is 3 ft ma
407. eal 06 1017 Xsync Out 2 Dly 792 Trend Control 556 UserData Real 07 1018 Xsync Out 3 794 Trend In1 Dint 570 UserData Real 08 1019 Xsync Out 3 Dly 795 Trend In1 Real 571 UserData Real 09 1020 Xsync Status 786 Trend In2 Dint 574 UserData Real 10 1021 Zero Speed Lim 160 Trend In2 Real 575 UserFunct Actual 1001 Trend In3 Dint 578 UserFunct Enable 1000 Trend In3 Real 579 V Hz Mode Config 513 Trend In4 Dint 582 V Hz Status 540 Trend In4 Real 583 Vds Command 498 Trend Mark Dint 567 Vds Fdbk Filt 441 Trend Mark Rea 568 Vds Max 438 Trend Out1 Dint 572 Vds Min 440 Trend Out Rea 573 VirtEncPositFast 1160 Trend Out2 Dint 576 Virt Encdr Dlyed 63 Trend Out2 Rea 577 Virt Encdr Posit 62 Trend Out3 Dint 580 Virt Encoder EPR 61 Trend Out3 Rea 581 Virtual Edge Rev 225 Trend Out4 Dint 584 Voltage Class 403 Trend Out4 Rea 585 VoltFdbkLossCnfg 394 Trend PreSamples 566 VPL Build Number 315 Trend Rate 559 VPL Firmware Rev 314 Trend State 558 VPL Mem Address 479 Trend Status 557 VPL Mem Data Bit 482 Trend Trig Bit 565 VPL Mem Data Fit 481 Trend Trig Data 564 VPL Mem Data Int 480 Trend TrigA Dint 560 VPL Mem Link Fit 484 Trend TrigA Real 561 VPL Mem Link Int 483 Trend TrigB Dint 562 VPL Mem Password 478 Trend TrigB Real 563 Vqs Command 497 TrendBuffPointer 569 Vas Fdbk Filt 442 Trq CurFdbk Iq 499 437 NegLim 124 Vas Min 439 3 124 Programming and Parameters Notes Chapter Objectives Drive Status
408. ear Fault Note When Using the MAH instruction in DriveLogix to home an axis and Digital Input 1 is used as the homing switch this parameter must be set to 0 Not Used When the MAH instruction is executed this parameter will be changed to option 31 Regis 1 Ltch to indicate that the drive registration has latched the encoder position when the switch was activated Note Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2 04 Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3 01 Values 41 and 42 were added for firmware version 4 001 Dig In2 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 2 Refer to Par 825 for a description of options 34 UserGen Sel0 37 UserGen Sel3 Note For all Stop Functions Low Stop High OK to Run In Norm Stop CF Low Normal Stop and Clear Fault Notes Option 38 ExtFault Inv was added for firmware version 2 04 Option 39 Home Switch was added for firmware version 3 01 Values 41 and 42 were added for firmware version 4 001 Dig In3 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 3 Dig In4 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 4 Dig In5 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 5 Dig In6 Sel Enter a value to select the function of digital input 6 Refer to Par 825 for a description of options 34 UserGen Sel0 37 UserGen Sel3 Note For all Stop Functions Low Stop High
409. ection to begin In this state Par 569 TrendBuffPointer and the Trend Output Parameters are active Value 1 First Scan indicates the Trend function is executing the first pass through the trend sample buffer This takes 512 ms 0 5 ms x 1024 samples When it enters this state the Trend function clears bit 1 Triggered and 2 Complete bits of Par 557 Trend Status While in this state the Trend function refreshes the data Also while in this state the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero When done it enters the Pre trigger state Value 2 Pre trigger indicates the Trend function is sampling the trend inputs and storing them in memory at a rate determined by Par 559 Trend Rate Sampling continues until either the trend trigger event occurs or bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 Trend Control is cleared While in this state the Trend function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero If the trigger event occurs the function sets bit 1 Triggered of Par 557 Trend Status and enters the Post trigger state If bit 0 Enbl Collect of Parameter 556 Trend Control is cleared the function sets bit 2 Complete of Par 557 Trend Status and returns to the Wait Enable state Value 3 Post trigger indicates the Trend function is continuing to sample and save the trend inputs until the buffer is full While in this state the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero value When the buffer is ful
410. ed Distribution Systems 1 4 Input Power 0 1 5 Grounding Requirements 2 0 1 5 Recommended Grounding 1 5 Shield Termination SHLD 0 1 6 REIL Pilter Grounding se eu note RS EA a eee 1 6 Fuses and Circuit Breakers een d a a 0 1 6 des 1 7 Power Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt 1 7 Motor Cable Lengths 55 0 1 9 Power Terminal Blocks i arie RI te bee teer 1 9 Cable Entry Plate Removal eeeeeeeeee 1 9 Power Wiring Access Panel 1 1 10 AC Input Phase Selection Frames 5 amp 6 1 10 Cooling Fan Voltage eor ELE ep Ree eel 1 10 Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage Frames 5 amp 6 1 10 Important Common Bus DC Input Application 1 12 Dynamic Brake Resistor 1 15 Using Input Output 1 16 Using PowerFlex 700S Drives with Regenerative Power 0015 1 16 Regenerative Unit to Drive 1 16 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode 1 17 VO Wining
411. ed word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type Options 5 5 5 o leee99729 8 8983838 38333333939 89 898 9 9 9 9 8 8 883353 O O Js Js gt sla sala sa Defaut 0 0 D o o p o fo o jo fo jo fo jo jo fo fo jo fo jo fo fo fo jo Ore Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 432 1 0 602 FromDriveLogix0O Default 0 RO 32 bit to to Min Max 32 dependant on Par 601 From DL Integer 622 FromDriveLogix20 DataType These parameters display the input values communicated from the DriveLogix controller to the PowerFlex 700S drive 625 DataType Sets the data type for each word communicated from the PowerFlex 7005 drive to DriveLogix Setting a bit High will configure the associated word as a Real data type and setting the bit Low will configure it for Integer data type Options gt 5 5 gt l gt gg 2 5 55555 5 8 5 55558 9 58 5 3558 oco E EE Le ped E CC O Default 0 0
412. eds z yse1 aouasajay JoUOD peeds ZH SHOA eseud S004 595 ER X 1 _____ ino puou i quid puau le y pul lt gt jouoD Buyo z Jead 5 19 eed 991eq jeseud ZINE NO ko 2 428d EKD 185 2 eed Buyo 428d smeis 910428 yos eq jeseud LIAGIed ar ARE ECD ul INO Li ejeq ee tuu us C298 qui Mew si 1804 8 1 puss 0 ED 1 gu puss eu pues Jojuo2 puau u amp iuieszxeed uy IGA ul 2120 Ul 21078 5 Leod ul GIES ul LI91CPld pussL 0 puai 2 ul puai smes puaa snes puas ysel puai 1961105 1 yg pussy 1 1 pues 0 enje 6954 pejeoo
413. eg ayers ui 91607 iKzsi 9 3 suonoun Md X ire me 4 Iqu3uonisog 91607 l Kore xpujosa LOK bbe evejodJejul Jes Joy uo BAY uonoeuuo xpujosg SL Audigxpujosg 5 1 uonisog Ez z deis 195 jeu 104 diskoa Ko EN 2 002 gt uonisod vt 0027 isd erin 195 eq oj speeu 4q pZd Bay sod JoUOD UONISOd sod ul lt a gt ums IS simae ue i Joje1euec asind d Ag sug o 1045 21219011504 esing snes ou sx 00 K 982 bil 61 C ove X sumo 5 5 15 U9IEM UONISOd ne 8r 1 uonisod feed 10 sniejs uonisog 60 bee eme cC gt pun Con eeu C ue g ner iE eol e94 U 21198 1504 Jenjoy uonisod euo uj ou sx jeo C082 idis Lirequsod v6 ou sx 1 Aejaq 1 ZL X ueog 50 V Ovi x ou sx n euo ret 062 9 Jojju02
414. eg BW Sets the h of the Speed Regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used Bandwidth is also referred to as the crossover frequency Small integral time response is approximately 1 BW and is the time to reach 6396 of set point A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Par 104 Srlss Spd Reg Kp and Par 105 Srlss Spd Reg Ki To disable the automatic gain calculation set this parameter to zero Slip RPM Meter Displays the present amount of adjustment being applied as slip compensation Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Spd Reg TP Sel Eer or write a value to select Speed Regulator data displayed in Par 109 Spd Reg TP Data Note The values for options 10 amp 11 were changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Spd Reg TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 108 Spd Reg TP Sel Speed TorqueMode Selects the source for the drive torque reference Note Values 7 amp 8 were added for firmware version 3 01 Torque Ref 1 Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive This parameter is divided by the value in Par 112 Ref1 Div A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Torque Ref1 Div Par 111 Torque Ref 1 is divided by this number Use this parameter to scale the value of Par 111 Torque Ref 1 Values Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Default Min Max Units
415. eg BW 503 BitSwap 1A Data 860 Curr Ref TP Data 358 BitSwap 1B Bit 863 Curr Ref TP Sel 357 BitSwap 1B Data 862 DC Brake Level 1125 BitSwap 2 Result 869 DC Brake Time 1126 BitSwap 2A Bit 866 DC Bus Voltage 306 BitSwap 2A Data 865 Dead Time 404 BitSwap 2B Bit 868 Dead Time Comp 405 BitSwap 2B Data 867 Decel Time 1 33 BitSwap 3 Result 874 Delayed Spd Ref 45 BitSwap 3A Bit 871 DelayTimer1Accum 1111 BitSwap 3A Data 870 DelayTimertPrSet 1110 BitSwap 3B Bit 873 DelayTimer1 Stats 1112 BitSwap 3B Data 872 DelayTimer2Accum 1116 BitSwap 4 Result 879 DelayTimer2PrSet 1115 BitSwap 4A Bit 876 DelayTimer2Stats 1117 BitSwap 4A Data 875 DelTmr1 Trig Bit 1109 BitSwap 4B Bit 878 DelTmr1 TrigData 1108 BitSwap 4B Data 877 DelTmr2 Trig Bit 1114 BitSwap 5 Result 884 DelTmr2 TrigData 1113 BitSwap 5A Bit 881 DeltaSpeedScale 60 BitSwap 5A Data 880 Dig In1 Sel 825 BitSwap 5B Bit 883 Dig In2 Sel 826 BitSwap 5B Data 882 Dig In3 Sel 827 BitSwap 6 Result 889 Dig In4 Sel 828 BitSwap 6A Bit 886 Dig In5 Sel 829 BitSwap 6A Data 885 Dig In6 Sel 830 BitSwap 6B Bit 888 Dig Out1 Bit 847 BitSwap 6B Data 887 Dig Out Data 846 Brake OL Cnfg 369 Dig OffTime 849 Brake PulseWatts 416 Dig Out1 On Time 848 3 118 Programming and Parameters
416. eger displays the raw position feedback data at home position Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 1125 Brake Level Units Volts 4 Real Defines the DC brake current level injected into the motor when DC Brake is selected as a Default 0 0 stop mode This also sets the braking current level when Fast Stop is selected Min Max 0 0 1170 0 The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications Refer to the PowerFlex 700 with Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 ATTENTION 1f a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used ATTENTION This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking 1126 Brake Time Units Sec 4 Real Sets the amount of time DC brake current is injected into the motor Default 0 0 Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 Min Max 0 0 655 0 1130 PPMP Pos Command Default 0 RW 32 bit Sets the position reference for the Motion Planner The units are counts Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1
417. enclosure Tamagawa TS 2014N182E32 x2 flange mounted 2 Rel800123 2S 2 2014 2087 2 2 2014 2087 2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2014N185E32 x5 flange mounted 3 Rel800123 2T 3 2014 2087 2 3 2014 2087 2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N12E9 x 2 HD foot mounted 2 Rel800123 2S 2 T2014 2087x2 2 2014 2087 2 enclosure double shaft Tamagawa TS 2087N1E9 1 HD foot mounted 1 Rel800123 2R 1 T2014 2087x1 1 T2014 2087x1 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N2E9 2 HD foot mounted 2 Rel800123 28 2 2014 2087 2 2 2014 2087 2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N5E9 x 5 HD foot mounted 3 Rel800123 2T 3 2014 2087 2 3 2014 2087 2 enclosure Tamagawa TS 2087N11E9 1 HD foot mounted 1 Rel800123 2R 1 T2014 2087x1 1 T2014 2087x1 enclosure double shaft Advanced Micro R11X C10 7 N A 14 AmciR11XC107 14 AmciR11XC107 Controls Inc AMCI G 2 PowerFlex 7005 Resolver Feedback Option Card Allen Bradley servo motors may be ordered with factory installed resolvers Table G B specifies which factory installed resolvers are supported by the 700 Resolver Feedback Option module Table G B Compatibility with Resolvers on Allen Bradley Motors Parameter 275 Parameter 275 Parameter 277 Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Reslvr0 Type Sel Setting for Phasel Setting for Phasel Setting for Phase Il Motor Resolver Type Compatible Notes Firmware 1 17 Firmware 2 XX Firmware 1 XX 1326 A
418. ensation function A value of 1 0 represents rated torque of the motor Filtered SpdFdbk Displays the motor speed feedback value output from the feedback Lead Lag filter Scaled Spd Fdbk Displays the product of the speed feedback and Par 73 Spd Fdbk Scale This parameter is for display only Spd Fdbk Scale A user adjustable scale factor multiplier for speed feedback It is multiplied with speed feedback to produce Par 72 Scaled Spd Fdbk Atune Spd Ref Sets the maximum speed of the motor during the Flux current and inertia tests Rev Speed Limit Sets a limit on the speed reference in the negative direction This value can be entered as a negative value or zero The maximum value equals Par 532 Maximum Freq 0 95 Fwd Speed Limit Sets a limit on the speed reference in the positive direction This value can be entered as a positive value or zero The maximum value equals Par 532 Maximum Freq 0 95 Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max 8 0000 0 0000 0 0000 8 0000 1 0000 1000 0000 EPR 4096 10 67108864 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 RPM 0 0000 8 0000 pu 325 0 999 P U 0 1500 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 1000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 2000 0 0000 8 0000 P U 0 0000 48 0000 pu Motor P U Torque RP
419. er Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 477 EstTheta Delay Units mSec RW 16 5 Active only in Permanent Magnet motor mode when Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode equals 2 Default 10 Integer PMag Motor Provides a delay for the function that compares the estimated rotor _ Min Max 12 1024 position and the data from the position sensor 478 VPL Mem Password Default 0 RW 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 479 VPL Mem Address Default 0 RW 32 bit Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 480 VPL Mem Data Int Default 32 RW 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 481 VPL Mem Data Fit Default 1 25 RW Real Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 482 VPL Mem Data Bit Default 1 25 RW 32 bit Min Max Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 483 VPL Mem Link Int Default RO 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 484 VPL Mem Link Fit RO Real Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 485 Motor m Mode mm Default 0 FOC nter a value to select the operating mode for the Motor Control ions 0 EOC 2o e Value 0 Field Oriented Control FOC is induction motor control with voltage Options 1 E Re 2 1
420. er 1 1 Disable capture 1 1 0 1 11300 ns filter 1 1 1 0 11400 ns filter 1 1 1 11500 ns filter 3 36 Programming and Parameters o 8 SEE Name s No Description Values 225 237 RegisLtch0 1 Ctrl Configures the control for registration latch 0 and 1 e Set bit 0 RLO Arm Req and bit 16 RL1 Arm Req to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input e Set bit 1 RLO DisarmReq and bit 17 RL1 DisarmReq to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event After the registration is captured bit 0 RLO Arm Req and bit 16 RL1 Arm Req automatically resets back to 0 after found Bit 1 RLO DisarmReq and bit 17 RL1 DisarmReq are only needed to disarm a registration latch that has not been found yet Setting bits 1 and 17 will clear the bits 0 and 6 Setting bits 0 and 6 sets bits 0 RLO Armed and bit 16 Armed and clears bits 1 RLO Found and bit 17 RL1 Found of Par 238 RegisLtch0 1 Stat Options 8 clo 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 lt 5 5 5 5 5 55 5 5 5 55 5 o O X 8 o 8 99 96 9 9 9 9 9 dd
421. erminal block P1 contains connection points for a differential encoder This terminal block resides on the Second Encoder Option Card Terminal Signal Description 1 N C Not connected 2 N C 3 N C 4 N C 5 A Quadrature A input 6 Not A 7 B Quadrature B input 8 Not B 9 2 Marker Pulse 10 Not Z 11 Power DC Power for encoder interface 12 Common 13 Shield Connection point for encoder Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card Connection Examples Differential Encoder with Internal Supply Encoder P1 N C N C N C N C A Not A B lt gt on co Not B 912 10 NotZ 11 Power 12 Common Li 13 Shield Differential Encoder with External Supply Encoder A 1 N C N C N C N C A Not A Not A B Not B co no B 2 Not B 9 z Not Z Power 10 NotZ 11 Power Common 12 Common 13 Shield O Power Common PowerFlex 7005 2nd Encoder Feedback Option Card E 3 Dip Switch Settings 1 SIDE VIEW UP OPEN OFF S DOWN C
422. et if the Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect is cleared before the trigger occurs The trend data outputs will be updated from the contents of the trend buffer data when this bit is set Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect can be cleared after this bit is set without affecting the trend data buffer contents This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 556 Trend Control bit 0 Enbl Collect The trend outputs will be forced to zero while this bit is clear Options o 9 9 9 9 9 9 99 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 2 9 9 9 885 5999999 9 9 9 9 9 9 O Defaut 0 0 o o o o jo o o o o o o o o jo o o o jo o lo jo o jo o jo Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 Description Trend State Value indicates the state of the Data Trend function Value 0 Wait Enable indicates the trend function is ready and waiting to begin data collection Setting bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 Trend Control will cause data coll
423. ete or pass diagnostic tests MC has not detected VPL handshake activity for over 32 ms e VPL has not detected MC handshake activity for over 32 ms This is indicated when Fault Test Point 15 or 16 equals 1 This test point is viewed Par 330 Fault TP Data when Par 329 Fault TP Select is set to value 15 or 16 29 PWM Signal Short This fault is detected when ever the actual IGBT gate is different than the commanded IGBT states This fault is detected by the Motor Control MC processor 30 IMC Firmware One of the following Motor Control MC firmware errors has Cycle power occurred e MC Task Over Run Reflash firmware Illegal Interrupt Replace Main Control Board Self Diagnostic Fault e Data Error 4 8 Troubleshooting No Name Type Description Action 31 Precharge Error The precharge function has failed to complete within 30 Verify the value in Par 410 PreChrg seconds default of the precharge request The precharge time TimeOut out is configurable by Par 410 PreChrg TimeOut A precharge request is initiated when the DC Bus voltage is PreChrg above the Undervoltage Trip level and the precharge input is E 9 high the requirement the precharge being high can be Configured with Par 381 PreChrg Err Cnfg bypassed by setting Par 411 PreChrg Control bit 01 PreChrg Enable off 32 PWM Asynch T
424. f 79000 F eua HK e V 5 8 IBS l I3 I5 200000000000 em meh D o PBR BR2 Dc OC WIS 802 cs g E P CTI 9 9 0 00 0 9 NE mel N j 5 m PE Frame 5 Ear qh 6 778 1 14 Installation Wiring Figure 1 4 Power Terminal Block Q Q C C C QC C C C CON BRI Frame 2 20 BR A DC AU QH W LN C DC Frame BR2 DC DC PE U V W R S T j PE T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 Rum Q Q Q Q GS Q Q Qv 7 v T2 T Motor Frame 3 RU su gt Input
425. fault corresponding change in state of Digital Output 2 If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Rly Sel Default Identifies the signal used on Digital Output 3 If the desired signal is not available in the Options selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 856 Rly Out3 Data and 857 RIy Out3 Bit to select the desired parameter for output EN Out3 Data Default Link a word to this parameter that will control the Relay Output 3 The bit within the selected Min word that will control Relay Output 3 is set by Par 857 Rly Out3 Bit Max Rly Out3 Bit Default Selects the bit from the word linked to Par 856 Rly Out3 Data that will change the status of Min Max the Relay Output 3 e g when Par 857 Rly Out3 Bit equals 0 bit 0 of Par 856 Rly Out3 Data will control the Relay Output 3 Rly Out3 On Time Units Defines the amount of time between a False to True transition on the output status and the Default corresponding change in state of Relay Output If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state befor
426. feedback option card and Endat communication Bit 0 VM Enc Out when set indicates that the encoder output from the Heidenhain option card is the virtual encoder position determined by Par 1155 Heidn Linkable Read Write Data Type VM Pos Ref Bit 1 Enc Out when set indicates that the encoder output from the Heidenhain option card is the emulated encoder position determined by the connected Heidenhain encoder Bit 5 Sig Amplitud indicates that the signal amplitude is insufficient or too large Bit 6 Quadrate Er indicates that there is a signal quadrature error Bit 7 Open Wire indicates an open wire fault Bit 8 VoltageLvlEr indicates that the operating voltage is too high or too low Bit 9 PowerSup Er indicates the failure of the power supply Bit 10 PowerUpDiag Er indicates the option board failed its power up diagnostic test The pattern on the FPGA must be identical to the pattern written from the DSP or the board status test will fail Bit 11 MsgChecksum Er indicates a message checksum fault The check sum associated with the Endat communication device must be correct and acknowledged by the feedback option card Bit 12 Time Out Err indicates an Endat time out fault Bit 13 PPR Error indicates an encoder PPR setting mismatch fault Bit 14 Bootup Error indicates an Endat boot up fault Bit 15 FW VersionEr indicates that the firmware version of the encoder does not ma
427. ference should also be redefined to zero to synchronize the position with the command This can be useful for returning to Home after a jog type operation Bit 28 Home Switch when this bit is set the Homing sequence will look for the home switch to make a transition from it s current state when the homing sequence is started Do not set with bit 29 Home Marker Bit 29 Home Marker when set the Homing Sequence will look for the Marker pulse When the marker pulse is found the drive will decelerate and return to the position where the marker was found Do not set with bit 28 Home Switch Vote Bits 24 29 were added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 Options 5 gt di 252 B2 121 0 ly lyfe le T 2 5 Sls zio 55 elz sels it 2 4 9 EE 92 9 9 amp 2 5555 53932 oo lt ie I I I jit gt lt x A N A 0 X lt SE S NE Default 0 0 o 0 0000 00 00 0100 JO JO JO JO JO JO JO 1 0 JO JO JO 1 0 Pid Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 90 Programming and Parameters No
428. formance AC Drive Phase II Control User Manual publication 20D UMO006 since the August 2006 release Change See Page Updated the Important information regarding the use of an Auxiliary Power Supply with Voltage Feedback boards on drives manufactured before June 2006 The following new parameters were added for firmware versions 4 001 3 1 3 114 459 ldsCompCoeff Mot 592 On Hystr 1166 EGR Pos Preset 460 ldsCompCoeff Reg 593 SlipReg On Hystr 1170 MC Generic 1 461 SlipReg Off 14 1124 Home Actual Pos 1171 MC Generic 2 462 VqsReg Off Freq 1155 Heidn VM Pos Ref 1172 MC Generic 3 544 External DB Res 1156 Heidn VM Enc PPR 1173 MC Generic 4 586 ldsCmd Slew Rate 1160 VirtEncPositFast 1174 MC Generic 5 587 SlipReg Err Lmt 1161 EGR Contig 1175 MC Generic 6 588 VasReg Err Lmt 1162 EGR Mul 1176 MC Generic 7 589 Err Count Lmt 1163 EGR Div 1177 MC Generic 8 590 RsTempCoefAdiust 1164 EGR Pos Input 1178 MC Generic 9 591 RsTmpCoefAdjstEn 1165 EGR Pos Output 1179 MC Generic 10 The following parameters were updated for firmware version 4 001 3 1 3 114 153 Control Options 512 PMag Mode Config 826 Dig In2 Sel 156 Start Inhibits 515 Tune Config 827 Dig In3 Sel 161 Logic TP Sel 533 SlewRateTimelimt 828 Dig In4 Sel 263 553 Slip Slew Rate 829 Dig 5 Sel 264 HeidenhainO Stat 701
429. fy this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Options 2 5 ld l d o d l w o 2 98888 9 2 2 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 516 FVC2 Tune Config Configures FOC 2 tuning mode ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Options 2 e 22 o o 2 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 525 526 527 Programming and Parameters a Name Description Values 5 PMag Tune Config Configures Permanent Magnet Motor tuning mode ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Options 9 o ooo lt o
430. g 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable Figure H 4 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable T c gt ion Board if BK ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 a xX A S gt SIN Rotary Encoder POWER 16 OL 4 gt B REFSIN Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 9 BKWH AD C 605 Rotary Encoder SIN 14 SU xX ET D REFCOS Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 008 gt gt E RS 485 Rotary Encoder COS 12 008 a xX us gt DATA RS 485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 11 0 gt Rotary Encoder DATA 85485 10 T wan WWGY P COMMON Linear Sensor CLOCK 9 07 R TS Linear Sensor CLOCK 8 1 1 U gt S TS Linear Sensor DATA 7 1 1 Linear Sensor DATA 6 07 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 07 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 L Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSISGND 1 OL Ft Note Thermal Switch cannot be accessed using 2090 X XNFMP SXX cable PowerFlex 700 Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card H 5 Connection Examples Figure H 5 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090 UXNFDMP SXX cable
431. g Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for more information on ungrounded system installation voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before removing installing jumpers Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block The voltage must be Zero ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the Table 1 D Jumper Removal Frames Jumper Component Jumper Location No 1 PEA Common Remove the Control Assembly and Cassette Jumpers located on the drive Power Board see Capacitors Figure 1 6 PEB MOV s 2 4 Jumpers located above the Power Terminal Block Mode see Figure 1 6 Capacitors PEB MOV s 5 Wire Common Remove the I O Cassette The green yellow jumper 15 Mode located on the back of chassis in the area shown see Capacitors Figure 1 6 Disconnect insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components MOV s Note location of green yellow jumper wire in Input Filter 1 6 Disconnect insulate and secure the wire guard Capacitors against unintentional contact with chassis or components 6 Wire Common Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal Please Mode Block Disconnect the three green yellow wires from refer to Capacitors two PE terminals shown in Figure 1 4 Insulate Power MOV s and secure th
432. ge of Par 230 EncdrO Position and Par 232 Encoder0 PPR PPR Sets the pulse per revolution rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder 0 input This parameter must be set to one of the values displayed in bold in Table 232A below Table 232A PPR Rating Values n 2 x 75 jmod125 mod 225 mod375 625 mod1125 0 1 75 125 225 375 625 1125 1 150 250 450 750 1250 2250 2 300 500 900 1500 2500 4500 3 600 1000 1800 3000 5000 9000 4 16 1200 2000 3600 6000 10000 18000 5 3 2400 4000 7200 12000 20000 6 64 7 128 8 256 9 512 10 1024 11 2048 12 14096 13 8192 14 16384 Values Units Default Min Max Scale Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max RPM 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu PPR 1024 10 20000 Linkable Read Write Data Type RO RO RO RW 32 bit Integer 32 bit Integer Real 16 bit Integer 3 34 Programming and Parameters 8 SEE Name s No Description Values 225 233 Encdr 0 1 Config Specifies the configuration options for the encoder 0 and encoder 1 e Bits 0
433. h 2 Vref Decel Fail The value of Par 301 Motor Spd Ref has failed to decrease during a ramp to zero speed stop This could possibly be due to a speed trim from Par 21 Speed Trim 1 Par 22 Speed Trim 2 or Par 23 Speed Trim 3 3 Encoder 0 Loss Q One of the following has occurred on encoder 0 Reconnect encoder or replace encoder 25 Configured with Par 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri missing encoder broken wire Par 366 LsCnfg Alt and Par 367 Fdbk e quadrature error LsCnfgPosit phase loss 9 4 _ 1 Loss One of the following has occurred on encoder 1 Reconnect encoder or replace encoder vis Configured with Par 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri missing encoder broken wire Par 366 Fdbk LsCnfg Alt and Par 367 Fdbk e quadrature error LsCnfgPosit phase loss 9 5 Opt Port 0 Loss A fault on port 0 of the Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Reconnect encoder or replace encoder Card MDI Option Card Heidenhain or Resolver Feedback Option Card has occurred Reconnect option feedback card Configured with Par 365 Fdbk LsCnfg Pri e Par 260 StegmannO Status displays the fault status for port Par 366 Fdbk LsCnfg Alt and Par 367 Fdbk 0 of the Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Card LsCnfgPosit e Par 264 HeidenhainO Stat displays the fault status for port 0 of the Heidenhain Feedback Option Card Par 269 Resolver0 Status displays the f
434. hat the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 383 SL CommLoss Data 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg let you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage Overview p 5 Catalog Number Explanation Position 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 200 2 1 0 b f g h i k 1 2 c3 Drive ND Rating ND Rating Code Type 400V 50 Hz Input 480V 60 Hz Input 20D PowerFlex 700 Code Amps kW Code Amps Hp oi 21 075 2P 21 10 b 3P5 3 5 1 5 3P4 3 4 2 0 5 0 2 2 5 3 0 Voltage Rating 8P7 8 7 4 0 8 5 0 __ Voltage IP 011 11 5 55 011 11 75 BS aes 3 015 15 4 75 014 14 10 400V ac 2 022 22 11 022 22 15 DIS 480V ac 3 030 30 15 027 27 20 E 8 600Vac 3 037 37 18 5 034 34 25 690V ac 3 043 43 22 040 40 30 H 540V dc N 056 56 30 052 52 40 J 3 650V dc 072 72 37 065 65 50 K 810V dc N 085 85 45 077 77 60 M 36 932V dc
435. he Motor Control Processor is not synchronized with SynchLink 33 15volt Power D The12V DC control voltage is outside the tolerance range The Replace switch mode power supply For positive voltage power must be within the band from 17 00 to smaller frames replace drive 11 61V DC The negative voltage power must be within the band from 17 00 to 11 61V DC 35 Parameter Chksum The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the _ Cycle power Replace Main Control Board 38 OL Trip The calculated temperature of the dynamic braking resistor is Verify actual temperature of brake too high The temperature is calculated by a thermal model If the resistor is internal the model uses resistor characteristic If hot wait for brake to cool stored in the power structure EEPROM memory If cold cycle power to the drive If the resistor is external the model uses values of Par 416 If cold verify Par 416 Brake PulseWatts and Brake PulseWatts and Par 417 Brake Watts Par 417 Brake Watts are correct Configured with Par 369 Brake OL Cnfg 39 PowerEE CRC Fail The Cycling Ring Checksum CRC of the data stored the Cycle power Power Board EEPROM does not match the stored CRC In High Horse Power units check communication bus lines 10 pin connector in Main Control Board High Horse Power interface board and fiber optic cable connections 40 SLink Mult Oflow A SynchLink Multip
436. he drive This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers If attribute 9 is selected each program scan will complete a write to the drives non volatile memory EEprom Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers Refer to the individual communications adapter User Manual for additional details Logic Command Word Logic Bits 15 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description Normal 0 Not Normal Stop Stop 1 Normal Stop 0 Not Start 1 Start xX Jog 1 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 1 1 Jog using Jog Speed 1 X Clear 0 Not Clear Fault Faut 1 Clear Fault X x Unipolar 00 No Command Direction 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control X Reserved X Jog 2 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 2 1 Jog using Jog Speed 2 X Current 0 Not Current Limit Stop Limit Stop 1 Current Limit Stop x Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop 1 Coast to Stop X Reserved X Reserved x Spd Ref Sel0 Bits x Spd Ref 14 13 12 0 0 0 Ref A x SpdRef 9 1 SpdRefB Sel2 0 100 Preset 2 0 1 1 Ref 3 Preset 3 100 Ref 4 Preset 4 1 10 1 Ref 5 Preset 5 1 11 0 Ref 6 Preset 6 1 1 1
437. he value of Par 250 FB OptO Posit It does not affect the number of counts created per resolver revolution see Table 268B Resolution and Least Significant Bits Used Also the resolution sets limit on the maximum tracking speed see Table 268C Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed e Setting bit 4 Energize energizes the resolver resetting the bit to zero de energizes the resolver Bit 5 Resolver Dir determines counting direction If clear direction is forward or up If set the direction is reverse or down Bit 9 Edge Time configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop VPL Setting the bit chooses Edge to Edge sampling while resetting the bit to zero chooses Simple Difference sampling Simple Difference sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time Edge to Edge sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card improving the accuracy of the speed calculation e Bits 10 SmplRate bt0 through 12 SmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response FIR Filter see Table 2680 FIR Filter Settings This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system Refer to the Speed Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 7005 with Phase 1 Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for details Note Bit 11 SmplRate 610 is set to 0 False by default for firmware version
438. his parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Options a 2 8 8 S 2 5 2 59595 5 5 51501 gt 5 5 gt 5 2 2 95919 25 25 5275 5 S S l 5 5 515 2 2 25 5 575 2 2 5 5 55 5 5 SS jm 02 Defautt 0 o 0 Oo fo fo jo fo fo jo fo fo fo fo npo ofp pjo P T Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 ug 513 V Hz Mode Config Configures V Hz control mode operation Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Changed bit 3 from Reserved to FastFluxDsbl for firmware version 3 03 ATTENTION Do not modify this parameter Motor Drive instabilities and damage could result Options ge d 55 5 l l l 9 l l l l A 5 5 gt ejg e S S 5 5 5 5 2 9 9 8686 966 088 gt c Defaut O jO J0 JO jO JO 0O JO jO O t jO jO 100 01 000 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 76543210 3 74 Programming and Parameters
439. icates that the primary structure detected a hardware disable Bit 8 Latch Err1 indicates that the primary structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set Bit 14 Cnv NotLogin indicates that the converter expected but none logged in Bit 15 Cnv NotStart indicates that the converter commanded to start but did not become active Bit 16 Dsat Phs U2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase U Bit 17 Dsat Phs V2 indicates that the second structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 18 Phs W2 indicates that the second structure detected a on phase W Bit 19 Ovr Current2 indicates that the second structure detected an over current Bit 20 Ovr Volt2 indicates that the second structure detected an over voltage Bit 21 Asym DcLink2 indicates that the second structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 22 Pwr Suply2 indicates that the second structure detected a power supply failure Bit 23 HW Disable2 indicates that the second structure detected a hardware disable Bit 24 Latch Err2 indicates that the second structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Options y S SS lt 5 1 zi92227 9 2 2 3455225255 9292r 8 24 5522 9 2 9 5 52 lt 55 22 2 2 585 5 5 5 5555 gt 25555 65 gt 519 5
440. ice A link should be made to it from one of the Min Max 2200000000 0 inputs on the local drive The local drive is the one implementing PLL The 1 pu RPM of this parameter is set by Par 727 PLL VirtEncdrRPM Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 735 SpeedOut Adv Unis 4 RW Real Phase Locked Loop velocity advanced output This signal is one velocity reference sample in Default 0 0 advance of Par 734 PLL Speed Out A link is normally made to this parameter from Min Max 2200000000 0 SynchLink Velocity reference is performed in the same task as the position regulator Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 737 cos TP Sed up Default 0 Zero nter or write a value to select position regulator data displayed in Par 738 Posit atalnt ione O Zero and Par 739 PosiTP DataReal OMS 2 Xcmd 11 OffsetSpdLim 3 del Act Load 12 Pt Pt SpdLim 4 del Act Mtr 13 Sec per Edge 5 Integ Error 14 Edge per Sec 6 Xprop Out 15 Ratio Guess 7 Fdbk Sel Alt 16 Sync Count 8 PreLim Xvout 738 PositTP DataDint Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the integer data selected by Par 737 Posit TP Select This display should only be Min Max 2147483648 Integer used if the selected value is Integer data 739 DataReal Default 0 0 RO Real Displays the real data selected by Par 737 Posit TP Select This di
441. idth Modulated PWM AC Drives publication number DRIVES INO01 for more information These applications include installations with long distances between drives or drive line ups which could cause large potential differences between the drive or line up grounds For installations within a cabinet a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point bar 1 6 Installation Wiring Figure 1 1 Typical Grounding R S L1 L2 A Required Input Fusing E E Required Branch Circuit Disconnect e 4 Apt Fuses and Circuit Breakers Shield Termination SHLD The Shield terminal see Figure 1 3 on page 1 13 provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the drive drive end and the motor frame motor end Use a shield terminating or EMI clamp to connect shield to this terminal RFI Filter Grounding Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building po
442. imit Par 500 Bus Util Limit Dead Time The time delay between turning off and turning on an upper device and a lower device in the power structure This parameter is set at power up and is not user adjustable Dead Time Comp The amount of voltage correction used to compensate for the loss of voltage during dead time Do not adjust Contact factory for alternative settings Power Loss Mode Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a loss of input power as sensed by an input voltage below the value specified in Par 408 Power Loss Level Enter a value of 0 to make the drive coast supply no current to the motor during the power loss time specified in Par 407 Power Loss Time Enter a value of 2 to make the drive continue normal operation during the power loss time Enter a value of 5 to make the drive provide only motor flux current during the power loss time Power Loss Time Sets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before fault is detected Power Loss Level Sets the bus voltage level at which ride through begins and modulation ends When bus voltage falls below this level the drive prepares for an automatic restart Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the high voltage setting for the voltage class For example on a 400 480V drive 0 221 x 480Vac x J2 150Vdc Line Undervolts Controls the level of bus voltage that is needed to complete precharge and sets the level for
443. imum Voltage 531 MotnPositLockTol 697 Jog Speed 2 39 MC Build Number 456 MotnUnwdTurnCmmd 706 Kd Current Limit 364 MC Cmd Lim Cnfg 382 MotnUpdatePeriod 684 Ki Current Limit 363 MC Diag Done 519 Motor Ctrl Ackn 167 Language 201 MC Diag Error 1 463 Motor Ctrl Cmmd 166 Leak Indc 493 MC Diag Error 2 464 Motor Ctrl Mode 485 Leak Indc Satur2 494 MC Diag Error 3 465 Motor Flux Est 359 Leak Inductance 492 MC Diag Status 518 Motor Freq Ref 296 LED Status 554 MC FaultTPSelect 475 Motor NP FLA 2 Lgx Closed 388 MC FaultTP Value 476 Motor NP Hertz 3 Lgx Comm Format 600 MC Firmware Rev 457 Motor NP Power 5 Lgx CommLossData 385 MC Generic 1 1170 Motor NP RPM 4 Lgx LinkChngCnfg 389 MC Generic 2 1171 Motor NP Volts 1 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg 386 MC Generic 3 1172 Motor NTC Coef 487 Lgx Timeout Cnfg 387 MC Generic 4 1173 Motor OL Factor 336 LimGen X axis In 206 MC Generic 5 1174 Motor Poles 7 LimGen Y axis Mn 205 MC Generic 6 1175 Motor Posit Est 227 LimGen Y axis Mx 204 MC Generic 7 1176 Motor Spd Fdbk 300 Limit Gen Hi Out 207 MC Generic 8 1177 Motor Speed Est 226 Limit Gen Lo Out 208 MC Generic 9 1178 Motor Speed Ref 301 Limit Status 304 MC Generic 10 1179 Motor Stall Cnfg 374 Limited Spd Ref 4 MC Status 555 Motor Stall Time 373 Lint Update Rate 289 MC TP1 Bit 468 Motor Torque Ref 303 Lin1Stahl Status 291 MC TP1 Select 466 MotorFluxCurr FB 312 3 120 Programming and Parameters
444. indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 11 CurrRef En is off Bit 14 Speed Limit indicates the collective status of all speed limitations Bit 15 Current Lim indicates the collective status of all current limitations Bit 16 MCS Iq Lim indicates that torque producing current is at its negative limit Bit 17 MCS Ws Lim indicates that flux producing torque is at its negative limit Bit 18 0 la from indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the negative direction refer to Par 353 Iq Actual Lim Bit 19 Iq Calc indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its negative limit Bit 20 Current Lim indicates that the current reference has reached the negative Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 Mtr Current Lim e Bit21 cue indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 343 OL OpnLp CurrLim Bit 22 DriveProtCL indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload shown in Par 344 OL e e Bit 25 Regen PwrLim indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Regenerative Power Limit set by Par 128 Regen Power Lim e Bit 26 Torq CurLim indicates that current refe
445. inear List Format 3 15 Viewing D 5 Parameters 3 1 About 3 1 Cross Reference 3 117 Organization 3 3 Programming 3 1 Parameters Groups Communication 3 4 Dynamic Control 3 3 Inputs amp Outputs 3 4 Monitor 3 3 Motor Control 3 3 Position Control 3 4 Process Control 3 3 Speed Control 3 3 Speed Posit Fdbk 3 4 Torque Control 3 3 User Functions 3 4 Utility 3 4 PE 1 5 Index 4 Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications I 1 Permanent Magnet Motors Compatible Motors 1 1 Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications 1 1 Phase Selection Input 1 10 Position Control Position Config 3 9 Power 1 9 Power Conditioning Input 1 5 Power Supply Auxiliary 1 21 A 31 Power Terminal Block 1 9 1 13 Location 1 13 Power Wiring 1 7 Powering Up the Drive 2 1 Precautions P 4 Preferences Setting D 4 Process Control Regulator 3 8 Programmable Controller Configurations A 5 R RCD Residual Current Detector 1 4 Recommended 1 19 F 3 Recommended Cables Cables F 3 Recommended Documentation P 1 Recommended Grounding Scheme 1 5 Reflected Wave 1 8 Removal 1 10 Access Panel 1 10 Removing the Cassette Cassette Removal 1 2 Removing the Side Covers 1 2 Reset to Defaults D 4 Residual Current Detector 1 4 Resistor Brake 1 15 Resolver E 1 G 1 Resolver Feedback Specifications G 1 Wiring G 3 Resolver Feedback Option Card E 1 G 1 Rotary Stegmann H 2 Rotary Encoders Stegmann H 2 Run Inhibit Common Causes Run Inhibit 2 4 4 3 S S
446. input at the notch frequency An attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1 30th of the input at the specified frequency Calculation Attenuation Input Output Attenuation Freq Hz X Notch FiltFreq Sets the center frequency of the Position Notch Filter PositDetct1 Stpt Provides the set point for Position Watch 1 Position Watch 1 is enabled and configured with Par 740 Position Control bits 16 amp 17 Position Watch 1 compares this value with Par 784 Posit Dect1 In and sets bit 8 Watch of Par 741 Position Status when the appropriate condition is satisfied Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max 0 2147483648 52 4 0000 0 0000 1000 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 2500 176 4000 14112 0000 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 176 4000 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 0 141 Par4 RPM 176 4000 14112 0000 0 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM RPM 176 4000 0 0000 14112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM Encoder 0 Encoder 0 Encoder 1 Reserved Mtr Fdbk Pri Motor Sim FB Opt Porto FB Opt Port1 12 0000 Motor NP RPM
447. ip Speed Band Determines the bandwidth around a skip frequency Skip Speed Band is split applying 1 2 above and 1 2 below the actual skip frequency The same bandwidth applies to all skip frequencies Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 0 False Values Default Options Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Zero Zero Scale Output Spd Torque Trq Mode Out Actv TrqMode Reserved Trq En Input NotchFiltOut NotchFilt In Trq Lim In 10 Bus Reg Out 11 Pos Pwr Lim 12 Neg Pwr Lim 18 Pos Atun Trq 14 Neg Atun Trq 15 Pos Lim Src PU 0 0 8 0 pu R S 100 0000 10 0000 250 0000 0 500 0 300 1 000 RPM 0 0 30000 0 RPM 0 0 0 0 1000 0 8 5 lt acia 16 Neg Lim Src 17 MPwr Par Lim 18 RPwr Par Lim 19 Trq 20 Trq ParLim 21 Nom Bus Volt 22 Bus Volt Hys 23 Bus Reg Ref 24 Bus Reg 25 Bus Reg Intg 26 BusReg Clamp 27 BusRegOutput 28 IAA Filt Out 29 IAA dVf dt 30 MC Trq Lim 31 IgActlTrqLim RO Real 1 0 PU Motor to Torque Bit 1 Load Est when set to 1 on the Load Estimate option removes or greatly reduces load disturbances and gives quicke
448. ipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss gt Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures Po b PowerFlex is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc DriveExplorer DriveExecutive and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc Manual Updates Summary of Changes This information summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 7008 High Per
449. is selected by setting parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 3 V Hz Volts Hertz allows wide variety of patterns using linear segments The default configuration is a straight line from zero to rated voltage and frequency This is the same volts hertz ratio that the motor would see if it were started across the line As seen in the diagram below the volts hertz ratio can be changed to provide increased torque performance when required The shaping takes place by programming five distinct points on the curve Motor Overload Application Notes C 5 1 Parameter 527 Start Acc Boost is used to create additional torque for breakaway from zero speed and acceleration of heavy loads at lower speeds 2 Parameter 528 Run Boost is used to create additional running torque at low speeds The value is typically less than the required acceleration torque The drive will lower the boost voltage to this level when running at low speeds not accelerating This reduces excess motor heating that could be caused if the higher start accel boost level were used 3 Parameters 529 Break Voltage and 530 Break Frequency are used to increase the slope of the lower portion of the Volts Hertz curve providing additional torque 4 Parameters 1 Motor NP Volts and 3 Motor NP Hertz set the upper portion of the curve to match the motor design and mark the beginning of the constant horsepower region 5 Parameters 531 Maximum Voltage and 532 Ma
450. isUnwdFdbk Default 0 RO 16 bit Position unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo Axis when configured in Min Max 32767 Integer rotary mode 709 FdbkAxis RotFdbk Default 0 RO 32 bit Positon feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only Axis when configured in Min Max 0 4294967295 Integer rotary mode 710 FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk Default 0 RO 16 bit Position unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only Axis when Min Max 32767 Integer configured in rotary mode 3 86 Programming and Parameters 8 2855 Description Values 22 5 711 MotnCnfgErrParam Default 0 RO 16 bit Identifies a parameter that is not configured properly for a motion connection to be accepted Min Max 0 65535 Integer The parameter identified could either have a wrong value or an incorrect link When bit 0 Config of Par 690 Cnet Status is set then this parameter contains the parameter number of an incorrectly configured parameter If more than one parameter is incorrectly configured each is displayed in turn after the previously identified parameter is fixed If there are no configuration problems relating to Motion then this parameter contains a value of zero and the bit 0 Config OK of parameter 690 Motn Cnct Status is cleared 712 Write Mask Act Status of write access for DPI p
451. ital output Sinking a Digital Output The digital output common return is connected to the power supply positive voltage The digital output is connect to the device to be controlled and the device common is connected to the power supply common Note Digital Inputs 1 3 can only be configured as sourcing inputs Digital Inputs 4 6 can be configured as sourcing or sinking inputs Installation Wiring 1 27 Input Output Connection Example Digital Inputs Sourcing Digital Inputs Internal Power Supply 2 Wire Control Required Parameter Changes 24V DC m e Set Par 829 Dig In5 Sel to value 7 Run LUIT mem e Par 153 Control Options bit 8 3WireControl will 2 automatically be OFF 0 for 2 wire control 3 e Set Par 168 Normal Stop Mode for the desired 1 rio stopping mode FT 10 0 Ramp Stop J 1 CurLim Stop 6 EAn 2 Coast Stop 7 12 8 L13 EC 14 115 RUN 16 Enable Digital Inputs Sourcing Digital Inputs Internal Power Supply 3 Wire Set Par 829 Dig In5 Sel to value 14 Normal Stop 24V DC e Set Par 828 Dig In4 Sel to value 5 Start Com zi 14L o o START 24V DC 3 50 Edje E 7 12 8 JU 13 15
452. its 3 RLO TrgEdgeO 4 RLO TrgEdge1 19 RL1 TrgEdgeO0 and 20 TrgEdge1 select which edges signal the position see Table 236C Edge Selection Settings e Bits 5 Dir Rev 6 RLO Dir Fwd 21 RL1 Dir Rev and 22 RL1 Dir Fwd set the direction of position capture see Table 2360 Trigger Direction Settings Bits 8 SL DI Filt 0 9 SL DI Filt 1 10 SL DI Filt 2 and 11 SL DI Filt configure a filter for the digital input 1 and 2 see Table 236E Filter Settings The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored Bits 8 11 add 100ns filter per stage to external trigger 17 RL1 TrgSrc0 and 18 TrgSrc1 select the trigger source see Table 2368 Encoder1 Trigger Source Settings e Bit0 816 off 0 input to latch on Enc1 input to latch o lt lo 8583 388588 5 5 lz lz lz Elali 8 gt gt 1215 gt gt 1515 gt gt gt gt gt S 5 15 1515 151515 1515 21 IE 55 5 5 5 15 5 2 EE 8 9 o e6 9 9 9 2 151515 8 8 8 8 CC CC CC CC ac 0 N Defaut 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 O jo 0 0 0 o o JO 0 O 0o fT 01
453. l the function sets bit 2 Complete of Par 557 Trend Status and enters the Wait Disable state Value 4 Wait Disable indicates the Trend function is complete and waiting for bit 0 Enbl Collect of Par 556 Trend Control to be cleared When this is done the trend function returns to the Wait Enable state While in the Wait Disable state Par 569 TrendBuffPointer and the Trend Output Parameters are active Trend Rate Sets the sample time for both trend input and output updates Trend TrigA Dint Provides the integer input for the A trigger function This integer is converted to a real number and summed with Par 561 Trend TrigA Real The result is compared with the Trigger B sum If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur Trend TrigA Real Provides the real input for the A trigger function This real number is summed with Par 560 Trend TrigA Int The result is compared with the Trigger B sum If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur Trend TrigB Dint Provides the integer input for the B trigger function This integer is converted to a real number and summed with Par 563 Trend TrigB Real The result is compared with the Trigger A sum If the A sum exceeds the B sum then a trend trigger will occur Trend TrigB Real Provides the real input for the B trigger function This real number is summed with Par 562 Trend TrigB Int The result is compared with the Trigger A sum
454. l Options bit 24 Time Axis the value of this parameter ramps from 0 to 1 at a rate determined by Par 202 Time Axis Rate Conversely when the Time Function Generator is disabled the value of this parameter ramps from 1 to 0 204 LimGen Y axis Mx Unit 4 Real Sets Par 207 Limit Gen Hi Out and Par 208 Limit Gen Lo Out when the absolute value of Default 0 2500 Par 206 LimGen X axis In is greater than or equal to 1 Min Max 0 0000 8 0000 205 LimGen Y axis Mn Unit 4 Real Sets Par 207 Limit Gen Hi Out and Par 208 Limit Gen Lo Out when the absolute value of Default 0 0500 Par 206 LimGen X axis In is equal to 0 Min Max 0 0000 8 0000 206 LimGen X axis In Default 0 0000 4 Real The X axis input to the Limit Generator Typically this parameter is linked to a speed reference Min Max 8 0000 pu or to Par 203 Time Axis Output 207 Limit Gen Hi Out Unit RO Real Displays the positive output of the Limit Generator When Par 206 Limit Gen X axis In is Default 8 0000 greater than or equal to 1 this value equals Par 204 Limit Gen Y axis Mx When Par 206 0 0000 8 0000 Limit Gen X axis In is equal to 0 this value equals Par 205 Limit Gen Y axis Mn For values of X Axis input between 0 and 1 the value of this parameter is interpolated from Y axis min and max values Typically it is linked to Par 188 PI Integ HLim 208 Limit Gen Lo Out Unit RO Real Displa
455. l is not required in typical applications HHHHHHHHHHHI Using Encoder 0 as speed feedback Par 222 Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 0 Encoder 0 default Par 232 Encoder0 PPR Pulses Rev for installed encoder Input Output Connection Example Installation Wiring Required Parameter Changes 1 25 HH Primary Encoder External Supply Encoder The Z channel is not required in typical applications HHHH Power V Common V Shield NA 1 26 Installation Wiring Input Output Digital Inputs used for enable and precharge control Note 24V DC Supply supports only on board digital inputs Do not use for circuits outside the drive Note The factory default for all Digital Inputs is 24V To use 115V on Digital Inputs 4 6 see Table 1 L Note Digital Inputs 1 3 are 12 24V DC Table 1 K 2 Digital Wiring Examples Connection Example Sourcing Digital Inputs Com Internal Power Supply 24V DC 10 Lj 11 9 4 o Sourcing and Sinking Definitions Sourcing Digi
456. late rated power Note The unit of measure for this parameter was changed from kW to Hp for firmware version 2 03 Mtr NP Pwr Units The power units shown on the motor nameplate Motor Poles Set the number of motor poles indicated on the motor nameplate or manufacturer s motor data sheet Only even numbers of poles are allowed Calculation 120 NP Hz NP RPM Poles round down Total Inertia Time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor torque Calculated during auto tune Speed Ref 1 Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 27 Speed Ref A Sel or Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel A value of 1 0 represents base speed of the motor Spd Divide Par 10 Speed Ref 1 is divided by this number This number can be used to scale the value of Par 10 Speed Ref 1 Speed Ref 2 Shi the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 27 Speed Ref A Sel or Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel A value of 1 0 represents base speed of the motor Spd Ref2 Multi Pm 12 Speed Ref 2 is multiplied by this number This number can be used to scale the value of Par 12 Speed Ref 2 Preset Speed 1 through Preset Speed 7 Provides d internal fixed speed command value The preset speeds may be selected with 27 Speed Ref A Sel or Par 28 Speed Ref B Sel Speed Trim 1 Provides an additive trim value to Par 38 Speed Ref Scale
457. ldlnitTm 96 IqsLimit 97 VqsCmdMotor 98 We2FieldWeak 99 VqsFieldWkBase 100 VgsldsCmd 101 VqsMaxMotor 102 VqsMaxVbus 103 CalcPUMtrFix 104 FldWklnitTim 105 FluxldsFfFit 106 FixVqsCmdFit 107 VqsError 108 VqsFluxPl 109 Vqsintegral 110 VqsPrportl1 111 VasPrportnl2 112 TestMark70 113 TestMark71 114 TestMark72 115 TestMark73 116 TestMark74 117 TestMark75 118 TestMark76 119 TestMark77 120 TestMark78 121 TestMark79 122 TestMark7A 123 TestMark7B 124 TestMark7C 125 TestMark7D 126 TestMark7E 127 TestMark7F 128 RWVuOut 129 RWVvOut 130 RWVwOut 131 RWuErr 132 RWvErr 133 RWwErr 134 RWVuOut2 135 RWVvOut2 136 RWVwOut2 137 RWPosState 138 RWNegState 139 BusDropVolts 140 RecoverVolts 141 DbDuty 142 VdsFdbkFltr 143 VqsFdbkFitr 144 VbusFdbkFltr 145 VbusMemory 146 VpEncOVelFbk 147 VpEnc1 VelFbk 148 VPOptOVelFbk 149 VPOptt VelFbk 150 BitSelect1 151 BitSelect2 152 SrLssWeEst2 153 MulgsRef2 154 EstThetaByMV 155 ETVdsFbkA 156 ETVqsFbkA 157 ETVdsFbkS 158 ETVqsFbkS 159 ETAtanVqVd 160 ETByMtrVDfr 161 VelRef2 162 VelOutput 163 Torque Est 164 TraEst Filt 165 PowerCalc 166 ThetaELiner 167 PprCntDfcOt 168 PprCntDfcTh 169 LinearPprCnt 170 ActiveFdbk 171 VdsComp Default 0 0 Displays the data selected by Par 473 MC TP2 Select This display should only be use
458. level is measured at 1 1 30CFM 59dB 9 78 49 meter All devices measured are 400V 2 50 57 dB 10 77 49 IP21 and in power 3 120 61 dB 13 76 46 mode Refer to 4 190 59 dB PFLEX INOOG 5 200 71 dB PowerFlex 700H S Installation Manual for 6 300 CFM 72 dB Fan Speed information Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Supplemental Information A 3 Specification Category Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only Frames 9 amp up Electrical Input See Input Voltage Range Tolerance on page 1 for Full Power See Input Voltage Range Tolerance on page C 1 for Full Power Voltage Tolerance and Operating Range and Operating Range Frequency Tolerance 47 63 Hz 47 63 Hz Input Phases Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 50 of rated current operation provides 50 of rated current DC Input Voltage Tolerance 10 of Nominal Bus Voltage above 10 of Nominal Bus Voltage above Displacement Power 0 98 across speed range 0 98 across speed range Fa
459. ley 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure F 3 on page F 4 S2L and S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley MPL A5xx and all MPL Bxxx Allen Bradley 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure F 3 on page F 4 motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all Allen Bradley 2090 XXNFMP SXX Figure F 4 on page F 5 MPG series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder gt len Bradley MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all Allen Bradley 2090 UXNFDMP SXX Figure F 5 on page F 5 MPG series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 pin DIN style connector Figure F 6 on page F 5 SHS 170 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 10 pin MS style connector Figure F 7 page F 6 SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 or SCM 70 SRS 50 585 60 SRM 60 SRM 60 SRS 25 or SRM 25 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 8 pin Berg style connector Figure 8 on page F 6 SCS Kit 101 or SCK Kit 101 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann Is available only with pre attached Stegmann shielded twisted pair Figure 9 on page F 6 SRS660 rotary encoder cable of various lengths F4 Connection Examples PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Figure F1 1326AB BXXXX 21ML
460. lier Overflow has occurred Par 927 SL Mult Configured with Par 390 SL MultErr Cnfg State displays SynchLink multiplier overflow errors 41 j Ridethru Timeout The drive has been in a bus loss ridethrough condition for more Verify the AC Line than two seconds default The ridethrough timeout is configurable by Par 407 Power Loss Time Verify the value in Par 407 Power Loss Time 42 DC Bus Undervot Bus voltage has fallen below the level configured by Par 409 Verify the AC Line Line Undervolts In frames 1 4 and 9 13 verify the precharge resistor is present With power off there should be a resistance between DC and BR In frames 5 amp 6 check the precharge board for errors See the precharge board LED for fault sequence Configured with Par 393 BusUndervoltCnfg 43 VoltageFdbkLoss Loss of Motor or DC Bus Voltage Feedback has occurred Check the communication line between Motor because of a communication failure between Motor Control and Control MC and Voltage Feedback board Voltage Feedback board Replace the Voltage Feedback board Configured with Par 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg 44 Runtime Data Rt Runtime data hours energy has been reset to zero due to a checksum error 45 Health Safety circuit is active Check input signal to the Safety circuit 46 Interp Out Synch Interpolator for position feedback lost synchronization with Configured with Par 378 Interp Fit Cnfg Ve
461. locity Position Loop VPL 47 MC CML Task Fail Current Minor Loop CML task has been delayed or run with Cycle power incorrect interval 48 Device The controlling device HIM or controller has been disconnected while the drive was running Troubleshooting 4 9 No Name Type Description Action 49 DPI Loss Port 1 Q The device at DPI port 1 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional at drive port 1 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI with Far 39 DPI Cig devices at 500k Baud 50 DPI Loss Port 2 The device at DPI port 2 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional at drive port 2 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI Configured with Par 391 DPI CommLoss Cig devices at 500k Baud 51 Loss Port 3 Q The device at DPI port has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional at drive port 3 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI Configured with Par 391 DPI CommLoss Cfg devices at 500k Baud 52 DPI Loss Port 4 The device at DPI port 4 has stopped communicating with the Verify DPI device is present and functional at drive port 4 A SCANport device is connected to a drive operating DPI Configured with Parai
462. lower limit for the MOP output The MOP cannot be decremented below this level Default 1 0000 Sec Min Max 2200000000 0000 0 0000 1090 Level Real Units Sec RO Real Actual output value of the MOP as a real number This value is also found in the speed Default 10 0000 reference selection A value of 1 0 equals base motor speed Min Max 2200000000 0000 1091 Scale Dint Default 1 0000 4 Real Set this value for scaling of the Dint MOP output The is calculated and controlled as Min Max 2200000000 0000 Real value MOP Use this scaler to adjust for an integer value Use this parameter to scale the conversion from Par 1090 MOP Level Real to Par 1092 MOP Level Dint 1092 MOP Level Dint Default 0 0000 RO 32 bit Actual output value of the MOP as a Dint number This value is scaled by Par 1091 MOP _ Min Max 2147483648 Integer Scale Dint 103 Anig Default 0 Disabled nig inzLossUnig Options 0 Disabled 4 Set Input Hi 1095 Anlg In3LossCnfg 1 Fault 5 Goto Presett Selects drive action when an analog input signal loss is detected Signal loss is defined as an 2 Hold Input 6 Hold OutFreq analog signal less than 1 V or 2 mA The signal loss event ends and normal operation 3 Set Input Lo resumes when the input signal is greater than or equal to 1 5 V or 3 mA Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 1096 AddSub 1 Input Default
463. lt Min Max Scale Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Zero Zero User Ref Logic Select Lgc Sel Ref Ramp Spd Ref Ramp In Filt Spd Ref Reserved Reserved Reserved 10 Amp Lim Stat 11 Ramp Match RPM 0 0000 8 0000 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 m n H H H H H I Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 0 32768 20 0000 0 0000 3000 0000 Sec 50 0000 0 0000 100000 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 5000 Over Shoot Under Shoot Linkable Read Write Data Type 12 S Crv Match 13 S Array size 14 S Array 15 Reserved 16 Scl Ext Trim 17 Trim FiltOut 18 Ref w Trim 19 Amp Lim In 20 Amp LimStat2 21 Amp Lim2 Out 22 FTD Ramp Out 23 Reserved RO Real RO 16 bit Integer V RWheal V RWheal RW Real 3 20 85 86 87 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 Programming and Parameters Name Description Servo Lock Gain Sets the gain of an additional integrator in the speed regulator The effect of Servo Lock is to increase stiffness of the speed response to a load disturbance It behaves like a position regulator with velocity feed forward but without the pulse accuracy of a true position regulator The units of Servo Lock are ra
464. ltage 4 0 mm 0 5mm 0 6 0 6 N m M10 Common Bus Only OV AC 120V 240V AC 10 AWG 22 AWG 5 3Ib in 5 3 Ib in Maximum minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations 2 Apply counter torque to the nut on the other side of terminations when tightening or loosening the terminal bolt in order to avoid damage to the terminal Not all terminals present on all drives Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive If necessary two wires can be used in parallel to any of these terminals using two lugs Auxiliary power UL Installation 300V DC 10 Non UL Installation 270 600V DC 10 Frame 1 6 100 W Oo 2 2 qo Installation Wiring 1 13 Figure 1 3 Typical Power Terminal Block Location Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 amp 4 el 11 ei o l HI o E n looooo e a us 0122858 M e
465. ly Bit 28 12v Pwr identifies when the12V dc control voltage is outside the tolerance range The positive voltage power exceeds 15 50 V dc and the negative voltage power exceeds 15 50V dc e Bit 29 AnlgIn1 Loss indicates non configurable Analog Input 1 loss fault e Bit 30 AnlgIn2 Loss indicates non configurable Analog Input 2 loss fault e Bit 31 AnlgIn3 Loss indicates non configurable Analog Input 3 loss fault Notes Bits 16 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2 04 Bits 11 12 13 29 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3 01 Changed bit 21 to Drive Homing and bit 28 to 12v Pwr for firmware version 3 03 Bit 14 HH Bus Data was added for firmware version 3 04 Options _ _ 215 5559 BASSE 215 5225 55 5 5 5 5515 5 gt 0 6 9iirizrooss5s5ss5s5s5ixr Default 0 0 O 00 00 0 0 00 0000 0 0 0 00 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 1 True 3 50 Programming and P
466. m revision of the SynchLink network To be compatible on the network all nodes must have the same major revision SL Error Status SL Error History E zoo oo Values Default Options Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Zero Zero SL Src SL Mult A In SL Mult B In SL Mult Out Rx Axis Size Rx Dir Size Rx Buf Size Rx Pkg Size Rx Seq Cnt 0 Rx Index 0 11 Rx Index 1 12 Rx Index 2 0 2147483648 0 0 4294967296 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 0 4294967296 0 0 4294967296 0 0 4294967296 2 0 256 2 0 256 0 1 0 1 999 9 0 001 0 001 999 999 Read Write Data Type Linkable 13 BufSeqErrTim 14 Rx Sys Rev 15 z Tx Axis Size 16 Tx Dir Size 17 z Tx Buf Size 18 Tx Pkg Size 19 Tx Seq Ont 20 Tx Index 0 21 Tx Index 1 22 Tx Index 2 23 Rx Vendor ID 24 Rx ModuleTyp 25 Rx Serial RO RO RO RO RO RW RW RO RO Indicates the presence of SynchLink faults This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window Bit 0 Sync Loss indicates SynchLink communication has failed after
467. manent non volatile HIM memory Option Description HIM Copycat Save data to a HIM set load data from a HIM set to active drive memory or delete Device gt HIM a HIM set Device HIM EEPROM Save data to EEPROM load data from EEPROM to active drive memory or name a User set Reset To Defaults Start Up Menu See Chapter 2 Restore the drive to its factory default settings Preferences Menu The HIM and drive have features that you can customize Option Description Drive Identity Add text to identify the drive Change Enable disable or modify the password Password User Dspy Lines Selectthe display parameter scale and text for the User Display The User Display is two lines of user defined data that appears when the HIM is not being used for programming User Dspy Time Set the wait time for the User Display or enable disable it User Dspy Video Select Reverse or Normal video for the Frequency and User Display lines Reset User Dspy Return all the options for the User Display to factory default values The PowerFlex 7008 drive is initially set to Basic Parameter View To view all parameters set parameter 196 ParamAccessL vl to option 1 Advanced Parameter 196 is not affected by the Reset to Defaults function HIM Overview D 5 Viewing and Editing Parameters Linking Parameters LCD HIM Step Key s Example Displays 1 In the Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down A
468. means setting its BW to the bandwidth of the master reference drive Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 3 88 Programming and Parameters 8 555 Description Values 512 5 731 PLL Out Default 0 RO 32 bit Phased Locked Loop position output This signal is precisely in phase with the input physical Min Max 2147483648 Integer device A link should be made to it from the local drive auxiliary position input The local drive is the one implementing PLL Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 732 PLL OutAdv Default 0 RO 32 bit Phased Locked Loop position advanced output This signal is one position sample in advance Min Max 2147483648 Integer of Par 731 PLL Posit Out A link is normally made to this parameter from SynchLink Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 733 PLLFiltPositOut Units RW Real Phased Locked Loop internal low pass filter output This parameter is normally used to Default 0 0 properly scale an external velocity reference See description of Par 729 PLL Ext SpdScale Min Max 2200000000 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 734 PLL Speed Out Units RW Real Phased Locked Loop velocity output This signal is used as a velocity feed forward It is Default 0 0 precisely in phase with the physical input dev
469. mes 5 amp 6 690V only TUV Functional Safety Report only for frames 1 4 600V no FS mark on the label Environment Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating TUV functional safety report only no FS mark on the label 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Surrounding Air Temperature without Derating Open Type IP20 NEMA Type 1 56 NEMA Type 4X 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Note Frames 9 amp 10 are rated 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F surrounding air Based on drive rating Storage Temperature all const 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing 5 to 95 non condensing ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Shock 10G peak for 11 ms duration 1 0 ms 15G peak for 11ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 152 mm 0 006 in displacement 1G peak 5 5 Hz 2 mm 0 0787 in displacement 1G peak EN50178 EN60068 2 6 Sound Frame Fan Sound Note Sound pressure level is Frame Sound Background Notes Sound pressure Speed Level measured at 2 meters Level Noise Level
470. mmand input from the Motion Planner Default 0 0000 Min Max 8 0000 pu 700 Posit Sync Synchronization input signal from the Motion Planner Pulse received once per coarse update period This is linked as the course to Par 693 Interp Synchlnput Bits 2 4 have been changed to Reserved for firmware version 2 04 Options jojo ooo o 8 SiS CC CC CC 0 0 Defaut O0 0 0 o o po o op oj pp p 00 op ojojo 00 o jo 0 0 0 0 O0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 701 Beier rao Default 0 Encoder 0 election for the Motion Feedback Only Axis feedback source ions 0 4 Note Options 5 and 6 are only available when compatible feedback option card is installed Options Fin Ee fa EE Note Bit 11 SL Buff Rx10 was added for firmware version 4 001 22 Reserved 8 SL DirlntRx1 3 Reserved 9 SL DirlntRx2 4 Motor Sim 10 SL DirlntRx3 5 FB Opt Porto 11 SL Buff Rx10 702 FdbkAxis FdbkVal Default 0 RO 32 bit Present value of the selected feedback for the Motion Feedback Only Axis Min Max 2147483648 Integer 703 Motn TP Select Default
471. mmand received amp controlling motor 16 AtSetpt 1 Par 172 value is within limits defined by Par 173 and Par 174 2 Command Dir Commanded direction is forward 17 Above Setpt 2 Par 175 value is within limits defined by Par 176 and Par 177 3 Actual Dir Actual motor direction is forward 18 MC Active Drive is controlling motor same as enabled 4 Accelerating Motor is increasing speed 19 Commis Motor control commissioning in progress 5 Decelerating Motor is decreasing speed 20 5 Speed control commissioning in progress 6 Jogging Jog command received amp controlling motor 21 Hw Enable On 7 Faulted Exception event that causes a fault has occurred 22 Torque Mode Par 110 value is 2 3 4 5 or 6 8 Alarm Exception event that causes an alarm has occurred 23 SpeedMode Par 110 value is 1 amp position control is not enabled 9 FlashMode Flash upgrade in progress 24 Position Mode Position control active amp Par 110 value is not 2 3 4 5 or 6 10 Ready Enable input is high amp drive is fault free 25 Start Active Start command received amp controlling motor 11 AtLimit Speed Power Current or Torque is being limited referto 26 Command Run Run command received Par 304 12 Tach Loss SW Failure is detected in primary speed or position feedback 28 3 Spd Ref Act1 3 device amp drive has switched to secondary device 0 13 AtZeroSpd Speed feedback is within limits defined in Par 160 31 LogixPresent Speed feedback is within limits define
472. mmunications if present B MOD Refer to the Status of communications module when installed E T Status of network if connected 5 p Status of secondary network if connected 5 SYNCHLINK Green Steady The module is configured as the time keeper 2 or 5 The module is configured as follower and synchronization is complete 5 Green Flashing The follower s are not synchronized with the time keeper 8 Red Flashing The module is configured as a time master on SynchLink and has received time information from another time master on SynchLink ENABLE Green The drive s enable input is high Green Off The drive s enable input is low 1 SynchLink LEDs are located on the SynchLink daughtercard on the main circuit board in the control cassette Examine Par 156 Run Inhibit Status 7 Examine the Status STS LED Verify that it is flashing green or that bit 1 Sts Ready of parameter 554 LED Status is set when viewed from the HIM or an application program If it is not in this state check the following possible causes and take the necessary corrective action Table 2 B Common Causes of a Run Inhibit bit Description Action No power is present at the Enable Terminal TB2 16 Apply the enable 4A stop command is being issued Close all stop inputs Power loss event is in progress indicating a loss of the AC input voltage Restore AC power Flash Update in Prog
473. mp 5 Oo lt 5 gt lt 9925 222 2 22 2822 83e 82 2 S S 2 5 5 2 5 gt gt Z DIN C jm Sit C a 00 0 0 1 0 JO 0 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 149 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 65 432 1 0 Bit 4 SlipTuneDone when set the value in Par 486 Rated Slip Freq is used as the slip gain before the slip regulator becomes active after power is cycled or when the drive is reset by the system When the Slip Tune is completed this bit will be automatically be set and Par 486 will be updated Bit 7 Ids Comp setting this bit runs the Ids test to establish the initial flux current level for the motor and the inertia test even if already run Bit 12 SlipRsCompEn when set the stator resistance will be compensated based on the output of the slip regulator Bit16 ManuCurOffst when set Par 453 lu Offset is used as the phase U current feedback offset value and Par 454 Iw Offset is used as the phase W current feedback offset value When this bit is not set default the phase U and W current feedback offset values are automatically
474. mp Setup 65 Hrd OvrTrviCnfg 398 EGR Pos Input 1164 FricComp Slip 67 dsCmd Slew Rate 586 EGR Pos Output 1165 FricComp Spd Ref 64 dsCompCoeff Mot 459 EGR Pos Preset 1166 FricComp Stick 66 dsCompCoeff Reg 460 Elapsed MWHrs 299 FricComp Trq Add 69 ds Command 496 Elapsed Run Time 298 From DL DataType 601 ds Integ Freq 429 Encdr 0 1 Config 233 FromDriveLogix00 602 ds Reg P Gain 430 Encdr 0 1 Error 234 FromDriveLogix01 603 n Posit BW 782 EncdrO Position 230 FromDriveLogix02 604 n Posit Dwell 783 Spd Fdbk 231 FromDriveLogix03 605 nert Adapt BW 133 Encdr1 Position 240 FromDriveLogix04 606 nert Adapt Gain 134 Programming and Parameters 3 119 Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter nert Adapt Sel 132 Line Undervolts 409 MC TP1 Value 467 nertia SpeedRef 56 Lineari Config 285 MC TP2 Select 473 nertia Trq Add 59 Linear CPR 290 MC TP2 Value 474 nertia TrqLpfBW 54 Lineari Status 286 Min Flux 360 ner
475. n as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Note the default value was changed from 8192 to 4096 for firmware version 3 01 StatorResistance Displays the sum of the stator and cable resistances of the motor in per unit percent representation as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Leak Inductance Displays the sum of the motor stator and rotor leak inductance and motor cable inductances in per unit percent representation as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Leak Indc Satur1 Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the autotune procedure Leak Indc Satur2 Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the auto tune procedure 195 Command Displays the torque producing q axis current command Ids Command Displays the flux producing d axis current command Vqs Command Displays the command for initiation of voltage on the torque producing axis q axis Vds Command Displays the command for initiation of voltage on the flux producing axis d axis Trq CurFdbk Iq Displays torque producing q axis current feedback Bus Util Limit Sets the maximum allowed bus voltage utilization for the Motor Control Do
476. n data of port 1 Indicates the position reference counter value latched Min Max 2147483648 Integer by the external strobes The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 236 RegisLtch 0 1Cnfg 240 Encdri Position Default 0 RO 32 bit Displays the position feedback accumulator from encoder 1 The value changes by a value Min Max 2147483648 Integer of four times 4x the Pulses Per Revolution PPR rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft Used by the VPL to close the position loop if position control is selected 241 Encdri Spd Fdbk Units RPM RO Real Displays the speed feedback from encoder 1 Calculated from the change of Par 240 Encdr1 Default 0 Position and Par 242 Encoder1 PPR Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 242 245 246 247 249 250 Description Encoderi PPR Sets the pulse per revolution rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder 1 input This parameter must be set to one of the values displayed in bold in Table 242A below Table 242A PPR Rating Values n 2 x mod75 125 mod 225 375 mod625 1125 0 f 75 125 225 375 625 1125 1 150 250 450 750 1250 2250 2 300 500 900 1500 2500 4500 3 600 1000 1800 3000 5000 9000 4 16 1200 2000 3600 6000 10000 18000 5 3 2400 4000 720
477. n in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good candidates for shielded cable Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications In addition the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks Refer to Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation including temperature flexibility moisture characteristics and chemical resistance In addition a braided shield should be included and specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75 An additional foil shield can be greatly improve noise containment A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx xx determines gauge This cable has 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket Other types of shielded cable are availa
478. n response to this event Sft OvrTrviCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a positive software positioning over travel condition 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Sft OvrTrviCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a negative software positioning over travel condition e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Hrd
479. n ta ione 0 Zero p e Hh0 Edge Time Latency counter value not used for Hi Resolution Feedback Option 0 0 sing Edge Time Hh0 dEdge Change in edge counts for one 500 microsecond update At constant speed 2 St dEdge 12 dEdge this value should be constant 3 Si0 dTime 13 Hh dTime e dTime Change in update time This value should be constant 500 microseconds 4 St0 EPR 14 Hh0 EPR e Hh0 EPR This value should be 1 048 576 counts per revolution this is a constant value 5 St0 EdgeMode 15 EdgeMode e Hh0 nMax This is a scaled value of 2 6 StO 16 Hh0 nMax Hho Delta2Err Derivative of value 2 Lu E 7 510 Delta2Er 17 HhO Delta2Er 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 262 Steg amp Hiedn TPDta Default 0 RO 16 bit Displays data selected by Par 260 5 Status Min Max 32768 Integer 263 Heidenhain0 Cnfg Configures the Heidenhain Encoder Feedback Option Bit 5 Direction determines the counting direction Set to 0 to count up or forward Set to 1 to count in reverse or down e Bit 6 SW Reset setting this bit to 1 resets and restarts the option card e Bit 7 VM Direction determines the direction of the encoder pulse output from the Heidenhain option card when bit 6 VrtlMasterEn of Par 266 Heidn Encdr Type is set When this bit is off 0 the
480. nal for Rotary Encoder interface 13 Rotary Encoder REFCOS Negative Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 12 Rotary Encoder COS Positive Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 11 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Positive DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface 10 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Negative DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface 9 Linear Sensor CLOCK Positive Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface 8 Linear Sensor CLOCK Negative Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface 7 Linear Sensor DATA Positive SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface 6 Linear Sensor DATA Negative SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Positive terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe 4 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Negative terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Positive terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe 2 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Negative terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe 1 CHASSIS GND Connection point for cable shields Figure H 1 Linear Sensor connections with MDI RG connector or P integral cable POWER SUPPLY Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder COS Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Rotary Encoder DATA RS485 Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor CLOCK Linear Sensor DATA Linear Sensor DATA Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION Ro
481. nclosure Weight kg Weight kg amp Packaging Voltage Class Amps Weight kg Ibs Ibs Ibs Weight kg Ibs 400 480V AC 820 814 1795 864 1905 584 1287 634 1398 540 650V DC 920 814 1795 864 1905 584 1287 634 1398 1030 814 1795 864 1905 584 1287 634 1398 600 690 AC 650 752 1658 802 1768 584 1287 634 1398 810 932V DC 750 752 1658 802 1768 584 1287 634 1398 820 752 1658 802 1768 584 1287 634 1398 1264 58 1464 58 1264 50 785 29 735 29 735 29 535 21 735 29 535 21 1264 50 1464 58 1264 50 1329 52 1529 60 1329 52 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches A 1412 56 1600 63 1412 56 1150 1300 1450 920 1030 1180 Figure A 13 Frame 13 Dimensions Voltage Class Amps 400V 600V Supplemental Information A 44 44 173 Weight kg Ibs DC Input Drive amp Packaging 720 1587 720 1587 720 1587 720 1587 720 1587 720 1587 lt 6192 gt gt 244 lt lt 603 237 Y amp Enclosure Weight kg Ibs 600 1323 600 1323 600 1323 600 1323 600 1323 600 1323 535 211 1468 3236 1520 8351 1520 8351 1368 3016 1368 3016 AC Input Drive DC Input Drive 1368 3016 Weight kg 65
482. nd fiber connections 75 HiHP PwrBd Otemp D High Horse Power Only Lower the ambient temperature Power Board Over Temperature the temperature of the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board has exceeded 85 C 76 HardwareVer High Horse Power Star coupler Frame 12 Only Check the version of each inverter left and The left and right side inverter units have different current right units then replace the unit ratings or the ASIC board on the power board is not functioning 77 HiHP CurrUnbInce High Horse Power Star coupler Frame 12 Only Check motor wiring for each unit The output current between the left and right side inverter units are unbalanced 20 of current feedback rating e g 184A 920A 0 2 Troubleshooting 4 11 No Name Type Description Action 78 VoltUnbince High Horse Power Star coupler Frame 12 Only Check input power and wiring for each unit The bus voltage for the left and right side inverter units is unbalanced 6 of normal bus voltage e g 41Vdc 675Vdc 0 06 79 Bus Data High Horse Power Star coupler Frame12 Only Check communication bus lines 10 pin Communication Bus data are mismatched between left side unit connector on Main Control Board High Horse and right side unit Power Fiber Optic Interface board and fiber connections 81 Soft Over Mo
483. nd lay on top of adjacent drive if present Frame 5 Slide the locking tab up loosen the right hand cover screw and remove Frame 6 Loosen 2 screws at bottom of drive cover Carefully slide bottom cover down amp out Loosen the 2 screws at top of cover and remove Loosen screws on face of cassette Remove the cassette Proper tightening torque for reassembly is 6 Ib in Removing the Side Covers Task Description Loosen screws on face of front cover and remove the cover Loosen screws on side of rear cover and remove the cover Mounting Clearances 7 ke M 101 6mm 4 0 in No Adhesive Label v see below 50 8mm 2 0 in With Adhesive Label y see below 8 m B Te a te se 101 6 0 4 0 in 50 8mm 2 0 in Operating Temperatures Installation Wiring 1 3 X 101 6mm 4 0 in v 101 6mm 4 0 in Refer to the Drive Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings tables in Appendix A for information on drive ambient operating temperatures 1 4 Installation Wiring AC Supply Source Considerations PowerFlex drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes 600 volts with recommended fuses circuit breakers Refer to
484. nection Motion Control B 28 2 Control Block Diagrams Diagram Conventions and Definitions Definitions of the Per Unit system Processor Task time selection Notes Important 1 0 PU Position Distance traveled 1sec at Base Spd 1 0 PU Speed Base Speed of the Motor 1 0 PU Torque Base Torque of the Motor NOTE Faster Task time selections may require 1 Parameter 147 FW Functions En is used to program functions to be disabled to stay within activate and deactivate firmware functions The processor load capabilities PowerFlex 700S drive ships with the position FW TaskTime Sel regulator deactivated To enable the position p Symbols FW TaskTime regulator set p147b16 on 2 Parameter 1000 UserFunct Enable is used to activate and deactivate the User Functions 3 These diagrams are for reference only and may Read Only Parameter val 0 val 1 val 2 Read Write Parameter Task1 0 6mS 0 5 mS 0 25 mS not accurately reflect all logical control signals Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration actual functionality is implied by the approximated Task2 20mS 1 0 mS 1 0 mS diagrams Accuracy of these diagrams is not Read Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration guaranteed Task3 80 mS 8 0 mS 8 0 mS Provides additional information 70000 Enumerated Parameter Page and Coordinate POET 3A2 pg 3 Column A
485. nfigures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Par 386 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted By default this parameter causes the drive fault and coast to a stop You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage 3 58 Programming and Parameters eo amp 55 Description Values 225 5 387 LgxTimeout Cnfg Default 2 FitCoastStop Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Controller to Drive connection timeout Options 0 Ignore as detected by the drive H Alarm e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 2 FliCoastStop 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when 3 Flt RampStop this event occurs 4 FliCurLimStp 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set th
486. ng power to the drive or damage to the Main Control board may occur ATTENTION The DIP switches for Digital Inputs 4 6 are set Table 1 L Switch Settings Function Default Switch Closed _ Notes HW Enable Jmp pin 2 4 SHUNT pin 2 4 pin 1 3 No Jmpr HW Enbl HW Enbl Jumper HW NoEnbl See window for Cnfg Analog Input 1 Voltage 95 2 Voltage Current Change with Power Off Analog Input 2 Voltage 95 1 Voltage Current Change with Power Off Digital Inputs 4 6 24V DC 54 1 115 24VDC Change with Power Off Voltage 54 2 Digital Input 1 24V 53 1 24V DC 12VDC Change with Power Off Voltage Digital Input 2 24V 53 2 24V DC 12VDC Change with Power Off Voltage Encoder Supply 12VDC 52 4 12VDC 5VDC Change with Power Off Voltage EncoderSignalA 12VDC S2 1 12VDC 5VDC Typically set all switches the Voltage same Encoder Signal B 12VDC S22 12VDC 5VDC Voltage Encoder Signal Z 12VDC S23 12VDC 5VDC Voltage Function Down Switch Center Notes DriveLogix RUN 1 Prog Remote _ Processor Mode Processor Please note there are two separate values for an encoder Conformity with the Low Voltage LV Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm EN standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities PowerFlex drives comply with the EN
487. nges in encoder direction bit 6 or 22 may require changing Par 153 Control Options bit 10 Motor Dir Bit 7 EdgTime or bit 23 Enc1 EdgTime configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop VPL Setting the bit chooses Edge to Edge sampling while resetting the bit to zero selects Simple Difference sampling Simple Difference sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time Edge to Edge sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card improving the accuracy of the speed calculation e Bits 10 EnOSmplRate 610 through 12 En0SmplRate 612 or bits 26 EntSmplRate bt0 through 28 EntSmplRate bt2 configure the Finite Impulse Response FIR Filter see Table 233C FIR Filter Settings This setting reduces the effect of noisy feedback on the system Refer to the Speed Position Feedback section of the PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for details Note Bit 27 is set to 0 False by default for firmware version 1 11 and is set to 1 True by default for firmware version 2 03 Options ajale 2 amp 5 2 2 888 2 2 2188 2 5 215 219 5 218 88 8 3 8 28 8188 jo Defaut 0 0 0 0 A 1 0
488. nications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 5 and the network Verify status of network Configured with Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 60 Loss DPI P6 Q A communications fault has occurred between the Verify network connection communication adapter at DPI port 6 and the network Verify status of network Configured with Par 392 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 61 Logix Out of Run Q The DriveLogix controller is in a Non Run mode Non Run Clear fault modes include program remote program and faulted modes Configured with Par 386 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg 62 Logix Timeout The communication connection to the DriveLogix controller has Configured with Par 387 Lgx Timeout Cnfg timed out 63 Logix Closed Q The DriveLogix controller has closed the Controller to Verify drive is present in Drive connection Configured with Par 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg 4 10 Troubleshooting No Name Type Description Action 64 Logix Link Chng Q A required link in the Controller to Drive Communication Format Clear fault has been modified Configured with Par 389 Lgx LinkChngCnfg 65 HiHp In PhaseLs High Horse Power Only 1 Check for voltage on each AC input phase AC Input Phase Loss the AC input phase voltage has fallen 2 Check the status of each external AC input fuse Configured with Par 370 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg 66 HiHpBusComDly High Horse Po
489. not change this value Higher values may result in control instability or over current faults Torque En Dly Sets the delay between the time the drive is enabled and the time the Motor Control applies torque Rotor Resistance Displays rotor resistance as determined by the auto tune procedure Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance Do not change this value Values Units Default Min Max Scale Units Default Units Default Scale Units Default Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Units Default Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Units Default Scale Units Default Scale Units Default Min Max Scale Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Programming and Parameters Hz 0 470 0 000 32 000 x 1000 100 50 200 30 00 0 00 75 00 100 PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu 100 0 0 00 799 99 100 4096 1 00 0 00 100 00 100 8192 20 00 0 00 100 00 100 8192 100 00 25 00 100 00 100 00 25 00 100 00 0 0 800 0 x 10 96 0 0 800 0 x 10 0 200 100 8192 0 200 100 8192 P U 0 0000
490. ns Reserved WP VNOn Vvw Reserved Negative Wr lReserved WPUN Vuv Vvw VP WNOn Vvw Reserved Reserved 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved IReserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Default k VP UNOn Vuv IUPWN Vuv Vvw 9 UP VNOn Ucur O Ground Fault N Ground Fault gt UP VPdevShrt 9lUPWPdevShrt 5 S VPWPdevShrt UN VNdevShrt e 9 UN WNdevShrt 9 IVNWNdevShrt gt Range Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred 0 3 65 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer False 1 True 0 Reserved Bit lt RN A To A zx a D k lUP VNOn Vuv 9 Reserved N 9 Reserved gt O Reserved 2 Reserved Reserved lt gt 2 Reserved Reserved 9 Reserved e gt SensOfstRnge False 1 True 3 66 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values Linkable Read Write Data Type 465 MC Diag Error 3 Displays the third diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control MC Errors appear in this p
491. ns A 5 Drive Frame Sizes P 3 Index 2 Drive Ratings A 8 Drive Status 4 1 Drive Status Indicator 2 4 4 2 DriveLogix Controller P 2 Drives Support P 2 Dynamic Brake Resistor 1 15 Dynamic Control Configuration 3 5 E Electrostatic Discharge P 4 EMC Directive 1 30 EMI RFI Filter Grounding RFI Filter 1 6 Enclosure Rating 1 3 Encoders H 2 ESD P 4 F Factory Defaults Resetting to D 4 Fan Voltage 1 10 Fault Non Resettable 4 4 Fault Descriptions 4 5 Fault Queue D 4 Faults Common Start Up 2 5 Manually Clear 4 4 Manually Clearing 4 4 Faults and Alarms 4 4 Feedback Option Resolver G 1 Fiber Optic Cable Assembly Specification K 2 Filter RFI 1 6 Frame Sizes P 3 Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 7 Fuse Ratings A 8 Fuse Size A 7 Fuse Type A 7 G General Precautions P 4 Grounding Filter 1 6 Recommended Scheme 1 5 Shields 1 6 Grounding Requirements 1 5 H Hardware Enable Circuitry 1 22 High Resolution Stegmann Specifications F 1 High Speed Inputs 1 27 HIM D 1 ALT Functions D 2 External and Internal Connections D 1 External Connections D 1 Internal Connections D 1 LCD Display Elements D 2 Removing the HIM D 6 HIM Indication 4 4 HIM Menu Structure D 3 D 4 HIM Menus Diagnostics D 4 Memory Storage D 4 Preferences D 4 Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option PowerFlex 700S F 1 Configuration Settings Main Control Board 1 28 Terminals Wiring Main Control Board
492. nt 1147 PPMP TP DataReal Note This parameter is used by PowerFlex 700L drives only 3 11 3 12 Programming and Parameters E Inp ERES amp 0 3 tions Utputs 5 n Sr o XP Sed Posi X Pigeon Go Slt zl gt antro Masks amp Owners DriveLogix SynchLink Config SynchLink Output 600 Lgx Comm Format 601 From DL DataType 602 FromDriveLogix00 603 FromDriveLogix01 604 FromDriveLogix02 605 FromDriveLogix03 606 FromDriveLogix04 607 FromDriveLogix05 608 FromDriveLogix06 609 FromDriveLogix07 610 FromDriveLogix08 611 FromDriveLogix09 612 FromDriveLogix10 613 FromDriveLogix1 1 614 FromDriveLogix12 615 FromDriveLogix13 616 FromDriveLogix14 617 FromDriveLogix15 618 FromDriveLogix16 619 FromDriveLogix17 620 FromDriveLogix18 670 Logic Mask 671 Start Mask 672 Jog Mask 673 Direction Mask 674 Fault Clr Mask 677 Stop Owner 678 Start Owner 679 Jog Owner 680 Direction Owner 681 Fault Clr Owner 904 SL Node Cnfg 905 SL Rx CommFormat 906 SL Rx DirectSel0 907 SL Rx DirectSel1 908 SL Rx DirectSel2 909 SL Rx DirectSel3 910 SL Tx CommFormat 911 SL Tx DirectSelO 912 SL Tx DirectSel1 913 SL Tx DirectSel2 914 SL Tx DirectSel3 915 SL Rcv Events 916 SL Clr Events 917 SL Rx PO Regis 918 SL Rx P1 Regis 921 SL Real2Dint In 922 SL Real2DInt Out 923 SL Mult Bas
493. nyejsuonisog xi6o7 OL Coes 8 ereaieaypeuyequesn Wo4 ejegieespeurjegies 4 xi607 oL Ceza ejegieespeuyeqaest ejegieespeuyeqiest eyegjeespeujeques wo x1607 Caza sniejs 91607 ejegieespeuyequest es a 4442 UOHISOd 7 4 uuo x61 Coos ejeqjeaypeuyeqiesy Wol4 xiBo1e ug OL J04ju02 OL Be x607 Cia 629 xi601 Czo suonoeuuo 04102 9SEUd 5002 Control Block Diagrams B 28 paads diejul sun 2 Jey peeds indino pds Cele eC zz z peeds les 011504 0 03002 UOHOY 10 eq JSNW oJezx 0 0009xibo1S Jo uoISJ8A uoneunfijuoo juo eui YO EW JepJo 03002 uono y eq JSNW 0 Ul
494. of certain drive anomalies Configure the drive s response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the fault alarm configuration group of the utility file e Bit 11 HH HW Ver is sed to indicate a High Horsepower hardware version fault Bit 12 HH CurUnblnc is used to indicate a High Horsepower output current unbalanced fault Bit 13 HH VltUnbInc is used to indicate a High Horsepower Bus voltage unbalanced fault Bit 29 1 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 1 loss fault Bit 30 AnlgIn2 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 2 loss fault e Bit 31 AnlgIn3 Loss is used to indicate an Analog Input 3 loss fault Notes Bits 16 20 and 23 were added for firmware version 2 04 Bits 11 12 13 29 30 and 31 were added for firmware version 3 01 Changed bits 11 12 13 21 and 28 to NonCnfgAlarm for firmware version 3 03 Bit 14 NonCnfgAlarm was added for firmware version 3 04 Options E E E la 2885 5 5 5 5508 59 275 2175 5 Sla 2 5 5 52 15 8 218 8 518 15 2 5 515 5 r lt lt 2 Z 2 F 9 2 2 2 Z T T T T T T T T T Default 0 0 0000000000 JO O JO 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
495. oltage feedback circuit Min Max 15764 0 17004 0 Integer The value of the offset is a uni polarity signal A zero offset is equal to 16384 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 551 CurrFdbk AdjTime Units juSec RW 16 bit Compensates for current feedback delays in High Horse Power drives frames 9 and up Default 0 0 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 0 0 50 0 552 Slip Preload Val Default 120 0 RW 32 51 The Slip Gain value to be pre loaded if the drive is powered down Min Max 0 0 8192 0 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 553 Slip Slew Rate Units uSec RW Real Sets the rate at which the Slip Gain Regulator output transitions from the inactive state to Default 0 200 the active state Min Max 0 010 16 383 Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 The default value was changed from 2 000 to 0 200 for firmware version 4 001 554 LED Status Used to monitor LED statuses including the main controller SynchLink and DriveLogix5370 from a HIM or an application program e g DriveExplorer This feature is only available with DriveLogix version 15 03 or later Bit 0 Sts Active Drive running no faults are present Bit 1 Sts Ready Drive ready but not running amp no faults are present Bit 2 Sts HW Fault A non resettable fault has occurred in the drive Bit 3 Sts Fault
496. om another time master on SynchLink ENABLE Green The drive s enable input is high Green Off The drive s enable input is low 1 SynchLink LEDs are located on the SynchLink daughtercard on the main circuit board in the control cassette Troubleshooting 4 3 Precharge Board LED Indications Precharge Board LED indicators are found on Frame 5 amp 6 drives The LEDs are located above the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1 2 Name Color State Description Power Green Steady Indicates when precharge board power supply is operational Alarm Yellow Flashing Number in indicates flashes and associated alarm 1 Low line voltage lt 90 2 Very low line voltage lt 50 3 Low phase one phase lt 80 of line voltage 4 Frequency out of range or asymmetry line sync failed 5 Low DC bus voltage triggers ride through operation 6 Input frequency momentarily out of range 40 65 Hz 7 DC bus short circuit detection active Fault Flashing Number in indicates flashes and associated fault 2 DC bus short Udc lt 2 after 20 ms 4 Line sync failed or low line Uac 5096 Unom alarm condition automatically resets when the condition no longer exists 9 A fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power Table 48 Common Causes of a Run Inhibit Examine Parameter 156 Run Inhibit Status Bit Description Action
497. on 9 was changed to Reserved for firmware version 4 001 PPMP TP DataDint Test point integer data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 1145 PPMP TP Select is integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 PPMP TP DataReal Test point real data This data is meaningful only if the selection at Par 1145 PPMP TP Select is not integer data Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Dint2Real2 In Input value for a second Dint to Real value conversion Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Dint2Real2 Scale Input value to scale the second conversion from Dint to Real This is a multiplication to the input value after conversion to a Real value Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Dint2Real2Result This is the resultant output of the second conversion form a Dint value to a Real value after scaling Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Heidn VM Pos Ref Virtual Master position reference for the Heidenhain option card This value is used by the Virtual Master function as a position reference This parameter can be linked to a position reference source such as Par 1160 VirtEncPositFast Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 Heidn VM Enc PPR Virtual Master Encoder Pulse per Revolution PPR This value defines the encoder PPR for the Virtual Master function The Heidenhain option card produces the
498. on Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended Power Terminal Block 1 Input power and motor 4 0 mm 0 5 mm 17N m 10 8 N m connections 10 AWG 22 AWG 15 1b in 7 Ib in 2 Input power and motor 10 0mm 0 8mm 17N m 14N m connections 6 AWG 18AWG 151b in 12 Ib in 3 Input power and motor _ 25 0 25 2 3 6 1 8 connections 8 AWG 14 AWG 321b in 16 Ib in BR1 BR2 100mm 08mm 17 14Nm 6 AWG 18 AWG 151b in 12 Ib in 4 Input power and motor 35 0 10 2 40N m 4 0 connections 1 0 AWG 8 AWG 24 Ib in 24 Ib in 5 R S T BR1 BR2 DC 50 0 2 25mm 7 See Note 9 75 DC U V and W 1 0 AWG 14 AWG PE 500mm 4 0 mm 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 5 S T DC DC U Vand 70 0 mm 16 0 100 W 2 0 AWG 6 AWG BR1 BR2 50 0mm 2 5 mm 1 0 AWG 14 AWG PE 50 0 40mm 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 6 Input power and motor _ 120 0mm 2 5mm 6 N m 6 N m connections 4 0 AWG 14 AWG 52 Ib in 52 Ib in SHLD Terminal 1 6 Terminating point for wiring 1 6 11 6 N m M12 shields 14 Ib in 14 Ib in AUX Terminal Block 1 4 Auxiliary Control Voltage 8 1 5 _ 02 PS PS 16 AWG 24 AWG 5 6 40mm 0 5mm 06N m 0 6 10AWG 22 AWG 5 3Ib in 5 3 Ib in Fan Terminal Block 5 6 User Supplied Fan Vo
499. on phase W Bit 3 Ovr Current1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over current Bit 4 Ovr Volt indicates that the primary structure detected an over voltage Bit 5 Asym DcLink1 indicates that the primary structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 6 Pwr Suply1 indicates that the primary structure detected a power supply failure Bit 7 HW Disable indicates that the primary structure detected a hardware disable Bit 8 Latch Err1 indicates that the primary structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set Bit 14 Cnv NotLogin the converter was expected but none logged in Bit 15 Cnv NotStart the converter was commanded to start but did not become active Bit 16 Dsat Phs U2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase U Bit 17 Dsat Phs V2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 18 Dsat Phs W2 the second structure detected a Dsat on phase W Bit 19 Ovr Current2 the second structure detected an over current Bit 20 Ovr Volt2 the second structure detected an over voltage Bit 21 Asym DcLink2 the second structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 22 Pwr Suply2 the second structure detected a power supply failure Bit 23 HW Disable2 the second structure detected a hardware disable Bit 24 Latch Err2 the second structure fault was generated but no indicating bit was set Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Opti
500. on regulator integral channel It is very important that the load gear ratio be precisely set such that the delta pulse count of one motor revolution equals the delta pulse count of this parameter When the position regulator is not enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 Position Control bit 6 AbsPositCtrl Posit FB EGR Mul A 32 bit integer in the numerator of the load EGR function It is multiplied by Par 764 Posit Load Fdbk and divided by Par 767 Posit FB EGR Div to reflect the load pulse count to the motor effectively removing the gear box ratio The accumulated position values Par 763 Position Actual and Par 765 Posit Actl Load will be equal if the ratio is set properly There may be some difference due to lost motion in the gear train but there should not be an accumulated difference It is often necessary to count gear teeth as gear box manufacturers often approximate exact ratios with decimal numbers Enter a negative value in the numerator to account for reversed motor rotation Posit FB EGR Div This is a 32 bit integer that forms the denominator of the load EGR function PositReg P Gain Sets position regulator gain as measured from position error to speed reference The gain number is identically equal to position regulator bandwidth in rad sec For example A gain of 10 means that a per unit position error of 0 1 sec will effect a 1 0
501. ons S x 125 Dials geo 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 2555 5 5 52 2 CC C lt O lt O O Defaut 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 0 0 False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 333 334 335 336 Programming and Parameters 2 Q Name Description Values 5 700L FaultStatus Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions for PowerFlex 700L LiquiFlo drive Bit 0 Phs U1 indicates that the primary structure detected on phase U Bit 1 Dsat Phs V1 indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase V Bit 2 Dsat Phs W indicates that the primary structure detected a Dsat on phase W Bit Current1 indicates that the primary structure detected an over current Bit 4 Ovr Volt indicates that the primary structure detected an over voltage Bit 5 Asym DcLink1 indicates that the primary structure detected an unbalanced DC Link Bit 6 Pwr Suply1 indicates that the primary structure detected a power supply failure Bit 7 HW Disable1 ind
502. ons all wiring must be routed through the conduit plate on the drive Route any wires from the expanded cassette to the base cassette and out of the drive Reinstall the plug when wiring is complete Table 1 F Control amp Encoder Terminal Block Specifications Wires Size Range Torque Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Recommended Blocks 1 6 Signal amp Encoder 1 5 14 25 N m 22 N m connections 16 AWG 28 AWG 2 21b in 1 9 Ib in 1 Maximum minimum sizes the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations Installation Wiring 1 21 Figure 1 7 Main Control Board I O Terminal Locations TB1 Terminals 5 S 841 BR2 0 O 465 DC O 2 Terminals lo t s ar i 7N LBS Lo HE DN OE sd O 8 6p WT3 U an eee O Auxiliary Power Supply High Power Only You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 700S Control Assembly energized when input power is de energized This allows the Main Control Board DriveLogix controller and any feedback option cards to continue operation See Power Te
503. oo 8 8 9 90 9 9 z o CC CC CC Default 0 o 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 687 Motn Axis Status Status bits pertaining to Motion related functions for the Servo axis Y c Options 5 515 21 5 959 5 95252 oo o o gt rue E o o 2 5 lt 5 55 2 5 8 88 818 O oe lt Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 jo JO 0 jo 0 JO jo JO Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 688 AxisControl Command request bits from the Motion Planner both the Servo and Feedback Only Axis Options G 8 e m c 51 8 29 255 2 52 2 585 82 55 8 7 5 2 2152 6 5 15 0 515 5 5 55 5 0 5 15 0 55 55 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 8 5 5 8 8 885 5 8 8 E
504. or bandwidth or crossover frequency The value represents the bandwidth in Par 90 Spd Reg BW after the maximum bandwidth limits have been applied Slip RPM 0 FLA Sets the amount of compensation to drive output at motor full load current FLA Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Slip Comp Gain Sets the response time of slip compensation Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Speed Error The error difference between the motor speed reference and the filtered motor speed feedback SpdReg Integ Out The output value of the Speed Regulator Integral channel Values Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Sec 0 0000 0 0000 300 0000 P U 0 0000 0 0000 0 2500 PU 0 0000 8 0000 pu R S 700 0000 0 0000 2000 0000 R S 10 0000 0 0000 500 0000 1 0000 0 5000 3 0000 100 0000 0 0000 3000 0000 1 0000 5 0000 20 0000 R S 35 0000 0 0000 3760 0000 1 0000 5 0000 R S 30 0000 0 0000 3760 0000 R S 10 0000 0 0000 500 0000 Based on Motor RPM 10 0 1200 0 RPM R S 40 0 1 0 100 0 RPM 0 0000 414112 0000 Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu P U 0 0000
505. or frequency The Vqs regulator turn on point is defined as Par 462 10 2 of the rated motor frequency Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 MC Diag Error 1 Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Scale Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Programming and Parameters 0 32767 0 32767 0 0 65535 0 000 0 000 655 350 x 10 0 32767 0 32767 200 32767 150 0 1000 Displays the first diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control MC Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred Note Bits 7 amp 8 have been changed to Ground Fault for firmware version 2 04 Options Not Rotating gt Not Rotating Reserved Reserved WP VNOn Wcur IWP UNOn U W lt gt IVP NNOn Weur 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 2 Reserved Reserved gt Neg Parametr Default VP UNOn Ucur UP WNOn U W Linkable RO RO RW RW RW RW Reserved O Bit RN e 4A To A Zi z D a D MC Diag Error 2 Displays the second diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control MC Optio
506. or the motor overload PT function The value indicates minimum current at the minimum speed Par 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min and these are the first current speed breakpoint From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by Par 336 Motor OL Factor Mtr I2T Spd Min Sets the minimum speed for the motor overload PT function The value indicates minimum speed below the minimum current threshold Par 337 Mtr I2T Curr Min and these are the first current speed breakpoint From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the motor service factor Par 336 Motor OL Factor For more information please see Motor Overload on page C 5 Mtr 12 Calibrat Sets the current calibration level for the motor overload I T function The value indicates the current level that the drive will fault at this current in 60 seconds Mtr 127 Trp ThrH Displays the trip threshold current for the motor overload PT function The value depends on the motor speed and is calculated from the minimum current Par 337 Mtr 12T Curr Min the minimum speed Par 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min and the motor service factor Par 336 Motor OL Factor Mtr I2T Count The accumulator for Motor Overload detection Motor PT function When the motor runs at the over rated motor current the accumulator starts counting up If the motor runs at below rated motor current the accumulator counts down If the value of this parameter exceeds 0 5
507. ormation Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core E Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 20D UMO06F EN P January 2007 Supersedes 20D UMOOGE EN P September 2006 Copyright 2007 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in USA Allen Bradley PowerFlex 7005 High Performance AC Drive Phase II Control User Manual
508. orts When bit 15 Security is set network security controls the write mask instead of Par 669 Write Mask Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options E 2 8 6 2 2 2 2 8 55555 555 2155 5 2 Slagle lt lH N X A S a fst Default 0 0 0 0 jO 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 2 10 t T 713 Logic Mask Act Indicates status of the logic mask for DPI ports When bit 15 Security is set network security controls the logic mask instead of Par 670 Logic Mask Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options 5 9g ggg 22 22 E 2 2 2 2 gt gt gt gt o 2 o o 5 0 5 osl ols 5 a 5 9 a gt la Default 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 714 Port Mask Act Bits 0 5 indicate status for port communication Bit 15 Security indicates when security software controls the parameter Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Ontons 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 lt ja gt sa Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 Q False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1
509. ote This parameter is new for firmware version 3 01 55 Speed Comp Units _ Sec RO Rea Displays the derivative or change in Par 56 Inertia SpeedRef on a per second basis Link this Default 0 0000 parameter to Par 23 Speed Trim 3 and set Par 24 SpdTrim 3 Scale to 0 002 to reduce Min Max 2200000000 0000 position error in following applications 56 _ nertia SpeedRef Unit RPM 4 RW Rea The speed input of the inertia compensator Link this parameter to the output of an internal Default 0 0000 ramp or s curve block The inertia compensator generates a torque reference that is Min Max 14112 0000 proportional to the rate of change of speed input and total inertia Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 57 InertiaAccelGain Default 1 0000 4 RW Rea Sets the acceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function A value of 1 produces 100 Min Max 1 0000 2 0000 compensation 58 InertiaDecelGain Default 1 0000 4 Sets the deceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function A value of 1 produces 100 Min Max 1 0000 2 0000 compensation 59 Inertia Trq Add Units RO Rea The torque reference output generated by the inertia compensator This torque level is Default 1 0000 modified by Par 57 InertiaAccelGain and Par 58 InertiaDecelGain A value of 1 0 Min Max 8 0000 pu represents rated torque of the motor 3 18 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
510. otor or 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motor with 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable POWER COMMON 12 POWER 11 REFSIN 10 SIN REFCOS COS SHIELD SHIELD N C N C DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 9 ENCODER SIN REFSIN COS REFCOS DATA RS 485 DATA RS 485 POWER COMMON TS TS Hi Res Feedback Option Board WH GY BK es OR XX BK WH BKWH R m BK WHRD UL WH RD eN 00 RD WH GN gt WH GY gt DE gt GN 0 oT WH GN XX LI DET Note Thermal Switch cannot be accessed using 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable Connection Examples Figure 4 MPL A3xx MPL A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090 XXNFMP SXX cable PowerFlex 7005 Stegmann Hi Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Hi Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER POWER COMMON 12 Nimm a BK 4SIN POWER 11 DH at BKWH REFSIN 10 BKW ee C cos 4SIN 9 I BK WARD D REFCOS REFCOS 8 WERE GN E DATA 85 485 0 7 4 BD F DATA RS 485 SHIELD 6 GY K POWER SHIELD 5 WHIGY COMMON NC 4 gt R_TS NC i gt s TS DATA
511. owerFlex 700 Drives with Phase II Control Who Should Use This Manual What Is Not In This Manual Recommended Documentation Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install start up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex amp 7005 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Phase II Control For information on See page Who Should Use This Manual Preface 1 What 5 Not In This Manual Preface 1 Recommended Documentation Preface 1 Manual Conventions Preface 3 Drive Frame Sizes Preface 3 General Precautions Preface 4 Catalog Number Explanation Preface 5 This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions You must also understand programmable controllers for the PowerFlex 7008 with DriveLogix Since this User Manual is designed to provide installation and wiring and basic start up information for frames 1 6 only the following topics have not been included e Spare Parts Information Installation and wiring and start up instructions for frames 9 13 Please refer to the tables below for more information on recommended documentation The following publications provide general drive information Title Publication Available Wiring and Grounding for PWM AC DRIVES
512. owerFlex drives can generate conducted low frequency disturbances harmonic emissions on the AC supply system More information regarding harmonic emissions can be found in the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol 2 Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions 1 6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800 3 1 2 5 6 Standard PowerFlex 700 CE compatible drive Review important precautions attentions statements throughout this document before installing drive Grounding as described on page 1 5 Output power control I O and signal wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or have shielding cover with equivalent attenuation shielded cables should terminate with proper shielded connector Output power cable to motor must not exceed lengths in Table 1 M Table 1 M PowerFlex 700S EN61800 3 EMC Compatibility 2 Second Environment First Environment Restricted Distribution E Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m 98 ft Restrict Motor Cable to 150 m 492 ft Drive and Option Any Drive and Option _ External Filter Required 6 v v v 1 1 External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available Roxburgh models KMFA for UL installations and MIF or Schaffner FN3258 and FN258 models are recommended Refer to http www delt
513. p Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp uon mn Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Hn n Amps RO Real 22 0000 0 1000 2500 0000 RO 16 bit 480 Integer Volt 75 750 Programming and Parameters 3 61 No 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 Name Description PWM Frequency Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output of the drive Drive derating may occur at higher carrier frequencies For derating information refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Default is dependant on power structure of the drive Note This parameter was changed for firmware version 3 04 to not allow changes while the drive is running Voltage Class Sets the drive configuration for high or low voltage class l e a 400 or 480V ac drive Allows choice of configuration and affects many drive parameters including drive rated current voltage power over loads and maximum PWM carrier frequency Note This parameter was changed for firmware version 3 04 to allow the drive to produce an output voltage limited by Par 531 Maximum Voltage or maximum voltage defined by the DC bus voltage level Par 306 DC Bus Voltage and DC bus voltage utilization l
514. pCoefAdjust 590 SL Buf Data Rx02 936 SL Buf Data Tx26 996 RsTmpCoefAdjstEn 591 SL Buf Data Rx03 937 SL Buf Data Tx27 997 Run Boost 528 SL Buf Data Rx04 938 SL Buf Data Tx28 998 Rx Buf Data Type 933 SL Buf Data Rx05 939 SL Buf Data Tx29 999 3 122 Programming and Parameters Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter SL Clr Events 916 Slip Reg Gain 448 SrLss FreqReg Kp 450 SL Comm TP Data 893 Slip Reg P Gain 447 5155 Spd Reg BW 106 SL Comm TP Sel 892 Slip RPM FLA 98 Srlss Spd Reg Ki 105 SL CommLoss Cnfg 384 Slip RPM Meter 107 Srlss Spd Reg Kp 104 SL CommLoss Data 383 Slip Slew Rate 553 SrLss StbltyFilt 539 SL Err Accum 894 Spd Err Filt BW 89 SrLss Volt Comp 542 SL CRC Err Limit 898 Spd Fdbk Scale 73 SrLss VoltStblty 538 SL CRC Error 895 Spd Fdbk TP Data 247 Srlss ZeroSpdLim 169 SL Dir Data Rx00 929 Spd Fdbk TP RPM 246 SrLssAngleStblty 537 SL Dir Data Rx01 930 Spd Fdbk TP Sel 245 SrvoAxis RotFdbk 707 SL
515. ped Par 150 Logic State Mach not equal Configured with Par 374 Motor Stall Cnfg to zero 2 Drive is on limit Par 304 Limit Status not equal to zero 3 Drive is at zero speed Par 155 Logic Status bit 13 At Zero Spd is set 14 OTemp Pend Par 313 Heatsink Temp is within 10 of maximum Reduce the mechanical load View the maximum heat sink temperature in Par 348 Drive OL TP Data when Par 347 Drive OL TP Sel is set to 30 Configured with Par 375 Inv OT Pend Cnfg fMaxHsDegc 15 Inv OTemp Trip Par 313 Heatsink Temp is above the maximum limit or Reduce the mechanical load temperature sensor has failed shorted or open Lower the ambient temperature See Par 346 Drive OL Status bit 0 NTC Shorted and bit 1 NTC Open 16 Inv OLoad The drive s operating point is approaching the intermittent Reduce the load on the drive current rating limitation If output current remains at or above present levels an inverter overload condition will occur Configured with Par 376 Inv OL Pend Cnfg 17 Inv OLoad Trip The drive s operating point has exceeded the intermittent Reduce the mechanical load current rating and a foldback to the continuous rating in Par 400 Rated Amps has occurred Configured with Par 377 Inv OL Trip Cnfg 18 Ext Fault Input digital input has detected an external fault Configured with Par 379 Ext Flt Alm Cnfg Enter a value of 3 Ext Fault or 3
516. played in Par 419 Brake TP Data Brake TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 418 Brake TP Sel Pwr Strct Mode Options Default Min Max Watt 100 0000 0 0000 500000 0000 0 Zero 0 Zero 1 Duty Cycle 2 Power Actual 3 Max BodyTemp 4 Max ElemTemp 5 BodyTemp Act 6 ElemTemp Act 7 BTmpTripStat 8 ETmpTripStat 9 Int DB Ohms 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Displays the power structure used in the drive This is an identifier to the firmware for power structure control Bit 0 Lo Pwr Strct PowerFlex 700S Frame 1 to 6 Bit 1 Hi Pwr Strct PowerFlex 700S above Frame 6 Bit 3 Parallel Drv PowerFlex 700S Frame 12 Note Bit 3 Parallel Drv was added for firmware version 3 01 Options gt 55 ls le 2 e 2812 ee ate ee CC Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 195 Freq Units Sets the break frequency of the torque producing q axis current regulator This and Par Default 422 14 Reg P Gain determine the integral gain for the q axis current regulator Set by Min Max the autotune procedure Do not change this value Iqs Reg P Gain Default Sets the proportional gain of the torque producing q axis c
517. plied by Par 1058 MulDiv 2 Mul and then divided by Par 1059 MulDiv 2 Div The result will be loaded to Par 1060 MulDiv 2 Result Equation Par 1057 Par 1058 Par 1059 Par 1060 MulDiv 2 Mul Set this value as the multiplier to the value of Par 1057 2 Input The result will be divided by Par 1059 and loaded into Par 1060 See Par 1057 MulDiv 2 Div Set this value as the divisor of the result of Par 1057 Par 1058 The result will be loaded into Par 1060 See Par 1057 MulDiv 2 Result This is the result output from the Multiplication and Division function See Par 1057 Equation Par 1060 Par 1057 Par 1058 Par 1059 Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 2147483648 0 2147483648 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 2147483648 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 0 0000 22
518. posonics R Series Linear sensors with MTS part numbers ending in 15201102 work with the MDI Option Part Number Character Characteristic 1 Input Voltage 24Vdc S SSI output 2 Data Length 24 Bits G Output Format Gray Code 1 Resolution 0 005 mm 1 Performance Standard 02 Scale Orientation Forward acting Synchronized Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation H 2 PowerFlex 700 Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card Supported Rotary Encoders Table H A specifies which encoders work with the MDI Option Important Please note that encoders must be ordered as Single Ended This will ensure that the RS 485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory Table Supported Stegmann Rotary Encoders Model SINCOS SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 and SCM 70 Resolution 512 sine cycles per revolution Comment SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SCS KIT 101 and SCM KIT 101 1024 sine cycles per revolution SCM 60 and SCM 70 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS 50 SRS 60 SRM 50 and SRM 60 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRM 50 and SRM 60 have built in mechanical turns counter SINCOS SRS M 25 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built in mechanical turns counter IP65 Protection Class Size 25 square flange mounting SINCOS SRS660 1024 sine
519. present on drives ordered with the Brake Option Installation Wiring 1 15 Terminal Description Notes BR1 DC Brake 4 Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection BR2 DC Brake Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection DC DC Bus DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper DC DC Bus DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper PE PE Ground Refer to Figure 1 6 on page 18 for location on 3 Frame drives Motor Ground Refer to Figure 1 6 on page 18 for location on 3 Frame drives U U T1 To motor V V T2 To motor W W T3 To motor R R L1 AC Line Input Power S S L2 AC Line Input Power T T L3 AC Line Input Power Dynamic Brake Resistor Considerations ATTENTION The drive does not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or a circuit equivalent to the one shown below must be supplied Figure 1 5 External Brake Resistor Circuitry Input Contactor M Three Phase AC Input Power Off Power On Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat 1 16 Installation Wiring Using Input Output Contactors Using PowerFlex amp 700S Drives with Regenerative Power Units ATTENTION contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the driv
520. produce Par 813 Anlg In3 Value Note When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 Analog I O Units is set 1 this parameter cannot be viewed from the HIM Al Filt Gain Provides the Lead term for the Analog Input 3 filter Note When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 Analog I O Units is set 1 this parameter Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max cannot be viewed from the HIM 0 0000 2200000000 0000 V mA 0 0000 20 0000 or mA 0 1000 2200000000 0000 V mA 0 0000 20 0000 1 0000 5 0000 RIS 0 0000 0 0000 3760 0000 0 0000 2200000000 0000 Volts 0 0000 0 0 10 0 Volts 0 1000 2200000000 0000 Volts 0 0000 20 0 1 0000 5 0 Linkable RW RW RW RW RO RO RW RW RW Data Type Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 3 96 Programming and Parameters 8 Name 585 No Description Values 52 5 817 13 Filt BW Units 5 RW Real Default 0 0000 Provides the Lag term for the Analog Input 3 filter Note When bit 2 AI3 Thermstr of Par 821 Analog I O Units is set 1 this parameter Min Max
521. producing d axis voltage required for motor control adaptation Adaptation is disabled below this voltage This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Vds Fdbk Filt Displays measured filtered motor flux producing d axis voltage V qs Fdbk Filt Displays measured filtered motor torque producing q axis voltage Flux Reg P Sets the Proportional P gain for the flux regulator Do not change this value Flux Reg Gain Sets the I gain for the flux regulator Do not change this value Slip Gain Max Displays the maximum slip frequency allowed in the motor control The scaling is in hertz 256 This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Slip Gain Min Displays the minimum slip frequency allowed in the motor control The scaling is in hertz x 256 This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Slip Reg P Gain Sets roportional P gain for the slip regulator Do not change this value Slip Reg Gain Se the ntegral 1 gain for the slip regulator Do not change this value SrLss FreqReg Ki Sets the integral gain of the Frequency Regulator which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected Do not change this value SrLss FreqReg Kp Sets the gain of the Frequency Regulator which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected Do not change this value
522. r wel o Cation S Reference Regulator Setpoint Monitor 27 Speed Ref A Sel 48 Spd Ref Bypass2 171 Set Speed Lim 28 Speed Ref B Sel 23 Speed Trim 3 172 Setpt 1 Data 10 Speed Ref 1 24 SpdTrim 3 Scale 173 Setpt1 TripPoint 11 Spd Divide 22 Speed Trim 2 174 Setpt 1 Limit 12 Speed Ref 2 25 STrim2 Filt Gain 175 Setpt 2 Data 13 Spd Ref2 Multi 26 SpdTrim2 Filt BW 176 Setpt2 TripPoint 14 Preset Speed 1 74 Atune Spd Ref 177 Setpt 2 Limit 15 Preset Speed 2 75 Rev Speed Lim 16 Preset Speed 3 76 Fwd Speed Lim 17 Preset Speed 4 301 Motor Speed Ref 18 Preset Speed 5 300 Motor Spd Fdbk 19 Preset Speed 6 93 SRegFB Filt Gain 20 Preset Speed 7 94 SReg FB Filt BW 29 Jog Speed 1 71 Filtered SpdFdbk 39 Jog Speed 2 100 Speed Error 40 Selected Spd Ref 89 Spd Err Filt BW 30 Min Spd Ref Lim 84 SpdReg AntiBckup 31 Max Spd Ref Lim 85 Servo Lock Gain 41 Limited Spd Ref 87 SReg Trq Preset 32 Accel Time 1 9 Total Inertia 33 Decel Time 1 90 Spd Reg BW 34 5 Curve Time 97 Act Spd Reg BW 43 Ramped Spd Ref 91 Spd Reg Damping 53 Drive Ramp Rslt 81 Spd Reg P Gain 45 Delayed Spd Ref 82 Spd Reg Gain 61 Virt Encoder EPR 92 SpdReg P Gain Mx 62 Virt Encdr Posit 86 Spd Reg Droop 63 Virt Encdr Dlyed 101 SpdReg Integ Out 37 Spd Ref Bypass 106 SrLss Spd Reg BW 35 SpdRef Filt Gain 104 SrLss Spd Reg Kp 36 SpdRef Filt BW 105 SrLss Spd Reg Ki 38 Speed Ref Scale 102 Spd Reg Pos Lim 46 Scaled
523. r 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl All inputs are entered as Real values You may use the output of the selector switch as either Real or Dint A conversion is done to create the Dint value Programming and Parameters 3 107 No 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 Name Description SelSwtch RealOut This is the result of the selector switch The output is loaded with the selected input based on Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 0 and bits 1 4 The output is only updated when Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 0 SSW DataPass is high If Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 0 is not high the output will not be updated to the selected input If this parameter does not update check the setting of Par 1000 UserFunct Enable bit 1 User Params SelSwtch DintOut This value is the value of Par 1045 SelSwtch RealOut converted to a DInt value Use this value for point to point positioning values Dint2Real1 In Input value for a first DInt to Real value conversion Note This parameter name changed from DInt2Real In to DInt2Real1 In for firmware version 3 01 Dint2Real1 Scale Input value to scale the first conversion from DInt to Real This is a multiplication to the input value after conversion to a Real value Note This parameter name changed from DInt2Real Scale to DInt2Real1 Scale for firmware version 3 01 Dint2Real1Result
524. r 1106 and loaded into Par 1107 See Par 1104 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Subirct This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1104 Par 1105 The result will be loaded into Par 1107 See Par 1104 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Result This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function See Par 1104 Equation Par 1107 Par 1104 Par 1105 Par 1106 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 1 0000 2200000000 0000 lt Linkable lt RO RW RW RW RO RW RW RW RO Data Type Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Programming and Parameters 3 111 No 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 Name Description DelTmr1 TrigData Link
525. r firmware version 4 001 Options 2 m i 5 E ale ee 55 2 zs jele 2 lt 15 lols 5102 52 35 2 5 2 gt 855 2 2 2 2 2 31212 2 2 5 2 25 Soj ojm Default 0 0 0 0 00 00 JO O 0 JO 0 JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oc Fale Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Current Function 0 Bipolar SRef When this bit is enabled a bipolar speed reference is used In bipolar reference mode Par 40 Selected Spd Ref indicates both the speed magnitude and the direction Positive speed reference values forward direction and negative speed reference values reverse direction When this bit is disabled a unipolar speed reference is used In unipolar mode the speed reference is limited to a minimum value of zero 0 In this case Par 40 Selected Spd Ref supplies only the speed magnitude The direction is determined by Par 152 Applied LogicCmd bits 20 Forward and 21 Reverse The forward reverse direction button on the HIM is one possible source for the Applied Logic Command direction bits The following chart explains the effect that the direction button on the HIM has based on the condition of the Bipolar SRef bit Bipolar Reference Controlled
526. r system response Notes When setting both Bit 0 amp 1 stability is enhanced and load disturbances are removed Bit 2 First Diff was added for firmware version 3 01 RW RW RW RW e Bit 0 Inrtia Adapt when set to 1 the Inertia Adaptation function will effect enhanced stability higher bandwidths and dynamic stiffness Useful when systems with a gear box becomes disconnected from the load Also used with motors that have very little inertia that otherwise lack dynamic stiffness even at Real Real 16 bit Integer 16 bit Integer 3 24 Programming and Parameters amp 5 2 285 5 Description Values 222 145 Hardware Present Indicates if optional hardware is installed Options gi m E 5 SIEIS Sle DID 288282 5 5 2 ta a Z Default 0 0 0 0 000 0 000000 0000 0200 00 0 00 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 49 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 146 FW TaskTime Sel Default 0 0 5 2 8ms RW 16 bit Sets the scan times for the drive firmware Ch
527. rames 9 amp up The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following codes standards IEC 61800 2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems General requirements IEC 61800 5 1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Safety requirements NFPA 70 US National Electrical Code UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA 22 2 No 14 95 Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Emissions EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 Immunity EN 61800 3 Second Environment Restricted Distribution Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Emissions EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Certified to AS NZS 1997 Group 1 Class N223 Certified to ATEX directive 94 9 EC Group II Category 2 60 Certified to ATEX directive 94 9 EC Group Category 2 GD Il 2 G D Applications with ATEX Approved Motors Refer to Appendix J for Applications with ATEX Approved Motors Refer to Appendix J more information for more information ch EN 50178 Bauart Type approved T V Rheinland TUV Rheinland applies to frames 1 6 200 400V and fra
528. re Current Limit Hardware Current Limit Instantaneous Current Limit Calculated value 105 of motor rated to 200 of drive rated Calculated value 10596 of motor rated to 200 of drive rated 105 of 3 sec rating 15826 21096 360 of rated Heavy Duty current typical 143 of 3 sec rating 21576 28796 Line Transients Up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 Control Logic Noise Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak mmunity Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full load 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 25 sec drive not running 0 25 seconds drive not running Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output Phase to phase on drive output 2 Certification Supplemental Information Specification Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following codes standards IEC 61800 2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems General requirements IEC 61800 5 1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Safety requirements 70 US National Electric Code NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment c UL us UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA 22 2 No 14 95 F
529. rence has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 Iq Actual Lim e Bit 27 Bus Reg Tq Lim indicates the bus voltage regulator is active and limiting the regenerative torque e Bit 28 0 Torq indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 9 Torq Ref En is off Bit 29 0 Curr Ena indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par 157 Logic Ctrl State bit 11 CurrRef En is off Bit 30 Torque Limit indicates the collective status of all torque limitations e Bit 31 Power Limit indicates the collective status of all power limitations Options _ _ S Bg E E 2 5 86 5 5 2 55625 212 12 2 5 8 5 5 5 5 5 20 5 5 515 00 9 F 12 8 19 9 F S 3 o a 9 2 7 S 9 9 e 3 F Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O jO 0 0 0 0 JO 0 O O JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oc False Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 76543210 Te True Mtr Trq Curr Ref Units RO Real Displays the torque current reference present at the output of the current rate limiter 100 is Default 0 0000 equal to 1 per unit pu rated motor torque Min Max 48 0000 pu DC Bus Voltage Units Volt RO Real Displays me
530. ress Complete Flash Procedures Drive is expecting a Start Edge and is receiving a continuous signal Open all start buttons and remove all start commands 1 3 5 6 Data supplied by the power structure EEprom is invalid or corrupt Cycle power If problem persists replace the power structure 7 8 9 Drive is expecting a Jog Edge and is receiving a continuous signal Open all jog buttons and remove all jog commands 5 A conflict exists between the Encoder PPR programming Par 232 or Verify encoder data and reprogram 10 242 and the encoder configuration for edge counts Par 233 bits 4 amp and no signal is present The drive cannot precharge because a precharge input is programmed Reprogram the input or close the precharge control contact Start input configured but stop not configured Start Up 2 5 Program Par 825 830 to include a stop button rewire the drive Run input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to 0 2 wire control Start input configured but control options do not match Program Par 153 Bit 8 to 1 3 wire control Multiple inputs configured as Start or Run Reprogram Par 825 830 so multiple starts multiple runs or any combination do not exist Multiple inputs configured as Jog1 Reprogram Par 825 830 so only 1 is set to Jog1 m Digital Configuration Multiple inputs configured as Jog2 Reprogram Par 825 830 so only
531. rite Mask Write Mask Act Logic Mask Act Port Mask Act PLL TP Select PLL TP DataDInt PLL TP DataReal PLL Control PLL Position Ref PLL BandWidth PLL Rev Input PLL Rev Output PLL EPR Input PLL EPR Output PLL VirtEncdrRPM PLL Ext Spd Ref PLL Ext SpdScale PLL LPFilter BW PLL Posit Out 732 733 734 735 848 849 853 854 858 859 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 PLL Posit OutAdv PLL FiltPositOut PLL Speed Out PLL SpeedOut Adv Dig Out1 On Time Dig Out1 OffTime Dig Out2 On Time Dig Out2 OffTime Rly Out3 On Time Rly Out3 OffTime Anlg IniLossCnfg Anlg In2LossCnfg Anlg In3LossCnfg AddSub 1 Input AddSub 1 Add AddSub 1 Subtrct AddSub 1 Result AddSub 2 Input AddSub 2 Add AddSub 2 Subtrct AddSub 2 Result AddSub 3 Input AddSub 3 Add AddSub 3 Subtrct AddSub 3 Result DelTmr1 TrigData DelTmr1 Trig Bit DelayTimeriPrSet DelayTimer1Accum DelayTimer1 Stats DelTmr2 TrigData 1114 1115 1116 1117 1120 1121 1122 1123 1125 1126 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1150 1151 1152 DelTmre Trig Bit DelayTimer2PrSet DelayTimer2Accum DelayTimer2Stats Home Accel Time Home Decel Time Home Speed Home Position DC Brake Level DC Brake Time PPMP Pos Command PPMP Pos Mul PPMP Pos Div PPMP Scaled
532. rloading Adjust Par 146 FW TaskTime Sel to a slower task cycle more time Options 58 3 2 212 gt 9 zo 8 5 gt a a o gt Fal Defaut 0 fo o fo fo fo fo Jo fo fo Jo fo fo fo fo fo Jo fo fo Jo fo fo Jo fo Jo fo mee Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1211 109 8 76543210 UserData Dint 01 Default 0 V RW 32 bit to Min Max 2147483648 Integer UserData Dint 10 These are general purpose parameters available for storage of 32 bit enumerated data or Dint data by the user These parameters will be retained through power cycles User Data Real 01 Default 0 0000 V IRW Real 10 Min Max 2200000000 0000 UserData Real 10 These are general purpose parameters available for storage of Real data by the user These parameters will be retained through power cycles Sel Switch Ctrl This is the control parameter for the switches used by the Selector Switch user functions 16 Input Selector Switches Pars 1029 1044 are controlled by bits 1 4 Bit 0 SSW DataPass Updates the output If bit 0 is low the output is NOT updated wi
533. rminal Block Specifications for connection information You must set bit 17 Aux Pwr Sply of Par 153 Control Options to enable this feature Table 1 G Auxiliary Power Supply Specifications Voltage Current Min Power Min 24V DC 5 75 W Important For drives manufactured prior to June 2006 the Voltage Feedback board provides the bulk 24 volts for the High Horsepower Fiber Optic Interface board If the auxiliary power supply 24 volts is greater than the Voltage Feedback board 24 volts then the switch mode power supply on the Voltage Feedback board will shut down If the auxiliary power supply has an adjustable voltage then the voltage should be lowered 23 75 This will allow the Voltage Feedback board power supply to supply the 24 volts If the auxiliary power supply cannot be adjusted then a 500 ohm resistor needs to be added to the Voltage Feedback board In this case please contact Drives Technical Support for details 1 22 Installation Wiring Hardware Enable Circuitry By default Digital Input 6 is configured for hardware enable input This is for applications requiring the drive to be disabled without software interpretation With the HW Enable Jumper Shunt on the pins closest to the PCB Digital Input 6 is configured as a dedicated hardware enable If this configuration is not required the HW Enable Jumper Shunt may be moved to the out board pins making Digital Input 6 user programma
534. ron emcon com and http www mtecorp com USA or http www schaffner com respectively Prepare for Drive Start Up Chapter 2 Start Up This chapter describes how to start up the PowerFlex 7008 Phase II drive Refer to Appendix D for a brief description of the Human Interface Module HIM For Information on See Page Prepare for Drive Start Up 2 1 Assisted Start Up 2 5 ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform AN the following start up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing Before Applying Power to the Drive Important If you have a DriveLogix application you must first connect the battery before starting this section L 1 Confirm that motor wires are connected to the correct terminals and secure Confirm Frame 5 amp 6 transformer connections refer to page 1 10 Ti T2 U V 1 2 If an encoder
535. rrow to scroll to Parameter or 62 2 Press Enter FGP File appears on the GP File top line and the first three files appear Monitor below it Dynamic Control 3 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the files FP Group 4 Press Enter to select a file The groups in the file are displayed under it Monitoring Drive Config 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select a group and then a parameter The parameter value screen will appear FG g Parameter Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA 6 Press Enter to edit the parameter Motor NP Hertz 7 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the value If desired press Sel to move from digit to digit letter to letter or bit to bit The digit or bit that you can change will be highlighted FGP Par 2 Motor NP FLA Amps ALT VIEW gt Limits 8 Press Enter to save the value If you want to cancel a change press Esc 9 z z FGP Par 2 9 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the parameters in the 1500 Amps group or press Esc to return to the ALT IVIEW gt ite group list Numeric Keypad Shortcut If using a HIM with a numeric keypad press the ALT key and the key to access the parameter by typing its number Most parameter values are entered directly by the user However certain parameters can be linked so the value of one parameter becomes the value of another For Example the value
536. s Ang Comp Default Not currently used Min Max Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version 2 03 SrLss Volt Comp Units Not currently used Default Note This parameter was added for future use not active for use with firmware version Min Max 2 03 External DB Res Units Sets the resistance value of an external dynamic braking resistor This value is usedto Default determine the power applied to the resistor and thus calculate its temperature Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 4 001 Bus Reg Ki Default Sets the responsiveness of the bus regulator Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Bus Reg Kp Default Proportional gain for the bus regulator Used to adjust regulator response Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Bus Reg Kd Default Derivative gain for the bus regulator Used to control regulator overshoot Min Max Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 VAC 50 0 0 0 1150 0 VAC 1150 0 10 0 6900 0 2 150 0 10 0 400 0 460 0 60 0 690 0 2 Par 3 Motor NP Hertz 2 10Hz Par 3 Motor NP Hertz 10 Hz 420 0 0 0 0 0 1126 0 51 0 0 0 32767 0 93 0 0 0 32767 0 3250 0 0 0 32767 0 0 0 16384 Volts 100 0 1000 0 Ohms 49 0 0 1 500 0 450 0 0 0 100000 1500 0 0 0 10000 0 1
537. s measured motor speed information from the selected feedback device Default 0 0000 Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 301 Motor Speed Ref Unit RO Real Displays the speed reference value after the limit function This is the input to the error Default 0 0000 calculator and speed regulator Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0pu 302 Spd Reg PI Out Units P U RO Real Displays the output of the speed regulator This is the input to torque control A value of 1 0 Default 0 0000 represents base torque of the motor Min Max 8 0000 pu 303 Motor Torque Ref Unit P U RO Real Displays the reference value of motor torque The actual value of the motor torque is within Default 0 0000 5 of this value Min Max 8 0000 pu 3 46 Programming and Parameters No 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 ClsLp CurrLim Displays the limit status of conditions that may be limiting the current reference or torque reference e Bit 0 Iq Lim indicates that torque producing current is at its positive limit Bit 24 Torq Limit indicates that the torque reference has reached the Negative Torque Limit set by Par 126 Torque Neg Limit E Name 585 Description Values 5c Limit Status e Bit Ws Lim indicates that flux producing torque is at its positive limit
538. s motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen Bradley 2090 UXNFDMP SXX Figure H 5 on page H 5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SHS 170 rotary encoder connector Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 12 pin DIN style Figure H 6 on page H 5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS 60 SCS 70 SCM 60 or SCM 70 SRS 50 SRS 60 connector SRM 60 SRM 60 SRS 25 or SRM 25 rotary encoder Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 10 pin MS style Figure H 7 on page H 5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS Kit 101 or SCK Kit 101 rotary encoder connector Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable with 8 pin Berg style Figure H 8 on page H 6 Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS660 rotary encoder Is available only with pre attached Stegmann shielded twisted pair cable of various lengths Figure H 9 on page H 6 Wiring the MDI Option Card M lt E S S S S 5 N amp N O S E 5 2 x X 2 D N uy Connection Examples PowerFlex 700 Multi Device Interface Option Card H 3 Terminal Signal Description 17 Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Power supply for Rotary Encoder interface 16 Rotary Encoder POWER 15 Rotary Encoder REFSIN Positive Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 14 Rotary Encoder SIN Negative Sine sig
539. s parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 This parameter was changed to be linkable for firmware version 3 04 Basiclndx Step Sets the amount added to or subtracted from Par 799 BasicIndx Output on a rising edge of Par 740 Position Control bit 12 Bsclndx Step Note that this value can be positive or negative Basiclndx Preset Sets the value to be moved into Par 799 BasicIndx Output when Par 740 Position Control bit 11 Bsclndx Enbl and bit 14 Bsclndx Prst are both on Basiclndx Output Displays the output of the Position Index function Anlg In1 Data Displays the scaled final value for Analog Input 1 Anlg In1 Value Displays the actual input value at Analog Input 1 Analog Input 1 may be configured for voltage or current input signal For proper selection of the input signal the DIP switch S 5 and Par 821 Analog I O Units must be set to match Par 801 Anlg In1 Value is multiplied by the value in Par 802 In1 Scale to produce the input to the lead lag filter function Type of Input Configurable Voltage or Current Polarity Bi Polar Resolution 14 bit 8191 to 8191 DIP Switch Analog Units Al 1 Voltage 55 2 Open Par 821 Bit 0 0 False Al1 Current S5 2 Closed Par 821 Bit 0 1 True In1 Scale Scales the range of Analog Input 1 to the range of Par 800 Anlg In1 Data Enter the units you want per volt or mA For ex
540. s the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Inv OL Trip Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to an Inverter Overload OL Trip exception event This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection Current Over Time functions Open Loop or Closed Loop detects current and temperature at a fault level e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs e 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Interp Fit Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a position interpolator exception event If the interpolator loses the synchronization pulse or is out of synch this event occurs Ext Fit Alm Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to an External Input exception event The event is triggered by a digital input that is configured for auxiliary fault or auxiliary aux fault by selecting 3 Ext Fault or 38 ExtFault Inv in Par 825 Digln 1 Sel Par 826 Digln 2 Sel Par 827 Digln 3 Sel e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs
541. s yey 199M0 AY s ezis 1 syd 00 sudjedz gze sudsedz Qgg sud sed 2 6292 007 0071 syd OOP 54890 099 349 9 001 548 089 706 66 zos 987 96 c 00S syd sed 2 069 54090 2 5098 2 089 sud sed 2 00 6292 008 00 1 Sud 1d 002 49299 008 sud 18d p 0061 544 008 988 679 069 0 9 SE 009 11 0693406 9269 009 0081 0081 009 0001 009 828 069 09 bry 009 9269 099 00 00 099 00 099 828 095 0S 987 009 11 60534906 9759 005 0011 00 005 008 0091 569 8 9 985 245 0 e 007 Syt9 009 0081 00 009 000 009 69 909 09 1444 0 009 11 0973406 0098 057 006 006 007 00 00 989 887 Sce ve 0 0 0298 oss 0021 0021 oss 006 099 989 897 0 95 097 01 9173906 1698 osy 006 006 007 002 00v 989 887 Sce vLE 0 c 096 Legs 008 00 00 008 098 00s 989 986 015 007 0 5883406 1977 007 00 00 ose 098 ose 0 262 192 990 Ov Z 092 1927 057 006 006 007 002 00v 0 898 Sce vLE 0 092 01 9683406 90ct 00 009 009 00 097 002 9 6 z ej 800 108 0 c 00c 9067 058 00 007 058 098 Osce 9 6 286 19 992 052 01 1963406 ose 005 005 Gee 092 900 68 052 0 1 91 0 Z 091 3 092 009 009 00 097 002 68 062 806 108 96 00c 6 8063406 2 002 00 00 002 006 00c
542. sDegc 31 fCsImp 32 fCsFitr 33 IPwmHz 34 fElecHz 35 fModldex 36 Boost 37 fTotalWatts 38 fHSDegc 39 iAdconv 40 Jct Temp 41 Jct HiHp 42 Jct Tmp Fwd 43 Loss Intg 44 HH PwrBdTemp 45 IGBT CndLoss 46 IGBT SwtLoss 47 z Fwd CndLoss RO RO RO RO RO 3 53 Bit 6 IT Foldback indicates the drive closed loop current limit is in a fold back condition The value of the fold back is proportional to the calculated junction Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real 3 54 Programming and Parameters No 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 367 368 Name Description Curr Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select current reference data displayed in Par 358 Curr Ref TP Data Note Added values 20 52 for firmware version 3 03 Added value 53 for firmware version 4 001 Curr Ref TP Data Sets the limit value for the motor torque producing current Motor Flux Est The Q axis motor voltage is divided by the motor frequency while field weakening is active This value is used to convert the torque command to a motor current Iqs command Min Flux Sets the smallest level of flux used to convert Par 303 Motor Torque Ref to a current reference above base speed Note Changed the minimum value from 0 2500 to 0 1
543. sabled and will not be processed outputs will not be updated were added for firmware version 3 01 Bit 7 EGR Notes Bit 16 Ratio Calc was added for firmware version 2 04 Bit 5 AddSub Math and bit 6 Delay Timer w Electronic Gear Ratio was added for firmware version 4 001 Options 58 8 8 gt 5 gt 2 5 5 2 215 85 8 8 5 6 5 a lt gt Default 0 jo j0 jo jo jo jo jo o JO o jo jo FA FO FO jo Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11109 807 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 True 3 106 Programming and Parameters No 1001 1002 to 1011 1012 to 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 to 1044 5 558 Description Values 5285 UserFunct Actual This parameter displays the actual status of the user functions If a bit is set then the corresponding function is active When Par 1001 UserFunct Actual does not match Par 1000 UserFunct Enable it is an indication that the function could not activate because of an error Typically the limitation is caused by processor ove
544. ser Manual for installation instructions if necessary The drive is manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94 9 EC These Drives are in Group II Category 2 Applications with ATEX Approved Motors Certification of the drive for the ATEX group and category on its nameplate requires installation operation and maintenance according to this document and to the requirements found in the User Manual and appropriate Motor Instruction Manual s ATEX certified motor that is located in a hazardous environment requires additional installation operation and maintenance procedures beyond those stated in the standard user manual Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if all additional instructions in this document are not observed ATTENTION Operation of this ATEX certified drive with an e The motor must be manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94 9 EC It must be installed operated and maintained per the motor manufacturer supplied instructions e Only motors with nameplates marked for use on an inverter power source and labeled for specific hazardous areas may be used in hazardous areas on inverter variable frequency power e When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in gas environments Category 2G the motor must be of flameproof construction d according to EN50018 or Ex d according to EN60079 1 or IEC60079 1 Group II motors are marked with a temperatur
545. sets the limit at 250 of the continuous drive rating If the function determines that the power device junction temperature is approaching maximum it will reduce this limit to the level required to prevent additional heating of the inverter This level could be as low as the continuous rating of the drive If the inverter temperature decreases the function will raise the limit to a higher level Disable this protection by setting bit 13 OL ClsLpDsbl of Par 153 Control Options Drive OL JnctTmp Displays the calculated junction temperature of the power semiconductors in the inverter The calculation uses the values of Par 313 Heatsink Temp Par 355 Iq Ref Limited and inverter thermal characteristics contained in the power EE memory If this value exceeds the maximum junction temperature visible in Par 348 Drive OL TP Data when Par 347 Drive OL TP Sel option 12 fJunTmprMax is selected two faults occur Inverter Overtemperature Fault fault code 15 and Junction Overtemperature Fault indicated by bit 7 Jnc OverTemp Values Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max of Par 346 Drive OL Status P U 0 5000 0 0500 2 0000 P U 1 0000 0 0500 1 0000 P U 2 0000 1 1000 4 0000 P U 1 1500 0 0500 2 0000
546. sion 3 01 Options 9 Mx ee 5 9 25 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 515 5 5 lt lt 2 585 58888 8888 8888 888 555 5 5 cC a x x x x Default 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 1 JO 1 JO JO JO 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO JO JO JO 0 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 109 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 Position Ref Sel Default 1 AuxPosit Ref Enter a value to select the position mode and corresponding reference ions 25 Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 Options M S sii rct Aux Posit Ref Default 0 y Supplies position reference to the position regulator when selected by Par 742 Posit Ref Sel Min Max 2147483648 1 This input is designed to be linked to a position count accumulator such as a virtual encoder or hardware accumulator PositRef EGR Out Default 0 Accumulated output of the position reference Electronic Gear Ratio EGR When the position Min Max 2147483648 regulator is not enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 Position Control bit 6 PositRef EGR Mul Default 1 An integer value in the numerator of the EGR function that is precision multiplied by the Min Max 2000000 selected position reference A negative value will effect a change in polari
547. sition Watch 1 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is less than Par 780 PositDtct1 Stpt e Setting bit 18 X Watch2 En enables position Watch 2 Resetting it clears Par 741 Position Status bit 9 Watch2 e Setting bit 19 X Watch2 Dir causes Position Watch 2 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is greater than Par 781 PositDtct2 Stpt Re setting bit 19 causes Position Watch 2 output to be set when Par 763 Position Actual is less than Par 781 PositDtct2 Stpt Setting bit 20 Pt Pt RampStop enables the Ramp to Stop function for point to point positioning When reset and the stop command is given during a move the drive will stop at 0 ramp time When set and the stop command is given during a move the rive will ramp to zero at Par 760 Pt Pt Decel Time Note Coast Stop or Removing Enable always causes a Coast to Stop function Bit 24 Find Home when this bit is on and the drive is started a homing sequence is initiated Bit 25 Pos Redefine when this bit is set the position will be set to zero Bit 26 Home Dir when this bit is set the homing direction will be opposite of the Home Speed commanded in Par 1122 Home Speed Bit 27 Return Home when this bit is set the homing direction will be opposite of the Home Speed commanded in P1122 Home Speed Note The position reference will not change but Par 763 Load Fdbk will return to zero The Position re
548. sjes HN seijddns 81 0 WV OZ dN se sse 10 A009 seDeyoA Oy sng 0 1 MOd jo jueiquie ay siu je 1 1900 0 JopJo ui snw jeqe ade eu uo sed JO seAup ezis JO Bues 9u 1 5 002 0921 881 Scl VEL 0 Z Gok O0cfSH 000 912 891 891 208 ael 9 vv LLOOC OSIfSH OSI 881 9 Z 98 209 9 OSIfSH OSL 96 601 66 9 801 20 e 001 S 6601Q0c ScIfSH Scl 701 81 29 0 89 Z 05 09 Y 2903502 06 5 06 08 919 cS 1 99 05 Or 09 90310 0 5 0 79 8 k 08 05 OF 8 17034906 09f SH 09 79 907 eve 05 Y Se 06 2203002 OSfSH 05 144 e 6 09 Y 06 Sc 220402 0 78 950 cc 90 09 Y Sk Oz 4 20310 O amp fSH 06 SSc 2811 21 81 08 Yi 0 SI 1103406 Oc SH 0c 81 FEL LL FE 09 t GZ 01 11034906 SI SH Sh 66 6 05 Y S Gl 0463406 0L SMf 0 c6 9 19 9 09 7 S Ld93d0c 9 5 9 6S Srl 6 08 v 6483406 9 6 9 87 9845 Yo 09 Y 91 453406 6 5 9 e Li 91 09 5 0 1413405 28504 esnj 9858 409 sduy 9
549. splay should only be used Min Max 8 0 pu if the selected value is Real data 740 Position Control Programming and Parameters 2 8 255 Description Values 525 3 89 Set bits to enable various position control functions Setting bit 1 Speed Out En enables position regulator output at Par 318 Posit Spd Output Setting bit 2 Integ En enables integrator operation Resetting it resets the integrator Setting bit 3 Integ Hold holds integrator in present state Setting bit 4 X Offset Pol reverses polarity of offset parameters Setting bit 5 XOffset Ref permits changing the value of position offsets without changing actual position Resetting it makes the position offset relative to the re referenced value or the latched value upon enable if re reference was not performed Bit 6 AbsPositCtrl may be set when a multi turn absolute feedback device is used for Point to Point positioning Activating this bit will ReRef the position reference to the absolute feedback when position control is activated in bit 7 Regulator On of Par 741 Position Status If the value at Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref is different than the feedback in Par 763 Position Actual a position error will exist and the machine will move to position when activated When bit 6 AbsPositCtrl is high bit 9 SetZeroPosit of Par 740 Position Control may be used to set the zero home position accumulators This can
550. sponse to a Inverter Over Temperature OT Pending exception event This event is triggered when the Inverter Negative Temperature Coefficient NTC function detects the heat sink temperature reaches to the overload warning level e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 4 FitCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Inv OL Pend ent Enter a value to configure the drive s response to an Inverter Overload OL Pending exception event This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection Current Over Time functions Open Loop or Closed Loop detects current and temperature at warning levels e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FltCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configure
551. st Overcurrent Hard Over Trvl 84 Interp Out Synch 46 Soft Over Trvl 81 Inv OLoad Pend 16 Soft Over 82 Inv OLoad Trip 17 Abs Ovespd Det 1 Inv OTemp Pend 14 Alarm Cleared 131 Inv OTemp Trip 15 Alarm Q Cleared 132 Inv Trans Desat 25 Analog In 1 Loss 94 Logix Closed 63 Analog In 2 Loss 85 Logix Link Chng 64 Analog In 3 Loss 96 Logix Out of Run 61 Brake OL Trip 38 Logix Timeout 62 DC Bus Overvolt 24 MC CML Task Fail 47 DC Bus Undervolt 42 MC Commissn Fail 23 DPI Loss Port 1 49 MC Firmware 30 DPI Loss Port 2 50 Motor OLoad Pend 12 DPI Loss Port 3 51 Motor OLoad Trip 11 52 58 54 DPI Loss Port 6 Net Loss DPI P2 13 55 56 Drive Homing 83 Net Loss DPI P3 5 Drive Power Loss 10 Net Loss DPI P4 58 DSP Device Error 20 Net Loss DPI P5 59 DSP Memory Error 19 Net Loss DPI P6 60 Enable Health 45 No Ctrl Device 48 Encoder 0 Loss 3 Opt Port 0 Loss 5 Encoder 1 Loss 4 Opt Port 1 Loss 6 Ext Fault Input 18 Over Frequency Fault 22 Faults Cleared 129 Parameter Chksum 35 Fault Q Cleared 130 Params Defaulted Ground Fault 26 Position Error 85 HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 PowerEE CRC Fail 39 HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Precharge Error 81 HiHP Bus Data 79 PWM Asynch 32 HiHp Bus Link Ls 67 PWM Signal short 29 HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Ridethru Timeout 41 HiHP CurrUnblnce 77 Runtime Data Rst 44 HiHp Drv OvrLoad 7 SLink Comm Fail 9 HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 SLink HW Fail 8 HiHP HardwareVer 76 SLink
552. stor Ratings A 30 Auxiliary Power Supply 2 A 31 Drive Frame Size to HP kW Ratings Cross A 31 Approximate Dimensions sese A 33 Control Block Diagrams List of Control Block Diagrams B 1 Diagram Conventions and Definitions B 2 Application Notes Input Voltage 2 00 1 Motor Control Mode e ding withing a SAP Eee C 2 Field Oriented Control 2 eere ee EU ARE VERSER SE iare ehe C 3 Permanent Magnet Control 0 0 0 eee eens C 4 Volts Hertz Control v2 003 and later C 4 Motor Overload de eda aed BLZ per PLU a C 5 Setting Parameter 338 Mtr DT Spd C 5 Motor Overload Memory Retention Per 2005 C 6 stop Dwell ime es 2 me eme epe uM eS Se ER e C 7 ved euer RSG UA ar SER A C 8 Setpt 2 Data ied Sood RS eee So C 8 HIM Overview External and Internal Connections 2 eee ees D 1 LED Display Elements asi ate nee we a aed dads D 2 ALT F rnctions PAGE oe CERRO BAGS Re ES Rae D 2 Menu Structure cs ssi wali al Mi
553. t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t Integer 453 454 456 457 459 460 461 462 463 464 Description lu Offset Sets the current offset correction for the phase U current This value is set automatically when the drive is not running and Motor Control MC is not faulted Do not change this value Iw Offset Sets the current offset correction for the flux producing d axis current regulator This value is set automatically when the drive is not running and Motor Control MC is not faulted Do not change this value MC Build Number Displays the build number of the drive s Motor Control MC software MC Firmware Rev Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive s Motor Control MC software Changed all values to three decimal places for firmware version 4 001 IdsCompCoeff Mot Defines the flux producing current Ids command compensation coefficient used during motoring When this parameter is set to 1024 the amount of compensation which is proportional to torque producing current Iqs command is 100 of the rated flux current at 1 pu of Iqs command when the torque producing voltage Vqs regulator is off and 510 Mode Config bit 7 Ids Comp En 1 No Ids command compensation will be applied when Par 510 FVC Mode Config bit 7 0 Notes Refer to Ids Compensation Coefficient Set Up in the Power
554. t 10 0000 Min Max 8 0000 pu 186 IPI Prop Gain Default 8 0000 4 Real Controls the proportional gain of the Process Control regulator If the proportional gain is 1 0 Min Max 0 0000 200 0000 the regulator output equals 1 pu for 1 pu error 187 Plinteg Time Units Sec Real Controls the integral gain of the Process Control regulator If the integrator time is 1 0 the Default 18 0000 regulator output equals 1 pu in 1 second for 1 pu error Min Max 0 0000 4000 0000 188 PI ind HLim Units 4 Real The high limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator A value of 1 can Default 0 1000 represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external function Min Max 0 0000 8 0000 189 LLim Unit V RW Real The low limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator A value of 1 can Default 0 1000 represent either base motor speed motor rated torque 100 for some external function Min Max 8 0000 0 0000 Programming and Parameters 3 31 8 5 83 No Description Values 222 190 Output Unit RO Real Displays the output value of the integral channel of the Process Control regulator A value of Default 0 0000 1 can represent either base motor speed motor rated torque or 100 for some external Min Max 8 0000 pu function
555. t s full range at a rate set by Par 559 Trend Rate 3 79 Programming and Parameters 5 585 Values 5e Default 0 Wait Enable Options 0 Wait Enable 1 First Scan 2 Pre trigger 3 Posttrigger 4 Wait Disable n Wait Enable Wait Disable Enbl Collect Buffer Full First Scan Post Trigger Pre Trigger Trigger Event Units RW Real Default 0 5000 Min Max 0 5000 1000 0000 Default 0 V 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Default 0 0000 RW Real Min Max 2200000000 0000 Default 0 V RW 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Default 10 0000 RW Real Min Max 2200000000 0000 Default 00000000000000000000000000000000 RW 32 bit Min 00000000000000000000000000000000 Boolean Max 11111111111111111111111111111111 Default 0 V RW 16 bit Min Max 32 31 Integer Default 511 RW 16 bit Min Max 0 1022 j Integer Default 0 RW 32 bit Min Max 2147483648 Integer Default 0 0000 RW Real Min Max 2200000000 0000 Default 0 RW 16 bit Min Max 1023 Integer 3 80 Programming and Parameters 8 2 9s No Description Values 222 570 Ini Dint Default 0 V RW 32 bit Provides integer input to the Trend 1 The Trending function samples this parameter for Min Max 2147483648 Integer Trend Buffer 1 if bit 1
556. t status and the Default 0 00 Integer d change in state of Digital Output 1 If a transition on an output condition occurs Min Max 0 00 600 00 and starts the time delay and the output condition returns to its original state before the delay timer reaches the setpoint the delay timer will be aborted and the corresponding output status or digital output will not change state Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 m D erbe used on Digital O If the desired li ilable in th ibid ei les the signal used on Digital Output 2 If the desired signal is not available in the 0 imi selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 851 Dig Out 2 Data and Options BON aul 852 Dig Out Bit to select the desired parameter and bit for output 2 Not Alarm 17 Fault 3 Ready 18 Alarm 4 Running 19 Command Dir 5 Reserved 20 Actual Dir 6 Reserved 21 Jogging 7 Enable On 22 In Position 8 Active 23 Posit Watch1 9 At Speed 24 Posit Watch2 10 At Sep t1 25 Cmpr 1 lt 11 Above 2 26 Cmpr 1 A gt B 12 AtZeroSpeed 27 Cmpr 2 A lt B 13 Speed Limit 28 Cmpr 2 A gt B 14 CurrentLimit 3 100 Programming and Parameters No 851 852 853 854 855 856 857
557. t to the user to select a time that does not place the drive in current or torque limit Deceleration from relatively low speed may be exponential Pt Pt Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter which affects smoothness at the start of deceleration in the point to point mode A high filter bandwidth will produce a more square deceleration torque one with a higher level of jerk Typical values range from 5 to 100 rad sec A zero value will bypass the filter Tail out is influenced mainly by Par 768 Posit Reg P Gain Position Fdbk Displays the accumulated pulse count of the selected position feedback Select a position feedback device with Par 777 PositionFdbk Sel Position Actual Displays the accumulated motor position as a 32 bit integer It tracks Par 762 Position Fdbk When the position regulator is not enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 740 Position Control bit 6 AbsPositCtrl Posit Load Fdbk Tracks the load position as a 32 bit integer When a gear box connects the load to the motor Par 766 Posit FB EGR Mul and Par 767 Posit FB EGR Div must be set to account for the gear ratio Set Par 766 Posit FB EGR Mul equal to Par 767 Posit FB EGR Div if the load is directly connected to the motor Posit Actl Load Holds the accumulated output of the Load Gear Ratio as a 32 bit integer and forms the primary feedback for the positi
558. tage Verify the encoder if used and velocity and speed are not within motor nameplate specifications This feedback is correct fault occur most frequently on low horsepower motors Change tuning mode in to Par 515 FVC Tune Config to 9 NoRotate Tune 24 DC Bus Overvolt Refer to Protection in Appendix A Specifications on page A 1 Verify the AC Line for DC Bus Overvoltage Trip levels Verify that either the brake or bus regulator is enabled Par 414 Brake Bus Cnfg bit 0 Brake Enable or bit 3 Bus Reg Enable respectively Verify that Par 128 Regen Power Lim is set properly If Par 414 Brake Bus bit 0 Brake Enable is set verify braking resistor is properly sized 25 Inv Trans Desat The IGBT detects a transistor failure Desat 26 Ground Fault current to earth exceeds 35 of the peak drive rating Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition 27 nst Overcurrent Instantaneous motor current exceeds 214 of rating Reduce mechanical load Check the motor and external wiring to the motor 28 VPL MC Comm Fail communication failure has occurred between the Velocity Cycle power Position Loop VPL processor and the Motor Control MC processor on the main control board Possible causes are Replace Main Control Board VPL is flashing MC firmware into the MC processor when HIM indicates Loading Config MC has failed to compl
559. tal Outputs Internal Power Supply Com 24V dc HHHHHHHH Oo VA rN Sinking Digital Inputs Com Internal Power Supply 24V de HHHHHI E 14 Sinking Digital Output Internal Power Supply HHHHHHHH Oc VAv wr The digital inputs and digital outputs of the PowerFlex 7005 AC drive support Sourcing or Sinking configuration Typically digital inputs are sourcing devices and digital outputs are sinking devices The following definitions apply throughout this section Sourcing a Digital Input The digital input common return is connected to the power supply common Applying a positive voltage to the digital input will cause it to activate pull up Sinking a Digital Input The digital input common return is connected to the power supply positive voltage Applying OV or common to the digital input will cause it to activate pull down Sourcing a Digital Output The digital output common return is connected to the power supply common The device to be controlled by the digital output is connect to the positive voltage and the device common is connected to the dig
560. tary Encoder REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION Linear Sensor REGISTRATION CHASSIS GND EXTERNAL 24 Vdc POWER f COMMON 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 m o RO OUO RD or BN WH o DI Feedback Option Board GN GY PK B e LINEAR SENSOR gt gt 7 Connection B gt 6 DC Ground RDorBN 5 424 Vde 4 CLOCK YE CLOCK GY 4 DATA DATA EE ET E EP EE EE DODDODODODOOBOUDODC H 4 PowerFlex 700S Multi Device Interface MDI Option Card Connection Examples Figure H 2 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL A5xx and MPL Bxxx motors or 1326AB BXXXX M2L M2KXL S2L and S2KXL motors with 2090 CDNFDMP SXX cable Linear Sensor DATA 8 7 Linear Sensor 6 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION 4 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION 2 CHASSIS GND 1 MDI Feedback Option Board Wine ROTARY ENCODER Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 OR N xx N gt SIN Rotary Encoder POWER 16 00 BKWH B REFSIN Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 00 BKIWH SOX RD C Rotary Encoder SIN 14 0 WHRD 5 Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13
561. tch the firmware version of the Heidenhain option card in the drive Bit 16 LightSrc Er indicates an Endat light source fault Bit 17 Sig Amplitud indicates an Endat signal amplitude fault Bit 18 PstvValue Er indicates an Endat positive value fault Bit 19 Over Voltage indicates an Endat over voltage fault Bit 20 Undr Voltage indicates an Endat under voltage fault Bit 21 Over Current indicates an Endat over current fault Bit 24 FrqExced Alm indicates an Endat frequency exceeded alarm Bit 25 Temprtr Alm indicates an Endat temperature exceeded alarm Bit 26 LghtCtrl Alm indicates an Endat limit of light control alarm Bit 28 RefPoint Alm indicates an Endat reference point alarm Notes This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 Bit 14 was changed from Endat BootEr to Bootup Error and bit 15 FW VersionErr is new for firmware version 3 01 Bits 0 and 1 were added for firmware version 4 001 Options 0 False 1 True gt Error MsgChecksum Er PowerUpDiag Er Error Out Err gt Over Voltage PstvValue Er zi 0 Amplitud LightSrc Er FW VersionEr a Default Bit lt Reserved amp Reserved 3 Reserved BI RefPoint Alm N Reserved D LghtCtrl Alm Alm FrgExced Alm 3 Reserved Reserved X 9 Over Current Voltage lt 9 PowerSup Er 9
562. ter Define Link The linked parameter can now be Parameter 32 viewed two different ways by repeating Accel Time 1 steps 1 4 and selecting Present Value Link 800 or Define Link If an attempt is made to Analog Ini Data edit the value of a linked parameter Parameter is Linked will be displayed indicating that the value is coming from a source parameter and can not be edited 5 To remove a link repeat steps 1 5 and change the source parameter number to zero 0 6 Press Esc to return to the group list Removing Installing the can be removed or installed while the drive is powered Step 5 Example Displays To remove the HIM 1 Press ALT and then Enter Remove The Remove HIM configuration screen appears 2 Press Enter to confirm that you want to remove the HIM 3 Remove the HIM from the drive To install HIM 1 Insert into drive or connect cable Remove Op Intrfc Press Enter to Disconnect Op Intfc Port 1 Control Appendix E PowerFlex 7005 2 Encoder Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives For Information on Specifications 1 Wiring and Configuring the Second Encoder Option Card 2 Specifications 2 Encoder Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Input Dual Channel Plus Marker Isolated with differential transmitter Output Line Drive Incremental Dual Channel Quadrature
563. ter Par 844 Anlg Out2 Value 6Hz per 1V or 0 60Hz Par 839 Out2 Par 840 Anlg Out2 Real is multiplied by this number after the limit function 843 Out2 Zero Units IRW Real Applies an offset to the scaled value of Analog Output 2 This parameter is summed with the Default 0 0000 output of the scaling block This sum produces Par 844 Anlg Out2 Value Typically this value Min Max 20 0000 corresponds to for Analog Output 2 844 Anlg Out2 Value Units RO Real Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output 2 before the digital to analog conversion Default 0 0000 Min Max 10 0000 845 Dig Quti Sel EUN US Default 3 Ready identifies the signal used on Digital Output 1 If the desired signal is not available in the igne 0 selection list choose option 0 User Select and link with Par 846 Dig Out Data and H i arque 847 Dig Out Bit to select the desired parameter and bit for output 2 Not Alarm 17 Fault 3 Ready 18 Alarm 4 Running 19 Command Dir 5 Reserved 20 Actual Dir 6 Reserved 21 Jogging 7 Enable On 22 In Position 8 Active 23 Watch1 9 At Speed 24 Posit Watch2 10 At Setpt 1 25 Cmpr 1 lt 11 Above 2 26 Cmpr 1 A gt B 12 AtZeroSpeed 27 Cmpr
564. tes Motor Control Mode 5 H 2 s o o 5 5 5 S Power Range No Drive i Output 1 Full Power Range gt Drive Operating Range Nominal Motor Voltage 10 i Drive Rated Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage gt Drive Rated Voltage 10 gt Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Example Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input e Actual Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage 74 3 e 74 3 x 5 HP 3 7 HP e 74 3 x 60 Hz 44 6 Hz At 342V Actual Line Voltage the maximum power the 5 HP 460V motor can produce is 3 7 HP at 44 6 Hz x U 87 HP M No Drive Output HP Motor Drive Output 342V 480V gt 460V gt 528V Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode selects the type of motor control to use This parameter is set during the HIM assisted startup when asked to select the Motor Control The settings for Parameter 485 Motor Ctrl Mode are e 0 selects field oriented control Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance e 1 FOC 2 selects field oriented control and is only used for a specific type of AC induction motor with motor thermal feedback Note FOC 2 is used only for motors manufactured by Reliance Electric Japan
565. th the selected input Bits 1 Sel Swtch 00 4 Sel Swtch 03 Binary coded selection of the 16 inputs to the switch Bit 1 is the Least Significant Bit If these bits are all low set to 0 Par 1029 is selected If these bits are all high set to 1 Par 1044 is selected Refer to Pars 1029 1044 The values in these bits can be controlled by the digital inputs Refer to Pars 825 830 and to the Selector Switches section of the PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase Il Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 for more information Bit 5 SW Real 1 On activates the Real switch Refer to Pars 1023 1025 Bit 6 SW Dint 1 On activates the Dint switch Refer to Pars 1026 1028 Options 56 g 5 8 5555 els SS les 5 0 5 gt 5 CC CC 0 N 0 False Default o O JO 0 0 1 True Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 Swtch Real 1 NC Default 0 0000 V IRW Real This is the Normally Closed input to the Real switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit5 Min Max 2200000000 0000 SW Real 1 is low this input is updated to Par 1025 Swtch Real 1 Output Swtch Real 1 NO Default 0 0000 RW Real This is the Normally Open input to the Real switch When Par 1022 Sel Switch Ctrl bit 5 SW Min
566. the PowerFlex Reference Manual Phase II Control publication PFLEX RMO03 for actual interrupt ratings based on circuit breaker or fuse choice equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection use only the recommended line fuses circuit breakers specified in Appendix A ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or If a Residual Current Detector RCD is used as a system ground fault monitor only Type B adjustable devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping Unbalanced Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems If phase to ground voltage will exceed 125 of normal or the supply system is ungrounded refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for more information and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground These devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an ungrounded distribution system See page page 1 18 for jumper locations ATTENTION PowerFlex 7008 drives contain protective MOVs Grounding Requirements Installation Wiring 1 5 Input Power Conditioning Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life These conditions are divided into 2 basic categories 1 All Drives The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system ei
567. the relay coil on the DriveGuard Safe Off with Second Encoder option board terminals 1 amp 2 on the board This option board must be installed in the drive for ATEX applications It is offered with a 24V DC coil only Both input signals are wired with respect to the drive s digital input common when using a control board with 24V I O Motor supplied contacts must have ratings compatible with the input circuit ratings and applied voltage level of the drive Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 7005 Phase Il Drives in Group Category 2 Applications with ATEX Approved Motors J 3 Safe Off Terminal Descriptions No Signal Description 24V DC Connections for power to energize coil 24V Common 33 3 mA typical 55 mA maximum 1 2 3 Monitor Normally closed contacts for monitoring 4 relay status Maximum Resistive Load 250V 30V DC 50 VA 60 Watts Maximum Inductive Load 250V AC 30V DC 25 VA 30 Watts Wiring Example AC Line Input Power PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC Drive 24V DC Common 24V DC Gate Control Power Supply Safe Off Option Motor Over Temperature Sensor s Gate Control Circuit Digital In 4 6 Com Digital In 6 Enable J4 Drive Hardware Configuration
568. ther by the user or by the power company The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes The power source has frequent interruptions 2 5 HP or Less Drives in addition to 1 above The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100 or the available short circuit fault current is greater than 100 000A The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0 5 If any or all of these conditions exist it is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source This impedance could come from the supply transformer itself the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in the technical document Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI The drive Safety Ground PE must be connected to system ground Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked Recommended Grounding Scheme A single point PE only grounding scheme should be used Some applications may require alternate grounding schemes refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for pulse W
569. tiaAccelGain 57 Lineari TP Data 288 Min Spd Ref Lim 30 nertiaDecelGain 58 Linear TP Sel 287 MOP Control 1086 nterp AccelRate 752 Load Estimate 221 MOP High Limit 1088 nterp Flt Cnfg 378 Load Frm UserSet 198 MOP Level Dint 1092 nterp Position 749 Local I O Status 824 MOP Level Real 1090 nterp Speed 751 Logic 1A Bit 1064 MOP Low Limit 1089 nterp 693 Logic 1A Data 1063 MOP Rate 1087 nv OL Pend Cnfg 376 Logic 1B Bit 1066 MOP Scale Dint 1091 nv OL Trip Cnfg 377 Logic 1B Data 1065 Motn Axis Resp 689 nv OT 375 Logic 2A Bit 1068 Motn Axis Status 687 q Actual Lim 353 Logic 2A Data 1067 Motn AxisControl 688 q Actual Ref 350 Logic 2B Bit 1070 Motn Cnct Status 690 q Rate Limit 354 Logic 2B Data 1069 Motn CoarseMulti 685 q Ref Limited 355 Logic Command 151 Motn Config 686 q Ref Trim 351 Logic Config 1061 Motn Event Ctrl 692 qs Command 495 Logic Ctrl State 157 Motn EventStatus 691 qs Integ Freq 421 Logic Mask 670 Motn Mx Neg 695 qs Rate Limit 423 Logic Mask Act 713 Mx Pos 694 qs Reg P Gain 422 Logic State Mach 150 Motn Posit Cmmd 698 reg IGain Fctr 428 Logic Status 155 Motn Posit Sync 700 5 Actual Lim 352 Logic TP Data 162 Motn PositErrTol 696 u Offset 453 Logic TP Sel 161 Motn RotaryCmmd 705 w Offset 454 Logic Cmpr State 1062 Motn Speed Cmmd 699 Jerk 42 LstFaultStopMode 331 Motn TP Select 703 Jog Mask 672 Max Spd Ref Lim 31 Motn Value 704 Jog Owner 679 Maximum Freq 532 MotnCnfgErrParam 711 Jog Speed 1 29 Max
570. tic Faults menu Faults and Alarms A fault is a condition that stops the drive An alarm is a condition that if left untreated may stop the drive There are three configuration types for indicating a fault and or alarm Table 4 C Fault Type Descriptions Type Fault Description Non Configurable The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be Fault cleared Q User Configurable Programming and commissioning personnel can configure the drive s response to these exception events Responses include e gnore e Alarm e Fault Coast Stop e Fault Ramp Stop e Fault Current Limit Stop Non Configurable only be configured as a alarm Alarm Fault Alarm Descriptions Troubleshooting 4 5 Table 4 0 Fault Alarm Descriptions and Configuration Parameters No Name Description Action 1 Abs Ovespd Det D Motor speed has exceeded the limits set by Par 75 Rev Speed Check to see if the encoder feedback polarity Limit Par 76 Fwd Speed Limit and Par 335 Abs OverSpd Lim is correct Check to see if the drive is in torque mode selected in Par 110 Speed TorqueMode value 2 Torque Ref If the drive is in torque mode verify that there is a load present Verify min max settings in Par 75 Rev Speed Lim and Par 76 Fwd Speed Lim Check to see if the load is overhauling If it is overhauling turn the bus regulator off using Par 414 Brake Bus Cnfg bit 2 BusRef Hig
571. tion Only Configured with Par 395 Sft OvrTrviCnfg Position feedback exceeds the maximum positive travel setting Par 694 Mx Pos 82 Soft Over Motion Only Configured with Par 396 Sft OvrTrvlCnfg Position feedback exceeds the maximum negative travel setting Par 695 Motn Mx Neg 83 Hard Over Motion Only Configured with Par 397 Hrd OvrTrviCnfg Signal for the hardware positive over travel appears on a digital input 84 Hard Over Motion Only Configured with Par 398 Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg Signal for the hardware negative over travel appears on a digital input 85 Position Error Motion Only Verify the value in Par 696 Motn PositErrTol Par 769 Position Error exceeded Par 696 Motn PositErrTol Configured with Par 399 Position ErrCnfg 86 Drive Homing When the drive is in Drive Homing mode Par 740 bit 24 or bit Check Par 740 bit14 Find Home or bit 27 27 is On the Drive Homing Alarm triggers and the drive moves Return Home to a home position automatically 88 Stahl Optics Linear Stahl Encoder detected a fault Par 291 Lin1 Stahl Reconnect encoder or replace encoder Status shows the details of the fault Reconnect option feedback card 93 12volt Power The12V DC control voltage is outside the tolerance range Alarm Alarm The positive voltage power exceeds 15 50 V DC The negative voltage power exceeds 15 50V DC 94 Analog In 1 Loss An
572. tions 0 Encoder 0 4 Motor Sim Notes Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode must be set to FOC for Sensorless feedback selection to be ie ee FB Opt Porto active Selection 5 is only available when compatible feedback option card is installed This 3 Reserved parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 224 TachSwitch Level Units 96 RW Real Sets the detection level for the automatic tach loss switchover routine A drop in feedback Default 10 0000 speed at this percent of rated speed over 0 5 msec will cause a tach switch from primary to Min Max 5 0000 25 0000 alternate feedback device This feature is enabled when bit 16 Auto Tach Sw in Par 153 Control Options is selected Setting this level lower will make the tach switch detection more sensitive and lower the minimum speed at which a tach switch can occur Setting this level higher will make the tach switch less sensitive and raise the minimum speed for tach switch detection Note This parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 225 Virtual Edge Rev Units RW 32 bit Set the EPR Edges Per Revolution scaling for calculating motor position Used in the Default 4096 Integer calculation of the position feedback such as Par 229 MtrPosit Stimulat Min Max 10 16777216 226 Motor Speed Est Unit RO Real Displays the estimated motor speed calculated when the selected feedback is sensorless or Default 0 000
573. to publication PFLEX INOO6 For Information on See Page Opening the Cover 1 2 Mounting Clearances 1 3 AC Supply Source Considerations 1 4 Grounding Requirements 1 5 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 6 Power Wiring 1 7 Using Input Output Contactors 1 16 Using PowerFlex 7005 Drives with Regenerative Power Units 1 16 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors 1 17 Wiring 1 19 CE Conformity 1 29 Since most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring take every precaution to assure the wiring is correct Read and understand all items in this chapter before beginning installation proper installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for 1 2 Installation Wiring ning the Cover arrr Removing the Cassette Task Q Description Open the door of the power structure and disconnect the cables that connect to the main board Frames 1 4 Locate the slot in the upper left corner Slide the locking tab up and swing the cover open Special hinges allow cover to move away from drive a
574. tor Fuse FWP 15A14F 55 Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only Frame 6 150 HP Normal Duty Frame 6 150 HP Normal Duty 650V DC Input 480 V AC Input Common Mode Capacitor amp MOV Jumpers Input Filter Capacitor Common Mode Capacitor H USE 75C COPF ONLY TORQUE SE Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F SA amp MOV Jumpers Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only USE 75 C COPF VA Mou nput Filter Capacitor H e o llo o l o 2 gt f elle UB m I ONLY w PE USE 75 Ir T2 T3 COPPER WIRE 6 N M OUTPUT U W PE PE R 5 T 0 VAC Ti T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 enw OUTPUT INPUT 120V AC 40V AC Shaded terminals BR1 amp BR2 will only be
575. tus Indicator Descriptions Color State Description PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive Power 575 Green Flashing Drive ready but not running amp no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present 5 Yellow Flashing When running a type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to a run When stopped a start inhibit exists and the drive cannot be started Steady A type 1 user configurable alarm condition exists but drive continues to run a Red Flashing A fault has occurred Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Red Flashing The drive is in flash recovery mode The only operation permitted is flash upgrade T Yellow Alternately 2 PORT Status of DPI port internal communications if present 5 MOD Refer to the Status of communications module when installed ALD Status of network if connected 5 B apter OSEE Manual Status of secondary network if connected 56 5 0 SYNCHLINK Green Steady The module is configured as the time keeper 2 or 5 The module is configured as follower and synchronization is complete 5 Green Flashing The follower s are not synchronized with the time keeper amp Red Flashing The module is configured as a time master on SynchLink and has received time information fr
576. ty PositRef EGR Div Default 1 An integer value in the denominator the EGR function that divides into the product of the Min Max 1 2000000 numerator and the selected position reference Remainders are accumulated and not lost Position Cmmd Default 0 Final accumulated command to the position regulator When the position regulator is not Min Max 2147483648 enabled this parameter is initialized to Par 762 Position Fdbk or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 750 Position Control bit 6 Thereafter its value will reflect the result of reference and offset changes CoarsePosit Trgt Default 0 Input to the interpolator This is a coarse position target reference Min Max 2147483648 Interp Position Default 0 Input to the interpolator This is a fine position target reference Min Max 2147483648 Coarse Spd Trgt Default 0 Input to the interpolator This is a coarse speed target reference Min Max 2200000000 0000 Interp Speed Default 0 Output from the interpolator This is a fine speed target reference Min Max 8 0000 pu Interp AccelRate Default 0 Output from interpolator This is a fine acceleration rate First derivative of 750 Course Min Max 8 0000 pu Spd Trgt if available or zero 0 if not available Posit Offset 1 Default 0 Supplies a position reference offset which is summed after the EGR and used to phase trim Min Max 2147483648 position reference A step in th
577. u Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 40 Selected Spd Ref Units RPM RO Rea Displays the speed command before the speed reference limit block Default 0 0000 Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 41 Limited Spd Ref Units RO Rea Displays the speed command after the limit block limited by Par 30 Min Spd Ref Lim and Par Default 0 0000 31 Max Spd Ref Lim Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 42 Jerk Default 900 RW 16 bit Allows you to adjust the amount of S Curve or Jerk applied to the Accel Decel rate Min Max 2 30000 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 2 03 43 Ramped Spd Ref Unit RPM RO Rea Displays the speed command after the ramp block modified by Par 32 Accel Time 1 Par 33 Default 0 0000 Decel Time 1 and Par 34 S Curve Time Min Max 8 0000 pu Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 45 Delayed Spd Ref Units RPM RO Rea One sample period delayed output of Par 43 Ramped Spd Ref Used in some applications to Default 0 0000 synchronize the speed reference value through SynchLink This master drive Par 43 Ramped Min Max 14112 0000 Spd Ref would then be transmitted to the slave drives over SynchLink Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 46 X Scaled Spd Ref Units RO Rea Displays the speed command after scaling Default 0 0000 Min Max 14112 0000 Scale Par 4 Motor NP RPM 1 0 pu 47 _ Spd Trm
578. ult 1048576 Integer Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Min Max 1 67108864 727 PLL VirtEncdrRPM Units RPM RW Rea RPM of the virtual output device The value specified determines the 1 pu velocity at Par 734 Default 1750 0 PLL Speed Out and does not otherwise affect performance Min Max 1 0 30000 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 728 PLL Ext Spd Ref Units RW Rea External Speed Reference This is a velocity feed forward input It is normally linked to _ Default 0 0 external velocity reference or the velocity output of the chosen physical encoder Min Max 2200000000 0 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 729 Ext SpdScale Default 1 0 4 RW Rea External Speed Scale This parameter is used to properly scale the velocity feed forward Min Max 2200000000 0 Adjust for zero average at Par 733 PLL FiltPositOut while running at moderate speed Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 730 PLLLPFilter BW Units R S RW Rea Low Pass Filter BandWidth BW The filter has two functions Default 50 00 Basic noise reduction of input velocity Min Max 0 00 8000 00 e Timed delay of input when feed forward is linked to an external master reference other than an input encoder The filter BW should be set for best tracking which occurs when the filter output coincides with the Loop filter output of PLL Usually that
579. ult If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened If a Regenerative unit i e 1336 REGEN is used as a bus supply or a brake the common mode capacitors should be disconnected see Table 1 D on page 1 17 Regenerative Unit to Drive Connections Regenerative Brake Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN PowerFlex 7005 1 4 DC amp DC BR1 amp DC 5 amp 6 DC amp DC DC amp DC Regenerative Bus Supply Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN PowerFlex 700S 1 4 DC amp DC DC amp DC 5 amp 6 DC amp DC DC amp DC of the Common Bus Drives Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors Installation Wiring 1 17 PowerFlex 700 drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground To guard against drive damage these devices must be disconnected if the drive 15 installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an ungrounded distribution system where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 12546 of the nominal line to line voltage To disconnect these devices remove the jumper s listed in Table 1 D Jumpers can be removed by carefully pulling the jumper straight out See the Grounding and Wirin
580. ult will be subtracted from by the value in Par 1102 AddSub 2 Subtrct The result of the operation is loaded to Par 1103 AddSub 2 Result Equation Par 1100 Par 1101 Par 1102 Par 1103 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Add This value is added to the value of Par 1100 AddSub 2 Input The result will be subtracted from by Par 1102 and loaded into Par 1103 See Par 1100 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Subirct This value is subtracted from the result of Par 1100 Par 1101 The result will be loaded into Par 1103 See Par 1100 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 2 Result This is the result output from the Add and Subtract function See Par 1100 Equation Par 1103 Par 1100 Par 1101 Par 1102 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Input Input value to be added to and or subtracted from as need with the Add and Subtract function This input will be added with Par 1105 AddSub 3 Add The result will be subtracted from by the value in Par 1106 AddSub 3 Subtrct The result of the operation is loaded to Par 1107 AddSub 3 Result Equation Par 1104 Par 1105 Par 1106 Par 1107 Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 AddSub 3 Add This value is added to the value of Par 1104 AddSub 3 Input The result will be subtracted from by Pa
581. um changed to non linkable for firmware version 3 01 12 Reserved 26 Opt Accum 13 Reserved g D i Tan oe f f SynchLink data This d efines the node s communication format for transmitting SynchLink data This determines i n the number of axis data words direct data words and buffered data words transmitted Value Axis A Direct D _ Buffered B Configure the format by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive Options 0 0 0 0 programming software 7 0 2 18 Value 14 can be used to allow the drive to transmit position data that can be used as a position reference 9 0 4 8 Note Option 14 was added and this parameter was changed to non linkable for firmware 14 1 3 14 version 3 01 17 0 4 18 911 SL Tx DirectSel0 Default 0 No Data Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 0 The source type Options 0 No Data 14 Reserved select ons are no data event feedback and drive parameter 1 SL Multiply 15 Reserved 912 51 Tx 2 Event PO 16 Reserved Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 1 The source type 3 Event P1 17 Reserved selections are no data event feedback and drive parameter 4 Reserved 18 Reserved 913 51 Tx DirectSel2 5 Reserved 19 Reserved Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 2
582. undervoltage alarm fault detection Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the value in Par 401 Rated Volts For example on a 480V drive 0 615 x 480Vac x 2 418Vdc PreChrg TimeOut Sets the time duration of precharge If bus voltage does not stabilize within this amount of time a Precharge Error exception event occurs PreChrg Control Must equal 1 to allow drive to exit precharge and begin to run Link this parameter to a Values Units Default Default Options Units Default Units Default Default Options Units Default Units Default Scale Units Default Units Default Default Options controller output word to coordinate the precharge of multiple drives Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max kHz 2 0000 Fr 5 6 9 4 0000 Fr 1 4 3 High Voltage 2 Low Voltage 3 High Voltage uSec 5 0000 2 0000 100 0000 0 0 200 0 Coast 0 Coast 1 Reserved 2 Continue Sec 2 0000 0 0000 60 0000 22 1 15 95 0 61 5000 10 0000 90 0000 Sec 30 0000 10 0000 180 0000 1 Enbl PrChrg 0 PrChrg 1 Enbl PrChrg 1 0000 15 0000 10 0000 Fr 5 6 9 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Flux Only Linkable Read Write Data Type D W Real RO Real RW 16 bit Integer RW Real RW 16 bit Integer
583. unning and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Values Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Units Default Min Max Default Options Programming and Parameters Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Fit RampStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp FitCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Hon n Hn Alarm Ignore Alarm FitCoastStop Fit RampStop FitCurLimStp Sec 1 0000 0 1000 3000 0000 gnore Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Fit RampStop 0 0 1 2 3 4 FltCurLimStp Linkable V Read Write Data Type RW 3 55 Real 3 56 375 376 377 378 379 381 382 Programming and Parameters Name Description Inv OT Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s re
584. ures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Mtr OL Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Overload OL Pending exception event e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs 2 FitCoastStop configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event e 3 Fit RampStop configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event 4 FltCurLimStp configures the drive to perform a current limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit in response to this event Motor Stall Time Enter a value to specify the time delay between when the drive detects a Motor Stall condition and when it declares the exception event Motor Stall Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive s response to a Motor Stall exception event e 0 Ignore configures the drive to continue running as normal when this event occurs 1 Alarm configures the drive to continue r
585. urrent regulator Set by the autotune procedure Do not change this value Scale Iqs Rate Limit Units Sets the limit of the rate of change for the torque producing q axis current regulator Do Default not change this parameter Use Par 355 Iq Rate Limited to control the q axis current rate limit Flux Ratio Ref Active only in the Field Oriented Control FOC 2 motor control mode when Par 485 Motor Ctrl Mode equals 2 2 Provides a scaling factor for the flux producing d axis current reference e When active Par 511 FVC2 Mode Config bit 28 FixRatRef Use is set Flux Producing d axis Current Reference Par 488 Flux Current x Par 424 Flux Ratio Ref e When inactive Par 511 FVC2 Mode Config bit 28 FIxRatRef Use is cleared Flux Producing d axis Current Reference Par 488 Flux Current below base speed and Flux Producing d axis Current Reference Par 488 Flux Current x motor base speed motor speed above base speed Flux Rate Limit Sets the limit for the maximum rate of change for flux producing d axis current Flux Satur Coef This represents the amount of flux current required to compensate for the flux saturation effect of the motor Active only for FOC 2 motor control mode PM Mtr CEMF Comp Provides CEMF compensation for the torque producing q axis current in the permanent magnet motor mode IReg IGain Fctr Adjustment for current regulator integral frequen
586. us 1 326 Alarm Status 2 327 Alarm Status 3 328 Analog I O Units 821 Anlg In1 Data 800 Anlg In1 Filt BW 805 Anlg In1 Offset 803 Anlg In1 Scale 802 Anlg In1 Sel 818 Anlg In1 Value 801 Anlg In1LossCnfg 1093 Anlg In2 Data 806 Anlg In2 Filt BW 811 Anlg In2 Offset 809 Anlg In2 Scale 808 Anlg In2 Sel 819 Anlg In2 Value 807 Anlg In2LossCnfg 1094 Anlg In3 Data 812 Anlg In3 Filt BW 817 Anlg In3 Offset 815 In3 Scale 814 Anlg In3 Sel 820 Anlg In3 Value 813 Anlg In3LossCnfg 1095 Param Name Text Parameter Param Name Text Parameter Anlg Out1 Dint 832 Brake TP Data 419 Offset 834 Brake TP Sel 418 Out1 Real 833 Brake Watts 417 Anlg Out1 Scale 835 Brake Bus Cnfg 414 Anlg Out1 Sel 831 Break Frequency 530 Anlg Outi Value 837 Break Voltage 529 Anlg Out1 Zero 836 Bus Reg ACR Kp 548 Anlg Out2 Dint 839 Bus Reg Kd 547 Anlg Out2 Offset 841 Bus Reg Ki 545 Anlg Out2 Real 840 Bus Reg Kp 546 Anlg Out2 Scale 842 Bus Util Limit 500 Anlg Out2 Sel 838 BusReg Brake Ref 415 Anlg Out2 Value 844 BusUndervoltCnfg 393 Anlg Out2 Zero 843 Cnv NotLogin Cfg 368 Applied LogicCmd 152 Coarse Spd Trgt 750 Atune Spd Ref 74 CoarsePosit Trgt 748 Atune Trq Ref 129 Compare 1A 1071 Auto Manual 649 Compare 1B 1072 Aux Posit Ref 743 Compare 2A 1073 Basiclndx Output 799 Compare 2B 1074 Basiclndx Preset 798 Control Options 153 Basiclndx Step 797 CurrFdbk AdjTime 551 BitSwap 1 Result 864 Current Limit Gain 362 BitSwap 1A Bit 861 Current R
587. usReg Brake Ref plus 4 5 With the setting the bus regulator turns on first at the value set by Par 415 BusReg Brake Ref and then the dynamic braking turns on when there are any transients above the value set in Par 415 BusReg Brake Ref e Set bit 3 Bus Reg to enable the Bus Voltage Regulator The output of the Bus Voltage Regulator is summed with Par 128 Regen Power Lim and fed into the Power Limit Calculator It in effect reduces regenerative torque references when the bus voltage is too high Notes This parameter was changed to non linkable and bits 5 and 6 were added for future use not active for use with firmware version 3 01 Remove bits 5 and 6 for firmware version 4 001 not used Options 5 5 55125 5 2155 gt 2 25 5 5 51515 5 5 gt gt jw 5 5 5 5 9 o 3 sS CC CC CC 0 Default 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 BusReg Brake Ref Units RW Real Sets the turn on voltage for the bus regulator and brakes Enter a percentage of the high Default 111 0000 voltage setting for the voltage class For example on a 400 480V drive Min Max 110 5000 117 8000 111 x J 2 x 480 VDC Brake PulseWatts Units RW Real Limits the power delivered to the external Dynamic Brake DB resistor for one second Default 2000 00
588. used for Motor Control MC Test Mode Test Freq Ref Sets the frequency reference used for Motor Control MC Test Mode Note The default value was changed for firmware version 2 03 Test Freq Rate Sets the rate of change of frequency reference used for Motor Control MC Test Mode Mtr Vds Base Displays the motor flux producing d axis voltage command when running at nameplate motor speed and load This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Mtr Vqs Base Displays the motor torque producing q axis voltage command when running at nameplate motor speed and load This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Vqs Max Displays the maximum torque producing q axis voltage allowed on the motor Adaptation is disabled below this voltage This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Vds Max Displays the maximum flux producing d axis voltage allowed on the motor Adaptation is disabled below this voltage This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Vqs Min Displays the minimum torque producing q axis voltage required for motor control adaptation This value is determined during the auto tune procedure Do not change this value Used only in FOC modes Vds Min Displays the minimum flux
589. ustable from 0 to 6553 5 in 0 1 second increments from 0 to 6553 5 in 0 1 second increments 5 Time Adjustable from 0 5 to 4 0 seconds Adjustable from 0 5 to 4 0 seconds Intermittent Overload 110 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 11096 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 800 of rated output current Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 80096 of rated output current Electronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by U L to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by U L to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 4 Category Supplemental Information Specification Frames 1 6 690V Drive frames 5 amp 6 only Frames 9 amp up Feedback Encoder Inputs 2 Dual Channel Plus Marker Isolated with differential transmitter Dual Channel Plus Marker Isolated with differential transmitter Output Line Drive Incremental Dual Channel Quadrature type Output Line Drive Incremental Dual Channel Quadrature type Encoder PPR Rating
590. utomation com literature or call M F 7 00a m to 7 00p m Central STD time 1 262 512 8176 For Automation and Control Technical Support Title Online at Rockwell Automation Technical Support http support rockwellautomation com knowledgebase The following publications provide necessary information when applying the DriveLogix Controller Title DriveLogix5730 Controller User Manual Publication 200 0 003 PowerFlex 7005 Drive amp DriveLogix Controller 20D RN007 Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures 1756 PMO01 Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions 1756 RMO003 Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and 1756 RMO006 Drives Instructions RSLogix 5000 Getting Results 9399 RLD300GR Available www rockwellautomation com literature Manual Conventions Drive Frame Sizes Overview p 3 The following publications provide information that is useful when planning and installing communication networks Title Publication ContolNet Coax Tap Installation 1786 5 7 Instructions ControlNet Cable System Planning 1786 6 2 1 and Installation Manual ContolNet Fiber Media Planning CNET INO01 and Installation Guide Available www rockwellautomation com literature e Inthis manual we refer to the PowerFlex 700S Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as drive PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700S drive or PowerFlex 700S AC drive e To
591. utput Frequency Range 0 400 Hz 0 400 Hz Note For output frequencies above 320 400 Hz consult the factory Speed Control Speed regulation without feedback Speed regulation without feedback 0 196 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 120 1 operating range 50 rad sec bandwidth 0 196 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 120 1 operating range 50 rad sec bandwidth Speed regulation with feedback 0 00196 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 744 rad sec bandwidth Speed regulation with feedback 0 00196 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 300 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation Torque Regulation without feedback 5 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation without feedback 10 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation with feedback 2 2500 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation with feedback 5 2500 rad sec bandwidth Selectable Motor Control Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast and Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast and Current Limit Current Limit Accel Decel Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable Independently programmable accel decel times adj
592. value at the transmitting node and receiving multiplying nodes Enter a value that will not produce an overflow the product of this value and the inputs to the conversion and multiply functions must be less than 65 536 924 ISL Mult A In Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the A Multiplier Input as a floating point real value This value is divided by the Par Min Max 0 0000 65535 0000 923 SL Mult Base The source of the A Multiplier is determined by the Rx Direct Data Selector Parameters 905 909 The possible sources are zero Par 1054 MulDiv 1 Mul Par 1056 MulDiv 1 Result Par 1058 MulDiv 2 Mul or Par 1060 MulDiv 2 Result The SynchLink Multiply function takes this input before it is converted to floating point 925 SLMult B In Default 1 0000 IRW Real The B Multiplier Input This must be a floating point real value The SynchLink Multiply Min Max 0 25000 2 0000 function takes this input after it is converted to integer 926 SL Mult Out Default 0 0000 RO Real Displays the output of the SynchLink Multiply function as a floating point real value The Min Max 0 0000 65535 0000 value is the result of the formula Par 924 SL Mult A In source integer x Par 925 SL Mult B In Par 923 SL Mult Base or Par 924 SL Mult A In x Par 925 SL Mult B In Note The SynchLink Multiply function produces an output that is always positive 927 ISL Mult State Displays the status of the SynchLink Multiply function
593. ve to the value in Par 763 Position Actual after homing is complete For example When homing is complete Par 763 Position Actual 1000 counts If you want to move to an absolute position of 2000 counts relative to the home switch you must enter a value of 3000 counts into Par 758 Pt Pt Posit Ref i e 1000 2000 3000 If you want to move back to the home switch using the same value in Par 763 Position Actual after homing 1000 you must enter a value of 1000 into Par 758 Pt Pt Position Ref i e 0 1000 1000 Bit 1 Incremental Incremental mode Bit 2 Start Start Bit 4 Scaling En Scaling enabled Bit 5 Over Ride En Override enabled Bit 6 S Curve En S Curve Enabled Bit 7 Cond Hold Conditional Hold Bit 8 Pause Pause Bit 9 Re Synch Re Synch Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options zs E Slo 5 5 sie 5 2 gt 5 98 SIS CC O O lt Default 0 0 jo jo 0 o o o jo 0 0 0 o rale Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 1 True 1135 PPMP Status Displays the current operating status of the Motion Planner Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options zziz 15 39883 222 ec Em E 5 5 5 gt 15
594. wap 1 Result BitSwap 2B Data BitSwap 3B Data BitSwap 4B Data BitSwap 5B Data BitSwap 6B Data BitSwap 1B Bit This parameter specifies the bit from Par 862 BitSwap 1B Data that will replace the specified bit in Par 860 BitSwap 1A Data and be loaded to Par 864 BitSwap 1 Result A negative bit selection may be used to invert the data Use 32 to invert the value of bit 0 BitSwap 2B Bit BitSwap 3B Bit BitSwap 4B Bit BitSwap 5B Bit BitSwap 6B Bit BitSwap 1 Result This parameter contains the result of the Bit Swap operation X unused data not passed to result BitSwap 2 Result BitSwap 3 Result BitSwap 4 Result BitSwap 5 Result BitSwap 6 Result Values Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max Default Min Max 0 32 bits of data 0 0 31 0 32 bits of data 0 32 31 0 32 bits of data Linkable Read Write Data Type RW RW RW RW RO 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 32 bit Boolean 16 bit Integer 32 bit Boolean 3 102 Programming and Parameters No 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 Name Description SL Comm TP Sel Enter or write a value to select SynchLink data displayed by Par 893 SL Comm TP Data SL Comm TP Data Displays data selected by Par 892 SL Comm TP Sel L CRC Err Accum isplays the total accumulated number of C
595. ward through Par 728 PLL Ext Spd Ref When cleared velocity feed forward is derived from the input device position Bit 2 Trckng When set provides an element of acceleration compensation to the feed forward branch This is not recommended for use with external inputs because of increased noise Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 Options g oo Q D D lt 5 c gt 333956 5 5 15 CC CC UW gt Default o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OO 0 0 0 Q False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 321 0 l Tue 721 PLL Position Ref Default 0 0 RW 32 bit Physical encoder position input This parameter is normally linked directly to the encoder Min Max 2147483648 Integer position of the device chosen for input to PLL Note This parameter was added for firmware version 3 01 722 PLL BandWidth Units R S RW Real Sets the internal bandwidth response of the PLL function in rad sec The setting for very Default 120 00 noisy mechanical systems could range from 1 to 10 r s while well behaved high line count Min Max 0 00 8000 00 input devices could range upwards of 100 r s Higher bandwidths will quickly resolve tracking errors while the lower bandwidths will take longer to
596. wer Only Check the communication bus lines 10 pin Bus Communication Time Delay the communication bus has connector on the Main Control Board High delayed feedback or bad communication quality Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board and fiber connections 67 HiHp BusLinkLs High Horse Power Only Check the communication bus lines 10 pin Bus Communication Link Loss bus communication between connector the Main Control Board High the High Power Fiber Optic Interface circuit board and the Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board and Voltage Feedback circuit board has stopped fiber connections 68 HiHpBusCRCEr High Horse Power Only Check the communication bus lines 10 pin Bus Communication CRC Error too many Cycling Ring connector on the Main Control Board High Checksum CRC errors have occurred the communication Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board and bus fiber connections A fast power cycle may cause the 700S Main Control Board to attempt to communicate with the ASIC Board before the ASIC Board is energized 69 HiHp Bus WtchDog High Horse Power Only Check the communication bus lines 10 pin Bus Communication Watchdog Error no message packets connector on the Main Control Board High came through in the communication bus a watchdog error was Horse Power Fiber Optic Interface board and detected fiber connections 70 HiHpFanFdbkLs High Horse Power Only 1 Check the communication
597. wer distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter The PowerFlex 700S can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker Local national electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses circuit breakers power short circuit protection Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided in Appendix A ATTENTION The PowerFlex 700S does not provide input Installation Wiring 1 7 Power Wiring Since most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring take every precaution to assure the wiring is correct Read and understand all items in this section before beginning installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for AN proper installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this driv
598. weypds 09 12919 61 049 4 412319 09 era 354 Ssoqu e 209 zoq ues 41 S pds 109 ues 09 dois jeuuow 91 iasa dweypds dojs jeuuoN 009 154 Id PIOH Id 2195 pds Lies pds 0195 jeu pds 15 15209 Id dwo9 1204 dwog enjeu 1X3 0 S SH d 91601 2913 les di 21607 JesJeg 91607 Sjulogise Le ysy 21601 e ug 1S4 WIL Id SEG PIOH Id ug uonisod s Id zia dwo9 puy dwo9 0 x4 609 309 paniasey 10 gt Beys 909 9 Bess soq 0 PIOH dweypds sxy 509 154 ssoquoe 209 S pds 109 Iqsq dweypds 009 D 21607 SL 0 SL da 0 SL 0 SL uonoeuuo 0 SL WIH peiunoy xiBo1eAug 0 00 4 Control Block Diagrams B 14 eui 196 28 pue ppd 69 9 9 19 uay
599. wists Per Inch 2 3 twists per inch of wire lay per pair Capacitance Per Pair not to exceed 30 pF per foot 0 3 pF as read on a GEN RAD Model 1658 Digibridge or equivalent Capacitance Difference Pair to Pair not to exceed 0 6 pF per foot as read on a GEN RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Resistance per 1000 Feet 17 150 1096 Inductance per 1000 Feet 0 13 mH 10 as read on a GEN RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent Insulation Thickness 0 008 in Conductor Stranding 16 30 Jacket Thickness 0 018 in Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver Connection Examples 23 4568 1898 Resolver Interface Clockwise Rotation Count Up PowerFlex 7005 Resolver Feedback Option Card G 3 Terminal Signal Description 8 REF HIGH Positive Reference signal 7 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable shield 6 REF LOW Negative Reference signal 5 SIN HIGH Positive Sine signal 4 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable shield 3 SIN LOW Negative Sine signal 2 COS HIGH Positive Cosine signal 1 COS LOW Negative Cosine signal REFHIGH8 SHIELD7 REFLOW6 SIN HIGH5 SHIELD 4 4 m SINLOW3 COSHIGH2 COSLOW1 REF HIGH8 SHIELD7
600. ximum length Important I O terminals labeled or are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise exists when using bipolar input sources Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage Table 1 E Recommended Control Wire Insulation Type Wire Type s Description Rating Digital I O Un shielded Per US NEC or applicable national local Mes mne A C Shielded Multi conductor shielded cable 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 ren such as Belden 8770 equiv conductor shielded Standard Belden 8760 9460 or equiv 0 750 mm 18AWG Analog I O twisted pair 100 shield with drain Remote Pot Belden 8770 or equiv 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 cond shielded Encoder Combined Belden 9730 or equivalent 0 196 mm 24 AWG Pulse I O individually shielded Less 30 5 m 100 ft 300V Encoder Signal Belden 9730 9728 or 0 196 mm 24 AWG 75 90 oc Pulse equivalent individually shielded 167 194 F 30 5 m 100 Power Belden 8790 2 0 750 mm 18AWG ft to 1524 Combined Belden 9892 0 330 mm or 0 500 mm m 500 ft 3 Encoder Signal Belden 9730 9728
601. ximum Freq slope that portion of the curve used above base speed Maximum Voltage Motor NP Volts Break Vollage Start Acceal Boost Run Boost Break Motor NP Hertz Maximum Frequency Frequency Setting Parameter 338 Mtr 127 Spd Min Parameter 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min sets the minimum speed for the motor overload function This value determines the minimum speed the drive should run below the minimum current threshold set in parameter 337 Mtr I2T Curr Min Parameters 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min and 337 Mtr I2T Curr Min set the first current speed breakpoint From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the motor service factor set in parameter 336 Motor OL Factor 6 Application Notes P336 Motor OL Factor P337 Mtr 12T Curr Min P336 Motor OL Factor Current Current Figure Motor Overload Curve When Par 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min Is Less Than 1 0 When motor current exceeds the value of the curve the motor overload output integrates A motor overload exception event occurs when the value of the motor overload output reaches 1 0 The value of the motor overload output is visible in Par 330 Fault TP Data when the value of Par 329 Fault TP Sel equals 13 Speed P338 Mtr I2T Spd Min Base Speed 1 0 Figure C 2 Motor Overload Curve When Par 338 Mtr I2T Spd Min Is Equal To 1 0 When the value of Par 338 Mtr 2 Spd Min equals 1 0 the curve is flat at the value of
602. ycle Redundancy Check CRC errors Clearing a ult resets this accumulator This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer ommunication window Refer to the SynchLink System Design Guide ublication 1756 TD008 for PowerFlex 700S SynchLink topologies hardware and iring details L CRC Error isplays the number of CRC errors that occurred during the last test last 8 mS This data is sible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window L BOF Err Accum isplays the total accumulated number of Beginning of Frame BOF errors Clearing a fault resets this accumulator This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window SL BOF Error Displays the number of BOF errors that occurred during the last test last 8 mS This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window SL CRC Err Limit Identifies the number of CRC errors per test per 8 mS allowed before the drive declares a SynchLink CRC Error exception event Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window SL BOF Err Limit The number of BOF errors per test per 8 mS allowed before the drive declares a SynchLink BOF Error exception event Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window SynchLink Rev Indicates the current revision of the local SynchLink Programmable Logic firmware SL System Rev Indicates the syste
603. ynchLink direct data transmitted See Par 964 Tx Dir Data Type for data type configuration 969 Tx Buf Data Type Indicates the data type of each Buffered Transmit word If the word s bit is set the data type is floating point real If the bit is not set the data type is integer Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection Options 55 SS S 555 2855 258 5585 555 9 sls sls sls 9 8 o o rq m N st O OO KO S S 9S S qe e gi 8545 54 0 0 OD 0 Defaut 0 jo O jo jo o p jo jo o 0 o jo jo jo oj jo jo fo o jo jo jo xrse Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SL Buf Data Tx00 Default 0 V 32 bit Min Max 32 bits of data W Integer 987 SL Buf Data Tx17 This is the SynchLink buffered data transmitted See Par 969 Tx Buf Data Type for data type configuration 1000 UserFunct Enable j iti ing function in enabled If the bit is not set the corresponding This parameter is used to enable and disable the optional user functions If a bit is set the correspond function is di
604. ys the negative output of the Limit Generator The value of this parameter is the Default 8 0000 negative of Par 207 Limit Gen Hi Out Typically it is linked to Par 189 PI Integ LLim Min Max 8 0000 0 0000 210 PeakDict Ctrl In Sets the configuration of the two peak level detectors Peak detection when set and hold are off causes the output to capture the peak min max Bit2 Peak1SelHigh and bit 6 Peak2SelHigh determine if the peak level detector is positive or negative If the bit is set the detector detects positive peaks or levels above the preset If the bit is not set the detector detects valleys or levels below the preset The output shows the min or max peak Bit 0 Peak 1 Set bit is used to reset the output to the value in Par 214 PeakDtct1 Preset default 0 Bit 4 Peak 2 Set bit is used to reset the output to the value in Par 218 PeakDtct2 Preset default 0 Bit 1 Peak 1 Hold is used to hold the output at the present value in Par 214 PeakDtct1 Preset Bit 5 Peak 2 Hold is used to hold the output at the present value in Par 218 PeakDtct2 Preset Options Default 0 0 False Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 True 9 Reserved 9 Peak2SelHigh 9 Peak 2 Hold gt 9 Peak 2 Set 9 Reserved nf PeaktSelHigh 9 Peak 1 Hold 2 e a 0 0 3 32 Programming and Parameters Name No Description Values Linkable Read

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

- Schneider Electric  Using the Nexa CM-500M with Library    ONKYO TX-NR709  NGS MSX5    User Manual - Keison Products  BABT 793 A Guide to the TÜV SÜD BABT Implementation of the  脱水溶剤SS/ME  Samsung XE300TZCI User Manual (Windows 8)  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file